User manual
BRAILLE SENSE
PLUS B32
USER MANUAL
(H332B)
ENGLISH MANUAL
For Software Version 5.0
(April 21, 2008)
When there are any manual updates, the
readme files or appendices
will be added to the manual CD
and website.
HIMS Co., Ltd.
139-9, Gajung-dong, Yuseong-gu,
Daejeon, Korea 305-350
Phone: +82-42-864-4460
Fax: +82-42-864-4462
Email: hims@himsintl.com
Website: www.himsintl.com
i
Congratulations on the purchase of your Braille Sense Plus B32! The
Braille Sense Plus B32 is capable of doing everything that an
ordinary PDA can do, and more – all without the need for a screen!
I. You will find the following items when you open the Braille
Sense Plus B32 package:
1) Braille Sense Plus B32
2) Battery
3) AC adapter
4) USB Cable
5) Earphone
6) User Manual (CD)
7) Braille User Manual (Hot Keys List)
1. The input voltage of the AC adapter is 100V - 240V, and the
output is DC 5V / 2A.
2. When the Braille Sense Plus B32 is shipped, the battery may
be separate from the unit to avoid damage. The battery may
not be fully charged when it is shipped. Before you use the
Braille Sense Plus B32, you should make sure the battery is
fully charged. When you use the Braille Sense Plus B32 for
the first time, you may need to open the package, take the
battery, and insert it into the battery slot at the rear panel of
the unit. It is possible that the dealer or distributor from whom
you purchased the Braille Sense Plus B32 from has already
done this for you.
3. When you use the Braille Sense Plus B32 with the battery for
the first time, the battery status may not be displayed
accurately. In order to avoid this, connect the Braille Sense
Plus B32 to the AC adapter for about six hours with turn on. If
you want to use the Braille Sense Plus B32 immediately after
opening the box, you will need to connect the AC adapter to
the unit for more than six hours to fully charge the battery.
ii
4. If you want or need to take the battery out of the unit, turn the
power off, and then take the battery out of the unit. Before
putting the battery back in to the unit, make certain that the
power switch is turned off.
5. When you are using the Braille Sense Plus B32 on battery
power only (without the AC adapter), the status of the
remaining battery power will be announced when the battery
power is low. When the battery’s charge falls below 15
percent, connect the AC adapter to the unit for recharging. If
the remaining battery power drops to five percent, and the unit
is not connected to the AC adapter, the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will shut down one minute after the announcement of the
battery’s status. The amount of battery life per charge will
vary depending on the options you have set.
6. Your Braille Sense Plus B32 needs to be handled with care.
The Braille Sense Plus B32 is a very delicate machine. You
should make sure to handle the unit in a proper manner. Also,
the Braille Sense Plus B32 is very sensitive to dust. Make
sure to keep the Braille Sense Plus B32 away from dusty
environments.
7. The Braille cells are very sensitive parts. If any of the Braille
cells are not working properly due to dust or any other reason,
please contact our repair center, or the dealer whom you
purchased the Braille Sense Plus B32 from for support.
8. You will need to register your Braille Sense Plus B32 in order
to ensure further maintenance, service, and upgrade
information. Please visit www.himsintl.com, to register your
information. If you have any trouble when registering your
information, please contact the dealer whom you purchased
your Braille Sense Plus B32 product from for help.
9. Do not take apart the Braille Sense Plus B32 by yourself. Do
not have anyone else who is not authorized by HIMS take
apart the Braille Sense Plus B32. If an unqualified person
disassembles the unit, serious damage may occur to the
Braille Sense Plus B32. If an unauthorized person
iii
disassembles the Braille Sense Plus B32, the unit will be
excluded from any free maintenance, and the warranty will
become void. If any liquid or external force damages the unit,
it may also be excluded from free maintenance, even if the
damage occurred during the warranty period.
10. If you have any complaints or suggestions, please provide us
with your comments on our website. We will improve our
product based on your comments and suggestions. Thank
you for using the Braille Sense Plus B32, and we value any
comments or suggestions you have for our product.
11. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions.
1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
II. How to use this manual
Before using the Braille Sense Plus B32, you should read the entire
manual to familiarize yourself with the functions of the Braille Sense
Plus B32. Reading the entire manual will allow you to operate the
Braille Sense Plus B32 to its fullest potential. The Braille Sense Plus
B32 has many functions. Many of these functions operate in a similar
manner, so it is important to become familiar with all of the functions
of the Braille Sense Plus B32.
You will see references to hot keys and shortcut keys. These keys
refer to ways to access menus and functions quickly by using a
combination of keystrokes. Please note that not all hot keys and
shortcut keys will work while you are in the Braille Sense Plus B32.
Some hot keys and shortcut keys require that you be within a
program in order for specific hot keys and shortcut keys to work.
This user manual uses a specific notation of how to press keys.
When you see, “space-b (dots 1-2)” this means that you would press
the “space bar” and dots 1 and 2 simultaneously. This is a very
important concept to understand when using this manual.
iv
In order to use the Braille Sense Plus B32, you will need to
understand what a menu is, and how it works. You will also need to
understand what a text box is, and how to type in information in a text
box. You will want to read section 2.2 to help you understand basic
concepts of menus. It is very important that you completely
understand concepts such as this, so that you are able to use the
Braille Sense Plus B32 to its fullest potential.
If you find that you are unable to find a solution to a problem within
the manual, or if you need assistance with the Braille Sense Plus B32,
please email us at hims@himsintl.com. Visit us on the web at
www.himsintl.com; or, you can call us at +82-42-864-4460.
v
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of
the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is con-nected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Caution: To assure continued compliance, (example - use only
shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral
devices). Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment.This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation
IMPORTANT NOTE:
FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set
forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be
installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters
between the radiator and your body.This transmitter must not be co-
located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction................................................................................... 1
1.1 What is the Braille Sense Plus B32?..................................... 1
1.2 Hardware ................................................................................. 2
1.2.1 Top Panel.............................................................................. 3
1.2.2 Right Side Panel................................................................... 4
1.2.3 Left Side Panel ..................................................................... 5
1.2.4 Rear Panel ............................................................................ 5
1.2.5 Front Panel ........................................................................... 6
1.3 Hardware Specifications of the Braille Sense Plus B32...... 7
1.4 Memory on the Braille Sense Plus B32................................. 7
2. Basic Functions of the Braille Sense Plus B32 ......................... 9
2.1 How to Use the Commands ................................................... 9
2.1.1 Messages.............................................................................. 9
2.2 Concept of the Menu ............................................................ 10
2.2.1 Control Symbols on the Braille Sense Plus B32............. 12
2.3 Using the Function Keys...................................................... 15
2.4 Option Menu (Called Option Settings in the “Program”
Menu) ........................................................................................... 16
2.4.1 Option Menu Overview...................................................... 17
2.4.2 Option Menu in Detail........................................................ 17
2.5 The AC Power Supply and the Battery Pack for the Braille
Sense Plus B32 ........................................................................... 35
2.6 Basic Explanation of Disks, folders, and files ................... 36
2.7 Controlling the Volume, Speed, and the Tone of Speech.37
2.8 How to use the Voice and the Braille display..................... 38
2.9 How to type the character.................................................... 38
2.9.1 The ASCII table for a computer Braille input................... 38
2.10 Multi Tasking....................................................................... 41
2.11 Switching Audio mode ....................................................... 42
2.12 Switching Key lock ............................................................. 43
2.13 Print Spool........................................................................... 43
2.14 One-Handed Mode .............................................................. 44
2.15 Common Combination Keys.............................................. 45
3. File Manager ............................................................................... 47
3.1 Overview................................................................................ 47
3.1.1 Navigating the File List...................................................... 48
3.1.2 Item (Folder or File) Selection Key................................... 48
3.1.3 Cancel / Exit Key................................................................ 49
vii
3.2 Using File Manager Features in the File List...................... 49
3.2.1 Selecting Disks .................................................................. 49
3.2.2 Getting in and Out of a Folder (Opening/Closing a Folder)
...................................................................................................... 50
3.2.3 Opening a File.................................................................... 50
3.2.4 Send To............................................................................... 52
3.2.5 Copy / Move........................................................................ 52
3.2.6 Delete Files or Folders ...................................................... 53
3.2.7 Rename............................................................................... 54
3.2.8 New Document................................................................... 54
3.2.9 New Folder.......................................................................... 55
3.2.10 File Conversion................................................................ 55
3.2.11 Select All........................................................................... 56
3.2.12 Search for File.................................................................. 56
3.2.13 Sort Files By..................................................................... 57
3.2.14 Set File Info....................................................................... 58
3.2.15 Display Only Files of Type .............................................. 58
3.2.16 Zip ..................................................................................... 59
3.2.17 Unzip ................................................................................. 59
3.2.18 Information ....................................................................... 60
3.3 Using the Address Window ................................................. 61
3.3.1 Editing................................................................................. 61
3.3.2 Type in Path / File Name.................................................... 61
3.3.3 Opening the History List ................................................... 62
3.4 Hot Keys in the “File Manager” ........................................... 62
4. Word Processor.......................................................................... 63
4.1 File Menu ............................................................................... 63
4.1.1 New ..................................................................................... 64
4.1.2 Open.................................................................................... 64
4.1.3 Save .................................................................................... 66
4.1.4 Save As............................................................................... 67
4.1.5 Close Current Document................................................... 68
4.1.6 Print..................................................................................... 68
4.1.7 Settings............................................................................... 70
4.1.8 Exit ...................................................................................... 72
4.2 Edit Menu............................................................................... 72
4.2.1 Start Selection.................................................................... 73
4.2.2 Copy.................................................................................... 73
4.2.3 Cut....................................................................................... 74
4.2.4 Paste ................................................................................... 74
viii
4.2.5 Delete .................................................................................. 74
4.2.6 Delete Blank Lines............................................................. 74
4.2.7 Add to Clipboard................................................................ 75
4.2.8 Clear Clipboard .................................................................. 75
4.2.9 Select All............................................................................. 75
4.2.10 Insert from File................................................................. 76
4.2.11 Insert Date ........................................................................ 76
4.2.12 Changing Between Insert and Overwrite Mode ............ 77
4.2.13 Check Spelling ................................................................. 77
4.3 Go to Menu ............................................................................ 81
4.3.1 Find ..................................................................................... 81
4.3.2 Find Again .......................................................................... 83
4.3.3 Replace ............................................................................... 83
4.3.4 Go to Location.................................................................... 84
4.3.5 Go to Previous Page.......................................................... 86
4.3.6 Go to Next Page ................................................................. 86
4.3.7 Set Mark.............................................................................. 87
4.3.8 Go to Mark .......................................................................... 87
4.3.9 Go to Previous Document................................................. 88
4.3.10 Go to Next Document ...................................................... 88
4.4 Read Menu............................................................................. 88
4.4.1 Read Selected Text............................................................ 88
4.4.2 Read Beginning of Selected Text..................................... 89
4.4.3 Read from beginning to cursor ........................................ 89
4.4.4 Read from Cursor to End .................................................. 89
4.4.5 Auto Scroll.......................................................................... 90
4.4.6 Read Status ........................................................................ 90
4.5 Layout.................................................................................... 91
4.5.1 Braille Document Layout................................................... 91
4.5.2 Print Document Layout ..................................................... 93
4.5.3 Braille Paragraph Layout .................................................. 95
4.5.4 Print Paragraph Layout ..................................................... 96
4.6 Keys for Text Scrolling and Deleting .................................. 97
4.7 Cursor Location .................................................................... 98
4.8 Hot keys in the word processor: ......................................... 99
5. Address Manager ..................................................................... 101
5.1 What is the “Address Manager”?...................................... 101
5.2 Starting the Address Manager........................................... 102
5.3 Using “Add Address”......................................................... 102
5.3.1 Adding an Address.......................................................... 102
ix
5.3.2 Setting Add Address Fields............................................ 104
5.3.3 Using “Search Address” in “Add address” .................. 105
5.4 Searching For an Address ................................................. 105
5.4.1 Using “search address”.................................................. 105
5.4.2 Setting Searching Address Fields.................................. 106
5.4.3 Using “Add Address” In “Search Address”.................. 106
5.5 Backing up and restoring the address list ....................... 107
5.5.1 Backup Address List....................................................... 107
5.5.2 Restore Address List....................................................... 107
5.5.3 Setting Backup Option .................................................... 108
5.6 Commands in the Found Records .................................... 109
5.6.1 Find again......................................................................... 109
5.6.2 Opening a home page ..................................................... 109
5.6.3 Editing Addresses ........................................................... 110
5.6.4 Deleting Addresses ......................................................... 110
5.6.5 Printing addresses........................................................... 111
5.6.6 Saving Addresses to a File ............................................. 112
5.7 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook............................. 112
5.8 Hot Keys in the Address Manager..................................... 113
6. Schedule Manager.................................................................... 115
6.1 Overview.............................................................................. 115
6.2 Starting “Schedule Manager”............................................ 115
6.3 Setting Date and Time ........................................................ 115
6.4 Adding a Schedule.............................................................. 116
6.4.1 Appointment Starting Date ............................................. 117
6.4.2 Appointment Starting Time............................................. 117
6.4.3 Appointment Ending Date............................................... 118
6.4.4 Appointment Ending Time .............................................. 118
6.4.5 Subject.............................................................................. 118
6.4.6 Location............................................................................ 119
6.4.7 Memo ................................................................................ 119
6.4.8 Alarm Time ....................................................................... 119
6.4.9 Setting a recurring Schedule.......................................... 120
6.4.10 Confirm ........................................................................... 123
6.4.11 Cancel ............................................................................. 123
6.5 Search Schedule................................................................. 123
6.5.1 Searching with date......................................................... 124
6.5.2 Searching with subject.................................................... 124
6.6 Modify Schedule ................................................................. 125
6.7 Deleting a Schedule............................................................ 126
x
6.8 Printing a Schedule ............................................................ 126
6.9 Saving Appointments as a File.......................................... 127
6.10 Backing Up and Restoring Your Appointments............. 127
6.10.1 Backup Schedule........................................................... 127
6.10.2 Restore Schedule........................................................... 128
6.10.3 Setting Backup Option .................................................. 128
6.11 Setting Alarm Option........................................................ 129
6.11.1 Alarm Duration............................................................... 130
6.11.2 Alarm Repeat Interval Time........................................... 130
6.11.3 Repetition Times............................................................ 130
6.11.4 Confirm ........................................................................... 131
6.11.5 Cancel ............................................................................. 131
6.12 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook........................... 131
6.13 Hot Keys for the Schedule Manager ............................... 132
7. E-mail......................................................................................... 134
7.1 Executing E-mail and Service Registration...................... 134
7.1.1 Launching the E-Mail Program....................................... 134
7.1.2 Registering E-Mail Service.............................................. 135
7.2 Sending and Receiving E-Mail........................................... 137
7.2.1 Receiving E-mail .............................................................. 137
7.2.2 Reading the Received E-mail Messages........................ 138
7.2.3 Sending E-Mail Messages............................................... 141
7.2.4 Local Folder...................................................................... 147
7.3 Functions of the InBox....................................................... 148
7.3.1 Deleting E-mail in Inbox .................................................. 148
7.3.2 Reply And Reply All to a Received E-Mail Message..... 150
7.3.3 Forwarding a Received E-Mail Message........................ 152
7.3.4 Saving a Received E-Mail Message................................ 153
7.3.5 Sending E-Mail Saved in the Storage Box..................... 153
7.3.6 Printing E-Mail Messages................................................ 154
7.4 Edit Menu............................................................................. 155
7.4.1 Select All........................................................................... 155
7.4.2 Start Selection.................................................................. 156
7.4.3 Copy.................................................................................. 156
7.4.4 Paste ................................................................................. 157
7.4.5 Cut..................................................................................... 157
7.4.6 Delete ................................................................................ 157
7.4.7 Move to Next Unread Message....................................... 158
7.4.8 Find ................................................................................... 158
7.4.9 Find Again ........................................................................ 159
xi
7.4.10 Copy to Folder................................................................ 159
7.4.11 Move to Folder ............................................................... 161
7.4.12 Check Spelling ............................................................... 163
7.5 Settings in the Tool Menu .................................................. 166
7.5.1 Service Manager .............................................................. 166
7.5.2 Set Path ............................................................................ 171
7.5.3 Set Options....................................................................... 174
7.5.4 Spam Settings.................................................................. 175
7.6. Hot Keys for E-Mail............................................................ 181
7.6.1 Hot Keys That Are Used in the Inbox............................. 181
7.6.2 Hot Keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward,
and Save in the Mail Storage Box ........................................... 181
7.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mail Messages or Writing an E-
mail Message ............................................................................ 182
8. Media Player ............................................................................. 183
8.1 Using the Audio Buttons.................................................... 183
8.1.1 Play/Pause Button ........................................................... 183
8.1.2 Next button and previous button ................................... 184
8.1.3 Record Button.................................................................. 184
8.1.4 Stop Button ...................................................................... 185
8.1.5 Using the Audio buttons in file open dialog box .......... 185
8.2 Braille Keyboard and Extended Keys ............................... 185
8.2.1 Playback Information Tab ............................................... 186
8.2.2 Play List Tab..................................................................... 186
8.2.3 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab and the Play List
Tab ............................................................................................. 187
8.3 How to Use the Media Player Menu................................... 189
8.3.1 File..................................................................................... 189
8.3.2 Play ................................................................................... 193
8.3.3 Record .............................................................................. 196
8.3.4 Advanced Menu ............................................................... 198
8.3.5 Settings............................................................................. 201
8.4 Hot Keys in the Media Player............................................. 204
9. Radio ......................................................................................... 206
9.1 Listening to radio via internal speakers ........................... 206
9.2 Frequency control............................................................... 207
9.3 Registration of the channel and move among channels.207
9.4 Recording radio sound....................................................... 209
9.4.1 Changing record folder ................................................... 210
9.5 Additional features ............................................................. 211
xii
9.6 Hot Keys in the Radio......................................................... 211
10. Web Browser........................................................................... 213
10.1 File...................................................................................... 213
10.1.1 Open URL ....................................................................... 213
10.1.2 Open................................................................................ 214
10.1.3 Save As........................................................................... 215
10.1.4 Page Information............................................................ 216
10.1.5 Exit .................................................................................. 216
10.2 Read................................................................................... 216
10.2.1 Read from Beginning to Cursor ................................... 217
10.2.2 Read from Cursor to End .............................................. 217
10.2.3 Auto Scroll...................................................................... 217
10.3 Edit..................................................................................... 218
10.3.1 Start selection................................................................ 218
10.3.2 Copy................................................................................ 218
10.3.3 Add to clipboard ............................................................ 219
10.3.4 Copy URL........................................................................ 219
10.3.5 Copy Link........................................................................ 219
10.4 Go To ................................................................................. 220
10.4.1 Go to Home Page........................................................... 220
10.4.2 Go to Previous Page...................................................... 220
10.4.3 Go to Next Page ............................................................. 221
10.4.4 Go to Previous Heading ................................................ 221
10.4.5 Go to Next Heading........................................................ 221
10.4.6 Go to Previous/Next Text .............................................. 222
10.4.7 Refresh ........................................................................... 222
10.4.8 History ............................................................................ 223
10.4.9 Find ................................................................................. 223
10.4.10 Find Again .................................................................... 224
10.4.11 Link List........................................................................ 224
10.5 Favorites............................................................................ 225
10.5.1 Set Current As Your Home Page.................................. 225
10.5.2 Add To Favorites............................................................ 226
10.5.3 Favorites List.................................................................. 226
10.6 Options .............................................................................. 228
10.7 Read Page.......................................................................... 228
10.7. Moving Between Controls............................................... 228
10.7.2 Moving to a Form........................................................... 230
10.7.3 Table ............................................................................... 230
10.7.4 Move to the Frame......................................................... 233
xiii
10.7.5 Playback of Streaming Audio Files.............................. 233
10.8 Hot keys in the Web Browser .......................................... 233
10.9 What the Web Browser Does Not Support ..................... 236
11. DAISY Player........................................................................... 237
11.1 Components of the DAISY Player ................................... 238
11.2 File...................................................................................... 238
11.2.1 Open DAISY.................................................................... 239
11.2.2 Voice Settings................................................................ 239
11.2.3 Book-Info ........................................................................ 240
11.2.4 Exit .................................................................................. 240
11.3 Document .......................................................................... 241
11.3.1 Play and Pause............................................................... 241
11.3.2 Move by Phrase.............................................................. 241
11.3.3 Move by Page................................................................. 241
11.3.4 Move by Level ................................................................ 242
11.4 Mark ................................................................................... 242
11.4.1 Previous Mark ................................................................ 242
11.4.2 Next Mark........................................................................ 243
11.4.3 Set Mark.......................................................................... 243
11.4.4 Move to Mark.................................................................. 243
11.4.5 Deleting a Mark .............................................................. 244
11.5 Heading.............................................................................. 244
11.5.1 Move by Heading ........................................................... 244
11.5.2 Find Heading .................................................................. 244
11.5.3 Scan Heading and Read Heading................................. 245
11.6 Hot Keys in the DAISY Player.......................................... 245
12. Bluetooth Manager................................................................. 248
12.1 Bluetooth Device List ....................................................... 248
12.2 Bluetooth Service List...................................................... 250
12.2.1 Connecting Service ....................................................... 252
12.2.2 LAN Service.................................................................... 253
12.2.3 FTP Service .................................................................... 254
12.2.4 ActiveSync Service........................................................ 260
12.2.5 Serial Port....................................................................... 261
12.2.6 Using Multiple Services Simultaneously..................... 264
12.3 Hot keys in Bluetooth Manager ....................................... 264
13. MSN messenger..................................................................... 266
13.1 Getting Started with MSN Messenger............................. 266
13.2 Using a Contact List ......................................................... 267
13.2.1 Instant Messaging.......................................................... 268
xiv
13.2.2 Adding, Deleting, or Viewing Contact Information ..... 268
13.2.3 Changing Your Nickname, Status and Viewing Your
Information ................................................................................ 270
13.2.4 Additional Features ....................................................... 271
13.3 Instant Message Dialog Box ............................................ 274
13.3.1 Inviting Others to Start a Conversation....................... 275
13.3.2 Saving and Printing Your Messages............................ 275
13.3.3 Copying and Pasting Instant Messages ...................... 276
13.3.4 Searching Messages ..................................................... 276
13.4 Hot Keys in MSN Messenger ........................................... 276
14. Database Manager................................................................. 278
14.1 Table Manager................................................................... 279
14.1.1 Add Table........................................................................ 280
14.1.2 Modify Table................................................................... 282
14.1.3 Delete table..................................................................... 283
14.1.4 Set Default Table............................................................ 283
14.2 Add Record........................................................................ 284
14.3 Search Records................................................................. 285
14.4 List of Records Found...................................................... 287
14.5 Setting Backup Option ..................................................... 287
14.6 Backup Database.............................................................. 288
14.7 Restore Database.............................................................. 288
14.8 Hot Keys for Database Manager...................................... 289
15. Utility ....................................................................................... 290
15.1 Calculator .......................................................................... 290
15.1.1 General Functions ......................................................... 291
15.1.2 Variable Calculators ...................................................... 292
15.1.3 Sine Functions ............................................................... 294
15.1.4 Cosine Functions........................................................... 295
15.1.5 Tangent Functions......................................................... 295
15.1.6 Logarithm Functions ..................................................... 296
15.1.7 Copy to Clipboard.......................................................... 296
15.1.8 Option Settings .............................................................. 297
15.1.9 Exit .................................................................................. 297
15.1.10 Sample Math Calculations .......................................... 297
15.2 Set Date and Time............................................................. 300
15.3 Check Date and Time........................................................ 302
15.4 Wake up alarm................................................................... 302
15.4.1 Set Time.......................................................................... 303
15.4.2 Alarm Sound................................................................... 303
xv
15.4.3 Term ................................................................................ 303
15.4.4 Ringing Duration............................................................ 303
15.4.5 Repeat Interval ............................................................... 304
15.4.6 Wakeup Call Times ........................................................ 304
15.4.7 Confirm Cancel .............................................................. 304
15.5 Calendar ............................................................................ 304
15.5.1 Using the Calendar ........................................................ 305
15.6 Pronunciation Dictionary ................................................. 306
15.7 Stopwatch.......................................................................... 307
15.8 Terminal for Screen reader .............................................. 308
15.9 Setup Internet.................................................................... 309
15.9.1 LAN Setup....................................................................... 310
15.9.2 Modem & Bluetooth DUN setup.................................... 310
15.9.3 ADSL Setup .................................................................... 312
15.9.4 Setup Wireless LAN....................................................... 313
15.10 Network Status................................................................ 316
15.11 Check Power Status ....................................................... 317
15.12 Backup/Restore Option.................................................. 317
15.13 Upgrade Braille Sense Plus B32 OS ............................. 318
15.13.1 Upgrading the Braille Sense Plus B32 OS Using the
Internet....................................................................................... 319
15.13.2 Upgrading the Braille Sense Plus B32 OS from a Disk
.................................................................................................... 320
15.14 Hot Keys for Utility.......................................................... 320
16. Using the help menu .............................................................. 324
17. Using ActiveSync ................................................................... 327
17.2 Connecting the Braille Sense Plus B32 to a PC............. 327
17.3 Setting up the Braille Sense Plus B32 in the ActiveSync
Program ..................................................................................... 327
17.4 Transferring Files to the Braille Sense Plus B32 Via
ActiveSync ................................................................................ 328
18. Command Summary............................................................... 330
18.1 Common Combination Keys............................................ 330
18.2 File Manager...................................................................... 331
18.2.1 Navigation keys on the file list and menu list ............. 331
18.2.2 Navigation Keys for the File List .................................. 331
18.2.3 Item (folder or File) Selection Key................................ 332
18.2.4 Hot Keys for the Commands......................................... 332
18.3 Word Processor ................................................................ 332
18.3.1 Hot Keys for the Commands......................................... 332
xvi
18.3.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys................................................ 334
18.4 Address Manager.............................................................. 334
18.4.1 Move keys for adding an address or in the menu ...... 334
18.4.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List ........................... 334
18.4.3 Hot keys for the Commands ......................................... 335
18.4.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys................................................ 335
18.5 Schedule Manager............................................................ 335
18.5.1 Hot keys for the commands.......................................... 335
18.5.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List ........................... 336
18.6 E-mail................................................................................. 336
18.6.1 Hot keys that are used in the inbox ............................. 336
18.6.2 Hot keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward,
and Save in the Mail Storage Box ........................................... 337
18.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mails or Writing an E-Mail
Message..................................................................................... 337
18.7 Media Player...................................................................... 338
18.7.1 Hot keys for commands ................................................ 338
18.7.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab .......................... 339
18.7.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab........................................ 339
18.8 Radio.................................................................................. 340
18.9 Web Browser..................................................................... 341
18.9.1 Hot keys for the command............................................ 341
18.9.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser .342
18.9.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages ................................ 342
18.10 Daisy Player..................................................................... 343
18.11 Bluetooth Manager ......................................................... 344
18.12 MSN messenger.............................................................. 344
18.13 Database Manager .......................................................... 345
18.14 Utility................................................................................ 346
18.14.1 Calculator ..................................................................... 346
18.14.2 Setting Date and Time ................................................. 347
18.14.3 Checking Date and Time ............................................. 348
18.14.4 Calendar........................................................................ 348
18.14.5 Pronunciation dictionary............................................. 348
18.14.6 Stopwatch..................................................................... 348
18.14.7 Check Network Status................................................. 349
18.14.8 Check Power Status .................................................... 349
18.14.9 Backup/restore option................................................. 349
18.14.10 Upgrading the Braille Sense Plus B32 OS............... 349
19. Command Summary for USB Keyboards............................. 350
xvii
19.1 Common Combination Keys............................................ 350
19.2 File Manager...................................................................... 351
19.2.1 Navigation keys on the file list and menu list ............. 351
19.2.2 Navigation Keys in the File List.................................... 351
19.2.3 Item (Folder or File) Selection Keys............................. 351
19.2.4 Hot Keys for the Commands......................................... 351
19.3 Word Processor ................................................................ 352
19.3.1 Hot keys for the command............................................ 352
19.3.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys................................................ 353
19.4 Address Manager.............................................................. 354
19.4.1 Move keys for moving from field to field in the record or
in the menu................................................................................ 354
19.4.2 Move Keys for Moving from Record to Record........... 354
19.4.3 Hot Keys for the Commands......................................... 354
19.4.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys................................................ 355
19.5 Schedule Manager............................................................ 355
19.5.1 Hot keys for the commands.......................................... 355
19.5.2 Movement Keys for the Search Result List................. 355
19.6 E-mail................................................................................. 356
19.6.1 Hot keys for reading e-mails......................................... 356
19.6.2 Hot Keys for Sending E-mail Including Reply, Forward,
and Save in the Pail Storage Box............................................ 356
19.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-mail messages or Writing an E-
mail Message ............................................................................ 357
19.7 Media Player...................................................................... 357
19.7.1 Hot keys for commands ................................................ 357
19.7.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab .......................... 358
19.7.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab........................................ 359
19.8 Radio.................................................................................. 359
19.9 Web Browser..................................................................... 360
19.9.1 Hot keys for the command............................................ 360
19.9.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser .361
19.8.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages ................................ 361
19.10 Daisy Player..................................................................... 362
19.11 Bluetooth Manager ......................................................... 363
19.12 MSN messenger.............................................................. 363
19.13 Database Manager .......................................................... 364
19.14 Utility................................................................................ 365
19.14.1 Calculator ..................................................................... 365
19.14.2 Setting the Date and Time........................................... 366
xviii
19.14.3 Checking the Date and Time....................................... 367
19.14.4 Calendar........................................................................ 367
19.14.5 Pronunciation dictionary............................................. 367
19.14.6 Stopwatch..................................................................... 367
19.14.7 Check Network Status................................................. 368
19.14.8 Check Power Status .................................................... 368
18.14.9 Backup/restore option................................................. 368
19.14.10 Upgrading Braille Sense Plus B32 OS..................... 368
20. Troubleshooting Guide .......................................................... 369
20.1 The Braille Sense Plus B32 Will Not Turn On ................ 369
20.2 The Voice Cannot Be Heard............................................. 369
20.3 The Voice is Too Fast to Understand.............................. 369
20.4 The Voice Tone Is Too Low or Too High to Understand369
20.5 Lost Your Place................................................................. 369
20.6 No Internet Connection .................................................... 370
20.7 Email .................................................................................. 370
20.8 The Braille display Does Not Display Braille.................. 370
20.9 The Braille Sense Plus B32 Does Not Respond............. 370
20.10 The LCD Does Not Come On ......................................... 370
21. Accessories ............................................................................ 371
22. Obtaining Support.................................................................. 371
1
1. Introduction
1.1 What is the Braille Sense Plus B32?
The Braille Sense Plus B32 is a Braille note taker developed and
manufactured by HIMS, for people who are blind and visually
impaired. You can do the following with the Braille Sense Plus B32.
1. You can use the Word Processor, and the Perkins style keyboard,
to create Braille documents.
2. You can print your text documents using any compatible ink printer.
3. You can emboss your Braille documents when you connect the
unit to a Braille printer.
4. You can open Microsoft (MS) Word documents, and read them in
Braille. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will import any document that
was created in MS Word, and translate it into Braille.
5. Using the E-Mail Program, you can send email messages to
sighted individuals, as well as read your email messages in Braille.
6. Using the Schedule Manager, you can enter your appointments on
the Braille Sense Plus B32. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will then
alert you at the time of your appointments.
7. With the Address Manager, you can input information about your
contacts and the Braille Sense Plus B32 can retrieve the
information for those contacts.
8. Using the Braille Sense Plus B32 Web Browser, you can surf the
Internet with the Braille display that is located on the Braille Sense
Plus B32.
9. Using the Braille Sense Plus B32 Media Player, you can listen to
music, or any other sounds that are recorded in mp3, wma, or a
wave file format.
10. Using the Braille Sense Plus B32 Radio, you can listen to radio
sound.
11. You can record the voice and radio sound in mp3 or wav file
format.
12. On the Calculator, you can calculate algebraic equations,
including scientific calculations.
13. You can copy any files from your personal computer to the
Braille Sense Plus B32, and vice versa.
2
14. You can use the Braille Sense Plus B32 as a Braille display
with a compatible screen reader, such as Window-Eyes.
15. You can copy, move, and delete files on the Braille Sense Plus
B32.
16. You can adjust the volume, the speed, and the tone of the
speech. You can change as many of these features as you want
on the Braille Sense Plus B32.
17. You can use the Database Manager to create your own
Database for keeping and storing important information
18. You can use MSN Messenger to communicate in real time, with
others who are running the MSN Messenger program.
19. The sighted person who is learning Braille for the first time can
use the LCD screen on the Braille Sense Plus B32, to easily learn
Braille. Likewise, using the LCD screen, sighted people, who do
not know Braille, can teach Braille to those who are blind when
using the Braille Sense Plus B32.
1.2 Hardware
In order to get the most out of your Braille Sense Plus B32, you will
want to become familiar with the Braille Sense Plus B32 by learning
where the buttons and ports are located, as well as the function of
each of these buttons and ports.
This section explains the hardware configuration of the Braille Sense
Plus B32. The dimensions of the Braille Sense Plus B32 are 10
inches long by 6.1 inches wide by 1.9 inches high. On the bottom of
the unit, there are rubber feet in order to prevent slipping while you
are using the Braille Sense Plus B32. The input keys are Perkins-
style, which consist of seven keys that represent dot one through dot
six, and the space bar. In addition to these seven keys, there are two
function keys that correspond to the backspace and enter keys. Also
there are 32 cells that make up the Braille display.
The first thing you should do is place the Braille Sense Plus B32 on a
level surface that you can use to examine the Braille Sense Plus B32,
such as a table or desk. When the Braille Sense Plus B32 is placed
on a level surface, the shape of the entire unit will resemble a small,
thin rectangular box. The Braille Sense Plus B32 has six sides. You
should feel for the Braille keys and Braille display. The side that the
3
Braille keys and Braille display are on should be facing up. The side
that is now facing up is referred to as the top of the Braille Sense Plus
B32. The side that is facing to your right is called the right side panel.
The side facing to your left is called the left side panel. The side that
is facing away from you is called the rear panel. The side that is
facing toward you is called the front panel, and the side that the
Braille Sense Plus B32 is sitting on is called the bottom panel.
This section of the manual describes each side of the Braille Sense
Plus B32 and the basic function(s) of each button and port. We will
discuss each of the panels in the following order: top panel, right side
panel, left side panel, rear panel, and front panel.
1.2.1 Top Panel
Starting with the top of the Braille Sense Plus B32, you will find a
Braille display that is located close to the front panel on the Braille
Sense Plus B32. Above the Braille display, there are 32 small
buttons that correspond to 32 Braille cells. These 32 small buttons
are called cursor routing keys. You can use these buttons as cursor
placement keys on the corresponding Braille cells when you are
editing documents. The cursor routing keys will also work as
shortcut keys in certain situations.
On both the extreme right and left sides of the Braille display, are two
capsule shaped buttons. These buttons divided into two parts up and
down. These buttons are called scroll buttons. The upper button
called up scroll button and the lower button called down scroll button.
The scroll buttons can be used to scroll through the menus or other
information that is displayed on the Braille display. If you are on text
that has more than 32 Braille cells, the scroll buttons will scroll the
Braille display. By pressing F1-up scroll button, this will act as the up
arrow, just like pressing space-1. Pressing F4-down scroll button will
act as the down arrow, just like pressing space-4.
Above the cursor routing keys, are four rectangular shaped buttons.
The spacebar is located between these four rectangular shaped
buttons. Two of the rectangular shaped buttons are located on the
left side of the spacebar and the other two are located on the right of
the spacebar. These four rectangular shaped buttons are function
4
keys. Moving from left to right, the key that is the farthest to the left is
called the F1 key, and the key to the right of the F1 key is called the
F2 key. Then, you will feel the spacebar. The key that is to the right
of the spacebar is called the F3 key, and the key that is to the right of
the F3 key is the F4 key.
Above the function keys, you will find the Braille keys that are
Perkins-style, including the spacebar. If you have ever used a regular
computer keyboard, this setup is very similar to the keys on the home
row on a regular computer keyboard. When you are typing, you
should place your fingers on these 9 Perkins-style keys in the
following manner:
Place your index finger, middle finger, ring finger, and pinky finger of
your left hand on the left four buttons. Then, place your index finger,
middle finger, ring finger, and pinky finger of your right hand on the
right four buttons. Finally, place both of your thumbs on the spacebar,
also called the space key.
The button where you placed your left index finger corresponds with
dot one in Braille. The button that your left middle finger is on
corresponds to dot two, and the button that your left ring finger is on
corresponds to dot three. The button on which your left pinky finger
is placed on is the backspace key.
The button that your right index finger is on corresponds with dot four
in Braille. The button that your right middle finger is on is dot five, and
the button your ring finger is placed on corresponds with dot six in
Braille. The button on which your right pinky is placed is the enter key.
And, the long bar shaped button where your thumbs are placed is
called the spacebar.
Toward the top of the Braille Sense Plus B32 on the top panel, is a
liquid crystal display (LCD) in the center. The LCD displays the
printed text, so that someone who has sight can see what you are
typing. On both sides of the LCD, there are two speakers, which
enable the Braille Sense Plus B32 to emit sound.
1.2.2 Right Side Panel
Next, let's discuss the right side panel of the Braille Sense Plus B32.
We will start from the front of the unit on the right side panel, and
move our way toward the back. Toward the front of the Braille Sense
5
Plus B32 on the right side panel, you will find the USB OTG port. If
you connect the unit to a personal computer by using this USB port,
you can transfer files that are stored in the Braille Sense Plus B32 to
your personal computer, and vice versa.
Continuing toward the back of the unit on the right side panel, you will
find the USB port. You can connect a USB stick memory in this USB
port, for auxiliary storage.
The last thing you will find on the right side panel of the unit is the AC
adapter jack. The AC adapter will plug in to this hole, and then plug in
to a standard AC electrical outlet, so that you can use the Braille
Sense Plus B32 with electricity, instead of using power from the
battery.
1.2.3 Left Side Panel
Now, let's take a look at the left side panel of the unit. If you move
your finger to the left side of the Braille Sense Plus B32, you will find
CF slot. You can insert CF card (compact flash card) in CF slot.
Continuing toward the back of the unit on the left side panel, you will
find the SD port. You can insert SD card (secure digital card) in SD
slot.
1.2.4 Rear Panel
Next, let's take a look at the rear panel of the Braille Sense Plus B32.
On the far left of the rear panel, you will find a small button in round
groove. This is the reset button. If your unit is not responding
properly, you can press this button with your finger, which will reboot
the unit via a hard reset. Pressing the reset button is a hardware
reset. Do NOT press the reset button for more than 5 seconds. You
can also do a soft reset by pressing F2-F3-1-2-3-4-5-6. This is a
software reset, instead of a hardware reset.
If you press down dots 1-2 and the reset button at the same time
while the power is on, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will turn on without
speech.
When the reset button is pressed, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
reboot. It will take about fifteen seconds for your unit to complete the
reboot process.
6
At the right side of this reset button, you will find the local area
network (LAN) port. If you connect the Braille Sense Plus B32 to an
Ethernet interface through this port, you will be able to connect to the
Internet, allowing you to browse websites as well as send and receive
email.
To the right of the LAN port is a serial port. You can connect the
Braille Sense Plus B32 to devices that have serial ports, such as
printers and a personal computer. The details of this feature will be
explained in more detail later in this manual.
Next, to the right of the serial port, you will find a video output port.
The video output port can be used to display the text that is shown on
the Braille display on a regular computer monitor for sighted people.
If you want to use this port, it will have to be turned on from within the
options menu. This port is very beneficial when using the Braille
Sense Plus B32 in educational settings.
The last thing you will find on the rear side panel of the unit is a
rectangular hole that is for the detachable battery. The battery is
separated from the unit when the Braille Sense Plus B32 is shipped.
Insert the battery into this rectangular slot until you hear a click sound.
When you hear this sound, you will know that the battery is inserted
correctly. To remove the battery from the unit, you will need to locate
the latch that is found on the bottom of the unit. Using your left hand,
pull the latch to the right panel, and then use your right hand to pull
the battery out of the slot.
1.2.5 Front Panel
Finally, let’s take a look at the front panel of the Braille Sense Plus
B32.
On the far left of the front panel, you will find a slide switch. This slide
switch is the key lock switch. This switch will be explained in more
detail in the next section.
To the right of the key lock switch is microphone jack. You can plug in
microphone.
To the right of the microphone jack is headphone jack. You can plug
in stereo headphone jack.
Next, to the right of the headphone jack is five buttons in different
7
shapes. The five buttons are for playback audio and recording
sounds. These five buttons will be explained in the Radio, Daisy and
Media program sections in this user manual.
To the right of the five buttons is on/off switch. This switch will turn the
unit on and turn the unit off. To turn on the unit, push the switch to the
right. To turn off the unit, push the switch to the left.
Congratulations! You are now familiar with the very basic functions of
the buttons and ports that are located on the Braille Sense Plus B32.
The rest of the manual will discuss each function in greater detail to
allow you to maximize the potential of your Braille Sense Plus B32.
1.3 Hardware Specifications of the Braille Sense Plus B32
1. Operating system: Windows CE 5.0
2. Flash memory: 8GB
3. RAM: 128MB
4. Memory extension: Compact flash, SD memory or USB stick
memory
5. CPU: Intel PXA270
6. Battery: Lithium Ion (detachable), backup battery installed
7. Keyboard: Braille keyboard with Perkins-style, 4 function keys, 32
cursor routing keys, 4 scroll buttons, 5 audio buttons
8. Additional button and switch: key lock switch, audio mode switch,
reset button
9. Braille display: 32 refreshable Braille cells
10. Video output: VGA output, LCD
11. Network: 10/100 based Ethernet
12. Wireless: WLAN b/g, Bluetooth
13. Interface: USB OTG, USB, serial (RS-232C) port, CF slot, SD slot
14. Sound: Internal stereo speakers, stereo headphone jack
15. Voice recording: Internal microphone, external microphone jack
1.4 Memory on the Braille Sense Plus B32
The Braille Sense Plus B32 has 128MB of RAM (random access
memory) and 8GB of flash memory. The RAM is memory space that
is reserved for running programs. This memory space is a temporary
storage of any program files that are running or any current data
located in documents that you are editing. The data in the RAM area
8
will disappear if your battery goes dead, and the AC adapter is not
connected. Also, when the Braille Sense Plus B32 reboots for any
reason, the data in the RAM will disappear. However, the data in
flash memory will not disappear, even if your battery goes dead, or if
your unit reboots.
Now that you know what the Braille Sense Plus B32 is, move on to
the next section to learn more about the basic functions of the Braille
Sense Plus B32.
9
2. Basic Functions of the Braille Sense Plus B32
2.1 How to Use the Commands
All of the commands that you will use on the Braille Sense Plus B32
are comprised of different combinations of the Braille keys. In this
user manual, the “-” sign is used to indicate key combinations. For
example, “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” indicates that the user should press
the “space bar” and “letter z (dots 1-3-5-6)” simultaneously and then
release them at the same time. You will also find expressions like
“space-1-3-5-6” in this manual. This means that the spacebar with
dots 1, 3, 5, and 6 should be pressed and released simultaneously.
You can execute most commands by pressing the “enter” button. If
you want to cancel the execution of any command, and return to the
previous status, press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).” “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-
6)” is a very important command to remember, as it will allow you to
back out of programs and menus, when you may have pressed keys
that you did not mean to press.
2.1.1 Messages
If you have setup an appointment in the Braille Sense Plus B32,
schedule Manager, you will be notified of your appointments by the
Braille Sense Plus B32 on the day of your appointment. When you
are notified of an appointment, you can interact with the Schedule
Manager as you normally would. In order to exit from the Schedule
Manager, you should press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots
1-5),” and launch another program.
If you do not want to be alerted of “today’s schedule” when you turn
on the Braille Sense Plus B32, you should turn off the “check today’s
schedule” option which will be explained in section 2.4.2.28. Please
refer to section 2.4.2.28 in this user manual for more information on
this option.
If you turn off the Braille Sense Plus B32 while another program is
opened, and then you turn it on again, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
tell you the name of the program that was running on the Braille
Sense Plus B32 when you turned it off. If you turn off the Braille
10
Sense Plus B32 while you are using the word processor, it will tell
you the file name/input mode and file protection status as well as the
program name.
When you connect the AC adapter to the Braille Sense Plus B32, the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will speak the message “AC adapter
connected.” When you disconnect it from the Braille Sense Plus B32,
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say, “AC adaptor disconnected.”
2.2 Concept of the Menu
The menu on the Braille Sense Plus B32 is similar to the concept of a
restaurant menu. For instance, a menu that is used at a restaurant
will help you select your choice of food that will be served, while the
menu on the Braille Sense Plus B32 provides you with choices that
you can select. If you have selected a menu item from the menu
items list, and there are sub menus, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
display those choices for that particular item.
Moving among the menu items is very simple.
Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or F2 to call up the menu, and press up
arrow key(“space-1”) to move to the previous item, and press down
arrow key(“space-4”) to move to the next item. Or just press an
alphabet that follows the menu names. This is a “shortcut key.” Or
you can execute the menu item without calling up the menu by
pressing “hotkey.”
Shortcut keys are the alphabets in the parentheses that follow the
menu names. And hotkeys are the combination of a couple of keys
like “enter,” “space,” or “backspace.” These are displayed after the
shortcut keys.
For example, if you are in the word processor, and press “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and then press “enter” on “file,” you will hear
“new (n) pull down enter-n”. The word “new” represents the function.
The letter “n (dots 1-3-4-5)” is the letter that you would press while
you are in the “file” menu in order to move directly to “new.” “Enter-n
(dots 1-3-4-5)” is what you would press to access the function “new”
from anywhere in the word processor. The “n” is the shortcut key and
“enter-n” is the hotkey. It is important to note that not all shortcut keys
work from anywhere in the Braille Sense Plus B32; some commands
11
will only work while you are in a specific program. For example, if
you want to activate the “new document” option in the word processor.
You cannot press “enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)” in the “program” menu to
activate this option. You must be in the word processor program in
order for “enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)” to activate the “new document”
option.
You can also move to the next menu item by pressing “space-4.” You
can move to the previous menu item by pressing “space-1.” When
you want to move to the first item of the menu, you can press “space-
1-2-3.” If you would like to move to the last item of the menu, you can
press “space-4-5-6.” The corresponding menu name will be
displayed on the Braille display, and the menu name will be spoken
through the TTS (text to speech) engine. If you want to listen to the
name of the menu again, press “space-r (dots 1-2-3-5).” Once you
move to a menu item that you want to execute, press “enter” in order
to execute the menu. By pressing “enter,” you will move to the sub
menu. If there is no submenu, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
execute the command from the menu. This process is called “menu
selection.” You may also move to any menu or execute any menu by
pressing an initial spelling of the menu.
Sometimes, if a menu is executed by pressing “enter,” the lower-level
menu is displayed. In this case, the right direction arrow sign (->) is
displayed after the name of the corresponding menu on the Braille
display. When this happens, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say, “pull
down.” Or, if a menu is executed by pressing “enter,” the dialog box
is displayed. In this case, the ellipsis sign (…) will be displayed after
the name of the corresponding menu on the Braille display. The
Braille Sense Plus B32 will also speak the message, “common
dialog.”
Let’s begin going through the various menus. First, turn the unit on
by pushing the power switch toward you. Now, bring up the
“program” menu. You can bring up the “program” menu by pressing
“F1.” The “program” menu is the top menu in the Braille Sense Plus
B32. That is, the “program” menu is the parent directory for
everything, as there are no directories or menus above the “program”
menu. The items in the “program” menu are file manager, word
processor, address manager, schedule manager, e-mail, media player,
12
web browser, daisy player, bluetooth manager, msn messenger,
database manager, utility, option settings, and help. The first item of
the “program” menu is “file manager.” If “space-4” is pressed, the
next menu item is displayed on the Braille display, and it is also
spoken. If “space-4” is pressed repeatedly, the “help” menu will be
displayed. The “help” menu is the last item on the “program” menu.
Press “space-4-5-6” when “file manager” is displayed. The Braille
Sense Plus B32 will say “help,” as the help menu is displayed. Then,
press “space-1-2-3,” and the Braille Sense Plus B32 speaks “file
manager.” It means that “space-4-5-6” moves to the last item of the
“program” menu, and “space-1-2-3” moves to the first item of the
“program” menu. If you want to move from the current menu to the
upper level menu, press “space-e (dots 1-5).”
At any point in the “program” menu or navigating sub-menus, you can
press the “F1” key to go to the “program” menu immediately. The file
manager, which is the first item of the “program” menu, will be
displayed.
2.2.1 Control Symbols on the Braille Sense Plus B32
The Braille Sense Plus B32 has many control symbols. Those
symbols appear when you set “before” and “after” the “control
information” in the “option” menu. The default value is set to “before.”
However, if you are in the web browser, the control symbols will be
displayed even if you turn off the “control information” option.
The control symbol will appear in front and back of the menu name or
item name. For example, you might see something like, “MN file (f)
pull down.”
The following table shows the names and the symbols of the control
symbols that are displayed in front and back of menu names.
Name Symbol Comments
Menu MN It means the menu that has
submenus.
Menu item MI It means the menu that does not
have a submenu.
List item LI The item name after this symbol
13
represents the name of the item
in any list.
(Ex: “LI database” or “LI
sample.txt” in the “file list” of the
file manager)
Edit box EB The item name after this symbol
represents the edit box name.
You can find the edit box after
the edit box name. In the web
browser, the symbol “EB” may
be followed by an edit box
without an edit box name. Edit
boxes that begin with the symbol
“EB” are one line.
(Ex: “EB name: (cursor)” in the
address manager program or
“EB (cursor)”
Multi edit box MEB This also represents the edit
box. But you can type in more
than one line in the edit box.
(Ex: “MEB subject: (cursor)” in
the e-mail program)
Computer edit
box
CE It means there is an edit box to
input ASCII Braille.
The edit box after this symbol
should allow ASCII Braille to be
typed in.
(Ex: “CE to: (cursor) ” in the
email program)
Combo box CB It represents the combo box in
which you can choose an item
by pressing the up arrow key or
the down arrow key.
(Ex: “CB type: *.*” in the “open
dialog box” of the word
processor program)
Edit combo box ECB You can choose the desired item
by pressing the up or down
arrow key, or by directly typing in
the item name.
14
(Ex: “ECB file name: (cursor)
“ in the “open dialog box“ of the
word processor program)
Prompt button PB PB follows any question in which
you have to choose “yes” or “no.”
You can toggle between “yes”
and “no” by pressing the “space”
or the “backspace” button.
(Ex: When you exit from the
word processor, “PB save: yes”)
Static box ST ST is followed by the current
status.
(Ex: “ST noname.hbl/insert
mode/write” in the word
processor program)
Link LN It means there is a link in the
web page.
Anchor ANC It means there is an anchor in
the web page.
Radio button
RB
It represents a radio button,
which allows you to choose an
item by pressing the up arrow
key, down arrow key, space, or
backspace. Also it cycles
between items when pressing
this key.
(Ex: “RB attribute: write” in the
“information dialog box” of the
file manager)
Radio button
select SRB It means that the radio button is
selected in the web browser
Radio button
unselect URB It means that the radio button is
not selected in the web browser.
Check box check SCHB It means that the check box is
selected in the web browser.
Check box
uncheck UCHB It means that the check box is
not selected in the web browser.
Links, anchors, and check boxes are controls that are only used in
15
the web browser. The symbols enable you to understand what type
of box or menu you are working with. For example, if “MN,” “MI,” or
“LI” are displayed in front of a list, you can move from one item to the
next item or previous item by pressing the up or down arrow keys. If
“ECB,” “EB,” “CB,” or “MEB” are displayed on the display, you will
have to find the cursor and input the desired letters at the cursor
position. If “BT” is displayed, you can press “enter” to “push the
button.”
2.3 Using the Function Keys
There are four function keys on the Braille Sense Plus B32. When
using the Braille Sense Plus B32, you can open the menus, cancel
tasks, and move to other items by using these function keys. No
matter where you are in the Braille Sense Plus B32, the “F1” key will
open the Braille Sense Plus B32 “program” menu. You can also use
“F1” and the shortcut key for each program in the “program” menu to
open each program anywhere in the Braille Sense Plus B32. For
example, if you are in the word processor, and want to open the web
browser, you could press “F1-b (dots 1-2)” to open the web browser.
In each program, “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” and the “F2” key will open
the specific menu for each program. The “F3” key has the same
function as “tab (“space-4-5”). If you press “space-F3,” this will have
the same function as pressing “shift-tab (“space-1-2”).” The “F4” key
will function just like the “escape” key does on a personal computer.
This key performs the same function as pressing “space-e (dots 1-5).”
Please note that the “escape” key does not exit a program, as does
“space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
You can use combinations of the function keys to allow you to do
many tasks. Pressing “F1” and “F2” at the same time will work the
same as “page up” on a personal computer. If you press the “F3” and
“F4” keys at the same time, this is the same as pressing “page down”
on a personal computer. The combination of the “F1” and “F4” keys
will move you to the task ID (like the task bar in a computer running
Microsoft Windows). If you press the “F2” and “F3” keys
simultaneously, you can switch between the different programs that
are running just like pressing “alt-tab” in your PC. The task ID and
program switching will be explained in greater detail in the section
2.10, entitled, “Multi-Tasking.”
16
2.4 Option Menu (Called Option Settings in the “Program” Menu)
The “option” menu in the Braille Sense Plus B32 has information on
all of your settings. You can change your preferences regarding each
option. You can access the “option” menu by pressing “F1.” Then,
use “space-4” or “space-1” until you find “option settings.” Then,
press “enter” on “option settings.” By pressing the “space-o (dots 1-
3-5),” you can open the “option” menu while you are anywhere in the
Braille Sense Plus B32. You can navigate all of the items in the
“option” menu with “space-1 (up arrow)” or “space-4 (down arrow).”
You can also use the scroll buttons for navigating through each of the
items. You can change the setting values with the “spacebar” or
“backspace” buttons. There are many shortcut keys which you can
use to quickly move you to wherever you want to go in the “option”
menu. By pressing “space” on an item in the “option” menu, you can
turn the setting on or off, or toggle between the various options that
are available for the item you are on.
The “option” menu is like a dialog box. To change and save the
settings in the “option” menu, you must press “enter” once you have
selected the setting that you want to save. If you do not press “enter”
(or select “confirm”) on the setting that you want, the setting will not
be saved. Once you press “enter” to save the setting, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will say, “saved options,” and you will be returned to
where you were before you entered the “option” menu. To cancel the
change to the setting, press the “F4” key, “space-e (dots 1-5),” or
“space-z (dots 1-3-4-5).” The Braille Sense Plus B32 will then speak
the message, “canceled saving options.” When you are on an option,
you can also use “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to go
to the “confirm” and “cancel” buttons. If you want to save your
settings, press “enter” on the “confirm” button. If you do not want to
save the changes you made to the settings, press “enter” on the
“cancel” button.
Before we go in to detail about each option, let’s first go through a
brief overview of what you will find in the “option” menu.
17
2.4.1 Option Menu Overview
The “option” menu contains different settings that can be changed in
the Braille Sense Plus B32. By pressing “space-o (dots 1-3-5),” you
can open the “option” menu while you are anywhere in the Braille
Sense Plus B32. The “option” menu has five groups.
1. Braille setting (which includes Braille display, Braille cursor, eight
dot mode, view/input grade, and message display time)
2. Voice setting (which includes voice, punctuation level, keyboard
echo, capitalization alert, numbers, voice volume, voice rate, voice
tone, and scroll voice)
3. Display setting (which includes LCD, LCD font size, and video
display)
4. Print setting (which includes printer port and print paper size)
5. General setting (which includes warning message, play power
on/off sound, reverse scroll, skip empty lines, control information,
hot key information, announce shortcut keys, power saving mode,
power saving kick in, check today's schedule, one-handed mode,
check spelling automatically, default document type, progress
indicator, Bluetooth, wireless LAN, and mobile disk.)
You can move between the five groups by pressing “page down
(“space-3-4-5” or “F3-F4”)” or “page up (“space-1-2-6” or “F1-F2”).”
When a group is opened, a list of options will appear that can be
changed for the particular setting that you are on. A list of options
under a group, are referred to as a “list.” You can move between
items in the “list” by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” You can then
change the setting for each option by pressing “space” or
“backspace” on each option.
2.4.2 Option Menu in Detail
Now, let’s take a look at each function in the “option” menu in more
detail, and look at the specific steps on how to change the various
settings. It is very important to note that there are duplicate shortcut
keys; therefore, pressing a shortcut key will move the focus to the
next setting that has a matching shortcut key, and pressing the same
shortcut key will move the focus to the next setting that has the same
shortcut key. If there are no more settings that have the same
18
shortcut key, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will wrap around and move
to the first match. Pressing “space-1” or “space-4” moves the focus
to the previous setting or the next setting. Pressing “page up
(“space-1-2-6”)” or “page down (“space-3-4-5”)” will move the focus to
the beginning of the previous group of settings or to the beginning of
the next group of settings.
2.4.2.1 Braille display
The first item that you will find in the “option” menu is “Braille display.”
You can switch the Braille display on and off with the “space” key.
The default is set to “on” and the shortcut key is “b (dots 1-2).” You
can toggle the Braille display on or off, by pressing “backspace-F3”
while you are using another program in the Braille Sense Plus B32,
without having to pull up the “option” menu. If you have changed the
setting, press the “enter” key to save the setting. You can also “tab
(“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “confirm” button, and
press “enter.” If you do not want to save the setting, “tab (“space-4-
5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel” button, and then press
“enter.” You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing “space–z
(dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.2 Braille Cursor
You can choose how you want the Braille cursor to show up on the
Braille display. The shortcut key is “c (dots 1-4).” By default the cursor
is set to “always up.” If you do not want the cursor set to “always up,”
you can press the “space” key to turn the cursor “blinking,” and one
more press the “space” key to turn the cursor “off.” If you have
changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the setting. You
can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “confirm”
button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the setting, “tab
(“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel” button, and
then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
Note that there are three types of cursors:
1. “dots 7-8”
2. blinking “dots 7-8”
3. blinking “dots 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8”
19
The blinking “dots 7-8” will be displayed when you are in the
“overwirte mode” in the word processor. The blinking “dots 1-2-3-4-5-
6-7-8” will appear when you are using the “start selection” setting in
the word processor and when you are in an edit box. In all other
situations, the cursor will be displayed as “dots 7-8.”
2.4.2.3 Eight Dot Mode
You can choose to use a 6-dot-Braille or 8-dot-Braille display when
using ASCII text mode. The shortcut key is “e (dots 1-5).” By default
the 8-dot-Braille display is set to off. You can switch this option to 8-
dot-Braille mode by pressing the “space” key. You can toggle this
option on or off by pressing “F1-down scroll button” while you are
using another program in the Braille Sense Plus B32, without having
to pull up the “option” menu. If you have changed the setting, press
the “enter” key to save the setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)”
or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “confirm” button, and press “enter.”
If you do not want to save the setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel” button, and then press “enter.” You can
also cancel saving the setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or
“space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.4 View/input the Grade of Braille
You can choose what grade of Braille you want the Braille display to
use when reading. The shortcut key is “g (dots 1-2-4-5).” The setting
choices are grade 1, grade 2, and ASCII. You can switch between
the settings by pressing the “space” key. You can press “space-g
(dots 1-2-4-5)” to cycle through the three settings while you are using
other programs without calling up the “option” menu. If you have
changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the setting. You
can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “confirm”
button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the setting, “tab
(“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel” button, and
then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
20
2.4.2.5 Message Display Time
You can choose when a Braille message will disappear from the
Braille display. This setting will only work when the voice setting is
set to “off.” The shortcut key is “m (dots 1-3-4).” The setting options
that you can choose from are “standby,” ”ignore”, and 1 to 10
seconds. The default is “3 seconds.” The “space” key increases the
option by one second and the “backspace” key decreases the option
by one second. You can set the unit to standby mode by pressing
the “space” key until you reach “stand by.” In this mode, the message
will remain until you press a key. The higher value you select, the
longer the message remains. If you read the message before setting
the number of seconds, you can clear the message by pressing any
key. If you choose “ignore,” then messages will be ignored and won’t
show on the display. If you have changed the setting, press the
“enter” key to save the setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or
“shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If
you do not want to save the setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel” button, and then press “enter.” You can
also cancel saving the setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or
“space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.6 Voice
This menu will allow you to turn the Braille Sense Plus B32 voice on
or off. The shortcut key is “v (dots 1-2-3-6).” By default the voice is
set to on, so you will hear the Braille Sense Plus B32 speak. You can
turn off the voice with the ‘”space” key. You can toggle it on and off
by pressing “backspace-F2” while you are using another program in
the Braille Sense Plus B32 without having to call up the “option”
menu. If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save
the setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-
2”)” to the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to
save the setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the
“cancel” button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving
the setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-
5).”
You can also press “dots 1-2” while turning on the Braille Sense Plus
B32, which will turn the Braille Sense Plus B32 on without speech.
When resetting the Braille Sense Plus B32, you can also press “dots
21
1-2” when you press the reset button to reset the Braille Sense Plus
B32, and turn on the Braille Sense Plus B32 without speech.
2.4.2.7 Punctuation Level
You can choose how you want the Braille Sense Plus B32 to read
punctuation marks. The shortcut key is “p (dots 1-2-3-4).” The
setting options are “all,” “off,” “punctuation,” and “symbol.” The
default setting is set to “all” in which the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
say all punctuation marks and symbols. The “space” key allows you
to cycle through all four of the setting values. If you select “off,” the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will not say any punctuation marks. The
option, “punctuation” will make the Braille Sense Plus B32 say only
punctuation marks, but the “symbol” option will say all symbols
without saying punctuation marks. If you have changed the setting,
press the “enter” key to save the setting. You can also “tab (“space-
4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “confirm” button, and press
“enter.” If you do not want to save the setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or
“shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel” button, and then press “enter.”
You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-
3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.8 Keyboard Echo
With this option, you can decide how the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
speak when you are typing. The shortcut key is “k (dots 1-3).” The
setting values are “on with characters and words,” “on with
characters,” “on with words,” and “off.” If you select the default “on
with characters and words,” you can hear each keystroke and a word
right after it is completed. If you select “on with characters,” you can
hear each keystroke letter by letter. If you select the “on with words”
option, you can hear each word right after it is completed, but not
each letter. You can cycle through each of the options by pressing
the “space” key. If you have changed the setting, press the “enter”
key to save the setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”)” to the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not
want to save the setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-
2”)” to the “cancel” button, and then press “enter.” You can also
cancel saving the setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or
“space-e (dots 1-5).”
22
2.4.2.9 Capitalization alert
You can decide how the Braille Sense Plus B32 will speak the
"capital character" when you type the character or read the document
by using "space-3" or "space-6" in computer edit box or ASCII mode .
The shortcut key is “u (dots 1-3-6).” The setting values are “off,” “say
cap,” and “pitch.” The default value is “off.” If you select the default,
read the same regardless of capital letter and lower case letter. And
if you select the “say cap,” you will hear “cap” sound before the
capital letter. For example, when you meet the capital letter “V,”
Braille Sense Plus B32 will talk “cap v.” And if you select the “pitch,”
you will hear higher tone when meet the capital letter.
You can cycle through each of the options by pressing the “space”
key. If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save
the setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-
2”)” to the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to
save the setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the
“cancel” button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving
the setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-
5).”
2.4.2.10 Numbers
You can choose how you want the Braille Sense Plus B32 to read
number. The shortcut key is “n (dots 1-3-4-5)” with the default set to
“on.”
For example, if you set “on,” the “2007” will read “two thousand
seven.” And you set “off,” “the “2007” will read “two zero zero seven.”
You can change the value by using “space.”
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.11 Voice Volume
You can set the volume level of the voice on the Braille Sense Plus
B32. The shortcut key is “l (dots 1-2-3).” The setting value is 1
23
through 10 with the default set on 6. When you have set this option
to 1, the volume will be set at the lowest level. If you set this option to
10, the volume is the loudest. If you set the volume level to 1, you
will almost not be able to hear. The “space” key increases the
volume and the “backspace” key decreases the volume by one
number at a time. Please note that if you are at volume level 10, and
increase the volume by one, the volume loops back to level 1. The
same is true if you are at level 1, and decrease the volume by one
unit. You will then be at level 10. Without opening the “option” menu,
you can increase the volume with the key combination of the
“backspace” and “F4” keys or you can decrease it with the
“backspace” and the “F1” key.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.12 Voice Rate
You can control the speed of the Braille Sense Plus B32 speech.
The shortcut key is “r (dots 1-2-3-5).” The setting options are 1
through 12 with the default set to 8. The “space” key increases the
speed level and the “backspace” key decreases the speed level by
one unit at a time. Without opening the “option” menu, you can
increase the speed with the key combination of the “space” and “F4”
keys, or you can decrease it with the “space” and the “F1” key. If you
are at level 12, and increase the speed by one unit, you will go to
level 1. Also, if you are at level 1, and decrease the speed by one
unit, you will go to level 12.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
24
2.4.2.13 Voice Pitch
You can control the voice pitch of the Braille Sense Plus B32. The
shortcut key is “t (dots 1-2-3-4-5).” The available options are 1
through 10 with the default set to 6. At level 10, the voice tone will be
the highest; and, at level 1, the voice tone will be the lowest. The
“space” key will increase the voice tone and the “backspace” key will
decrease the voice tone by one level. Just as with the voice volume
and voice speed, if you are at level 10, and you increase the voice
tone by one level, you will go to level 1. And, if you are at level 1 and
decrease the voice tone by one level, you will go to level 10. When
you are not in the “option,” menu, you can increase the tone by
pressing, “enter” and “F4,” or you can decrease it by pressing “enter”
and “F1.”
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.14 Scroll Voice
You can decide if you want the Braille Sense Plus B32 to speak while
using the scroll buttons in the document. The shortcut key is “s (dots
2-3-4)” with the default set to “off.” The default setting (off) does not
allow the Braille Sense Plus B32 to speak while scrolling. The
“space” key toggles off/on. If you set the option to “on,” you can hear
the Braille Sense Plus B32 while scrolling.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.15 LCD
You can decide whether the Braille Sense Plus B32 will show text on
the LCD screen. If you decide to turn the LCD screen on, sighted
25
people will be able to see what you are working on when they look at
the LCD screen. The shortcut key is “l (dots 1-2-3)” with the default
set to “off.” The options that you can choose from for this setting are,
“on,” “off,” and “all (lighting).” The “all (lighting)” setting will light the
background of the LCD screen. You can toggle between all three of
these options by pressing the “space” key.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.16 LCD Font Size
Here, you can change the font size on your LCD panel. The shortcut
key is “f (dots 1-2-4).” The default is set to 19, but you can set the
font size anywhere from 12 to 20. You can increase the font by one
size with the “space” key, and you can decrease the font size with the
“backspace” key. If you have the font size set to 20, and you
increase the font by one size, the font will go to 12. If your font size is
12, and you decrease the font by one size, the font will go to 20.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.17 Video Display
You can choose to have the Braille Sense Plus B32 show your tasks
on a VGA monitor. That is, a monitor that would normally hook up to
a personal computer. The shortcut key is “d (dots 1-4-5)” with the
default set to “off.” To use a VGA monitor, you need to connect a
cable from the Braille Sense Plus B32 VGA port to a computer
monitor. You can toggle this option on and off with the ‘”space” key.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
26
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.18 Printer Port
You can choose which port will be used for your printer port when
sending your documents to a printer. The shortcut key is “p (dots 1-
2-3-4).” The default is set to “USB.” If you want to use a USB port
printer, you keep the default setting. If you want to use a parallel port
printer, you change the setting. You can toggle the options by hitting
the “space” key.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
For your reference, if you want to use parallel port printer, you must
connect the USB port to cable that convert USB into parallel.
2.4.2.19 Print Paper Size
This option allows you to select the size of the paper that an ink
printer will use, if you will be printing to an ink printer. The shortcut
key for this function is “s (dots 2-3-4).” You can change the size for
this option by pressing “space.” You can choose between the
settings of, “letter” (8.5 inches by 11 inches) or, “legal” (8.5 inches by
14 inches.)
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.20 Warning Message
You can choose whether you will hear a warning sound or not. The
shortcut key is “w (dots 2-4-5-6).” This option is useful if the speech
27
setting on the Braille Sense Plus B32 is turned off. The default for
this option is set to “on.” If you turn off the speech, you will hear a
beeping sound when you type in keys that the Braille Sense Plus B32
does not accept. If you don't want to hear the warning sound, you
can press the “space” key once to turn “off” the warning message.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.21 Play Power On/Off Sound
You can choose whether you will hear a power on/off sound or not
when you turn on the Braille Sense Plus B32. The shortcut key is “s
(dots 2-3-4).” The default for this option is set to “on.” If you keep
default setting, you will hear a starting sound signal when you turn on
or off the Braille Sense Plus B32.
If you don’t want to hear the on/off sound signal, you can press the
“space” key once to turn “off” the sound signal.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.22 Reverse Scroll
You can switch the direction of scrolling on the Braille Sense Plus
B32. The shortcut key is “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” with the default set to “off.”
The “space” key toggles off/on. In the default setting (which has the
reverse scroll set to off), the up scroll button moves up a 32-cell
display in your document, or one previous item in a list. The down
scroll button moves down a 32-cell display in the document, or the
next item in the list. If you turn the reverse scroll on, the up and down
scroll buttons will function in the reverse direction.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
28
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.23 Skip Empty Lines
You can choose to have the Braille Sense Plus B32 read a blank line,
or to skip empty lines. The shortcut key is “e (dots 1-5),” and the
default is set to “off.” If you keep the default setting, you will hear the
words “empty line” if there is a blank line. The “space” key toggles
off/on. If you choose to turn this option on, the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will skip all blank lines, and you will not hear the words “empty
line” when there is a blank line. If you have changed the setting,
press the “enter” key to save the setting. You can also “tab (“space-
4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “confirm” button, and press
“enter.” If you do not want to save the setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or
“shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel” button, and then press “enter.”
You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-
3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.24 Control Information
You can choose the display location of information regarding the files
and menus in the Braille Sense Plus B32. The short cut key is “I (dots
2-4),” and the default is set to “before.” To toggle “control information”
between before, after and off, press “space.
If you select “before,” you will hear control information before a menu
or list item. If you select “after,” you will hear control information such
as “list item” or “menu item” after a menu or list item. If you have
control information shut off, you will not hear “list item” or “menu
item.”
Note that if the web browser is activated, the control symbols will
appear even if you turn off the “control information” option.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
29
2.4.2.25 Hot Key Information
As described before, hot keys are keystrokes that can take you
directly to an item, such as a menu, or a particular item in a list.
You can choose the speech output method of hot key. The short cut
key is “h (dots 1-2-5),” and the default is set to “ASCII character.” The
setting values are “ASCII character,” “dot patterns,” and “off.” You
can cycle through each of the options by pressing the “space” key.
For example, when you select “ASCII character,” the “open (o) enter-
o” will output with “open (o) enter-o.” And if you select “dot patterns,”
the “open (o) enter-o” will out put with “open (o) enter dots 1 3 5.”
And if you select “off,” you can’t hear the hot key information.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.26 Announce shortcut keys
The “announce shortcut keys” option allows you to decide if the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will say the shortcut key for a function. The
shortcut key is “s (dots 2-3-4)” and the default is set to “on.”
For example, if you hear, “file f pull down,” the shortcut key is the
letter “f.” If you prefer the Braille Sense Plus B32 only says, “file pull
down,” you will want to turn the “announce shortcut keys” setting off.
To toggle “announce shortcut keys” between on and off, press
“space.”
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.27 Power Saving Mode
You can choose to have the Braille Sense Plus B32 use the power
saving mode. The shortcut key is “p (dots 1-2-3-4).” The default
30
setting is set to “on,” which will use the power saving mode. The
“space” key switches between “on,” off, and “message.” If you don't
want to use the power saving mode, you can set the option to “off.” If
you set the option to “message,” you will hear a warning message
that says “power on” in 10, 20, or 30 minute increments (depending
on the setting that you will choose for power saving kick in) if you
have not pressed any keys on the Braille Sense Plus B32. The next
section explains how to change the power saving kick in to 10, 20, or
30 minutes. If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to
save the setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”)” to the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not
want to save the setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-
2”)” to the “cancel” button, and then press “enter.” You can also
cancel saving the setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or
“space-e (dots 1-5).”
For your reference, this option is available only when the AC adaptor
is connected to the unit. In other word, although you set the option to
“on” if AC adaptor is connected to the unit, the unit will not go to the
sleep mode automatically when you meet the “power saving kick in”
time.
2.4.2.28 Power Saving Kick In
When you want to use the power saving mode, you can set the time
when the power saving mode will begin. The shortcut key is “k (dots
1-3)” with the default set at “after 10 minutes.” If you set this option to
the default, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will enter into power saving
mode when you have not used the Braille Sense Plus B32 for 10
minutes. The “space” key changes the option setting to 10 minutes,
20 minutes, or 30 minutes.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
31
2.4.2.29 Check Today’s Schedule
In the “schedule manager” (which you will learn about later), you are
able to keep track of your appointments, using the Braille Sense Plus
B32. The Braille Sense Plus B32 is able to check today’s schedule
when you turn it on. You can decide if you want the Braille Sense
Plus B32 to show today’s schedule when it powers on. The short cut
key for this option is “s (dots 2-3-4).” To toggle this option between
off and on, press “space.”
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.30 One-Handed Mode
You can choose one-handed mode on or off when you use the Braille
Sense Plus B32. The shortcut key is “h (dots 1-2-5).” The default for
this option is set to “off.” The setting options are “on” and “off.” The
detail information about one-handed mode refers to “2.14 One-
Handed Mode.”
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
For your reference, this option is set to “off” even if you are set to “on”
when connected the Braille Sense Plus B32 to USB keyboard. And if
you remove the USB keyboard, this option will be returned to value
that before you connected to the USB keyboard.
2.4.2.31 Spell check Automatically
You can choose whether the Braille Sense Plus B32 will check
spelling or not. This option is available in “multi edit boxes” in
programs such as the schedule manager, address manager, e-mail
32
messages, the word processor, etc. The short cut key for this option
is “c (dots1-4).”
By default this setting is set to “off” which will not check your spelling.
If you want to check spelling, press “space” to toggle the option to
"on” and press “enter.” Or, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the
“confirm” button, and press “enter.”
If you set the option to “on" and enter a misspelled word, you will hear
a beep sound. You will hear a beep sound, even though you shut “off”
the warning message discussed in section “2.4.2.20.”
If you do not want to save the changed setting, press “tab (space-4-
5)” to move to the “cancel” button, and press “enter.” You can also
cancel saving the setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or
“space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.32 Default Document
This function is used to set the default document type applied when
you create a new document using the word processor on the Braille
Sense Plus B32. The shortcut key for this option is “q (dot 1-2-3-4-5)”.
When you create a new document in the “word processor”, “Braille
document” (.brl file) is selected as the file type by default. You can
change the default setting using this option.
You can choose between “sense document”, “Braille document,” and
“text document”. By default, it is set to “Braille document.” Press
“space” to toggle through the three settings, and press “enter,” or
press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button, and press
“enter,” to save the changed setting.
If you do not want to save the changed setting, press “tab (space-4-
5)” to move to the “cancel” button, and press “enter.” You can also
cancel saving the setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or
“space-e (dots 1-5).”
For your reference, this option is set to “text document” even if you
are set to “sense document” or “Braille document” when connected
the Braille Sense Plus B32 to USB keyboard. And if you remove the
USB keyboard, this option will be returned to value that before you
connected to the USB keyboard.
33
2.4.2.33 Progress indicator
Progress indicator shows the progress of opening a document,
copying files or opening any webpage. This option is used to set the
progress sign. The shortcut key is “p (dots 1-2-3-4),” and you can
choose one among “silent,” “beep,” and “message.” By default, it is
set to “message.”
Press “space” to toggle through three settings, and press “enter” to
save to the changed option.
If it is set to “message,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say progress
in percentage, like 10% or 20%. If it is set to “beep,” the Braille Sense
Plus B32 outputs beep sound during copying or opening any
documents or webpage. If it is set to “silent”, the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will not hear the any sound in progress of copying or opening.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.4.2.34 Bluetooth
You can decide whether the Braille Sense Plus B32 will turn
Bluetooth on.
The shortcut key for this option is “b (dots 1-2).” You can choose
between “on” and “off” by pressing “space.” By default, it is set to
“off.”
You can toggle it on and off by pressing “backspace-3-4-5-6” while
you are using another program in the Braille Sense Plus B32 without
having to call up the “option” menu.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
34
For your reference, in order to use Bluetooth function of the Braille
Sense Plus B32, please turn it on. And please turn it off while you are
not using the Bluetooth function to save battery power.
2.4.2.35 Wireless LAN
You can decide whether the Braille Sense Plus B32 will turn Wireless
LAN on.
The shortcut key for this option is “w (dots 2-4-5-6).” You can choose
between “on” and “off” by pressing “space.” By default, it is set to
“off.”
You can toggle it on and off by pressing “backspace-1-4-5-6” while
you are using another program in the Braille Sense Plus B32 without
having to call up the “option” menu.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
For your reference, in order to use wireless LAN function of the
Braille Sense Plus B32, please turn it on. And please turn it off when
you are not using the wireless LAN to save battery power.
2.4.2.36 Wired LAN
You can decide whether the Braille Sense Plus B32 will turn Ethernet
card (Wired LAN) on.
The shortcut key for this option is “l (dots 1-2-3).” You can choose
between “on” and “off” by pressing “space.” By default, it is set to
“on.”
You can toggle it on and off by pressing “backspace-1-5-6” while you
are using another program in the Braille Sense Plus B32 without
having to call up the “option” menu.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
35
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
For your reference, if you want to save battery power, turn this option
off when you are not using the Ethernet (Wire LAN).
2.4.2.37 Mobile Disk
You can choose whether the Braille Sense Plus B32 will be used as a
mobile disk or not when the Braille Sense Plus B32 is connected to
the personal computer (PC) via USB. The shortcut key for this option
is “d (dots 1-4-5)” with the default set to “on.” The “space” key
toggles off/on.
If you keep default setting, PC recognizes the Braille Sense Plus B32
as the mobile disk automatically when connecting the Braille Sense
Plus B32 to PC.
If you select “off,” PC doesn’t recognizes the Braille Sense Plus B32.
In this case, if you want to connect the PC to the Braille Sense Plus
B32, you need to install and execute the Active Sync program in the
PC. You can download the Active Sync program from the Microsoft
website for free.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel”
button, and then press “enter.” You can also cancel saving the
setting by pressing “space–z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).”
2.5 The AC Power Supply and the Battery Pack for the Braille
Sense Plus B32
It is very useful to know what the remaining battery power when the
Braille Sense Plus B32 is being operated only on battery power. If
the remaining battery power is not sufficient, the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will indicate that the battery power is low. In this case, you need
to check the remaining battery power, especially when you are using
the Braille Sense Plus B32 without plugging it into an AC power
supply.
To check the battery power status, press “space-1-6.” You will find
36
the following 2 items:
1. Battery power level
2. Power source (battery or AC supply)
The battery power level represents the percentage of the remaining
battery power. The power source indicates whether power is coming
from the battery or the AC power supply. If the battery power level
drops under 15 percent, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display the
battery status on the Braille display, and it will announce (through the
speakers) that the battery has less than 15 percent of its power left.
If the battery power level falls below five percent, the Braille Sense
Plus B32 will give you a warning indicating that your battery power
level is under five percent, and the Braille Sense Plus B32 will be
automatically turned off in one minute, unless you connect the Braille
Sense Plus B32 to an AC power supply.
Let’s explore the detachable battery pack. When the Braille Sense
Plus B32 is shipped, you will find the battery pack is not installed in
the Braille Sense Plus B32. This is done to prevent damage during
shipping. When you insert this battery pack in to the Braille Sense
Plus B32 for the first time, the unit may display an inaccurate battery
power level. Before using the Braille Sense Plus B32 for the first time,
please charge the battery for six hours. If you need to use the unit
during the initial recharge, the unit should be connected to the AC
power supply for at least seven hours in order to fully charge the
battery. When you remove the battery from the Braille Sense Plus
B32, make sure your unit is turned off; especially when the AC power
supply is not connected to your unit. Otherwise, you will lose all of
your data that is stored in RAM. If you remove the battery, and do
not have the Braille Sense Plus B32 hooked up to the AC power
supply, your data that is stored in RAM will remain for only about an
hour. In order to keep your data that is stored in RAM, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 must be connected to an AC power supply or battery
pack within an hour; otherwise the data that is stored in RAM will be
lost.
2.6 Basic Explanation of Disks, folders, and files
37
The flash memory in the Braille Sense Plus B32 is similar to a big
bookshelf in a library. The piece of hardware in the Braille Sense
Plus B32 that is called the “disk” is similar to the idea of a bookshelf
in a library. You can make partitions on a bookshelf in order to
organize books into categories. Each category can be compared to
what are called “folders” on the Braille Sense Plus B32. The books in
each section can be compared to what are called “files” on the Braille
Sense Plus B32. You can save files into any folders at your
convenience. If you make the proper folder names for files you are
saving, it will make it easier to find saved files when you need to
access them later.
When the Braille Sense Plus B32 is shipped from the factory, the
name of the flash memory in the Braille Sense Plus B32 is called
“flashdisk.” You can create folders on this “flashdisk” in any way that
you prefer.
You can also expand your memory space by adding additional
memory devices, such as a floppy disk drive through a USB port,
USB stick memory (also known as a USB flash drive), or a compact
flash memory card in the CF slot. The default name of the floppy disk
drive is “FDD” and the name of the CF card is “CFD.” The USB stick
memory is called “SMD.” If you decide to add any of these memory
devices, you will be able to create folders, and save files on the
additional memory devices.
2.7 Controlling the Volume, Speed, and the Tone of Speech
You can change the volume, speed, and tone of speech used on the
Braille Sense Plus B32. To change the volume, you can press
“backspace-F4” to raise the volume. Press “backspace-F1” to lower
the volume. To make changes in the reading speed, you can press
“space-F4” to make the reading faster. Press “space-F1” to make the
reading speed slower. In order to make changes in tone, press
“enter-F4” for a higher tone and “enter-F1” for a lower tone. When
any of the above combination keys are pressed, the Braille Sense
Plus B32 will announce the status of its volume, speed, or tone. The
changes you made with these combination keys will remain in effect
even when you turn off the machine and turn it back on again. These
changes can also be made in the “option” menu settings. Please
38
refer to sections 2.4.2.11, 2.4.2.12, and 2.4.2.13 in this user manual.
2.8 How to use the Voice and the Braille display
When using the Braille Sense Plus B32, you can choose to use
Braille only or speech only for reading. You can also use both Braille
and speech at the same time for reading. However, you cannot turn
off both Braille and the speech simultaneously. You can utilize
“backspace-F2” to turn the speech on and off. You can use
“backspace-F3” to turn the Braille on and off. Please refer to section
2.4.2.1 in this user manual for more information.
2.9 How to type the character
In the document, “edit box” and “multi edit box” on Braille Sense Plus
B32, you can enter the grade 1 or grade 2 Braille. But in the
“computer edit box” such as “to” in email program, you have to enter
the computer Braille.
If you want to enter the capital letter, you can use the “capital sign
(space-u (dots 1-3-6))” when you enter the computer Braille. For
example, if you want to enter the “H” in computer edit box, you press
the “space-u (dots 1-3-6)” and press the “dots 1-2-5.”
If you press “space-u (dots 1-3-6)” twice, capitals continue until you
turn off by pressing “space-u (dots 1-3-6).”
You can use the “space-backspace” instead of “capital sign (space-
u).” Only, you have press “space-backspace” and “dots 1-2-5”
simultaneously.
Also you can use the “capital sign” when you enter the “at sign.” To
input the “at sign,” you press the “space-u (dots 1-3-6)” and press the
“dot 4.” Also you can input the “at sign” by pressing “space-
backspace-dot 4.”
And if you want to enter the number, you can use the “number sign
(dots 3-4-5-6).” But in the computer edit box, you have to input the
number in computer Braille that lowered by one row and no number
sign.
2.9.1 The ASCII table for a computer Braille input
exclamation mark: dots 2-3-4-6
quotation mark: dot 5
39
number sign: dots 3-4-5-6
dollar sign: dots 1-2-4-6
percent: dots 1-4-6
ampersand: dots 1-2-3-4-6
apostrophe: dot 3
left parenthesis: dots 1-2-3-5-6
right parenthesis: dots 2-3-4-5-6
asterisk: dots 1-6
plus: dots 3-4-6
comma: dot 6
dash: dots 3-6
period: dots 4-6
slash: dots 3-4
0: dots 3-5-6
1: dot 2
2: dots 2-3
3: dots 2-5
4: dots 2-5-6
5: dots 2-6
6: dots 2-3-5
7: dots 2-3-5-6
8: dots 2-3-6
9: dots 3-5
colon: dots 1-5-6
semi colon: dots 5-6
less than: dots 1-2-6
equal: dots 1-2-3-4-5-6
great than: dots 3-4-5
question mark: dots 1-4-5-6
at sign: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dot 4
A: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dot 1
B: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2
C: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-4
D: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-4-5
E: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-5
F: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-4
G: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-4-5
H: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-5
I: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-4
J: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-4-5
40
K: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3
L: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3
M: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-4
N: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-4-5
O: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-5
P: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3-4
Q: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3-4-5
R: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3-5
S: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-3-4
T: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-3-4-5
U: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-6
V: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3-6
W: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-4-5-6
X: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-4-6
Y: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-4-5-6
Z: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-5-6
left bracket: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-4-6
back slash: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-5-6
right bracket: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-4-5-6
carat: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 4-5
underline: space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 4-5-6
grave accent: dots 4
a: dot 1
b: dots 1-2
c: dots 1-4
d: dots 1-4-5
e: dots 1-5
f: dots 1-2-4
g: dots 1-2-4-5
h: dots 1-2-5
i: dots 2-4
j: dots 2-4-5
k: dots 1-3
l: dots 1-2-3
m: dots 1-3-4
n: dots 1-3-4-5
o: dots 1-3-5
p: dots 1-2-3-4
q: dots 1-2-3-4-5
r: dots 1-2-3-5
41
s: dots 2-3-4
t: dots 2-3-4-5
u: dots 1-3-6
v: dots 1-2-3-6
w: dots 2-4-5-6
x: dots 1-3-4-6
y: dots 1-3-4-5-6
z: dots 1-3-5-6
left brace: dots 2-4-6
vertical bar: dots 1-2-5-6
right brace: dots 1-2-4-5-6
tilde: dots 4-5
2.10 Multi Tasking
The Braille Sense Plus B32 can do more than one task at the same
time, which is called multi-tasking. For example, you can work with
the word processor while you are listening to music, and you can put
calculations into a document at the same time. This is called a Braille
Sense Plus B32 multi-task. If you want to work with the word
processor while listening to music, you can first run the media player
and play a music file. While playing music, you can press the “F1”
key to open the Braille Sense Plus B32 menu and run the word
processor.
The Braille Sense Plus B32 can run up to seven programs
simultaneously. You cannot have more than seven multi-tasks. That
is, you cannot run more than seven programs at the same time.
If you try to run a program that you are already running, the new
instance of the program will not start, and you will be taken to the
instance of the program that is already running.
For example, while you are working with a document called “A,” you
decide to execute the “file manager.” Next, you move to a document
called “B” by pressing the move keys in the “file list” of “file manager,”
and you press “enter.” Then, the word processor will not load again
for opening the document “B,” but the document “B” will be opened in
the word processor, which document “A” is also running on. If you
want to switch documents, you need to open them in the word
processor without running other programs. In this case, you can
switch them with “tab(space-4-5 or F3)” or “shift-tab(space-1-2 or
42
space-F3).” Switching documents will be explained later in detail in
section 4, which covers the word processor.
After you press F1 to call up the “program” menu, or after you press
F1-F4 to open the Task ID, you can press “escape” (“space-e” or
“F4”) to return to the previously-running program.
If you want to switch between programs while running more than one
program, press the “F1” and “F4” keys at the same time to open the
Task ID. The Task ID shows the names and numbers of the running
programs, just like the file manager. You can cycle through the
running programs on the Braille Sense Plus B32 with the “space-1” or
the “space-4” and scroll buttons. Press the “enter” key to run the
program that you want after focusing on your selection.
The combination of the “F2” and “F3” keys can switch between all of
the running programs immediately without opening the Task ID. It
functions the same way as the “alt-tab” keys on your PC. If you are
running three programs and you are in the second program, pressing
the “F2” and “F3” keys at the same time will move you to the third
program. If you press “F2-F3” again, you will be on the first program.
In the above case, pressing “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” will close the
current running program and move you to the previous program.
However, if there is only one program running, pressing “space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6)” will close the program and move you to the Braille
Sense Plus B32 “program” menu. Note that “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”
is different from the “escape” key, which does not close programs.
2.11 Switching Audio mode
The audio buttons on the front panel will work for different function
according to the location of Audio mode switch.
If you push the audio mode switch to the left side, the Braille Sense
Plus B32 will say “radio mode” and the audio buttons will work for the
Radio program.
If you set the audio mode switch to the center, the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will say “daisy mode” and the audio buttons will work for the
Daisy program.
If you push the audio mode switch to the right side, the Braille Sense
Plus B32 will say “media mode” and the audio buttons will work for
the Media program.
43
So in order to use the audio buttons as you desire, you have to set
the audio mode switch to the proper position. For example, when you
are using Media program and the audio mode switch is located in the
left side, the audio buttons on the front panel will work for radio
program. The detailed function of the audio buttons will be explained
in the Radio, Daisy and Media program sections in this user manual.
2.12 Switching Key lock
You can disable or enable any specified keys on the Braille Sense
Plus B32 by using Key Lock switch on the front panel.
If the key lock switch put on left, Braille Sense Plus B32 will say “all
keys locked.” In this case, you can’t use the all keys including the
on/off switch.
If the key lock switch put on center, Braille Sense Plus B32 will say
“top panel locked.” In this case, only you can use the buttons and
switches in the front panel (audio mode switch, audio buttons and
on/off switch).
If the key lock switch put on right, Braille Sense Plus B32 will say
“unlock.” In this case, you can use the all keys (Braille keyboard,
audio buttons, arrow keys, function keys, audio mode switch and
on/off switch).
But, you can use the reset button, regardless of location of key lock
switch.
2.13 Print Spool
The Braille Sense Plus B32 has a print spool function. This function
enables the Braille Sense Plus B32 to do other tasks while printing to
an ink-printer or Braille embosser. For example, if you send data to
your printer or embosser, you will be immediately returned to where
you were before the print command was executed. If you want to
check the print spool dialog box after you have given the print
command, press “space-2-3-4-6.” Then, you will see the dialog box
which has three controls. The first control is a list that gives you
information about files that are being printed. There is also a “cancel”
button and a “close” button. You can cycle through the three controls
by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2).” In the
information list, you can move item by item by pressing “space-4” or
44
“space-1.” However, if you open up the dialog box without printing
anything, you will see “no list” and the “close” button.
While printing, the information list will contain the following: “running
program name,” “printing file name,” “printer type,” “the number of
copies,” and either “printing” or “ready.” For example, let’s assume
that we are printing one copy of "sample.hbl" in the word processor.
In the info list, you will see "program: word processor, file: sample.hbl,
printer, copy: 1, printing." If you are using a Braille embosser, you
will see “embosser” instead of “printer.” If there is not anything
printing and, (the printer is waiting), you will see “ready” instead of
“printing.” If you print something out in the e-mail program, you will
see "emailtemp.txt," instead of the file name. When you are printing
something from the address manager, or the schedule manager, you
will see the message, "prn_(time).txt.”
If you focus on any of the files in the info list, and press “enter” on
“cancel” after pressing “tab (space-4-5),” you will cancel the printing
of that file. If you press “space-4-5” repeatedly, locate “close,” and
press “enter” on “close,” you will close the print spool dialog box.
Pressing “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” will also close the print spool.
2.14 One-Handed Mode
Braille Sense Plus B32 provides a one-handed mode for users
restricted to the use of one hand for Braille input. To turn on one-
handed mode, hold down F3, while turn on the power switch. And to
turn off this mode (i.e. to return on two-handed mode), hold down F4,
while turn on the power switch. Also, by using the Option menu, you
can turn on or off this mode.
When one-handed mode turned on, the input methods are as follows:
1) To type a character, you press the dots in any combination or
order. And when you have pressed all dots, press “space.” For
example, if you want to type the “h,” you press “dot 1” and “dot 2”
separately or together and then press “dot 5.” And finally you
press “space.”
2) To press a command that includes “space,” you press “space”
both before and after the other keys. For example, if you want to
press “space-o (dots 1-3-5),” you press “space” and then press
45
“dot 1”, “dot 3” and “dot 5” separately or together in any order.
Then press “space” again.
3) To press a command that includes “backspace” or “enter,” you
press “backspace” or “enter” before the other keys. And then press
other keys. Finally you press “space.” For example, if you want to
press “enter-l (dots 1-2-3)”, you press “enter” and then press “dots
1-2-3.” And press “space.”
4) To press “space,” “backspace” and “enter”, you press this keys
twice. For example, if you want to press “space” to make a space
between words, you press “space” twice.
The operation of the arrow keys, function keys, audio buttons remains
the same as in two-handed mode.
If one-handed mode is on, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will advise this
each time it is turned on, and will also advise what to do to return to
the two-handed mode.
2.15 Common Combination Keys
1. Call up the program menu: F1
2. Run the individual program in the program menu F1-“shortcut key”
(varies for each program)
3. Call up the task ID list: F1-F4
4. Switch to previous program: Space-F2-F3
5. Switch to next program: F2-F3
6. Call up the menu in the individual program: Space-m (dots 1-3-4)
or F2
7. Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
8. Escape: Space-e (space-1-5) or F4
9. Move to the next control in a dialog box: Tab (space-4-5 or F3)
10. Move to the previous control in the dialog box: Shift-tab (space-1-
2 or space-F3)
11. Move to the previous character: Left arrow key (space-3)
12. Move to the next character: Right arrow key (space-6)
13. Move to the previous line/item: Up arrow key (space-1)
14. Move to the next line/item: Down arrow key (space-4)
15. Move to the beginning of line/item: Home key (space-1-3)
16. Move to the end of line/item: End key (space-4-6)
17. Move to the top of a document or to the first item: Ctrl-home
(space-1-2-3 or F1-F2-up scroll button)
46
18. Move to the bottom of a document or to the last item: Ctrl-end
(space-4-5-6 or F3-F4-down scroll button)
19. Move to the previous page or to the first item of the previous 32-
item group: Page up (space 1-2-6 or F1-F2)
20. Move to the next page or to the first item of the next 32-item group:
Page down (space 3-4-5 or F3-F4)
21. Scroll left: Up scroll button
22. Scroll right: Down scroll button
23. Move the cursor to each cell or move to an item: The
corresponding cursor routing key
24. Read the current item again: Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
25. Say current time: Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
26. Check power status: Space-1-6
27. Call up the “option” menu: Space-o (dots 1-3-5)
28. Online help: Space-h (dots 1-2-5)
29. Checking your version: Space-v (dots 1-2-3-6) only in the Braille
Sense Plus B32 “program” menu.”
30. Check network status: Space-n (dots 1-3-4-5) in the Braille Sense
Plus B32 “program” menu
31. Increase the voice volume: Backspace-F4
32. Decrease the voice volume: Backspace-F1
33. Increase the voice rate: Space-F4
34. Decrease the voice rate: Space-F1
35. Increase the voice tone: Enter-F4
36. Decrease the voice tone: Enter-F1
37. One-handed mode on: hold down F3 while turning on
38. One-handed mode off: hold down F4 while turning on
39. Bluetooth on/off: Backspace-3-4-5-6
40. Wireless on/off: Backspace-1-4-5-6
41. Scroll voice on/off: F3-up scroll button
42. Selecting Braille cursor: F4-up scroll button
43. Selection control information: F2-down scroll button
44. Eight dot mode on/off: F1-down scroll button
47
3. File Manager
3.1 Overview
The functions and structures of the “file manager” on the Braille
Sense Plus B32 are very similar to the “file manager” on a personal
computer. In order to run the “file manager,” press “f (dots 1-2-4)” or
press “enter” when you are on “file manager” in the “program” menu.
The “file manager” includes an “address window” and a “file list.”
When you open the “file manager,” the disk name will appear. The
default disk name is “flashdisk.” You can use the up and down
arrows (“space-1” or “space-4”) or the scroll buttons to explore
additional disks. Press “enter” on the disk you want to open. The
Braille Sense Plus B32 will show you the list of the files or folders on
the disk you have opened.
When you press “tab (space-4-5 or F3)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2” or
“space-F3”)” on the “file list,” you will enter into an “address window.”
The “file list” and “address window” will be explained in more detail in
section 3.2 and section 3.3 in this user manual.
For your convenience, the “file manager” provides you with menus
and “hot keys.” The menus will appear when you press “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.” Section 3.4 will provide a more detailed
explanation of the hot keys that you can use.
It is possible to format the flashdisk, which will erase everything on
the flashdisk. Be extremely cautious when executing this command.
If you execute this command, you will loose all of your data. You will
NOT be able to get this data back once the command has been
executed. To format the flashdisk, press “space-1-2-3.” While
holding down “space-1-2-3,” quickly press and release the reset
button. Continue pressing “space-1-2-3” until you hear the flashdisk
formatting.
48
3.1.1 Navigating the File List
There are two kinds of lists that you will see when using the Braille
Sense Plus B32. The lists are: “file list” and the “menu list.” When
you reach the end of the “menu list,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
automatically bring you back to the top of the list when you press
“space-4.” However, when you reach the end of a “file list,” the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will remain at the end of the “file list,” even if
you press “space-4.” The following is a list of the navigation keys;
(1) Move to previous item: Up arrow key (space-1) or up scroll button
(2) Move to next item: Down arrow key (space-4) or down scroll
button
(3) Move to the beginning of a list: Ctrl-home (space-1-2-3)
(4) Move to the end of a list: Ctrl-end (space-4-5-6)
The following keystrokes are valid only when you are on a “file list.”
(1) Fast move to folder list or move to file list: Space-5-6
(2) Move between file list and address window: Tab (space-4-5 or F3)
/ shift-tab (space-1-2 or space-F3)
(3) Enter into a selected folder or open the selected file: Enter
(4) Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
(5) Fast move to the top level disk: Space-1-2-5-6
(6) Move to the previous 32-item group: Page up (space 1-2-6 or F1-
F2)
(7) Move to the next 32-item group: Page down (space 3-4-5 or F3-
F4)
(8) Find and move to the file or folder in the file list by pressing the
first character of the folder or file names. You must use ASCII
characters.
3.1.2 Item (Folder or File) Selection Key
1) Select item by item (“space”): Select one or more item(s) while
moving in a list. “*” is displayed in front of the selected item.
Pressing “space” again on the selected file that has “*” displayed
by it will cancel the selection.
2) Continuous selection (“enter-b (dots 1-2)”): This will select all of
the items from the point where this command is executed to the
49
item where the cursor is moved to. “*” will appear in front of the
selected items.
3) Select all (“enter-a (dot 1)”): This selects all the items including
files and folders in the current path. You can use navigation keys
to move around the selected items to make sure they are selected.
You can cancel selections or reselect canceled items by pressing
the “space” on the item. When the “select all” command is given,
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say the number of selected files,
and will display “*” in front of the selected files on the Braille
display.
3.1.3 Cancel / Exit Key
Cancel (“space-e (dots 1-5)” or “F4”): This command will cancel a
function, just like the “esc” key cancels functions on a personal
computer.
Exit (“space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”): This will cancel or stop a selected
function or program. This is similar to the way “alt-F4” closes a
program on a personal computer.
3.2 Using File Manager Features in the File List
When you open the “file manager,” you will see the list of disks that
you can access. You can choose a disk from the list, and then press
“enter” to get into the selected disk. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will
show you the list of folders and files on that disk. The items within
the quotation marks are the folders, and the items without quotation
marks are the files. The items on the list will be followed by numbers,
such as 1/5 or 2/5. The numbers after the names of the items
indicate where an item is on the list, and how many items are on the
list. For example, “database 1/5,” means that this is the first folder on
a list that has five items.
3.2.1 Selecting Disks
When you open the “file manager,” the first item on the list is
“flashdisk.” If you inserted the CF memory or SD card in CF card slot
or SD card slot, CF memory card and SD card will be listed on this list.
Any of the disks can be selected by using the up and down arrows
50
(“space-1 or space-4”). You can also use the scroll buttons to choose
one of the disks. After selecting the disk you want, press “enter” to
open the disk you have selected. For more information on the name
of the disks, refer to section 2.6.
3.2.2 Getting in and Out of a Folder (Opening/Closing a Folder)
1. There are several ways to open a folder.
You can utilize a menu to get into a specific folder.
a. You can call up a menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2.” You will have to choose the menu item called “open” from
the list and press “enter” to get into a selected folder.
b. You can also press “enter-o (dots 1-3-5)” to call up the menu to
open a desired folder.
c. Another way to open a selected folder is by just pressing “enter”
on the folder that is selected.
2. To close the current folder, you can use the “backspace” key.
Then, you will be at the next upper level folder list.
3.2.3 Opening a File
You can open a file by pressing “enter” on the item that is displayed.
You can also use “enter-o (dots 1-3-5)” to open a file or folder. The
Braille Sense Plus B32 will load the appropriate application or
program to open the file you have chosen.
Another way of opening a file is using the menu. You can press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu. Then, press the
letter “o (dots 1-3-5),” or you can press “enter” on the item named
“open.”
The file formats that are supported by the Braille Sense Plus B32 are
as follows:
1. Hbl, brl, txt, pwd, brf, rtf, and doc files are supported by the word
processor on the Braille Sense Plus B32.
2. Url, and html files are supported by the web browser on the Braille
Sense Plus B32.
51
3. ac3, asf, asx, m3u, mp2, mp3, ogg, pls, wav, wax, wma, and wmv
files are supported by the media player on the Braille Sense Plus
B32.
4. Daisy files are supported by the Daisy player on Braille Sense Plus
B32.
If you press “enter” on a file type other than those mentioned above,
the “open with” dialog box appears, because the file type is not
associated with a program. Also, you can bring up the “open with”
dialog box through the menu. By using the “open with” menu item,
you can open the currently selected file with a program other than the
program originally associated with it. First, press “space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” to bring up the menu, press “space-4” repeatedly until you reach
“open with,” and then press “enter.” You can also open the dialog
box by pressing “enter-e (dots 1-5)” in the file list, or by pressing “e
(dots 1-5)” in the menu.
This dialog box consists of the “open with” list, the “adopt” list, a
“confirm” button, and a “cancel” button. You can move between
these elements by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-
2).” Within the list, you can select the next item by pressing “space-
4,” and the previous item by pressing “space-1.”
As soon as the dialog box opens, “open with: word processor” will be
displayed. In this list, you can select a program, which would be the
word processor, media player, or web browser. Pressing “space-4”
will select the next program, and “space-1” will select the previous
program. Once you have selected the program to open the file type
with, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “adopt” list. If you have
selected the word processor, pressing “tab (space-4-5)” will take you
to an additional list called “open mode.” Using this list, you can
specify whether the file will be opened as a Braille file or a text file.
Press “space-4” or “space-1” to select one of the two file types, and
then press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “apply to” radio button. In
this radio button, you can specify whether only the currently selected
file or all of the files with the same file extension as the currently
selected file will be opened with the specified program. If you have
set one of the two, press “enter” or “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the
“confirm” button, and then press “enter” to apply what you have just
set. If you have specified a program that does not support the file
type, nothing will be displayed or played after the program has started.
52
In the “file manager,” if you activate the "open with" menu after
focusing on folders that have Daisy or media files, you will see the
associated program, Daisy or media player. If you activate the "open
with" menu, and encounter a folder that does not have the Daisy info
file (discinfo.html or ncc.html), you will not be able to see the Daisy
player as an associated program. You can play all of the files after
selecting either the Daisy or media player.
3.2.4 Send To
You can use this option to copy files and folders to different disks
such as a flash disk, USB flash drive (also known as USB stick
memory), SD card, or a CF memory card. You can select files and
folders by using the item selection option, which was described in
section 3.1.2. After selecting files and folders, you can call up the
menu with “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to choose the “send to” option.
Then, when you press “enter” on “send to,” the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will display the list of disks that you can use to send your files or
folders to. You can choose a destination disk by using the up and
down arrow keys (“space-1” or “space-4”). Pressing “enter” on the
desired disk will start copying the selected files and folders into the
selected disk. Also, you can send files and folders by pressing
“enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” without calling up a menu.
3.2.5 Copy / Move
There are some differences between “copy” and “move.” “Copy”
leaves the original files and folders in their original places, while
“move” removes original files and folders from their original places.
In the “file manager,” you can use the copy function as follows:
First, you have to select the files and folders you would like to copy.
Files and folders can be selected as explained in section 3.1.2 in this
user manual.
Second, you need to call up the menu, and choose “copy” from the
list to copy selected files and folders. If you want to move files and
folders, you can choose “cut” from the menu. When the “copy” or
“cut” command is executed, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will return to
the file list.
53
Third, you need to go into the destination folder and call up the menu,
and choose “paste.” Press “enter” on “paste,” and your selected files
and folders will be copied or moved. If the destination folder is the
same folder where the selected files are, the Braille Sense Plus B32
will attach “copy1-” to your original file names for copied files. If the
same files are copied into the same folder once again, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will attach “copy2-” to the original file names for the
second copied files.
If your destination folder has the same name as the file you are
copying, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say “file xxx already exists.
Overwrite? Yes.” Press “enter” if you want to replace the file.
However, if you do not want to overwrite the file, select “no,” and
press “enter.” When “no” is selected, the “paste” function will be
canceled.
Example: Copying “sample.txt” from the root folder to the download
folder.
1. Select “sample.txt” from the root folder by using the navigation
keys “up arrow (space-1)” or “down arrow (space-4).”
2. Call up the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and choose
“copy.” Then, press “enter.” The Braille Sense Plus B32 will
return to the file list in the root folder.
3. Move to the download folder, and press “enter.” Call up the menu
again to choose “paste.” Press “enter” on “paste,” or press “v
(dots 1-2-3-6)” after calling up the menu to complete the file copy
function. You can also use “enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)” to do the same
thing.
3.2.6 Delete Files or Folders
To delete files or folders, go to the folders or files you want to delete,
and then select them, as explained in section 3.1.2. Call up the menu
by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to choose the “delete” function.
Press “enter” on “delete” to complete the deletion of the selected files
and folders. You can also press the letter “d (dots 1-4-5)” after calling
up the menu to have the same result as above. You can delete
selected files or folders even without calling the menu by using hot
keys. “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” and “enter-d (dots 1-4-5)” are the
54
hotkeys assigned to perform the delete function. However, “space-d
(dots 1-4-5)” can be used with in the programs on the Braille Sense
Plus B32. “Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)” can only be used in the “file
manager.” When you delete only one file or one folder, it is not
necessary to use the select function. Instead, just use the navigation
keys to go to the file or folder you want to delete, and then you can
use the delete function from the “file manager.”
3.2.7 Rename
You can change the name of a file or folder by using this function. To
change the name of a file or folder, move to the file or folder you
desire to rename. Section 3.1.1 describes the navigation method for
using the file list. Call up the menu by using “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to
choose “rename” from the menu list. Press “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” after
calling up the menu to activate the rename function quickly.
Otherwise, you can use the down arrow key (“space-4”) until you
reach “rename” on the list. Press “enter” on this menu. Then, the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will ask for a new name. On the Braille
display, “new name? (current file name or folder name)” will appear.
You must type in a new file name and folder name in ASCII
characters. And if you type the file extension, you can change the file
extension. Pressing “enter” after entering a new file name will
complete the process of changing a file or folder name. You cannot
use the following characters in a file name or folder: “|, \, <, >, ?, :, *”
3.2.8 New Document
You can create a new document with this option. There are several
ways to access this function. You can utilize the menu by pressing
“space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and you can use the down arrow (“space-4”)
until you reach “new document.” Another way to use this function is
by pressing “n (dots 1-3-4-5)” after calling up the menu. The hot key
for this option in the “file manager” is “enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5).” When
the new document function is activated, the Braille Sense Plus B32
will display “file format: text (txt).” You can create two types of
documents, which are “text file” and “Braille file.” When the Braille
Sense Plus B32 displays “file format: text (txt),” you can use the down
arrow (“space-4”) to select the “Braille (brl)” file format. When you
press “enter” on either “text (txt)” or “Braille (brl),” the Braille Sense
55
Plus B32 will display “new document name? New document0.txt” or
“new document0.brl.” “New document0.xxx” is the default file name
based upon the file type you have chosen. The number after the new
document will increase by one whenever you create a new document.
You can also type in the document name you prefer. Then, the new
document you named will be created. “|, \, <, >, ?, :, *” characters
cannot be used when creating a file name.
3.2.9 New Folder
You can create a new sub-folder under the current folder by using
this option. You need to call up the menu in the “file manager” by
pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and select “new folder” from the
menu list by using the down arrow (“space-4”). Press “enter” on “new
folder” to activate this function. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will ask,
“new folder name?,” and wait for your response. Enter your
preferable new folder name in ASCII, and press “enter.” Finally, your
new folder has been created. You can still use the letter “f (dots 1-2-
4)” after calling up the menu to invoke the new folder option. “Enter-f
(dots 1-2-4)” is the hotkey that you use to access this feature quickly
without going through the menu. When creating a new folder name,
you cannot use the following characters: “|, \, <, >, ?, :, *”
3.2.10 File Conversion
The “file conversion” on the Braille Sense Plus B32 is similar to the
“save as” item in the word processor. This feature converts files to
different file formats. The Braille Sense Plus B32 file conversion
feature will support the following file formats: “Sense word (hbl),”
“text (txt),” and “Braille (brl).”
The Braille Sense Plus B32 can convert one or more files at the same
time to the file format you prefer. Select files using the file selection
method (method described in section 3.1.2). After selecting the files
you want to convert, call up the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-
3-4).” Move down to the file conversion, and press “enter.” The
Braille Sense Plus B32 will prompt you to choose the preferred file
format. Use the up and down arrows (“space-1” or “space-4”) to
select the desired file format. When you press “enter” on the file
format you want, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will start converting files
56
to the file format you have chosen. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will
keep the original file names for the files you have converted, except
for the file name extension. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will change
your file extension to the extension that you have selected. If there is
a file with the same file name and format already, “date” and “time”
will be added to the file name. You can always use the letter “t (dots
2-3-4-5)” after calling up the menu to invoke the file conversion
feature. Also, “enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)” is the hot key that activates this
feature without calling up the menu.
3.2.11 Select All
This feature selects all the files and folders in the current path. You
can use this feature through the menu, or by using a shortcut key.
Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call up the menu. Press the down
arrow (“space-4”) to go to “select all.” Press “enter” to execute the
“select all” function. You can use the letter “a (dot 1)” after calling up
the menu to use this feature. “Enter-a (dot 1)” is the hot key to select
all of the files and folders in the current path. When “select all” is
activated, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say, “x objects selected.”
The Braille Sense Plus B32 will return to the file list in the current
path after this brief announcement. You will see “*” in front of each
file name you have selected. You can always cancel your selections
by pressing “space” after moving to the file you want to cancel. This
feature is a convenient way of copying, cutting, and deleting multiple
files.
3.2.12 Search for File
“Search for file” is to find out files of the current or other disk. You
can press “space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call the menu and move to
“search for file,” and press “enter” or “b.” Or, you can press “space-f
(dot 1-2-4)” without calling the menu. Then, you can see dialog box
for file search.
The dialog box for file search consists of “edit window for file name to
search”, “combo box to select a disk”, “check box to searching sub-
folder”, “search button”, “cancel button” and “list to be searched file”
and you can use “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2)” to move
to each control.
57
When you perform file search, you will hear “file to find:” This edit
window is “edit window for file name to search.” You need to input
whole or part of the file name and press “enter.” Then, it will search
all files which contains the word which you inputted in the current disk.
After the file search, it is located in “list to be searched file”
automatically.
You can press up and down arrow key (“space-1” and “space-4”) to
move to each file in “list to be searched file.” If you press “enter” on a
file, it moves to the path where a file is stored and dialog box for file
search will be closed. You can open the file by pressing “enter” on the
file name once again.
If you want to search a file in another disk, not in current disk, you
need to input file name and press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to
“combo box to select disk.” Then, you can press up and down arrow
key (“space-1” and “space-4”) to move to a disk. If you press “enter”
on a disk or “search button,” it will start to search a file in a disk. In
“combo box to select disk,” you can see the disk list which is linked
with Braille Sense Plus B32 now. If there are many files in a disk, it
can take some time to search a file and you can see a message of
“searching.”
If you want to search in a root of a disk excluding sub-folders, then
press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “check box to searching sub-
folder,” press “space” to cancel the selection in the check box and
press “enter.” The default set-up is to include sub-folders when you
search in a disk.
3.2.13 Sort Files By
This option is used to specify the order of how files and folders will be
displayed within the file list. Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to bring up
the menu. Then, press “space-4” repeatedly until you reach “sort files
by,” and then press “enter.” Also, you can access this feature by
pressing “enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)” in the file list, or by pressing “g (dots
1-2-4-5)” in the menu. Then, you can specify in what order the files
and folders in the file list will be sorted. Files and folders can be
sorted according to the following: “name,” “size,” “extension,” and
“date and time.” You can move between these items by pressing
“space-4” or “space-1.” If you press “enter” after selecting the sorting
criterion, files and folders will be displayed in the specified order. If
you select “name” or “extension,” the list will be sorted in ascending
58
order, and if you select “size” or “date and time,” the list will be sorted
in descending order. By default, files and folders in the file list will be
sorted by “name.” Once you have chosen how you want your file and
folder lists sorted, the option will be kept even after the “file manager”
is closed, so that files and folders can be sorted in the same order
when the “file manager” is opened again later.
3.2.14 Set File Info
This item is used to set what kind of information will be displayed in
the file list. Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4).” Then, press “space-4”
repeatedly until you reach “set file info,” and then press “enter.” You
can also access this feature by pressing “enter-l (dots 1-2-3)” in the
file list or press “l (dots 1-2-3)” when you are in the menu. Then, you
can select the information to be displayed in a list containing “name,”
“name, size,” and “name, size, date and time.” You can move
between these items by pressing “space-4 or “space-1.” If you press
“enter” after selecting the information to be displayed, the file list will
be updated, and show all the information you specified. By default,
only names are displayed in the “file list.” If you have selected “name,
size,” the name and size of files will be displayed. But, for folders,
size will not be displayed. If you have set the “set file info” option, it
will be kept even after closing the “file manager,” and the same
information will be displayed when the “file manager” is started again.
3.2.15 Display Only Files of Type
This is used to specify what type of files will be displayed in the file
list. Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to bring up the menu. Then, press
“space-4” repeatedly until you reach “display only files of type,” and
press “enter.” You can also access this feature by pressing “enter-w
(dots 2-4-5-6)” in the file list, or press “w” in the menu. Then, you can
select one of the following items: “all files,” “Sense word files,” “MS
word files,” “text files,” “Braille files,” “html files,” “url files,” “media
files,” and “wave files.” You can move between these items by
pressing “space-4” or “space-1.” If you press “enter” after selecting
the file type you want, only the files of the specified type will be
displayed in the file list. Folders will be displayed for whatever type
you have specified. By default, all files are displayed in the file list.
59
This option setting is not kept after closing the “file manager,” so all
the files will be displayed after starting the “file manager” again.
3.2.16 Zip
With this item you can compress files (but not folders) into a zip file.
Compressing a file makes the total file size smaller, which can make
it easier to email, or allow you to save space on a storage device or
disk. To activate the “zip” function, use the following steps:
1) Select the files you want to compress in the “file list” by using
“space” or “enter-b (dots 1-2)”.
2) Open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and
press “enter” on “zip.” Or, while you are in the menu, press “z
(dots 1-3-5-6).” You can also activate this function without calling
up the menu by pressing “enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
3) Then, "zip filename: (default filename.zip)" will appear. “Default
filename” is the file name that will be used for the compressed file
if you try to compress only one file. If you try to compress several
files, the default name is the folder name that contains the files.
4) If you press “enter” (or press “enter” on “confirm” by pressing “tab
(“space-4-5”)”), the zip file will be created in the current path. If
you want to change the name of the zip file, you can modify the
default by using the cursor keys or type in a new name. If you
want to cancel, press “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-
6).” Or, move to “cancel” by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”),” and then
press “enter” on “cancel.”
3.2.17 Unzip
The “unzip” function will allow you to unzip (or decompress) a zip file,
regardless of whether it was made in Braille Sense Plus B32 or a PC.
To activate the “unzip” function, use the following steps:
1) After selecting a zip file, open the menu with “space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2,” and press “enter” on “unzip.” Or, press “u (dots 1-3-
6)” in the menu. You can also activate this function without
opening up the menu by pressing “enter-u (dots 1-3-6)” after
selecting a zip file.
2) Then, "unzip foldername” (default foldername)" will appear. The
default foldername is the compressed file name. For example, if
60
you unzip a file called “test.zip,” you will see "unzip foldername:
test."
3) Then, press “enter,” or move to “confirm” by pressing “tab (“space-
4-5”),” and then press “enter” on “confirm.” Then, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will unzip the files to the default folder. If you
want to change the default folder name, you can modify the default
folder name by using the cursor keys and editing the folder name.
Or, you can type in a new name. If you want to cancel, press
“space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).” You can also
move to the “cancel” button by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”).” Then,
press “enter” on “cancel.”
3.2.18 Information
The Braille Sense Plus B32 can provide information about files and
folders. The information feature in the “file manager” provides you
with information about the file type, file size, the date and time of the
file or folder’s creation, and file attribute. Press “space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” or “F2” to call up the menu. Press the down arrow (“space-4”)
until you reach “information.” Press “enter” to activate the “file
information” feature. Use the letter “I (dots 2-4)” to call up the “file
information” feature after opening up the “menu.” “Enter-i (dots 2-4)”
is the hot key for this option. You can use this hot key without going
through the menu. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will display the
information about a file or folder in the following order: file type, file
size, creation date and time, and attribute. You can review this
information by pressing the “tab (“space-4-5”).” You can also press
“space-I (dots 2-4),” while you are in the file manager or “program”
menu in the Braille Sense Plus B32, to hear how much space is
available on the flashdisk.
1) File type: This will give you the file type information, such as “brl
file,” “doc file,” and “txt file.” When a folder is selected, it will give
you the information indicating that this is a folder containing x
number of files and folders.
2) File size: This will show you the size of the selected file or folder.
When multiple files or folders are selected, this will give you the
total size of the selected files and folders.
3) Date and time: This will show you the time and date when the
folder and file was created or modified.
61
4) Attribute: This will show you whether the file is write protected or
not. You can change this attribute by using the up and down
arrows (“space-1” or “space-4”) or “space. When multiple files or
folder are selected, you won't be able to see this attribute.
5) Confirm: In order to change the attribute, press “enter” when
“confirm” is displayed.
6) Cancel: In order to cancel the change, press “enter” while
“cancel” is displayed.
3.3 Using the Address Window
This window provides you with the ability to type in the file name you
want to open. Also, this window provides you with the opportunity for
you to type in the path name you want to go to. This window contains
the history list you can use for opening a file or for moving to a
directory. The history list contains file names and directory paths you
have used recently.
3.3.1 Editing
When you are in a file or folder list, you can press “tab (space-4-5)” to
get into the address window. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will show
you the current path including the current disk name, such as
“flashdisk/download/.” When you edit the path, you need to use the
cursor routing keys to move the cursor to the place where you can
type in the text. The cursor stays at the end of the path name when
you first go into the address window.
The address window is only valid when you are in a file or folder list.
When you are in the disk list, the address window is not available.
3.3.2 Type in Path / File Name
When you relocate the cursor by pressing the cursor routing key to
the place that you want to edit, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will insert
the text from the location where the cursor is. If you know the exact
path and file name, you can type in the path and file name to open
the file with the appropriate application. For example, if you type in
“flashdisk/download” in the address window and press “enter,” the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will show you the list of the files in the
62
download folder. If you type “flashdisk/work/sample.txt” in the
address window, and press “enter,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
first load the word processor, and then open the file “sample.txt.”
After the file opens, you can read or edit the file, “sample.txt.”
3.3.3 Opening the History List
The history list contains paths, folders, and files that you have
opened previously. You can access this history list within the
address window by pressing the down arrow (“space-4”). Use the up
and down arrows (“space-1” or “space-4”) to review the history list.
You can also use the scroll buttons to move around on this list.
Simply open or visit the file and path by pressing “enter” on the item,
which is displayed in Braille. The files that are supported by the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will open with the appropriate applications
(see section 3.2.3). During the navigation of the history list, you can
still type in new path names or file names that you want to access.
3.4 Hot Keys in the “File Manager”
Hot Keys for the File Manager
(1) Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
(2) Open with: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
(3) Zip: Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
(4) Unzip: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
(5) Send: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
(6) Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
(7) Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
(8) Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
(9) Delete: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
(10) Rename: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
(11) New document: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
(12) New folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
(13) File conversion: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
(14) Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
(15) Sort files by: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
(16) Set file info: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
(17) Display only files of type: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
(18) Search for file: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
(19) Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
63
4. Word Processor
When you launch the word processor on the Braille Sense Plus B32,
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will place you in a new document that is
ready for you to write in. The menu can be opened by pressing
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.” Don’t worry if you can’t remember the
exact shortcut keys for each of the menu items, since you can
activate various functions of the word processor by activating the
word processor menu. The menu in the word processor consists of
file, edit, go to, read, and layout. In order to use these menus, press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” in the word processor, select a menu
item, and press “enter” or press “backspace” and the corresponding
character that represents the menu item name. For example, in order
to open the edit menu, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open
the menu, and move to the next menu by pressing arrow keys
(“space-1” and “space-4”) to find the “edit” menu, and then press
“enter.” Or, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” and press “e (dots 1-5),”
which represents the “edit” menu. The “edit” menu contains a lower
level menu. The “right arrow” is displayed at the end of the menu
name, and it is spoken as “pull down” after the menu name. If a
menu contains a dialog box, ”...” will be displayed after the name of
the menu, and it will be spoken as “common dialog.”
Before going in to more detail about the word processor, it is also
important to note that while you are anywhere in a document, you can
find out your location by pressing “space-1-5-6.” Also, if you are
editing a document, and turn the Braille Sense Plus B32 off while you
are editing a document, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say the status
when you turn the Braille Sense Plus B32 back on. In the next few
sections the features of the word processor will be explained in more
detail. We will also explain the functions of each of the menu items
available in the word processor.
4.1 File Menu
The “file” menu contains the menus that will allow you to create new
documents, open documents that were saved to a disk, save any
documents that were edited, and print in Braille. It also contains
various environment setting menus. In order to select the file menu,
64
press the “space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and press “f (dots 1-2-4).” Or,
press “enter” on “file.”
4.1.1 New
The new command creates a new document that can be edited. By
default, the name of the new document is “noname.brl.” The
extension, “.brl” is the extension given to documents that are created
in Braille on the Braille Sense Plus B32. It is the same file name that
is named automatically when the word processor opens. In order to
create a new document, select “new” on the “file” menu. Or, press
“enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5).” If “new” is executed while editing another
document, “Sense document (s)” is displayed first. If you press
“space-4” repeatedly, “Braille document (b)” and “text document (t)”
will appear. Select the document type that you want, and then press
“enter”.
“New” means that users can create a new document after closing the
document that is currently being edited. Closing the document that is
currently being edited means that the document is erased from the
temporary memory. If a new document is executed without saving
the document that is currently being edited, the Braille Sense Plus
B32 asks whether it should save the current document, so that
changes to the document will not be lost. When “save: Yes” is
displayed, users can select “yes” in order to save the current
document or select “no” in order not to save the changes. If you
select “cancel” by pressing “space” once more, the word processor
will cancel the new document, and return to the current document.
Note that you can change the “default document type”, in the “options
menu.” By changing the “default document type”, you can choose to
have your default document type as text, sense, or Braille.
4.1.2 Open
The open command opens a document that has already been saved
on to a disk. Select “open” on the “file” menu, or press “enter-o (dots
1-3-5).” You can access the “file” menu by pressing “space-m (dots
1-3-4”), or by pressing “F2.” Then, a dialog box pops up, so that you
can open a file. The “open dialog box” is a tool that helps you find
65
documents that you want to edit and read. It consists of the “file list”
(which shows the list of files or folders), “file name” (to type in a file
name directly), “type” (which changes the file format when opening a
document), a “confirm” button (for confirming the selection), and a
“cancel” button (for canceling the selection). In order to move
between these controls, press “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”).” If the “open dialog box” is executed, “file name:” is
displayed first. If “file name:” is displayed, then type in a file name
that you want to open, and press “enter.” The file name should be
typed in ASCII Braille. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will look for that
file in the “/flashdisk/work” folder. If there are files that you used
recently, you can scroll through them by pressing “space-4.” The file
names that were opened recently are displayed one by one by
pressing “space-4.” If the file that you want to open is selected press
“enter” to open it. In order to move to the previous file name in the list,
press “space-1.” In order to open a file with a different file format,
press “tab (“space-4-5”)” to move to the file format selection, and then
press the up arrow key (“space-1”) or down arrow key (“space-4”) to
select a desired file format. You can find and open a desired file from
the file list without typing in the file name directly in the “file name:”
box. Press “tab (“space-4-5”)” several times to move to the “file list,”
and then select a desired file. You can also move to the “file list” by
pressing “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” when you are at the “file name:”
dialog box. The files in the “file list” have the file format that was
selected in “file format.”
You can select a file that you want by using the up and down arrow
keys, and you can open the file by pressing “enter.” If you select a
folder and press “enter,” you will see the list of files in that folder. If
you want to move to the upper folder or to other folders, you can go
to wherever you want by using scrolling keys, just like in the “file
manager” in chapter 3.
If you want to access a file that is on a compact flash card, or USB
memory stick, you can access the file in the “open” dialog box by first
moving to the “file list” by pressing “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” or “space-
F3.” Then, press “backspace” until you hear the USB stick memory
or the compact flash card. Then, press “enter” to open the memory.
The Braille Sense Plus B32 will choose the Braille mode depending
upon the file type. For example, if you press “enter” to select a file
66
that has the extensions hbl or brl, or if you type in a file name with
those extensions and press “enter,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
open the selected file in Grade 2 Braille. You will not be able to
change the Braille mode in these documents. If you press “enter” to
select a file that has the extensions of txt or doc, it will open the file in
what is currently set in “view/input grade” of “option menu.” After the
file opens, you can switch the Braille mode, as was explained in
section 2.4.2.4. If you press “enter” at the other file format, you can
select the file format; Braille format, or text format. You can toggle
between “Braille format” and “text format” by pressing the “space”
key. Press “enter” when the desired format is displayed. If the Braille
format is selected, the document will be opened in Braille grade
2. And, if the text format is selected, the document will be opened in
Braille mode that is currently set in “view/input grade” of “option
menu.”
In the word processor of the Braille Sense Plus B32, it is possible to
open and work simultaneously with up to 10 files at one time. If you
already have one document open, and you try to open another
document, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will ask you if you want to save
changes to the document that is already open. Then, you can save
the file (see section 4.1.3 for a detailed explanation). Once you have
completed saving the document, an open dialog box will appear.
However, you will still have the two files open. It only seems that you
closed one without saving it. With the new document open, if you
want to go to the previous document, you can press “shift-tab (space-
1-2).” If you want to go back to the other document again, press “tab
(space-4-5).”
4.1.3 Save
The save command will save a document to a disk drive. If you want
to use this option, you can press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the
“file” menu and execute the “save” command by pressing “enter” on it,
or you can press “s (dots 2-3-4).” Otherwise, you can press “enter-s
(dots 2-3-4)” while editing a document.
If you created a new document by activating the word processor or by
pressing enter on “new” in the menu; if you execute “save,” the “save
67
as dialog box” will open. You can refer to section 4.1.4 that explains
how to use the “save as” dialog box.
If you execute “save” after you edit a document that was opened
using the “open” function, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will save the
document with the same file name without using a dialog box. After
saving a document, it will return to document edit status.
When you have several documents open, you can save the current
open document, by pressing “space-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5).” This will
close the document, save it, and return to the previous document.
4.1.4 Save As
The “save as” option is used to save a document as a different file
name, on another disk drive, or as a different file type. If you want to
execute this command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and then press
“enter” when the “file” menu is displayed. Move to “save as” by
pressing “space-4.” Then, press “enter.” Another way is to press
“space-s (dots 2-3-4),” which executes the “save as” command in the
word processor.
If you execute “save as,” the “save as” dialog box is displayed. This
dialog box is almost the same as the “open” dialog box. It consists of
“file list,” “file name,” “type” (representing the file format), a “confirm”
button, and a “cancel” button. If the dialog box is opened, “file name:”
is displayed. You can move from one tab to the other tab by pressing
“tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”.
If you execute “save as” when you are editing a document that you
opened, the displayed file name, file format, and the folder are the
same as those of the file that you opened.
However, if you created a new document by executing the word
processor or by executing “new,” and you execute “save” or “save
as,” the displayed default file name is “noname.brl” and the file path is
“flashdisk/work/.”
If you want to edit the file name that is displayed on the Braille display,
press the cursor routing key where you want to edit the file name, and
then modify it. Or, if you want to make a new file name, type in the
68
new file name without pressing any of the cursor routing keys. You
cannot use the following characters in a file or folder name. “|, \, <,
>, ?, :, *”
If you want to change the file format, move to “type.” In “type,” move
to the file format that you want by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.”
If you want to save a file with a file name that is in the file list, move to
the “file list” by pressing “shift-tab.” When “file name” is displayed,
select your desired file by navigating the file list with the same
method that you used to navigate the “file manager” that was
explained in chapter 3.
4.1.5 Close Current Document
The “close current document” command allows you to close the
current document that you are working on without closing the word
processor. You can access the “close current document” command
by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.” Then, press “enter” on
the “file” menu. Use the arrow keys (“space-1” and “space-4”) until
you find “close current document,” and then press “enter.” Or, you
can press “q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)” in the “file” menu. You can also access
this function by pressing “space-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)” while you are
editing a document. Please note that this function will not work if you
only have one document open. You must have at least two or more
documents open in order to execute the “close current document”
command.
4.1.6 Print
The “print” command is used to print the current document in ink or
emboss it in Braille. If you want to execute this command, press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and press “enter” on the “file” menu.
Then, move to “print” by pressing “space-4,” and then press “enter,”
or just press “p (dots 1-2-3-4).” While editing a document, the hot key
for printing is “space-p (dots 1-2-3-4).” There are two lower level
menus for the “print” menu. One is for printing with an ink printer, and
the other is for embossing in Braille. Remember that you can move
between the menu items by using “space-1” or “space-4.”
69
1) Embossing in Braille
Open the document that you want to be embossed. Press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to activate the menu. Locate “print” in the
“file” menu and select “embosser,” or press “b (dots 1-2).” If you
select “embosser (b)” above, the “embosser” dialog box is
opened. Here you can type in the page number where you want
the embossing to start, and type in the end page number, where
you want the embossing to stop. The following items are in the
dialog box.
(1) Start page number
This is the beginning page number to be embossed. The
default page number is set to 1. You can change the value of
the page number, by typing in the value that is desired. You
can move to the next selection item, which is the “end page
number” by pressing “space-4.”
(2) End page number
This is the ending page number that is to be embossed. The
default value is set to 100000. It means that the document
will be embossed to the end of the document, unless the
document exceeds 100000 pages. In order to change the
value, input the number of the ending page. You can move to
the next selection item (which is the “number of copies”) by
pressing “space-4.”
(3) Number of copies
This option designates the number of copies to be embossed.
The default value is set to 1. You can change this number by
typing in the number that is desired. If you press “space-4” or
“space-1,” you will be moved to “start page number” or “end
page number,” respectively. If you want to move to “confirm,”
press “tab (“space-4-5”).”
(4) Set Braille format
In this option, you can set whether or not the Braille document
layout settings specified in Braille Sense Plus B32 will be
used when embossing. If you set this to “yes,” the document
will be embossed using the Braille document layout setting in
Braille Sense Plus B32. If you set it to “no,” the document will
be embossed in the format specified in the original document.
(5) Confirm / Cancel
70
In order to emboss as designated above, move to “confirm”
by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”),” and then press “enter.” Or, if
you are canceling embossing, move to “cancel” by pressing
“tab (“space-4-5”)”, and then press “enter.”
If “enter” is pressed on “confirm,” “Print: Yes” is displayed on
the Braille display and it is also spoken. If “enter” is pressed
on “yes,” embossing will start. If you do not want to emboss,
press “space” to select “no,” and then press “enter.” If “save
as file” is selected by pressing “space,” then the current
document is saved as a “brl” file.
If there are any problems with the Braille printer, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 shows an error message and returns to the
open document.
2) Print Text
This option is used when you want to print a document on an
ink printer. To do so, open the document to be printed and
press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and then press “enter”
on the “file” menu. Move to “printer” by pressing “space-4”
repeatedly. Then, press “enter” when you are on “printer,” or
just press “p (dots 1-2-3-4).” The dialog box for “printer” is
almost the same as “embosser.” After you input the value as
in embosser dialog box, press “tab (“space-4-5”),” and then
“Print: Yes” is displayed. If “enter” is pressed, printing will
start. But, if you press “space” to move to “no,” and press
“enter,” printing will be canceled, and the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will return you to the open document.
Note that the Braille Sense Plus B32 will work with all HP printers
(level 3 PCL or higher), and with HP-compatible printers.
4.1.7 Settings
If you want to change the environment, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
or “F2,” and press “enter” on the “file” menu in order to enter into the
“file” menu. Move to “settings (e)” by pressing “space-4” repeatedly,
and then press “enter” on “settings,” or just press “e (dots 1-5).”
71
While editing a document, pressing “enter-e (dots 1-5)” will open the
“settings” menu.
When this menu is opened, a dialog box is displayed. You can move
between the menu items by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” To
make a change for one of the settings, press “tab” (“F3 or space-4-5”)
and press “enter” on “confirm” or “cancel.” The following are the
menu items that can be changed:
1) View format character (yes/no): If this option is set to “yes,” all of
the format characters are displayed. If you want to change this
option, use “space” to toggle. Formatted characters will be
marked with the “carriage return ($p)”, “auto return ($l)” and the
“mark sign ($pl).”
2) Reading unit (line/paragraph): It sets the moving unit when
“space-1” or “space-4” is pressed while you are reading a
document. If this option is set to “line,” “space-1” moves line by
line. If this option is set to “paragraph,” “space-1” moves
paragraph by paragraph. In order to toggle between “line” and
“paragraph,” press “space.”
3) Read only (yes/no): If this option is set to “yes,” the document
cannot be modified. This setting is used in order to protect the
document from any unintentional modifications. If you want to
change it to “no,” press “space.”
Note that when you choose to select “compressed” on the option
for reading with the Braille display, you set “read only” to “yes.”
When you are reading a document pressing a “cursor routing key”,
will show a word or character corresponding to the operation of
the “cursor routing key.” This will be displayed at a very left of the
32-cell Braille display.
4) Reading mode (original or compressed): This option sets the
reading mode. Reading mode “original”, will show the document in
its original format.
If the Reading mode is set to “compressed”, The Braille Sense
Plus B32 will continue displaying contents even if there exists a
carriage return ($p). In order to toggle between “original” and
“compressed,” press “space.”
5) Auto scroll speed (1~20): This option sets the duration of
displaying one line while you are scrolling in a document. Twenty
is the fastest scrolling speed. Pressing “space” makes the number
72
increase, and “backspace” makes the number decrease. Refer to
section 4.4.5 for more information about the auto scroll option.
6) Automatic save interval (don’t save automatically, 10~60): This
option sets the automatic save time interval of the file that is
currently being edited. The setting time can be increased or
decreased by 10 minutes if you press “space” or “backspace,”
respectively.
7) Apply settings to all documents (yes/no): This option selects the
settings only if they are valid for all documents. If “yes” is selected,
the settings will be kept for all future documents, and if “no” is
selected, the settings will only affect the document that is currently
being edited. In order to toggle between “yes” and “no,” press
“space.”
8) Confirm: If you press “enter” on “confirm,” you can change the
settings and return to the current editing document.
9) Cancel: If you press “enter” on “cancel,” it will cancel the setting
and return to the current editing document.
4.1.8 Exit
This command will close the word processor. In order to execute this
command, select “exit” in the file menu, or press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-
6).” If the document has been changed (or edited) and “exit” is
selected without saving the document, a dialog box will ask you if you
want to save the current document. You can select “(yes)” with the
spacebar and press “enter” to exit the word processor.
4.2 Edit Menu
In the Braille Sense Plus B32, you can edit all files regardless of what
the view mode is set to. In the “edit” menu, you will find the following
items: “start selection,” “copy,” “cut,” “paste,” “delete,” “delete blank
lines,” “add to clipboard,” “clear clipboard,” “select all,” “insert from
file,” “insert date,” “change insert/overwrite mode,” and “check
spelling.” If you want to open the menu, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
or “F2,” and then press “enter” on “edit.” Or, you can press “e (dots
1-5)” in the “edit” menu. Now, let’s explore the edit menu.
73
4.2.1 Start Selection
The “start selection” command allows you to select a certain portion
of text that you would like to edit. When you use the “start selection”
command, the cursor will appear as blinking “dots 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8.”
The “start selection” command allows you to make changes to only
the text that is selected, and the changes will not affect text that has
not been selected. The “start selection” command is especially useful
for copying, cutting, and pasting. You can select text in a document
by placing your cursor on the location where you want to start
selecting text. If you want to use this function, press “space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the “edit” menu, and then press “enter” on
“start selection,” or you can press “b (“dots1-2”)” in the “edit” menu to
get to this option. While editing a document, pressing “enter-b (dots
1-2)” will activate this command. The end point of the selected text is
where you want to place the cursor after setting the starting point.
For example, if you have typed the word, “mother” in a document,
and you want to select the word “mother,” you should place the
cursor on the letter “m,” and then place the cursor directly after the
letter “r.” Then, you will have selected the entire word.
4.2.2 Copy
After selecting text in a document, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2” to open the menu, and move to “edit” by pressing “space-4.”
Press “enter” to open the “edit” menu. Press “space-4” to move to
“copy” and then press “enter,” or press “c (dots 1-4)” in the “edit”
menu. While editing a document, pressing “enter-c (dots 1-4)” will
activate this command.
When you copy the selected text, it will be copied to the clipboard.
The clipboard is the virtual space that is used for storing copied data
temporarily. However, if you decide to copy new text that you have
selected, the data in the clipboard that you copied before will be
erased, and the selected text that you have just copied will replace
the previously selected text that was on the clipboard.
74
4.2.3 Cut
To cut a selection of text, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and
press “enter” on “edit” to enter into the “edit” menu. Move to “cut” by
pressing “space-4” repeatedly, and then press “enter” on “cut,” or
press “x (dots 1-3-4-6)” in the “edit” menu (which is the short cut) to
cut your selected text. While editing a document, pressing “enter-x
(dots 1-3-4-6)” will activate the “cut” command.
The difference between “cut” and “copy” is that if you execute the
“cut” command, the text that has been selected will not be moved to
the clipboard and the selection in the document will be erased.
However, the “copy” command will copy the selection to the clipboard,
and the text that has been selected will not be erased from the
document.
4.2.4 Paste
To paste selected text to the clipboard, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
or “F2,” and then press “enter” on “edit” to enter into the “edit” menu.
Move to “paste” by pressing “space-4” repeatedly and then press
“enter” on “paste,” or press “v (dots 1-2-3-6)” in the “edit” menu
(which is the short cut) to paste the selected text from the clipboard.
While editing a document, press “enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)” to paste the
text from the clipboard.
4.2.5 Delete
To delete text that has been selected, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2,” and then press “enter” on “edit” to enter into the “edit” menu.
Move to “delete” by pressing “space-4” repeatedly, and then press
“enter” on “delete,” or press “d (dots 1-4-5)” (as a short cut) in the
“edit” menu to delete the selected text. When you are editing a
document, you can press “space-d (dots 1-4-5)” to delete text that
you have selected
4.2.6 Delete Blank Lines
In order to delete blank lines, you must select the area of the
document where you want the blank lines to be deleted from. Once
75
this has been done, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and press
“enter” on “edit” to enter into the “edit” menu. Then, use the arrow
keys (“space-1” or “space-4”), and press “enter” on “delete blank
lines,” or press “l (dots 1-2-3)” as a short cut, while in the “edit” menu.
If you want to delete an empty line while you are editing a document,
press “backspace-e (dots 1-5),” which is the hot key for “delete blank
lines.”
4.2.7 Add to Clipboard
When you have selected the text you want to select in your document,
you should press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and then press
“enter” on “edit” to enter into the “edit” menu. Move to “add to
clipboard” by pressing “space-4,” and then press “enter,” or press “p
(dots 1-2-3-4).” While editing a document, pressing “enter-p (dots 1-
2-3-4)” will activate this command.
“Add to clipboard” is almost the same as the “copy command.”
However, with the “copy” command, the newly selected text will
replace the text that was copied before. The “add to clipboard”
command however, will not erase the previously data from the
clipboard when you use this command to copy the selected text. It
will keep the previously selected text, and the new text that you have
selected will also be added to the clipboard.
4.2.8 Clear Clipboard
To clear the clipboard, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and
press “enter” on “edit” to select the “edit” menu. Move to “clear
clipboard” by pressing “space-4” repeatedly, and then press “enter.”
Or, you can press “e (dots 1-5)” in the “edit” menu as a short cut.
Once you have executed the “clear clipboard” command, everything
on the clipboard will be erased. When you are editing a document,
you can press “enter-d (dots 1-4-5)” to activate this command.
4.2.9 Select All
The “select all” command will select all text within a document. To
activate this command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and
then press “enter” on “edit” to enter into the “edit” menu. You can
move to “select all” by pressing “space-4” repeatedly, and then press
76
“enter” on “select all,” or press “a (dot 1)” in the “edit” menu (which is
the short cut). While editing a document, press “enter-a (dot 1)” to
activate this function.
4.2.10 Insert from File
This command will insert another file in the current document that is
being edited. If you want to run this command, press “space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2,” and press “enter” on the “edit” menu. Move to “insert
from file” by pressing “space-4” repeatedly. Then, press “enter” on
“insert from file,” or just press “I (dots 2-4)” in the “edit” menu. While
editing a document, pressing “enter-I (dots 2-4)” will activate this
function.
When you use this option, an insert dialog box will appear just like the
open dialogue box. Select a file that you want to insert in to the
current document, and press “enter” on the file. Then, the selected
file will be inserted at the beginning of the paragraph with your cursor.
When you execute “insert from file,” the text inserted from the file will
be converted to the file format of the current document. Although the
saved file that you pasted was in a different formatted document, the
same file format will be kept as the current document. For example, if
you insert “sample.txt” in “sample.hbl” and save it, the saved file will
be “sample.hbl.”
Note that if you are going to insert a Braille file in a text file, the Braille
document will be translated back into a text document. You can read
it in Braille, but on rare occasions you might see differences in the
translated text.
4.2.11 Insert Date
To insert the date into your document, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
or “F2,” and then press “enter” on “edit” to enter into the “edit” menu.
Move to “insert date” by pressing “space-4” repeatedly. Then, press
“enter” on “insert date,” or press “w (dots 2-4-5-6)” (which is the short
cut) in the “edit” menu. Then, you can insert the current date and
time where the cursor is located in your document. If you want to
insert part of the current date and time, you can modify what you
77
want to change after completing the “insert date” command. When
you are editing a document, you should press “enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)”
to activate this command.
4.2.12 Changing Between Insert and Overwrite Mode
There are two ways of editing documents in the Braille Sense Plus
B32. The first is to insert your text, which will push back the words
behind the cursor. This is called the “Insert mode” because you are
simply inserting text. When you are in “Insert mode,” the cursor will
show up “dots 7-8.” The second is to overwrite text at the cursor
location. This is called the “Overwrite mode.” In “Overwrite mode”,
the cursor will display as blinking “dots 7-8.”
If you start the word processor (or open a document), the “insert
mode” is the default. This will write text, while pushing back other
words that are already in the document. However, you can overwrite
text while erasing the old text by switching to “overwrite mode.” You
can switch to the “overwrite mode” by pressing “space-I (dots 2-4).”
In the “overwrite mode,” you can change the old text into new text at
the cursor location. If you want to go back to “insert mode,” you
should press “space-I (dots 2-4)” again. You can also access this
function via the menu. Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and go
to “edit” using the arrow keys (“space-1” and “space-4”). Next, press
“enter” on “edit” to enter in to the “edit” menu. Then, use the arrow
keys to scroll to find “toggle insert/overwrite mode,” or you can just
press “m (dots 1-3-4)” while you are in the “edit” menu.
4.2.13 Check Spelling
This option is used to check spelling while you are editing a
document
In order to bring up check spelling option, do the following;
1. Call up the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.”
2. Move to the “edit” menu by pressing “space-4.”
3. Press “enter” on the “edit” menu.
4. Press “space-4” until “check spelling” is displayed. Or, press “k
(dots 1-3)” in order to move to “check spelling” directly.
78
5. Press “enter” on the “check spelling.” Or, you can call up the
“check spelling” menu by pressing “enter-k (dots 1-3)” while you are
editing a document.
If “check spelling” is executed, a dialog box with the following items
will be displayed:
“Range” combo box
“Custom dictionary” dialog (c)
“Options” dialog (o)
“Begin” button (b)
“Cancel” button
You can move from one item to the next by pressing “tab (space-4-5)”
or “shift-tab (space-1-2).”
The following is a detailed explanation for each item:
The “range” combo box is used to designate the range that is to be
spell checked.
1) Whole document: check throughout the entire current document.
2) Chapter: check the current chapter where the cursor is located.
3) Sentence: check the current sentence where the cursor is located.
4) From cursor to bottom: check from the cursor position to the end
of the document.
5) Current word: check just the word where the cursor is located.
You can move from one item to the next by pressing “space-1” or
“space-4.”
When you press “enter” on the “custom dictionary” dialog, the
following items will be displayed:
1) List: it shows the words that are registered in the custom
dictionary. (Example: Braille 1/20). If there are no words
registered, “no list” will be displayed.
2) Add word (a): if “enter” is pressed on this button, “add word?”
will be displayed. If you want to add a word, press “enter” after
you enter the new word. Then, the new word is added and the
Braille Sense Plus B32 exits to the “add word” button.
3) Modify word (m): select the word to be modified on the “list” and
then press “enter.” The “modify word?” message is displayed.
79
Input the correct word that will replace the selected word and
then press “enter” in order to modify the selected word. The
“modify word” button will be displayed again after the Braille
Sense Plus B32 modifies the selected word.
4) Delete word (d): select the word to be deleted on your “list” and
press “enter” in order to delete the selected word.
5) Cancel: this command closes the dialog box.
You can move from one item to the next item by pressing “tab
(space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2).”
When you press “enter” on the “option” dialog, the following items will
be displayed:
1) Check automatically: if you select “check automatically,” the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will check the spelling of the document
automatically. The default is set to “off.” If it is set to “on,” the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will beep if the word is not registered in the
dictionary. Press “space” in order to toggle between “on” and “off.”
2) Always suggest recommended word: if this option is set to “on,”
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will suggest a word if the word that is
encountered is not in the dictionary. The default is set to “on.” If
the option is set to “off,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will not
recommend a word. In order to toggle between “on” and “off,”
press “space.”
3) Use main dictionary only: if this option is set “on,” the spell
checker will not look up any words in the “custom dictionary.” It
will only use the main dictionary. The default value is set to “off,”
and you can toggle between “on” and “off” by pressing “space.”
4) Skip whole upper-case word: if this option is set to “on,” words
with only upper-case letters will not be checked. The default is set
to “on,” and you can change it by pressing “space.”
5) Skip a word including address: if this option is set to “on,” the
words that contain an address will not be checked. The default is
set to “on,” and you can change it by pressing “space.”
6) Skip a word including number: if this option is set to “on,” the
words that include the numbers will not be checked. The default
value is set to “off,” and you can change it by pressing “space.”
7) Confirm: if you press “enter” on “confirm,” the changes that you
made above will be saved, and the Braille Sense Plus B32 will exit
from the “option” dialog.
80
8) Cancel: if you press “enter” on “cancel,” the changes that you
have made above will be canceled and the Braille Sense Plus B32
exit from “option” dialog.
In order to move between the items 1) through 6), press “space-1” or
“space-4.” But, in order to move to “confirm” or “cancel,” press “tab
(“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”).”
If you press “enter” on the “begin” button after you set all of the
settings, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will start to check spelling. If you
press “enter” on the “cancel” button, the “spell check” will be canceled.
Once “spell check” is executed, the following dialog box will be
displayed:
1) Window to show the text: it shows the sentence with the word to
be checked currently. The cursor will be located at the word that is
to be checked currently.
2) Change word edit box: it shows the word to be checked currently.
You can input the correct word in edit box directly.
3) Recommendation word list: if the word to be checked is not in the
dictionary, the Braille Sense will recommend words. You can
move from one recommended word to the next by pressing
“space-1” or “space-4.”
4) Skip once (s): if you press “enter” on this button when a word is
encountered that is not in the dictionary, the word will not be
modified. You can also press the “down scroll button” in order to
skip the word.
5) Skip all (i): if you press “enter” on this button, the word that is the
same word as the currently focused word will not be modified and
skipped throughout the spell check range.
6) Add to custom dictionary (a): if you press “enter” on this button,
the word that is currently focused is added to your “custom
dictionary.”
7) Modify once (c): focus on the modified word and select the
desired word on the “recommendation word list,” and then press
“enter.” Then, the currently focused word that is on your document
will be replaced by the recommended word.
8) Modify all (m): focus on the modified word and select the desired
word on the “recommendation word list,” and then press “enter.”
81
The same words with the same spelling will be replaced by the
new word throughout the document.
9) Cancel: if you press “enter” on the “cancel” button, the “spell
check” will be ended.
You can move from one item to the next by pressing “tab (space-4-5)”
or “shift-tab (space-1-2).”
When the spell check has completed, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
say “search: 00 mismatch: 00 replace: 00.”
Also simply, you can check spelling of the current word by press
backspace-k (dots 1-3) when you enter or meet the misspelled word.
If you press backspace-k (dots 1-3), you will hear list of
recommended word. You move to word that you want by using the
“space-1” or “space-4.” And press “enter.” So misspelled word will
change to the correct word.
4.3 Go to Menu
If you want to open the “go to” menu in the word processor, press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and move to “go to” by pressing
“space-4.” Then, press “enter” on “go to.” Or, you can press “g (dots
1-2-4-5)” in the menu. In the “go to” menu, you will find the following
submenus: “find,” “find again,” “replace,” “go to location,” “go to
previous page,” “go to next page,” “set mark,” “go to mark,” “go to
previous document,” and “go to next document.”
4.3.1 Find
The find function allows you to search for text in a document. Once
the text is found you will be taken to that position in your document.
To execute this command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and
move to “go to” by pressing “space-4” and press “enter” on “go to.”
Then, select “find.” You will be able to navigate the “go to” menu with
“space-1” or “space-4.” Otherwise, you can press “f (dots 1-2-4)” in
the “go to” menu, which is the shortcut. While editing a document,
pressing “space-f (dots 1-2-4)” will activate the “find” command. If
“find” is executed, the dialog box is displayed. This dialog box
consists of “text to find,” “search direction,” “match case,” a “confirm”
button, and a “cancel” button. You can move from one field to the
next field by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”.
82
1) Text to find
The first field in “find” is “text to find.” In this window, you can
type in the text that you want to find. If you want to find the text
immediately, press “enter.” However, if you want to set other
fields in the dialog box, press “tab (“space-4-5”)” to move to the
next field.
2) Search direction
The next field is “search direction.” The default direction is
“forward.” If you would like to change the search direction, you
should press “space.” Pressing “space” will toggle between
“forward” and “backward”. After you type in the text to be found,
and set the searching direction, press “enter” if you want to find
the text immediately.
3) Match case
The next field is “match case.” This field display only when you
execute the “find” command in text file. This field does not display
in Braille file. The default value is “no.” If you want to change the
value, press “space.” Pressing “space” will toggle between “no”
and “yes.”
4) Confirm
After you set all of the fields and want to execute “find,” press
“enter” on “confirm.” You can also start finding text by pressing
“enter” on “text to find” or “search direction.”
5) Cancel
In order to cancel the “find” function, press “enter” on “cancel.” Or,
you can cancel the “find” command by pressing “space-z (dots 1-
3-5-6).”
If you have executed the “find” command as explained above and it
finds the text that you typed in, the sentence with the text is displayed
on the Braille display, and “completed” is announced by the voice. If
there was no text that matched what you typed in, the cursor does not
move and the Braille Sense Plus B32 announce the “not found.” by
the voice. This function saves the text that was typed in last, as well
as the direction, so you can use it again to search for the next
occurrence of text.
When using the find command, the current cursor position is very
important. If the cursor is located at the beginning of the document, it
is better for you to select “forward” direction. If the cursor is located
83
at the end of the document, it is better to select “backward” as the
direction used for searching.
4.3.2 Find Again
When you want to run the “find again” command; you can press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.” Then move to “go to” by pressing
“space-4.” Then, press “enter” on “go to.” Move to “find again” by
pressing “space-4” to move to “find again” and press “enter,” or press
“h (dots 1-2-5)” in the “go to” menu. When you are editing a
document, you should press “enter-f (dots 1-2-4)” to activate this
command. When “find again” is executed, “find again” will look for
the text that was used in the previous “find.” “Find again” will search
in the same direction that was used with the last “find.” If you have
not yet used the “find” command in the current document, and you
execute “find again,” it will not work. “Find again” is used to find the
text that you have previously found in the current document.
4.3.3 Replace
To execute this command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and
move to “go to” by pressing “space-4.” Then, press “enter” on “go to.”
Move to “replace” by pressing “space-4” to move to “replace (r),” and
press “enter,” or press “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” in the “go to” menu (which is
the short cut). While editing a document, pressing “enter-r (dots 1-2-
3-5)” will activate this function.
“Replace” also has a dialog box that consists of the following fields:
“text to find,” “replace with,” “search direction,” “match case,”
“replace,” “confirm” and “cancel.” You can move between the fields
by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”. The
following is a description of each function.
1) Text to find
You can type in the text that you want to be replaced in this field.
2) Replace with
You can type in new text that will replace the text that is found.
After you type in “text to find” and “replace with,” the Braille Sense
Plus B32 will find the text and replace it in the direction that you
84
have specified. If you want to change the direction, press “tab
(“space-4-5”)” to move to the next field.
3) Search direction
The “search direction” has the same function as the “search
direction” explained in section 4.3.1. After you set the searching
direction, press “enter” to start the replacement of text, or press
“tab (“space-4-5”)” to set the “match case” or “replace.”
4) Match case
This field display only when you execute the “replace” command in
text file. This field does not display in Braille file. The default value
is “no.” If you want to change the value, press “space.” Pressing
“space” will toggle between “no” and “yes.”
5) Replace
You may want to replace only one piece of text. Or, you may
want to replace all the texts that coincides with the text that you
typed in the “text to find” field. You can set it in the “replace” field.
There are two choices: “once” and “all.” You can toggle between
the two choices by pressing “space.”
6) Confirm and Cancel
Pressing “enter” on “confirm” will start finding and replacing text.
If there is no text that coincides with the text that was typed in,
“no more searching data” is displayed, and the function is
canceled.
Pressing “enter” on “cancel” will cancel the “replace” function.
4.3.4 Go to Location
The “go to location” command moves rapidly to a specific location.
You can move to a specific page, paragraph, or line. To execute this
command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and move to “go to”
by pressing “space-4.” Then, press “enter” on “go to.” Move to “go to
location” by pressing “space-4,” and then press “enter.” While editing
a document, press “enter-l (dots 1-2-3)” to activate this function. If
“go to location” is executed, the word processor says, “move to page
number:” If you type in a number here, the Braille Sense Plus B32
will take you to the page number that corresponds with the number
you have just typed in. You can also type the letter “f (dots 1-2-4)”
before the number. This will tell the Braille Sense Plus B32 that you
are looking for a page number, and not a paragraph, or, line number.
Type in the number of the page you want to move to without the plus
85
sign or minus sign, and then press “enter.” The word processor will
jump from start of the document to the specific page at once. If you
want to move forward from your current location, put the plus sign in
front of the number and letter. For example, if you want to move
forward five pages, you would type “+f5.” If you want to move
backward from your current location, put the minus sign in front of the
number and letter. If you want to move to the previous page, type “-
f,” and if you want to move to the next page, type “+f.” If the page
number you type in is not valid, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say,
“move range error.”
You can also use this function to move to a specific paragraph. First,
select “go to location” in the “go to” menu, or just press “enter-l (dots
1-2-3).” Then, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say, “move to page
number:” Before you type in the number of the paragraph that you
want to go to, type “p (dots 1-2-3-4),” and then type the number of the
paragraph that you want to go to. By typing in the letter “p (dots 1-2-
3-4),” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will know that you are looking for a
paragraph, and not a page or line. If you want to move forward from
your current location, put the plus sign in front of the number and
letter. If you want to move backward from your current location, put
the minus sign in front of the number and letter. For example, if you
want to move backward two paragraphs, you would type, “-p2.” If you
want to move to the previous paragraph, type “-p,” and if you want to
move to the next paragraph, type “+p.” If the paragraph number you
type in is not valid, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say, “move range
error.”
You can also use this function to move to a specific line. First, select
“go to location” in the “go to” menu, or just press “enter-l (dots 1-2-3).”
Then, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say, “move to page number:”
Before you type in the number of the line that you want to go to, type
“l (dots 1-2-3),” and then type the number of the line that you want to
go to. By typing in the letter “l (dots 1-2-3),” the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will know that you are looking for a line, and not a page or
paragraph. If you want to move forward from your current location,
put the plus sign in front of the number and letter. If you want to
move backward from your current location, put the minus sign in front
of the number and letter. For example, if you want to move backward
two lines, you would type, “-l2.” If you want to move to the previous
86
line, type “-l,” and if you want to move to the next line, type “+l.” If the
line number you type in is not valid, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
say, “move range error.”
You can also go to a specific line number on a specific page. The
Braille Sense Plus B32 enables you to type in this information at the
same time. To do this, press “enter-l (dots 1-2-3),” or you can select
“go to location” in the “go to” menu. Then, when the Braille Sense
Plus B32 says, “move to page number:” you can type in the page
number followed by the line number. For example, to move to the 3rd
line on the 20th page, you would type “20 3,” or you could type “f20 3.”
When you use the command of the “go to location” function, you
cannot use the “+” or “-“ sign. You can only go directly to the page
and line number.
4.3.5 Go to Previous Page
The “go to previous page” command allows you to move to the page
that is located before the page you are currently on. To execute this
command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and move to “go to”
by pressing “space-4.” Then, press “enter” on “go to.” Move to “go to
previous page” by pressing “space-4,” and then press “enter,” or
press “space-1-2-6” or “F1-F2” while you are in the document. Once
you have activated the “go to previous page” function, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will go directly to the previous page.
4.3.6 Go to Next Page
The “go to next page” command allows you to move to the page that
is located after the page you are currently on. To execute this
command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and move to “go to”
by pressing “space-4.” Then, press “enter” on “go to.” Move to “go to
next page” by pressing “space-4,” and then press “enter.” Or, you
can press “space-3-4-5” or “F3-F4” while you are in the document.
Once you have activated the “go to next page” function, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will go directly to the next page.
87
4.3.7 Set Mark
The “set mark” command marks a position in the document that you
want to use later. To execute this command, press “space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2,” and move to “go to” by pressing “space-4.” Then, press
“enter” on “go to.” Move to “set mark” by pressing “space-4,” and
then press “enter,” or press “m (dots 1-3-4)” in the “go to” menu,
which is the short cut. While editing a document, press “enter-m
(dots 1-3-4)” to activate this command.
Move the cursor to the location that you want to mark, and press
“enter-m (dots 1-3-4”). Then, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say
“mark name:.” To name the mark, use the letters a through z. For
example, if you put down the letter “a (dot 1),” the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will move you to that point in the document immediately. If you
are in the document, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will not show the
mark sign. If you selected “view format character” in “settings,” which
was explained in section 4.1.7, you will see the bookmark sign in the
document. You can go to marked text by using “space-3” or “space-
6,” and the bookmark sign will appear, which is “$pl (mark name).” If
you move the cursor to the mark location in a document, you can see
dots 7-8 all through the mark sign. This means that the Braille Sense
Plus B32 will deal with the marked text as a chunk, but not with every
character one by one.
4.3.8 Go to Mark
The “go to mark” command finds a mark that has already been
marked. When you want to execute this command, you can press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4),” or “F2,” and move to “go to” by pressing
“space-4.” Then, press “enter” on “go to.” Move to “go to mark” by
pressing “space-4,” and then press “enter,” or press “j (dots 2-4-5)” in
the “go to” menu, which is the short cut. You can jump to anywhere
in a document to marked text with by pressing “enter-j (dots 2-4-5).”
If you press “enter-j (dots 2-4-5),” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say
“mark to move:.” If you type in the character of the mark name that
you want to locate, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will move the cursor to
the marked text with dots 7-8 embossed in the first cell.
88
4.3.9 Go to Previous Document
If you have multiple documents open, you can go directly to the
document that you had opened before the document that you are
currently editing. To execute this command, press “space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2,” and move to “go to” by pressing “space-4.” Then, press
“enter” on “go to.” Move to “go to previous document” by pressing
“space-4,” and then press “enter.” Or, you can press “shift-tab (space
-1-2)” while you are editing a document to go to the previous
document.
4.3.10 Go to Next Document
If you have multiple documents open, you can go directly to the next
document that is open. To execute this command, press “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and move to “go to” by pressing “space-4.”
Then, press “enter” on “go to.” Move to “go to next document” by
pressing “space-4,” and then press “enter.” Or, you can press “tab
(space-4-5)” while you are editing a document to go to the next
document.
4.4 Read Menu
The “read” menu reads the document in voice and in Braille when the
user has opted to use read in voice and Braille. In order to call up the
“read menu,” press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and then press “r
(dots 1-2-3-5).” The submenus of the “read” menu are “read selected
text,” “read beginning of selected text,” “read from beginning to
cursor,” “read from cursor to end,” “auto scroll,” and “read status.”
4.4.1 Read Selected Text
The “read selected text” command allows you to have the Braille
Sense Plus B32 read text that you have in a selection. To execute
this command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and move to the
“read” menu by pressing “space-4,” and then press “enter,” or press “r
(dots 1-2-3-5)” to call up the “read” menu. Press “enter” on “read
selected text” in the “read” menu. While editing a document, you can
press “backspace-b (dots 1-2)” to activate the “read selected text”
function. Although you activate this function, the cursor location will
89
not move to the selected text. The cursor will stay where you have
activated “read selected text.”
4.4.2 Read Beginning of Selected Text
The “read beginning of selected text” command will allow you to hear
the first line of the selected text, without moving the cursor location.
To execute this command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and
move to the “read” menu by pressing “space-4.” Then, press “enter.”
Move to “read beginning of selected text” by pressing “space-4,” and
then press “enter,” or you can press “u (dots 1-3-6)” on the read
menu, which is the short cut. While editing a document, you can
press “enter-u (dots 1-3-6)” to activate this function. When you
execute “read beginning of selected text,” the cursor will stay in the
same position it was at when you executed “read beginning of
selected text.”
4.4.3 Read from beginning to cursor
Using this function, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will audibly speak a
document from the beginning to the position where the cursor is
located. To execute this command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2,” and move to the “read” menu by pressing “space-4.” Then,
press “enter.” Move to “read from beginning to cursor” by pressing
“space-4,” and then press “enter” or you can press “t (dots 2-3-4-5)”
on the read menu, which is the short cut. While editing a document,
you can press “backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5)” to activate this function.
If you want to quit this function before you reach the cursor location,
you can press “backspace-enter.” Your cursor will stay where it was
when you started this function. That is, the cursor will not move to
the position to where you stopped the function.
4.4.4 Read from Cursor to End
This command will read a document from where the cursor is located
to the end of the document. While the Braille Sense Plus B32 is
reading the text, the cursor will stay in the same location that you
were, before you started this command. The cursor will not be
moved until the reading has been completed. Once the text has been
90
read, the cursor will move to the end of the document. To execute
this command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and move to the “read”
menu by pressing “space-4.” Then, press “enter.” You can move to
“read from cursor to end” by pressing “space-4” and press “enter,” or
you can press “g (dots 1-2-4-5)” on the “read” menu, which is the
short cut. While editing a document, you can press “enter-g (dots 1-
2-4-5)” to activate this function.
If you stop this command before the end of a document, you can
press “backspace-enter,” which will move the cursor to where you
stopped the command.
4.4.5 Auto Scroll
The “auto scroll” command scrolls automatically. The speed of the
“auto scroll” is set in the “settings” menu, which is located in the “file”
menu, which was explained in section 4.1.7. The auto scroll mode
does not read the document using the voice. It is only displayed on
the Braille display. It reads the document line by line automatically.
To execute this command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and
move to the “read” menu by pressing “space-4.” Then, press “enter.”
Move to “auto scroll” by pressing “space-4,” and then press “enter,” or
you can press “a (dot 1)” on the read menu, which is the short cut.
You can turn the auto scroll feature on and off by pressing the up and
down scroll buttons simultaneously. For faster scrolling, press the
right arrow key (“space-6”). For slower scrolling, press the left arrow
key (“space-3”). If you want to read a line again that you have
already scrolled past, you can read it again by pressing the up arrow
key (“space-1”) until you can get to what you want to read. Similarly,
if you want to skip some lines that you do not wish to read, you can
skip them by pressing the down arrow key (“space-4”). You can also
access this function without opening the menu by pressing both scroll
keys at the same time when in your document.
4.4.6 Read Status
This function will tell you information about your current file. If you
activate this function, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will tell you the
“filename,” “edit mode (insert or overwrite),” and “file protection(write
or read only).” To execute this command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-
91
4)” or “F2,” and move to the “read” menu by pressing “space-4.”
Then, press “enter.” Move to “read status” by pressing “space-4,”
and then press “enter,” or you can press “s (dots 2-3-4)” in the read
menu, which is the short cut. While editing a document, you can
press “space-3-4” to activate this function. In order to return to the
document that you are editing, press any key.
4.5 Layout
The “layout” command sets the layout for printing on an ink printer or
embossing on a Braille printer. The “layout” menu has the following
submenus: “Braille document layout,” “print document layout,”
“Braille paragraph layout,” and “print paragraph layout.” The changes
that are made with the “layout” command are not displayed on the
Braille display. In order to check the layout, call up the menu by
pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and check the layout values
one by one. The changed values will be displayed within the menu.
4.5.1 Braille Document Layout
While you are editing a document, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2” to call up the menu, and select “layout” or press “p (dots 1-2-3-
4),” (which is the short cut), and then select “Braille document layout.”
Or, you can press “backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4).” “Braille document
layout” is used to set the width and height of the paper for embossing
as well as the following options. Whenever you change a layout
setting while you are editing a document, the setting will be valid on
the rest of the document.
You can navigate the menu items with “space-1” or “space-4,” and
you can move to “confirm” or “cancel” by pressing “tab” (“space-4-5”
or “F3”). You can skip an item by pressing “space-4” if you don’t want
to change the default setting.
The following are the items that can be changed:
1) Set characters per line
This sets the number of characters (Braille) per line to emboss
in Braille. The default value is set to 32. Type in the number of
characters per line, if you decide you want to change the value.
92
Then, you can move to the next setting by pressing “space-4.”
2) Set lines per page
This sets the number of lines per page to be embossed. It
includes the line that the page number is printed in. For
example, if it is set to 26, the content of the document will be
embossed with 25 lines and the page number is printed as the
26th line. If you want to change the value, type in the number of
lines that you want to emboss. Then, you can move to the next
setting by pressing “space-4.”
3) Print type
This sets whether the document will be embossed on a single
sided or a double sided (both sides). The default value is set to
double side embossing. If you want to emboss using single
sided embossing, press “space” until “Print type: single sided” is
displayed on the Braille display. Then, the setting will be
changed to single side embossing. If you want to go back to
double side printing again, press “space” again, and “print type:
double sided” will be displayed. After setting your preference,
move to the next setting by pressing “space-4.”
4) Page numbering type
This sets the numbering type for embossing a document. The
default type is set to “double sided.” It means that the page
number will be embossed on every page. The setting values
are “double sided,” “odd,” “even,” and “none.” These settings
are changed when you press “space.” Pressing “backspace”
will allow you to move in reverse order. When you have
selected your preference, you need to press “space-4” in order
to move to the next setting.
5) Set page numbering
This sets the position of the page number when embossing.
The selections are “upper-right” and “lower-right.” The default
setting is set to “lower-right.” Press “space” in order to change
the setting. Pressing “backspace” will allow you to move in
reverse order. After selecting your preference, you should
press “space-4” in order to move to the next setting.
6) Header
This is used to edit the header that will be embossed on the
head of every page. Move to “header” and type in the text to be
embossed as the header. In order to move to the next setting,
press “space-4.”
93
7) Footer
This is used to edit the footer that will be embossed on the
bottom of every page. Move to “footer” and type in the text to
be embossed as the footer. After you set every field, move to
“confirm” or “cancel,” and press “tab (“space-4-5”).” If you want
to change a setting, or check your settings again, press “space-
1” to move to the previous fields.
8) Confirm / Cancel
In order to apply a setting, press “enter” when “confirm” is
displayed. If you do not want to change the setting, you will
need to press “enter” when “cancel” is displayed.
4.5.2 Print Document Layout
This option will allow you to set the layout of the document for printing
on an ink printer. Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the
menu while you are editing a document, and select “layout” or press “l
(dots 1-2-3)” (which is the shortcut), and then select “print document
layout.” Or, press “backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5),” which is the hot key
for “print document layout.” The settings in this menu are applied to
all the paragraphs in the selected document. You can navigate the
menu items with “space-1” or “space-4,” and you can move to
“confirm” or “cancel” by pressing “tab” (“space-4-5” or “F3”). You can
skip an item by pressing “space-4” if you do not want to change the
default setting.
The following is a detailed explanation of each setting:
1) Set top margin
This sets the top margin for ink printing. The top margin is the
distance from the top of the paper to the first line of the printed
paragraph. The default value is set to 20mm (about 0.78 inches).
If you are going to change the default setting, you can type in a
number, which will make the margin as big as you would like to
have it.
2) Set bottom margin
This sets the bottom margin for ink printing. The bottom margin is
the distance from the bottom of the paper to the last line of a
printed paragraph. The default value is set to 20mm (about 0.78
inches). If you are going to change the default setting, you can
94
type in a number, which will make the margin as big as you would
like to have it.
3) Set left margin
This sets the left margin for ink printing. The left margin is the
distance from the left edge of the paper to the first text that is
printed. The default value is set to 20 mm (about 0.78 inches). If
you are going to change the default setting, you can type in a
number, which will make the margin as big as you would like to
have it.
4) Set right margin
This sets the right margin for ink printing. The right margin is the
distance from the right end of the printed text to the right edge of
the paper. The default value is set to 20mm (about 0.78 inches).
If you are going to change the default setting, you can type in a
number, which will make the margin as big as you would like to
have it.
5) Set page numbering
This sets the position where the page numbers will be printed.
The page number positions are “upper left,” “upper middle,”
“upper right,” “lower left,” “lower middle,” and “lower right.” To
change the setting, press “space.” Pressing “backspace” will
allow you to move in reverse order. After selecting your
preference, you should press “space-4” in order to move to the
next setting.
6) Header
This is used to edit the header that will be printed at the top of
each page. Move to “header,” and type in the text that you want
to be printed.
7) Footer
This is used to edit the footer that will be printed at the bottom of
each page. Move to “footer,” and type in the text that you want to
be printed.
8) Distance between lines
This sets the distance between the lines that will be printed. The
default value is set to 150%. The distance can be anywhere from
100% to 300%. If you type in a value that exceeds this range, the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will say “Out of range. Value too large,”
and wait for you to type in another value.
95
9) Confirm / cancel
In order to apply a setting, press “enter” when “confirm” is
displayed. If you do not want to apply a setting, you will need to
press “enter” when “cancel” is displayed. If you press “enter” on
cancel, you will be taken out of the menu. You must press “tab
(“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to get to the confirm and
cancel buttons.
4.5.3 Braille Paragraph Layout
In order to call up the “Braille paragraph layout,” press “space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2” while you are editing a document. Then, press “enter”
on “layout,” or press “l (dots 1-2-3)” while in the “layout” menu (which
is the short cut), and then select “Braille paragraph layout.” Or, you
can press “backspace-1-2-4-6.” The changed layout will be applied
only to the selected paragraph. These settings are not applied to
other paragraphs.
You can navigate between the menu items by pressing “space-1” or
“space-4.” Move to “confirm” or “cancel” by pressing “tab” (“space-4-
5” or “F3”). You can skip an item by pressing “space-4” if you do not
want to change the default setting.
In this setting, you can set the following items:
1) Indent first line
This indents the first line of the paragraph as designated by the
number of characters. The default value is set to 0. In order to
change this setting, type in the number of characters to be
indented on the “indent first line” setting item. Press the down
scroll key or “space-4” in order to move to the next setting item.
2) Indent all lines except the first line
This indents all the lines of the paragraph, except the first line of
the paragraph as designated by the number of columns. If you
want to indent all of the text, except for the first line, by typing in a
number. You can make the indent as big as you want it by
changing the number of columns, which will indent all lines,
except for the first line. Press “tab (“space-4-5”)” in order to
“confirm” and “cancel.” If you want to change the setting of a
previous item, move to it by pressing “space-1,” and change it.
The default is set to “0.)
96
3) Confirm / cancel
In order to apply changes, you need to press “enter” when
“confirm” is displayed. If you want to exit from a setting without
changing it, you should press “enter” when “cancel” is displayed.
You must press “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to
get to the confirm and cancel buttons.
4.5.4 Print Paragraph Layout
You can set the layout of the current paragraph for printing on an ink
printer. In order to set “print paragraph layout,” press “space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2” while you are editing a document, and select “layout,”
or press “l (dots 1-2-3)” (which is the short cut), and select “print
paragraph layout.” Or, press “backspace-2-3-4-6,” which is the hot
key for “print paragraph layout.” This setting applies only to the
paragraph that you are on when the setting is changed. This setting
change does not apply to other paragraphs. You can navigate the
menu items by pressing “space-1” or “space-4,” and you can move to
“confirm” or “cancel” by pressing “tab (“space-4-5” or “F3”).” You can
skip an item by pressing “space-4” if you do not want to change the
default setting.
The following is a detailed explanation of the settings for “print
paragraph layout:”
1) Set left margin
This sets the left margin for ink printing. The default value is set
to 0mm. In order to change the setting, you will need to type in
the value. Move to the next setting by pressing the down scroll
button or press “space-4.”
2) Set right margin
This sets the right margin for ink printing. The default value is set
to 0mm. In order to change the setting, you will need to type in
the value. Move to the next setting by pressing the down scroll
button or press “space-4.”
3) Indent first line
This sets the indentation of the first line. The first line will be
indented by the value that you select, and the other lines will not
be indented. This setting is valid for the paragraphs that follow,
unless the setting is changed. The default value is set to 0. In
order to change the setting, you should type in the number of
97
characters. Press the down scroll button or press “space-4” in
order to move to the next setting.
4) Indent all lines except the first line
All the lines in the paragraph, except the first line, are indented if
this is set. This setting will be valid for the following paragraphs,
unless the setting is changed. The default value is set to 0. In
order to change the setting, you should type in the number of
characters.
5) Alignment
This sets the alignment type. The default type is set to “left
justified.” The other options are “centered” and “right justified.”
Press “space” in order to change the setting.
6) Setting style
When printing a document through an ink printer, the style of
each paragraph can be set to a desired style. Style includes “font
type,” “font size,” and “text shape for text.” You can select “text,”
“title,” “sub title,” “abstract 1,” and “abstract 2” by pressing “space”
or “backspace.” The default fonts for each style are listed below.
Text: Times New Roman, Font size 11
Abstract1: Times New Roman, Font size 11, Boldface
Abstract2: Times New Roman, Font size 14, Boldface
Sub title: Courier New, Font size 16, Italic, Boldface, Center-
aligned
Title: Times New Roman, Font size 20, Boldface, Center-
aligned
7) Confirm / cancel
In order to apply a setting, press “enter” on “confirm.” In order to
cancel a setting, and move to “edit mode,” press “enter” on
“cancel.” You must press “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-
1-2”)” to get to the confirm and cancel buttons.
4.6 Keys for Text Scrolling and Deleting
While reading a document, you can use the following commands to
read Braille or hear speech. You can move character by character,
word by word, or paragraph by paragraph.
The previous character: Left arrow (“space-3”)
The next character: Right arrow (“space-6”)
98
The previous word: Space-2
The next word: Space-5
The beginning of line: Home key (“space-1-3”)
The end of line: End key (“space-4-6”)
The previous line: Up arrow (“space-1”)
The next line: Down arrow (“space-4”)
The next paragraph: “Space-5-6” or “enter-down scroll button”
The previous paragraph: “Space-2-3” or “backspace-up scroll button”
The top of document: Control-home (“space-1-2-3” or “F1-F2-up
scroll button”)
The bottom of document: Control-end (“space-4-5-6” or “F3-F4-down
scroll button”)
In addition, if you use the following commands, you can read the part
of a document where the cursor is. For example, if you activate the
read the current paragraph function, you will hear the entire
paragraph where the cursor is located.
Read the current paragraph: “Space-2-3-5-6”
Read the current line: “Space-1-4”
Read the current word: “Space-2-5”
Read the current character: “Space-3-6”
If you want to delete a part where the cursor is, you can use the
following keys. For example, if you activate the delete the current
paragraph function, you can delete the entire paragraph where the
cursor is located.
Delete the current paragraph: “Backspace-2-3-5-6”
Delete the current line: “Backspace-1-4”
Delete the current word: “Backspace-2-5”
Delete the current character: “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”
4.7 Cursor Location
While reading a document, you can check the cursor location. To do
this, press “space-1-5-6.” You will then hear, "00page 00line
00column 00%, 00/00 paragraph 00/00 line."
99
4.8 Hot keys in the word processor:
1) File menu
New document: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Save: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Close current document: Space-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)
Print: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Settings: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
2) Edit menu
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Delete: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Delete blank lines: Backspace-e (dots 1-5)
Add to clipboard: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Clear clipboard: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Select All: Enter-a (dot 1)
Insert from file: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
Insert date: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Toggle insert/overwrite mode: Space-i (dots 2-4)
Check spelling : Enter-k (dots 1-3)
Check spelling of the current word: Backspace-k (dots 1-3)
3) Go to menu
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Replace: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Go to location: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Go to previous page: Space-1-2-6 or F1-F2
Go to next page: Space-3-4-5 or F3-F4
Set mark: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Go to mark: Enter-j (dots 2-4-5)
Go to previous document: Space-1-2 or space-F3
Go to next document: Space-4-5 or F3
100
4) Read menu
Read selected text: Backspace-b (dots 1-2)
Read beginning of selected text: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Read from beginning to cursor: Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Read from cursor to end: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Auto scroll: up-down scroll buttons
Read status: Space-3-4
5) Layout menu
Braille document layout: Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Print document layout: Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Braille paragraph layout: Backspace-1-2-4-6
Print paragraph layout: Backspace-2-3-4-6
6) Miscellaneous hot keys
Move to previous character: left arrow key (space-3)
Move to next character: right arrow key (space-6)
Move to previous word: Space-2
Move to next word: Space-5
Move to the beginning of the line: Home (space-1-3)
Move to the end of the line: End (space-4-6)
Move to previous line: Up arrow key (space-1)
Move to next line: Down arrow key (space-4)
Move to previous paragraph: Space-2-3
Move to next paragraph: Space-5-6
Move to the beginning of the document: Ctrl-home (space-1-2-3)
Move to the end of the document: Ctrl-end (space-4-5-6)
Read current paragraph: Space-2-3-5-6
Read current line: Space-1-4
Read current word: Space-2-5
Read current character: Space-3-6
Delete current paragraph: Backspace-2-3-5-6
Delete current line: Backspace-1-4
Delete current word: Backspace-2-5
Delete current character: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Confirm current cursor position: Space-1-5-6
Set view format character: Space-1-4-6
Set reading unit: Space-2-4-6
Set read only: Space-3-4-6
101
5. Address Manager
5.1 What is the “Address Manager”?
The “address manager” is a program that you can use to keep track
of your contact information and schedule information, such as names,
company addresses, home addresses, as well as other information.
“Address manager” has two main dialog boxes: “add address” and
“search address.”
In the “add address,” dialog you can enter contact information, such
as names, company addresses, home addresses and so on. The
information that you have entered can be saved for later use.
In the “search address,” dialog you can look for information that is
stored in the “address manager.” You can edit or delete information
that you find. You can also select addresses to be printed using an
ink or Braille printer.
You can also connect to a web site by pressing “enter” on a
homepage address field if the field contains an address for a web site.
In the “program” menu, you can start “address manager” by typing “a
(dot 1),” or by selecting “address manager.” Press “space-4” or
“space-1” repeatedly in the “program” menu until you arrive at the
“address manager,” and then press “enter” to open it.
Before going into the details of how to use the “address manager,”
let's discuss the structure of address data.
The address data that is stored in “address manager” consists of a
set of records. A “record” is a collection of contact information about
one person or company. Each record contains 23 fields. These 23
fields are: “last name,” “first name,” “company name,” “title,” “mobile
phone,” “home phone,” “home fax,” “company phone,” “company fax,”
“home street address,” “home city,” “home state,” “home zip code,”
“home country,” “company street address,” “company city,” “company
state,” “company zip code,” “company country.” “home e-mail,”
102
“company e-mail,” “home page,” and “memo.” Thus, one record
contains all the information you can keep about a person or company.
5.2 Starting the Address Manager
When you press “enter” on “address manager” in the “program” menu,
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say “search address,” and display the
prompt, “Last name:.” In other words, when you start the “address
manager,” the “search address” dialog box will be opened.
In “address manager,” you can use the menus to conveniently
browse and execute all of the available commands. When you
cannot remember the exact hot key for the command that you want to
execute, you can press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the
menu.
5.3 Using “Add Address”
This dialog box allows you to enter new addresses in the address
manager. In order to use the “add address” function, press “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to bring up the “address manager” menu, and
then press the up arrow key (“space-1”) or the down arrow key
(“space-4”) to move to “add address.” Then, press “enter.” Or, press
“enter-I (dots 2-4)” (which is the hot key) in “address manager.”
While you are entering an address, you can use the “search address”
function (refer to section 5.4), “set address fields” (refer to section
5.3.2), “set backup option (refer to section 5.3.3),” “backup address
list (refer to section 5.5.1)” “restore address list (refer to section
5.3.2)” and “exit” commands, using the menu or with other shortcut
keys.
5.3.1 Adding an Address
“Add address” is a dialog box that contains a list of 22 input fields, the
“memo” field, a “confirm” button, and a “cancel” button. In the input
fields, you can enter the information corresponding to the 22 fields of
a record. “Confirm” is used to save the information entered, and
“cancel” is used to discard the entry. You can move among the input
fields, “memo,” “confirm,” and “cancel” by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)”
or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”.
103
Among the 22 input fields, you can move from one field to the next by
pressing the up arrow key (“space-1”) or the down arrow key (“space-
4”).
Here you should type in the appropriate information for each field,
and press the down arrow key (“space-4”) to move to the next field.
You do not have to fill in all of the fields. If you want to skip a field,
press the down arrow key (“space-4”), and the field will be left blank.
You will then be prompted for the next field.
When you have entered information in the desired fields, you can
save the information by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”)” repeatedly to move to the “confirm” button. Then,
press “enter.” Or, you can press “enter” in any field.
If you don’t want to save the information that you have entered, press
“tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” repeatedly to move to
the “cancel” button, and then press “enter.”
After you cancel the entry, you will be prompted for another record,
beginning with the “last name” field.
You can the use the cursor routing keys to move from one field to the
next.
In any input field, if you press the first cursor routing key all the way to
the left, the first input field (“last name:”) will be displayed and you
can type in a name there. If you want to enter a mobile phone
number without entering other information, press the 5th cursor
routing key, and then enter the phone number. In order to jump to
the “home e-mail” field, which is the 20th field, you should press the
20th cursor routing key.
If you have pressed the 23th cursor routing key, or any key to the right
of the 23th key is pressed, you will hear a warning sound because
there are only 23 fields in a record.
You can enter telephone numbers using computer Braille (without a
number sign) or regular grade 1 Braille (with or without a number
sign). To type in a dash (-) while typing in a telephone number (e.g.
000-000-0000), you should press “space” or “dots 3-6.”
104
If you want to put an extension number after any phone number,
enter the phone number as described above, and then type a comma
(,), followed by the extension number, as in “000-000-0000,100.” In
this case, you should press “dot 6” to enter the comma in computer
Braille or “dot 2” in grade 1 Braille.
When you enter a home page address or an e-mail address, you
should enter the information using computer Braille. For the @ (at
sign), you should press “space-u (dots 1-3-6)” and then “dot 4.” A
period or dot (.) in a home page address (or an e-mail address)
should be entered as “dots 4-6.” A colon (:) can be typed in using
“dots 1-5-6” and a slash (/) can be typed in using “dots 3-4.”
By pressing “tab (“space-4-5”),” you can get to the “memo” field. You
can type in multiple lines of text in the “memo” field. When you want
to start a new line of text, you should press “enter.”
When you are done entering information for a record, you can press
“tab (space-1-2)” until you reach the “confirm” button. Then, press
“enter” on “confirm.”
5.3.2 Setting Add Address Fields
“Set address fields” enables you to select one of the 22 fields to be
shown when you enter contact information. There are 22 fields in a
record, but you may not want to enter information in every one of the
22 fields. You can use “set address fields” to select only the fields
that you need.
To use this function, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to bring up
the menu, and then select “set address field,” or press “o (dots 1-3-5)”
(which is the short cut), and then press “enter.” Or, you can press
“enter-o (dots 1-3-5)” in the “add address” dialog box.
On the right side of each field name, “use” or “unused” is displayed.
The default value is set to “use.” In order to toggle the value, press
“space.”
After setting all the fields you want to change, move to the “confirm”
button or the “cancel” button by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-
105
tab (“space-1-2”)”, and then press “enter” to save or cancel the
changes. Another way you can cancel the changes is by pressing
“space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
5.3.3 Using “Search Address” in “Add address”
In “add address,” use the “search address” function to jump to
another record. To use the “find address” function, press “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu. Next move to “find
address,” and then press “enter,” or press “s (dots 2-3-4).” You can
also press “enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” in the “add address” dialog box.
If you have entered any information and execute “search address,”
you will be asked “save changes? yes/no.” Once you answer this,
the “find address” dialog box will be displayed.
5.4 Searching For an Address
5.4.1 Using “search address”
The “search address” dialog box enables you to search for any
information stored in “address manager.” If you execute “address
manager” in the “program” menu, “search address” is executed
automatically. If you want to use “search address” in “add address,”
you can either select it from the menu, and press “enter,” or press
“enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” (which is the hot key), as explained in section
5.3.3. If you press “enter” in the “search address” dialog box, without
typing any text, when “last name:” is displayed, you can browse
through all of the records that are stored in “address manager.” A
“record” is a collection of information about one person. If more than
one record is found, you can move to the next record by pressing
“space-4.” If you want to move to the previous record, you need to
press “space-1.”
For moving each field and record in the search result list, you can use
the following keys.
Following are the move keys in the search result list
Move to a previous field in a record: Space-2
Move to the next field in a record: Space-5
Move to the first field in a record: Space-1-3
106
Move to the last field in a record: Space-4-6
Move to the previous record: Space-1
Move to the next record: Space-4
Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3
Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6
Move to previous same field different record: Space-3
Move to next same field different record: Space-6
You can also search records using not only name field but also the
other fields. If you want to find records with a company name, press
“space-4” repeatedly until “company name:” is heard. Then, type the
company name, and press “enter.” The first record that has the
company name will be displayed.
When you enter text to be searched for, you do not have to type the
entire content of a field. For example, if you want to find a record
about “Edward,” type in “ed” in the “search name” field. Then, all the
records whose name field contains “ed” will be found.
5.4.2 Setting Searching Address Fields
This option enables you to select the fields that you want to search.
Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to bring up the menu, and select
“set address search fields.” Then, press “enter.” Or, you can press
“enter-o (dots 1-3-5)” (which is the hot key) in the “set address search
fields” dialog box.
If you want to search only the name, mobile phone number, and
company telephone number fields, move to those fields that you do
not want to search by pressing “space-4” or “space-1,” and then
press “space” to change the value of that field to “unused.” By
pressing “space,” you can toggle the value of a field between “used”
and “unused.” This works just like the “set address fields” function
that was explained in section 5.3.2.
5.4.3 Using “Add Address” In “Search Address”
You can use the “add address” command in the “search address”
dialog box. To do this, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to bring
up the menu, and then select “add address.” Then, press “enter.”
107
You can also press “enter-I (dots 2-4),” which is the hot key for this
option.
5.5 Backing up and restoring the address list
5.5.1 Backup Address List
If a cold reset occurs, or if your battery goes dead, all of the data in
the address manager will be lost. So, it is very important that you
make a backup file every time you make a change to the address list.
To go to “backup address list,” open the menu by pressing “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.” Then, use the up and down arrow keys (“space-
1” or “space-4”), and find “backup address list.” Then, press “enter.”
You can also press “u (dots 1-3-6)” while you are in the menu to get
to “backup address list.” Or, you can press “enter-u (dots 1-3-6)” to
activate this function without calling up the menu.
If you already have a backup file, you will see the message “Backup
file already exists. Continue to backup? yes.” If you have made any
changes to your address list, press “enter” to create a new backup file.
If you want to keep the previous backup file, press “space-4,” locate
“no,” and press “enter” on it. When you make a backup file in your
address list, you will always have a new backup file with the
extension DAT, and you will have another file with the extension BAK
(which originated from the previous “address.dat” file).
5.5.2 Restore Address List
If you want to restore the address list after a cold reset, press “space-
m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu, and use the up and down
arrow keys to find “restore address list.” Then, press “enter” on
“restore address list.” Or, you can press “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” while you
are in the menu to find “restore address list.” You can also press
“enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)” to activate this function, without calling up the
menu.
If you activate the “restore address list” function, and you already
have an address list, you will see the message, “Address file already
exists. Which do you prefer? Append.” If you press “enter,” the
backup address list will be appended to the current address list. If
108
you press “space-4” once and press “enter” on “overwrite,” you will
install the new backup file, erasing the old backup file. For example,
let us assume that you have three records in your address list and
you have ten addresses in your backup file. If you select “append,”
you will have 13 records in your address list. In this case, three
addresses could possibly be redundant. If you select “overwrite,” you
will have 10 addresses backed up, and the three original addresses
will be deleted. If you don’t want either “append” or “overwrite,” press
“space-4,” locate “cancel,” and press “enter” on it.
5.5.3 Setting Backup Option
To backup your address list, you can do it manually using the
“backup address list” function. You can also backup your address list
automatically by using the “set backup option.” To activate the “set
backup option” function, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open
up the menu. Then press “space-4” or “space-1” repeatedly to locate
“set backup option.” Then press “enter” on it. Or, you can press “e
(dots 1-5)” in the menu to go to “set backup option.” You can also
activate the function without opening up the menu by pressing “enter-
e (dots 1-5).”
If you activate the function, you will see a dialog box. The dialog box
has three controls: “backup mode” radio button, a “confirm” button,
and a “cancel” button. You can switch between controls by pressing
“tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2).” To switch between radio
buttons, you can press “space-1,” “backspace,” “space-4,” or “space.”
The “backup mode” has three radio buttons: “always backup
changes when exiting,” “manual backup,” and “prompt backup
changes when exiting.”
1) If you select the “always backup changes when exiting,” a new bac
kup file will be automatically created if you modify the address list
or add other information when you exit the address manager.
2) If you select the “manual backup,” it will not create a new backup fi
le even though there may be changes in the address list. In this c
ase, you can only make a new backup file by using the “backup ad
dress list” menu.
109
3) If you select the “prompt backup changes when exiting,” you will s
ee the message “backup changes? Yes” when you exit the addres
s manager, if you have modified the address list or added other inf
ormation. If you press “enter” on “yes,” it will automatically create
a new backup file and exit the address manager. If you press “spa
ce-4” once and press “enter” on “no,” it will exit without making a n
ew backup file.
You can change the backup mode if you press “enter” after focusing
on one of the three radio buttons. Or, you can press “enter” on
“confirm” by moving to it by pressing “tab (space-4-5).” The default
backup mode is set to “prompt backup changes when exiting.”
5.6 Commands in the Found Records
5.6.1 Find again
If you want to search for another name, press “tab (“space-4-5”)” or
“shift-tab (“space-1-2”).” The prompt, “last name:” will be displayed.
Now, you can type in the new text that you want to look for.
Just as in a new search, you can start the search by pressing “enter.”
Even if you have canceled a search, you can go back to the “search
address” dialog box by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”).”
5.6.2 Opening a home page
If a record has a homepage address or an email address, you can
open the homepage or send an email. Move to “home page,” “home
e-mail” or “company e-mail” by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.”
Then, press “enter” on “home page,” “home e-mail” or “company e-
mail.”
If you press “enter” on a “home page,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
automatically connect to the web browser program. If you press
“enter” on an “home e-mail” or “company e-mail,” the Braille Sense
Plus B32 will bring up the “email” program, so that you can send an
email to the email address that you have selected.
110
Before you use this command, please make sure that you are
connected to the internet.
5.6.3 Editing Addresses
In order to edit a field that is in a record, find the desired address by
using the “search address” function, and then move to the field you
want to change by using the “space-2” or the “space-5” repeatedly
until you arrive at the field that you want to change. Then, press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call up the “menu,” and select “modify
address.” Then, press “enter,” or you can press “enter-m (dots 1-3-
4),” which is the hot key. You can now enter new information for that
field. After you have finished entering the information, press “enter.”
The Braille Sense Plus B32 will save the changes that have been
made, and you will be returned to the first field of the record.
To save the changes that have been made, and exit from “edit
address” mode, move to “confirm” by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or
“shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”, and then press “enter.” In order to exit from
edit mode without saving the changes that have been made, move to
“cancel” by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”
and press “enter.” You can also exit from the “modify address” by
pressing “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6),” which are
the hot keys.
5.6.4 Deleting Addresses
To delete the record you are currently reading, call up the “menu” by
pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and select “delete address.” Then,
press “enter” or press “d (dots 1-4-5)” (which is the short cut) in the
“menu.” Or, you can press “space-d (dots 1-4-5)” (which is the hot
key) while the record is displayed. You can also delete more than
one record at a time as follows:
1) Select the records to be deleted and use the “delete” command.
To select the record that you want to delete, press “space” when
the record is displayed. Selected records can be deleted by
pressing the “delete” key (“enter-d (dots 1-4-5”). If you press
“space” again on a selected record before you delete it, the
selection will be canceled. The records you have selected will
111
show the, “*” symbol to the left of the “last name:,” which is the first
field of a record. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will say “selected.” If
you cancel a selection by pressing “space” on a selected record,
the “*” will disappear, and the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say
“cancel selection.”
2) Select all and delete
If you want to delete all the records in “address manager,” press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call up the “menu” and select “select all.”
Then, press “enter.” Next, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call up
the “menu” again, and then select “delete address.” Then, press
“enter.” Or, you can press “enter-a (dot 1)” (which is the hot key)
and press “space-d (dots 1-4-5)” while you are using the “find
address” function. If you select all records by “select all,” “*” will be
displayed to the left of “last name:” If you press “space-e (dots 1-
5),” then all of the selections will be canceled and “*” will disappear.
5.6.5 Printing addresses
This option allows you to print the selected records to a Braille printer
or an ink printer. First, search the records to be printed with the
“search address” command, and then select the records that you
want to print. To select a record, press “space” on the record to be
printed. If you want to select all records in “address manager,” press
“enter-a (dot 1),” or select “select all” from the “menu,” and press
“enter.” At the beginning of a selected record, “*” will be displayed on
the Braille display.
After selecting the records that you want to print, press “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” to bring up the “menu,” and then select “print address.”
Then, press “enter,” or press “space-p (dots 1-2-3-4),” which is the
hot key. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will now prompt you to select a
printer. The default selection is “printer.” If you press “space” once,
the selection will be changed to “embosser.” And, if you press
“space” again, “cancel” will be selected. Each time when you press
“space,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will cycle through “printer,”
“embosser,” and “cancel.” You can select one of them by pressing
“enter” when the option you want to choose is displayed.
112
5.6.6 Saving Addresses to a File
You can save selected records to a file. Regarding how to select
records, you can find a detailed explanation in section 5.6.4 and 5.6.5.
To save selected records in a document file format, press “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” to call up the “menu,” select “save addresses as file,”
and then press “enter.” Or, you can press “enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)”
(which is the hot key) after selecting the desired records. If you
execute the “save addresses as file” command, the “file save” dialog
box will be displayed and you will be asked to enter the file name and
select a file format. After you type in the file name, and select one of
the available file formats, you should press “enter” on “confirm,” which
will save the selected record(s) to a file. This dialog box is the same
as the “save as” dialog box in the word processor, except that, here,
when you are saving addresses to a file, the default file name is not
displayed unlike the dialog box in the word processor.” You should
refer to section 4.1.4 to learn about the dialog box “save as” in the
word processor.
5.7 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook
The “address manager” can be synchronized with Microsoft Outlook
on your personal computer to help you keep track of your information.
For a more detailed explanation of how to connect the Braille Sense
Plus B32 to your computer, and for more information on how to use
ActiveSync, please refer to chapter 16. Please take the following
steps in order to synchronize the Braille Sense Plus B32 with
Microsoft Outlook:
1) Download and install “ActiveSync” on to your personal computer.
2) Connect the Braille Sense Plus B32 to your personal computer,
using a USB cable.
3) If the “partnership” dialog box opens on your PC after you connect
the Braille Sense Plus B32 to your PC, select “yes,” and press the
“next” button on your PC.
4) Then, you will be asked for a device name. Type in
“BrailleSensePlus” (or whatever you would like to call the Braille
Sense Plus B32)
113
5) Press the “next” button. Then, the program list dialog box will be
displayed on your PC. Click on the “check box” that is located
next to “contacts.” Note that the other check boxes should not be
checked. Press the “next” button.
6) Then, the synchronization between Microsoft Outlook and the
Braille Sense Plus B32 are complete. You can then check the
contacts in Microsoft Outlook and the Braille Sense Plus B32.
5.8 Hot Keys in the Address Manager
1) Move keys for moving from field to field in add address or in the
“menu”
Move to the previous field or menu item: Up arrow key (space-1)
or up scroll button
Move to the next field or menu item: Down arrow key (space-4) or
down scroll button
Move to the first field or menu item: Ctrl-home (space-1-2-3)
Move to the last field or menu item: Ctrl-end (space-4-5-6)
2) Move Keys For Moving From Record To Record in the search
result list
Move to a previous field in a record: Space-2
Move to the next field in a record: Space-5
Move to the first field in a record: Home (space-1-3)
Move to the last field in a record: End (space-4-6)
Move to the previous record: Space-1
Move to the next record: Space-4
Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3
Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6
Move to previous same field different record: Space-3
Move to next same field different record: Space-6
3) Shortcut keys in the “menu”
Add address: I (dots 2-4)
Find address: s (dots 2-3-4)
Modify address: m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete address: d (dots 1-4-5)
Select all: a (dot 1)
Save as a file: t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Print address: p (dots 1-2-3-4)
114
Backup address list: u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore address list: r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Setting backup option: e (dots 1-5)
4) Hot Keys For The Commands
Add address: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
Find address: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Modify address: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete address: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Save as a file: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Print address: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Backup address list: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore address list: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Setting backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Setting add/searching address fields: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
5) Miscellaneous hot keys
Tab: Space-4-5
Shift-tab: Space-1-2
Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5) or F4
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
115
6. Schedule Manager
6.1 Overview
The “Schedule manager” is a program that is used to manage
important information about appointments, anniversaries, and events.
The Schedule Manager can also inform you of appointments at a
specified time. You can start the “schedule manager” from the
“program” menu, by pressing the up or down arrow key (“space-1” or
“space-4”) to move to “schedule manager.” Then, press “enter.” Or,
you can press “s (dots 2-3-4)” in the “program” menu, which is the
short cut. The “Schedule manager” has two main dialog boxes: “add
schedule” and “search schedule.” In “add schedule,” you can enter
information about a new appointment. Using “search schedule,” you
can look for information about a specific appointment stored in the
“schedule manager,” and you can edit or delete the schedule
information that is stored.
6.2 Starting “Schedule Manager”
If you press “enter” on “schedule manager,” or press “s (dots 2-3-4)”
(which is the short cut) in the “program” menu, the “find schedule”
dialog box will appear, so that you can search stored information.
The first thing you will hear is “find date:” followed by the current date.
If you want to add new schedule information, press “space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2” to bring up the menu. Then, select “add schedule,” and
then press “enter.” Or, you can quickly open it by pressing “enter-I
(dots 2-4)” in the “search schedule” dialog box. As in other programs
on the Braille Sense Plus B32, you can use menus and shortcut keys
in the “schedule manager.” Section 6.13 lists all the hot keys and
shortcut keys available in the “schedule manager.”
6.3 Setting Date and Time
When you use “add schedule,” “search schedule,” or “wakeup call”
(which are located in the “utility” menu), you are asked to set the date
and time. The Braille Sense Plus B32 provides you with a consistent
interface to enter time and date information in these dialog boxes. So
before we start talking about using the “schedule manager” in this
116
section, we should explain how to enter the date and time. When you
are asked to enter a date and time, you can either type in the date
and time, or select it using shortcut keys, which are outlined at the
end of this section. When you type numbers in date/time, you can
use either computer Braille (without a number sign) or regular grade 1
Braille (with or without a number sign). When entering time, use “hh
mm” format, two digits for the hour, and two digits for the minute. For
example, use “10 05” to enter 5 minutes past 10. You can use a
dash (-) or slash (/) to separate the hour field and minute field, but not
a colon (:). You can enter a date in “mm dd yyyy” format, which uses
two digits for the month, two digits for the day, and four digits for the
year, as in “09 01 2004” to enter September 01, 2004. Again, you
can use a space, dash (-), or slash (/) to separate the month, day,
and year. To set the date and time with shortcut keys, you can use
the following commands.
1) Date setting keys
Move to the next day: Space-6
Move to the previous day: Space-3
Move to the next week: Space-5
Move to the previous week: Space-2
Move to the next month: Space-4
Move to the previous month: Space-1
Move to the next year: Space-5-6
Move to the previous year: Space-2-3
2) Time setting keys
Move to 1 hour after: Space-4
Move to 1 hour before: Space-1
Move to 10 minutes after: Space-5
Move to 10 minutes before: Space-2
Move to 1 minute after: Space-6
Move to 1 minute before: Space-3
6.4 Adding a Schedule
To add a new appointment, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to
bring up the menu. Select “add schedule,” and press “enter,” or
press “enter-I (dots 2-4)” in the “search schedule” dialog box. The
“add schedule” dialog box has a set of input fields, a “confirm” button,
117
and a “cancel” button. The input fields are “appointment starting
date,” “appointment starting time,” “appointment ending date,”
“appointment ending time,” “subject,” “location,” “memo,” “alarm time,”
and “set recurrence schedule.” Among the input fields, you can move
from one field to the next by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”).” For the “subject” and “memo” fields, you can type in
text, and for the “appointment starting date”, “appointment ending
date”, “appointment starting time”, “appointment ending time” fields,
you can either type in a date/time, or select it using shortcut keys, as
explained in section 6.3. If you press “enter” on the “confirm” button,
the schedule information will be saved. If you press “enter” on
“cancel” button, the entry will not be saved.
6.4.1 Appointment Starting Date
When you start “add schedule”, the “Appointment starting date” edit
box is displayed first. By default, this field is set to the current date,
which can be changed in the “set date and time” in “utility” program.
If you want to use this date, just press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to
the next field. If you want to enter a new date, you want to type
month/day/year in this order. You can see “6.3 Setting Date and
Time” for more details about how to enter a date. After you have
entered the date, you should then press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to
the next field. If you press “enter” by accident right after filling in this
field, you will get the message, “no subject,” and then the focus
moves to the “subject” field.
6.4.2 Appointment Starting Time
“Appointment starting time” is the second field in the “add schedule”
dialog box. Here you can set the time when your appointment starts.
By default, this field shows the current time, which can be changed in
the “set date and time” in the “utility” program. If you set the time
format as “12 hour” in this option, the time will be displayed in
“am/pm” format. Otherwise, the time will be displayed in 24 hour
format. If you want to change the time, you should enter the time as
explained in “6.3 Setting Date and Time.” If you have set the time
format to “12 hour,” you will want to press “space-x (dot 1-3-4-6)” to
change between am and pm. After you have entered the time, press
the “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the next field. If you press “enter” by
118
accident right after entering this field, you will get the message, “no
subject,” and then the focus will move to the “subject” field.
6.4.3 Appointment Ending Date
The “Appointment ending date” is the third field in the “add schedule”
dialog box, and here you can set the date when the appointment
ends. By default, the same date as the date you set in the
“appointment starting date” field is displayed. If you want to use this
date, you can press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the next field. If you
want to enter a new date, you should type month/day/year in this
order. You can refer to “6.3 Setting Date and Time” for more details
about how to enter a date. After you have changed the date, you can
press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the next field. If you press “enter”
by accident right after entering the date, you will get the message, “no
subject,” and the focus will move to the “subject” field.
6.4.4 Appointment Ending Time
“Appointment ending time” is the fourth field in the “add schedule”
dialog box. Here you can set the time when the appointment ends.
By default, the same time as the time you set in the “appointment
starting time” field is displayed. If you want to change the time, type
the time as you would in the “appointment starting time.” You should
refer to “6.3 Setting Date and Time” for more details about how to
enter the time. After setting the time, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move
to the next field. If you press “enter” by accident right after entering
the time, you will get the message, “no subject,” and then the focus
moves to the “subject” field.
6.4.5 Subject
“Subject” is the fifth field where you can type in the subject of an
appointment. If you do not enter anything in this field, you will not be
able to save the record. If you press “enter” after typing in the subject,
the record will be saved, leaving the “location” and “memo” field
empty, and the “alarm time” field set to its default value (“time of
appointment”). If you want to move to the next field, press “tab
(“space-4-5”),” instead of “enter.”
119
6.4.6 Location
In the “Location” field, you can type appointed location. If you press
“enter” after typing in the location, the record will be saved, leaving
the “memo” field empty, and the “alarm time” field set to its default
value (“time of appointment”). If you want to move to the next field,
press “tab (“space-4-5”),” instead of “enter.”
6.4.7 Memo
In the “Memo” field, you can enter detailed information about an
appointment. Here, you can type in more than one line. You can use
most of the editing commands that are used in the “word processor.”
Press “enter” to enter information on a new line. You can leave this
field blank if you want to. After you finish writing the information, you
can press “tab (“space-4-5”)” to move to the next field.
6.4.8 Alarm Time
The “alarm time” function allows you to set the time when you will be
notified about an appointment. The alarm is set relative to the
appointment time. For example, you may want the alarm to sound 30
minutes before your appointment, so that you are not late. The
default value for this field is set to “time of appointment.” This means
that the alarm will sound at the same time as you have set for your
appointment. You can set the time in the same way as when you set
the appointment time. The time can be set anywhere from one
minute to twenty-three hours and fifty-nine minutes. Refer to section
6.3 for more information about how to set the time. If you attempt to
set the time to 0, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display the message,
“time of appointment.” If you do not want to set an alarm, press
“space-1” when “alarm time” is set to “time of appointment.” Then,
“alarm off” will be displayed, and the alarm for this appointment will
be turned off. After setting the “alarm time,” save this appointment by
pressing “enter,” or by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” to move to the
“confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you have set the “alarm time,” it
will go off at the specified time even if the Braille Sense Plus B32 is
turned off. If you want to stop the alarm, press “backspace-enter.”
120
6.4.9 Setting a recurring Schedule
You can set this option when the schedule you are creating currently
recurs periodically. If you clear this check box, the schedule will be
set to occurring once. You can check or uncheck this option by
pressing “space.” That is, if you press “space” when this box is
checked, it will be unchecked, and if you press “space” when this box
is unchecked, it will be checked. If you have unchecked this, just
press “enter”, or press “tab (space-4-5)” repeatedly to move to the
“confirm” button and press “enter”, to save the schedule. If you want
to set recurrence schedule, you should press “space” and then press
“tab (space-4-5)” or “enter” to move to the combo box where you can
set the recurrence pattern. In this combo box, you can select one of
“daily”, “weekly”, “monthly” and “yearly.” We will discuss these
options in more detail in the next section.
6.4.9.1 Daily
If you select “daily,” and press “tab (space-4-5),” the focus will move
to “recurring interval of day” edit box. Here, you can enter the number
of days after which the appointment recurs. You can type a number
between 1 and 999. If you enter 1, the appointment recurs every day,
and if you enter 2, it recurs every other day. One thing you have to be
careful when you use this is that the difference between the starting
and ending date should be shorter than the recurring interval value.
For example, suppose that the appointment starts at 09:00, Feb. 1,
2006, and ends at 12:00, Feb. 2, 2006. If you set the recurring
interval to 1, you will get an error message “The appointment duration
should be shorter than the recurring interval.” This is because it is
logically impossible that the appointment duration is 27 hours, and
the appointment recurs 24 hours. This rule is applied in the same way
when you set weekly, monthly, or yearly recurring appoints. If you
press “tab (space-4-5)” after setting the recurring interval, the
“recurrence ending date” check box appears. By default, it’s
unchecked, which indicates that there is no apparent ending date
when the recurrence will stop. If you check this box by pressing
“space,” and press “tab (space-4-5),” the focus will move to the edit
combo box that asks for the ending date. Enter the date when the
recurrence will stop. ‘You can directly type the date, or you can set
121
the date as described in “6.3 Setting date/time”. Once you set the
date, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button.
6.4.9.2 Weekly
After you set the “recurrence” to weekly, press “tab (space-4-5)” to
move to the “recurring interval” edit box. Here you can set after how
many weeks the appointment will recur. You can type a number
between 1 and 999. If you set it to 1, the appointment will recur every
week, and if you set it to 2, it will recur every other week. The
restriction on the recurring interval as in “daily” is applied to “weekly.”
If the recurring interval is one week, the appointment duration should
be shorter than one week. Otherwise, you will get an error message,
“The appointment duration should be shorter than the recurring
interval.” If you press “tab (space-4-5)” after entering the recurring
interval, the focus will move to a list box where you can select the day
of the week on which the appointment recurs. You can move between
the items in the list box, by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” To select
or unselect the current item, press “space”. You can make more than
one selection. If you don’t select any day, it will be set to the today’s
day of the week. Press “tab (space-4-5)” after selecting the days of
the week when the appointments recurs. Then the focus will move to
“set recurrence end date” check box. You can set the recurrence end
date as described in 6.4.9.1.
6.4.9.3 Monthly
If you press “tab (space-4-5)” after setting the “recurrence to
monthly,” the focus will move to the “recurring type” combo box. Here,
you can set the recurring type as “date” or “day of the week.” To
move between the two options, you can use “space-1” or “space-4.”
“date” is used when you want to set an appointment recurring on the
same day of a month, for example, on the 17th of every month, or
every other month. On the other hand, “day of the week” is used
when you want to set an appointment recurring on the same week
and the day of the week of a month, for example, on Wednesday of
the second week of every month. After selecting the “recurring type,”
press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “recurring interval.” In this field,
you set after how many months the appointment will recur. You can
type a number between 1 and 999. If you press “tab (space-4-5)”
122
after setting “recurring interval,” different fields will be shown
depending on what you have selected in “recurring type.” If you set
the “recurring type” to “date,” an edit box will be shown, where you
can type the day of the month when the appointment recurs. By
default the date set in the “appointment starting date” is shown. You
can type a number between 1 and 31. If you press “tab (space-4-5)”
after setting this, the focus will move to “recurrence end date” and
you can set the date in the same way as described in 6.4.9.1. If you
have set the “recurring type” to “day of the week,” you will be asked
the “recurring week” first. You can set this to “first week,” “second
week,” “third week,” “fourth week” or “last week.” This is for setting
the week of a month when the appointment recurs. Here if you press
“tab (space-4-5),” the focus will move to a combo box where you can
select the day of the week when the appointment recurs. Since you
can select only one of the 7 days, the one shown currently is the
selected day. If you press “tab (space-4-5)” here, the focus will move
to the “recurrence end date” check box, and you can set it in the
same way as described in 6.4.9.1
6.4.9.4 Yearly
If you set the “recurrence” to “yearly,” press “tab (space-4-5)” to move
to the “recurring type” combo box. You can select either “date” or
“day of the week,” and you can move between them by pressing
“space-1” or “space-4.” If you set the “recurring type” to “date,” you
can set the month and the day of the month when the appointment
recurs. If you set it to “day of the week,” you can set the month, the
week, and the day of the week when the appointment recurs every
year. If you press “tab (space-4-5)” after setting “recurring type,” the
focus will move to the “month for recurrence” combo box. You can
select one of the 12 months by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” If
you press “tab (space-4-5)” here, the focus will move to different
fields, depending on what you have set the “recurring type” to. If you
have set the “recurring type” to “date,” the focus moves to “day for
recurrence” edit box. You can type a number between 1 and 31 here.
If you press “tab (space-4-5)” here, the focus will move to “the
recurring end date” check box, using the same way as described in
6.4.9.1. If you have set the “recurring type” to “day of the week,” you
have to set “recurring week” and “day of week for recurrence.” You
123
can set the values of these combo boxes in the same way as
described in 6.4.9.3.
6.4.10 Confirm
If you press “enter” on the “confirm” button, the appointment will be
saved, and the “add schedule” dialog box will be closed.
6.4.11 Cancel
If you press “enter” on the “cancel” button, the appointment
information you entered will be discarded, and you will be asked to
enter information about another appointment. You can also cancel
the entry by pressing “space-e (dots 1-5).”
6.5 Search Schedule
“Search schedule” is used for searching Appointments that you have
entered before. When you start “schedule manager,” the “search
schedule” dialog box will be opened. You can also open this dialog
box when you are in the “add schedule” dialog box, by pressing
“enter-s (dots 2-3-4).” Or you can open the menu by pressing “space-
m (dots 1-3-4),” and press “enter” on “search schedule.”
There are two methods to search for the schedule; “searching with
subject” and “searching with date.” With the “searching with subject,”
you can find schedule with the keywords in the subject field. With the
“searching with date,” you can find schedules with the specified date.
In order to toggle the searching mode, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
or F2 to call up the menu and move to “toggle search mode” and
press “enter.” Or you can execute it by pressing “enter-f (dots 1-2-4)”
without calling up the menu. Every time you press “enter-f (dots 1-2-
4),” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say “search mode: Date” or
“search mode: Subject,” and the searching mode will be toggled.
The latest searching mode will be saved when you will exit the
Schedule Manager. So if you execute the Schedule Manager and
search any schedule, the latest searching mode will be displayed.
124
6.5.1 Searching with date
It searches the schedule with the date. If it is executed, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will say “find date: (current date).”
If you just press “enter” here, the appointments occurring today will
be searched for. If you want to search for another date, you can type
the date in the format “mm/dd/yyyy,” or use the “move by date”
hotkeys as described in “6.3 Setting date and time.” If you press
“enter” after entering the date, the appointments occurring on the day
will be shown. If there is no appointment on that day, “There is no
schedule registered.” will be announced. Otherwise, the first
appointment on that day will be announced in the form of “date, time,
and subject.” If the appointment lasts for more than one day,
“continuous schedule” will be announced. If the appointment recurs,
“recurring schedule” will be announced. If you registered more than
one appointment for that day, you can move between the
appointments on that day by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” If you
want to move to the first appointment on a day, you can press
“space-1-3,” and if you want to move to the last appointment on the
day, press “space-4-6.” To move to the appointments on another day,
press “space-2” or “space-5.” Then, the previous/next appointment
occurring within four months will be displayed. If you want to move to
the first appointment registered in the schedule manager, press
“space-1-2-3,” and if you want to move to the last appointment
registered in the schedule manager, press “space-4-5-6.”
If you want to know more about a registered appointment, press
“enter” on the desired appointment item. Then, if you press “space-1”
or “space-4,” you can hear the appointment starting date, starting
time, ending date, ending time, subject, and memo.
6.5.2 Searching with subject
If it is executed, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say “search subject:”
Type in the keywords which you are searching. After you type in the
keywords and press “enter,” then all schedules with the keywords will
be displayed.
If you press “enter” without typing in any word in “search subject:” edit
box, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display all schedules in your
Braille Sense Plus B32.
In order to move to the next or previous schedule, press “space-4” or
“space-1,” respectively. Pressing “space-1-3” will move to the first
125
item of the schedule list, and pressing “space-4-6” will move to the
last item of the schedule list.
For the recurring appointment and multiple day appointment, the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will show the schedules of the first day only, if
you search the schedule with subject. For example, if you registered
any appointment on January 1, 2007 and made it recur the first day of
every month, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will show this schedule on
January 1, 2007 only when you search it with “searching with
subject.”
If you want to read the schedule in detail, you can press “enter” at the
schedule that you want to read in detail. After you read the schedule
in detail and return to the schedule list, press “space-e (dots 1-5).”
And if you want to search with the other keywords, press “tab (space-
4-5)” to move to “search subject” edit box.
6.6 Modify Schedule
You can modify an appointment that you have scheduled. First, move
to the appointment you want to modify in the find result list. Press
“enter-m (dots 1-3-4).” Or open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2” and press “enter” on “modify schedule,” or press the
shortcut key “m (dots 1-3-4)” in the menu. Or you can press its hot
key, “enter-m (dots 1-3-4)” in the find result list. If the appointment is
a recurring schedule, a prompt, displaying “recurrence appointment.
Open type?” will appear. This is asking whether you want to modify
the recurring schedule or the schedule for a specific day. If you select
“this occurrence,” you will make changes for the appointment of the
day, but the recurring appointments on other days will not be
changed. If you select “the series,” you will make changes for all the
recurring appointments of the schedule. If you select “cancel,” “modify
schedule” dialog box will not be opened and go back to the previous
status. You can select these values by pressing “space” or
“backspace.” Press “enter” to open the “modify schedule” dialog box.
This dialog box contains the same controls as in the “add schedule”
dialog box. The only difference is that each field has the value
entered previously. You can make changes in these fields in the
same way as described in 6.4. If you change a recurring schedule, all
126
the instances of the schedule will be changed according to the new
values. Once you finish modifying the schedule, the information
shown in the find result list will be updated accordingly.
6.7 Deleting a Schedule
If you want to delete a schedule, move to the schedule in the find
result list. Then, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the menu, and
press “enter” on “delete schedule.” Or you can press its hot key,
“space-d (dots 1-4-5)” in the find result list. If the selected schedule is
a recurring schedule, “recurring appointment. Delete type?” will be
displayed. This is asking whether you want to delete the recurring
schedule, or just the appointment for that day. If you select “this
occurrence,” only the appointment on that day will be deleted. If you
select “the series,” the recurring schedule itself will be deleted. You
cannot select and delete multiple schedules at once. You can delete
only the appointment currently focused.
6.8 Printing a Schedule
After finding an appointment using the “search schedule” command
(as explained in section 6.5), you can print an appointment that you
have found using the “print schedule” command. In the search
results list, press “space-p (dots 1-2-3-4),” or call up the menu by
pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and press “p (dots 1-2-3-4),”
or select “print schedule.” Then, press “enter.” The Braille Sense
Plus B32 will ask you to specify the beginning date of the
appointments to be printed. By default, the current date is displayed.
You can specify a date that you want to search for. Refer to section
6.3 for information on how to enter dates. Now, press “tab (“space-4-
5”)” to set the end date of the appointments that you want to be
printed. Again, you can enter the dates, as explained in section 6.3.
If you press “enter” or “tab (“space-4-5”),” you will be asked to select
the type of printer you will use. “Printer” is the default setting. Press
“space-1” or “space-4” to move between “embosser” and “printer.” If
you have selected the appropriate printer type, you can press “enter”
to start printing. Before you press “enter” here, please make sure the
Braille Sense Plus B32 is connected to the printer correctly. After the
printing is finished, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display the search
results list.
127
6.9 Saving Appointments as a File
You can save appointments stored in “schedule manager” as a
document file. In the search results list, press “enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5),”
or call up the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and
then select “save schedule as file,” and press “enter,” or press “t (dots
2-3-4-5)” in the menu. Then, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will ask you
to specify the beginning and end date of the appointments to be
saved just like it did in “print schedule.” After setting the beginning
and end dates, press “enter” or “tab (“space-4-5”),” and the “file save”
dialog box will be displayed to prompt you to enter the name and the
format of the file to be saved. This dialog box is the same as the
“save as” dialog box in the “word processor.” Please refer to section
4.1.4 for more information about the “save as” dialog box.
6.10 Backing Up and Restoring Your Appointments
6.10.1 Backup Schedule
If a cold reset occurs, or if your battery goes dead, all of the data in
the schedule manager will be lost. So, it is very important to make a
backup file every time you change your schedule. To backup your
schedule, go to “backup schedule,” open the menu by pressing
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.” Then, use the up and down arrow
keys (“space-1” or “space-4”), and find “backup schedule.” Then,
press “enter.” You can also press “u (dots 1-3-6)” while you are in the
menu to get to “backup schedule.” Or, you can press “enter-u (dots
1-3-6)” to activate this function without calling up the menu.
If you already have a backup file, you will see the message “Backup
file already exists. Backup anyway? yes.” If you have made any
changes to your schedule, press “enter” here to create a new backup
file. If you want to keep the previous backup file, press “space-4,”
locate “no,” and press “enter” on it. If you make a backup file again in
the schedule manager, you will have a new backup file with the
extension DAT, and you will have another file with the extension BAK
(which originated from the previous “schedule.dat.”)
128
6.10.2 Restore Schedule
If you want to restore your schedule after a cold reset, press “space-
m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu, and use the up and down
arrow keys to find “restore schedule.” Then, press “enter” on “restore
schedule.” Or, you can press “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” while you are in the
menu to find “restore schedule.” You can also press “enter-r (dots 1-
2-3-5)” to activate this function, without calling up the menu.
If you activate the "restore schedule" function, and you already have
an existing schedule, you will see the message "schedule file already
exists. Which do you prefer? append?" If you press “enter” here, you
will have a new schedule with the backup file appended. If you press
“space-4” once and press “enter” on “overwrite,” you will have a
schedule restored from the backup file. For example, let us assume
that you have a schedule for days 1 - 3 in your schedule and you
have a schedule for days 1 - 5 in your backup file. If you select
“append,” you will have a schedule with 8 days. In this case, three
days of the schedule could possibly be redundant. If you select
“overwrite,” you will have days 1 – 5 from your schedule back-up, and
days 1 – 3 of the original schedule will be deleted. If you don't want
to “append” or “overwrite,” press “space-4” once more, locate
“cancel,” and press “enter” on it.
6.10.3 Setting Backup Option
To backup your schedule, you can backup your schedule manually by
activating the “backup schedule” function. You can also backup the
schedule automatically by activating the “set backup option” function.
To activate the “set backup option” function, press “space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2” to open up the menu. Next press “space-4” or “space-1”
repeatedly to locate “set backup option.” Then, press “enter” on “set
backup option.” Or, while you are in the menu, you can press “e
(dots 1-5)” to jump directly to “set backup option.” You can also
activate the “set backup option” function without opening up the menu
by pressing “enter-e (dots 1-5).”
If you activate this function, you will see a dialog box. The dialog box
has three controls, “backup mode” radio button, a “confirm” button,
and a “cancel” button. You can switch between controls by pressing
129
“tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2).” To move between the
radio buttons, you can press “space-1,” “backspace,” “space-4,” or
“space.”
The “backup mode” has three radio buttons: “always backup
changes when exiting,” “manual backup,” and “prompt backup
changes when exiting.”
1) If you select the “always backup changes when exiting,” a new bac
kup file will be created automatically if you have modified your sch
edule or added other information before exiting the schedule mana
ger.
2) If you select the “manual backup,” a new backup file will not be cre
ated, even though there have been changes made to your schedul
e. If you select this option, you can only make a new backup file b
y using the "backup schedule" menu.
3) If you select “prompt backup changes when exiting,” you will see t
he message “backup changes? yes” if you have modified your sch
edule or added other information before exiting the schedule mana
ger. If you press “enter” on “yes,” a new backup file will be created,
and you will exit the schedule manager. If you press “space-4” on
ce, and press “enter” on “no,” you will exit the schedule manager,
and a new backup file will not be created.
You can change the backup mode if you press “enter” after focusing
on one of the three radio buttons. Or, press “tab (space-4-5), and
press “enter” on “confirm.” The default backup mode is set to “prompt
backup changes when exiting.”
6.11 Setting Alarm Option
You can open the “set alarm options” dialog box by pressing “enter-o
(dots 1-3-5),” or by pressing “enter” on “set alarm options” in the
menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” in the “schedule
manager.” This dialog box has a list of alarm option fields, a
“confirm” button, and a “cancel” button. Alarm option fields include
“alarm duration,” “alarm repeat interval” and “repeat.” You can move
between these fields by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” You can
130
access the “confirm” and “cancel” buttons by pressing “tab (“space-
dots 4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-dots 1-2”).”
6.11.1 Alarm Duration
With this option, you can change the duration of the alarm sound.
You can set this option to a value that is between 5 and 600 seconds.
The default value is set to 30 seconds. You should enter the number
in computer Braille or regular grade 1 Braille, without a number sign.
Press “enter” to save the changes, and exit from the dialog box. If
you want to set the “alarm repeat interval” in the next field, you should
press “space-4” to move to it.
6.11.2 Alarm Repeat Interval Time
When the alarm goes off, if you do not stop it by pressing
“backspace-enter,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will keep giving you a
notice about the appointment after a specified time interval. The
“alarm repeat interval” option allows you to change this interval. You
can set the value anywhere from 1 to 60 minutes, and the default
value is set to 5 minutes. When you want to change the value, type
in a number between 1 and 60 in computer Braille, or regular grade 1
Braille. You can type these numbers without a number sign. After
entering the number, press “enter” to save the changes, and exit from
the dialog box. Or, if you press “tab (“space-4-5”)”, the Braille Sense
Plus B32 will move to the “repeat” edit box.
6.11.3 Repetition Times
The alarm will make a sound as the amount of time that you changed
the alarm duration and it then stops. After a specified time interval,
you will hear again the alarm sound.
“Repeat” is a field, which allows you to decide how many times the
alarm will sound. You can set the value from 1 time to 10 times, and
the default value is set to 3 times. To change the value, you type in a
number between 1 and 10. After entering the number, you press “tab
(space-4-5),” and press “enter” on the “confirm” button.
131
Or, if you press “enter” on the “repeat” edit box, the changed options
will be saved, and the dialog box will be closed.
An alarm will repeat according to the number of times that you set for
this option and will then stop automatically. The Braille display on the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will also display the “date” and “subject” for
the alarm.
6.11.4 Confirm
By pressing “enter” on the “confirm” button, you will save the changed
settings, and close the “alarm option setting” dialog box.
6.11.5 Cancel
If you press “enter” on the “cancel” button, or press “space-e (dots 1-
5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6),” the previous option settings will be
restored and “set alarm option” dialog box will be closed.
6.12 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook
The “schedule manager” can be synchronized with Microsoft Outlook
on your personal computer to help you keep track of your
appointments. For a more detailed explanation of how to connect the
Braille Sense Plus B32 to your computer, and for more information on
how to use ActiveSync, refer to chapter 17. You should take the
following steps in order to synchronize the Braille Sense Plus B32
with Microsoft Outlook:
1) Download and install “ActiveSync” on to your personal computer.
2) Connect the Braille Sense Plus B32 to your personal computer,
using a USB cable.
3) If the “partnership” dialog box opens on your PC after you connect
the Braille Sense Plus B32 to your PC, select “yes,” and press the
“next” button on your PC.
4) Then, you will be asked for a device name. Type in
“BrailleSensePlus” (or whatever you would like to call the Braille
Sense Plus B32),
5) Press the “next” button. Then, the program list dialog box will be
displayed on your PC. Click on the “check box” that is located
132
next to “calendar.” Note that the other check boxes should not be
checked. Press the “next” button.
6) Then, the synchronization between Microsoft Outlook and the
Braille Sense Plus B32 is complete. Please check the contacts in
Microsoft Outlook and the Braille Sense Plus B32.
6.13 Hot Keys for the Schedule Manager
1) Add Schedule
(1) Move between fields
Move to the next field: Tab (space-4-5)
Move to the previous field: Shift-tab (space-1-2)
(2) Hot keys for the Commands
search schedule: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Alarm option: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Backup schedule: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore schedule: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Setting backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
2) Search schedule
(1) Hot keys for the commands
Add schedule: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
Alarm option: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Backup schedule: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore schedule: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Set backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Toggle search mode: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
3) Move keys in the search result list
(1) Move from a appointment to another in the schedule list
Move to the previous a in the same day: up arrow key (space-1)
Move to the next appointment in the same day: down arrow key
(space-4)
Move to the first appointment in the same day: Space-1-3
Move to the last appointment in the same day: Space-4-6
(2) Move from one appointment to another in all the appointments
registered
133
Move to the previous schedule: Space-2
Move to the next schedule: Space-5
Move to the first schedule: Space-2-3 or space-1-2-3
Move to the last schedule: Space-5-6 or space-4-5-6
(3) Hot keys for the commands
Add schedule: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
Modify schedule: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete schedule: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Alarm option: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Backup schedule: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore schedule: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Set backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Save schedule as file: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Print schedule: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
4) Cancel / Exit
(1) Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5)
It cancels the current job or setting like the “esc” key on a
personal computer.
(2) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Exit from the schedule manager. It can be used as cancel key
for any function.
134
7. E-mail
The e-mail program is used to communicate with others using the
Internet. In order to use the e-mail program, you must have your own
e-mail account, which has been provided to you by your Internet
service provider.
The e-mail account that you have should support POP3 (Post Office
Protocol 3) and SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol). You should
check with your Internet service provider to make sure that your
provider supports POP3 and SMTP.
Before you use the e-mail program, you will need to setup the Braille
Sense Plus B32 to use the Internet, which is in the “utility” menu (see
chapter 15).
When checking the “inbox” in the email program, the menus are
different from the menus that are used when you are writing an email.
You should read this chapter carefully, before you use the e-mail
program on the Braille Sense Plus B32.
7.1 Executing E-mail and Service Registration
7.1.1 Launching the E-Mail Program
To launch the e-mail program on the Braille Sense Plus B32 press
“f1” to bring up the “program” menu of the Braille Sense Plus B32,
then press “space-4” repeatedly until “e-mail” is displayed, and then
press “enter.” Or, just press “e (dots 1-5)” on the “program” menu in
order to execute the e-mail program.
When you launch the e-mail program for the first time, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will display “create service information at service
manager in tool menu.” Then, the “inbox” will be opened. The
“inbox” is the main window of the e-mail program. When you run the
e-mail program for the first time, this “inbox” is empty and the Braille
Sense Plus B32 displays “no list 0/0.”
135
If there are any e-mail messages that the Braille Sense Plus B32 has
already received, “making mail list,” “exist mail count xx” will be
announced in voice and on the LCD display; however, “xx%
processed” will be displayed on the Braille display. Once progress
has reached100%, the “inbox” will be opened and it will show the
received e-mail in the list.
7.1.2 Registering E-Mail Service
In order to receive e-mail, your e-mail service information must be
registered in the Braille Sense Plus B32. If you have not yet
registered your e-mail service information in the Braille Sense Plus
B32, please register your e-mail service information as follows:
1) Call up the e-mail menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2.”
2) Move to the “tools” menu by pressing “space-4.”
3) Press “enter” when “tools” is displayed. Then, “service manager”
will be displayed.
4) Press “enter” on “service manager,” then “service name: no list
0/0” will be displayed. You can also move to this menu by
pressing “enter-m (dots 1-3-4).”
5) Move to “register” by pressing “tab (space-4-5).”
6) Press “enter” when “register” is displayed.
7) Then, the dialog box will be opened and “service name:” will be
displayed. Type in the service name with the Braille keys. (Ex:
Braille Sense Plus B32)
8) Press “space-4” to move to “display name:” Type in your name.
This name will be shown as sender’s name to a receiver.
9) Press “space-4” to move to “logon username:.” Then, type in
your e-mail ID using computer Braille. (Ex: Sense or
sense@braillesense.com)
10) Press “space-4” to move to “password:.” Type in your password
using computer Braille. When you type in your password, the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will display the password you typed in as
“*.” (Ex: ******)
11) Press “space-4” to move to “e-mail address:.” Type in your e-
mail address using computer Braille. (Ex:
sense@braillesense.com)
136
12) Press “space-4” to move to “pop3 server:.” Type in the POP3
server address using computer Braille (Ex:
mail.braillesense.com). Check with your Internet service provider
or network administrator to find out what you should use as the
POP3 server name.
13) Press “space-4” to move to “smtp server:” and type in the SMTP
server address (Ex: smtp.braillesense.com). Check with your
Internet service provider or network administrator to find out what
you should use as the SMTP server name.
14) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to “confirm,” and then press
“enter” in order to save the changes. Or, just press “enter.”
15) Then, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will exit to “service name list”
and show the registered service name (Ex: service name: Braille
Sense Plus B32 1/1).
16) If you want to register another service, go to step 5 again, and
follow the steps explained above.
17) When you finish registering the services, press “space-z (dots 1-
3-5-6)” to exit to the “inbox.”
In order to move from a setting item (Ex: ID, password) to the
previous setting item, press “space-1.” And, in order to move to the
“confirm” button or the “cancel” button, press “tab (space-4-5)” or
“shift-tab (space-1-2).”
If you made a typo in an item such as service name, ID, or password,
you can correct the typo as follows;
1) In order to delete the letter where the cursor is located, press
“space-d (dots 1-4-5).”
2) In order to delete the letter in front of the cursor position, press
“backspace.”
3) In order to delete the current line, press “backspace-1-4.” Then,
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will ask “delete line: yes.” If you press
“enter,” the selected line will be deleted. If you do not want to
delete the current line, press “space” to change from “yes” to “no”
and press “enter.”
When you need to type using computer Braille to type in your ID,
password, and address, please use the following computer Braille:
1) Dot (.””): dots 4-6
2) At sign (“@”): Press “space-u” and release it, then press dot 4.
137
3) Under bar (“_”): dots 4-5-6
4) Dash (“-”): dots 3-6
You will find other menus like “information,” “modify,” “delete,” and
“close” in the “service manager.” These menus will be explained in
section 7.5.1.
7.2 Sending and Receiving E-Mail
7.2.1 Receiving E-mail
In order to receive e-mail, you must register your email service
information as explained in section 7.1.2. The Braille Sense Plus B32
is capable of receiving plain text email and html email messages
You can receive e-mail messages by doing the following.
1) Call up the e-mail menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2.”
2) Move to “message” by pressing “space-4.”
3) Press “enter” on the “message” menu. Then, “reply” will be
displayed.
4) Move to “receive new mail” by pressing “space-4.”
5) Press “enter” on “receive new mail.” Then, a dialog box will
appear where you can select the service list and “service name:” is
displayed. You can move to this dialog box directly by pressing
“enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5).” This dialog box consists of “service list,” a
“confirm” button, and a “cancel” button.
6) When “service name: (registered service name x/x)” is displayed,
press “space-1” or “space-4” to move to the desired service.
7) Press “enter” when the desired service is displayed, or press “tab
(space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button, and press “enter.”
8) Then the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display “There are xx
messages to receive. Now receiving…” “xx/xx mail received;”
“Completed receiving new mail. total mail count: xx; received: xx,
failed: xx” will be displayed. When the e-mail messages are
downloaded from the server, the e-mail list is displayed in the “inbox”
(Ex: subject: (subject of the email received) xx/xx).
In step 8 above, if the e-mail size is more than the Braille Sense Plus
B32 can handle, it announces “Source data exceeds buffer size.
138
Skipping current mail.” and then the Braille Sense Plus B32 will begin
downloading the next e-mail message.
If you want to cancel the download, press “tab (space-4-5)” at step 7
above to move to the “cancel” button, and press “enter,” or you can
press “space-e (dots 1-5).”
7.2.2 Reading the Received E-mail Messages
If you downloaded e-mail from your server as explained in section
7.2.1, the e-mail messages will be listed in the “inbox.” Each e-mail
in the “inbox” has the following items.
1) Subject
2) Date
3) From (Sender)
4) Message
5) Attach (this will be displayed only for an e-mail that has an
attached file)
You can move from one item to the next item or previous item by
pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2),” respectively.
7.2.2.1 Subject Control
“Subject” shows the title of the e-mail; “subject: (subject of the e-mail)
xx/yy.” After the subject of the email, you will find “xx/yy,” which
shows the number (xx) of the current e-mail out of the total number
(yy) of received e-mail messages. For example, “11/21” means that
the e-mail is the 11th e-mail out of a total of 21 e-mail messages.
If there is an attached file to the e-mail, “a subject: (subject of the e-
mail) xx/yy” will be displayed. The symbol “a (dot 1)” means that the
e-mail has an attached file. It is displayed as “a (dot 1)” on the Braille
display, and it is announced as “1 attachment,” which indicates the
number of the attached files in voice.
The Braille Sense Plus B32 also indicates which e-mail messages
have been read, and which e-mail messages have been unread. E-
mail messages that have not yet been read have the “-” sign placed
in front of the subject. For example, let’s suppose there is an email
139
with an attachment that has been unread. It would appear as “-a
subject: (subject of the e-mail) xx/yy.”
You can move from one e-mail message to the next e-mail message
when this subject is displayed. You can move by using the following
keys;
Move to the next e-mail: Space-4
Move to the previous e-mail: Space-1
Move to the first e-mail in the Inbox: Space-1-2-3 or space-1-3
Move to the last e-mail in the Inbox: Space-4-5-6 or space-4-6
7.2.2.2 Date Control
“Date” shows the date and time when the e-mail was received; “date:
(date), (time) xx/yy.” The date is displayed in the following order: day,
month, date, and year. The time is displayed in the following order:
hour, minute, and second with the 24 hour system. And, “xx/yy”
shows the current number of the email out of the total number of e-
mail messages received. You can also move from one e-mail
message to the next e-mail message when the date is displayed.
The move keys are explained in section 7.2.2.1.
The Braille Sense Plus B32 also indicates which e-mail messages
have been read, and which e-mail messages have been unread. E-
mail messages that have not yet been read will have the “-” sign
placed in front of the date. For example, let’s suppose there is an
email that has been unread. It would appear as “- date: (date), (time)
xx/yy.”
7.2.2.3 Sender Control
“From” shows the sender information; “from: (sender’s e-mail
address) xx/yy.”
The Braille Sense Plus B32 also indicates which e-mail messages
have been read, and which e-mail messages have been unread. E-
mail messages that have not yet been read will have the “-” sign
placed in front of the sender. For example, let’s suppose there is an
email that has been unread. It would appear as “- from: (sender’s e-
mail address) xx/yy”
You can save the e-mail id of the sender using the following
sequence:
140
1) Press “enter-I (dots 2-4)” when “from: (sender’s e-mail address)
xx/yy” is displayed.
2) Then, the “add address” dialog box will be opened, and “name:
(sender’s user name or e-mail address)” will be displayed.
3) Type in the sender’s name with your Braille keyboard, or press
“tab (space-4-5)” to move to “confirm,” and press “enter.”
When you type in the name, you can type it in directly without
pressing the cursor key to designate the input position on the Braille
cell, if you want to retype the name. But, if you designate a specified
position by pressing a corresponding cursor key, you can modify the
displayed name.
If the address that was typed in is saved, and the dialog box is closed,
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will show you the “from” item again.
By saving the e-mail ID using the above method, the name and its e-
mail id will be saved in the Braille Sense Plus B32. The saved e-mail
ID can be used to send your message. This will be explained in
section 7.2.3.3.
If you want to cancel saving the e-mail ID, press “tab (space-4-5)” to
move to the “cancel” button, and press “enter,” or just press “space-e
(dots 1-5).”
7.2.2.4 Message Control
“Message” shows the message body of the selected e-mail. You can
move to a message by pressing “tab (space-4-5).” Or, you can read
a message by pressing “enter” when “subject,” “date,” or “from” is
displayed. In case of pressing “enter” on “subject,” “date,” “from”
controls, you will automatically hear the whole message body, if you
want to stop this reading at this time, just press “backspace-enter.”
When you read the message, all of the control keys are the same as
in the word processor.
141
7.2.2.5 Attachment Control
You can find and download the attached file at “Attach.” It will appear
only for the e-mail that has an attached file.
“Attach” is displayed in the form of “attach: (attached file name)
xx/yy.” The “yy” is the total number of the attached files to the e-mail
and “xx” is the “xxth” attached file.
The following is the procedure to download attachments;
1) Move to the desired file name in “attach” by pressing “space-4” or
“space-1.”
2) Press “space” on the file name that you want to download. Then
“*” will be displayed in front of the file name.
3) Press “enter” to download that file. Then “Current download path
is set to /flashdisk/download. Do you want to change it? No” will be
displayed. Press “enter” in here.
By doing so, the selected file will be saved in the “download” folder in
“flashdisk.”
If you have more than one attachment that you want to download,
you can press “enter-a (dot 1).” If you want to download only the
attached file that is displayed on the Braille display, just press “enter”
without pressing “space.”
If you want to change the download path, please refer to section
7.5.2.1 (Set Download Path).
7.2.3 Sending E-Mail Messages
In order to send an e-mail message, you should register your e-mail
address as explained in section 7.1.2 (Registering e-mail service).
Writing an e-mail message and sending procedure is as follows;
1) Call up the e-mail menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2.” The “file” menu will be displayed.
2) Press “enter” on the “file” menu. Then “write new mail” will be
displayed.
3) Press “enter” on “write new mail.”
142
4) Then “To:” will be displayed on the Braille display. Pressing
“enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)” will take you directly to this stage.
5) Press “shift-tab (space-1-2)” to move to “account” combo box.
Move to account that you want by using “space-1” or “space-4.”
Press “tab (spac-4-5)” to move to “To:.”
6) Type in the e-mail address of the recipient when “To:” is displayed.
Please type in the e-mail address using computer Braille (Ex:
sense@braillesense.com).
7) Next, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to “CC:.”
8) Type in the e-mail address of the other recipient using computer
Braille. If you do not need to carbon copy a recipient, you can skip
to the next step.
9) Press “tab (space-4-)” to move to “BCC:.”
10) Type in the e-mail address of another recipient using computer
Braille. This e-mail address will not be seen by the recipient or the
carbon copy recipient. If there is no “hidden recipient,” you can
skip to next step.
11) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to “subject:.”
12) Type in the subject of the e-mail message at “subject:” You can
input the subject in ASCII, Grade 1, or Grade 2. You can change
the mode by pressing “space-g (dots 1-2-4-5).”
13) When you finish typing in the subject, press “tab (space-4-5)” to
move to “message body:”
14) You can write an e-mail message. The input method and the
editing method are the same as the input and editing method used
in the word processor. You can also write the message in ASCII,
Grade 1, or Grade 2.
15) When you finish writing the e-mail message, press “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” to call up the “e-mail” menu. Then the “file” menu will
be displayed again.
16) Press “enter.”
17) Press “space-4” to move to “send.”
18) Press “enter” when “send” is displayed. Pressing “enter-s (dots
2-3-4)” will take you directly to this stage at step 14. Then,
“Sending…” will be displayed, and the e-mail will be sent to the
recipients. When the Braille Sense Plus B32 finishes sending e-
mail, “Successfully sent new message.” will be displayed. If it fails
to send the e-mail, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display “Failed
to send message.” If this occurs, the e-mail will be saved in the
“storage box.”
143
If the Braille Sense Plus B32 completed or failed to send the e-mail, it
will return you to the “inbox.”
If you have to set the default account, the Braille Sense Plus B32
focus to it in step 5 above. Otherwise, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
be displayed the first one in alphabetical order of registered accounts.
The method which set the default account refers “7.5.1.1.”
At “To:,” “CC:,” and “BCC:,” you can input more than one e-mail
address. You can also type in e-mail addresses that have been
saved in the Braille Sense Plus B32 by searching the address list.
This method will be explained in section 7.2.3.2 (Sending e-mail to
Multiple Recipients) and section 7.2.3.3 (Searching Address List).
If you want to attach a file, execute “attach file,” which will be
explained in section 7.2.3.1 (File Attachment), between steps 14 and
15 above.
If you want to cancel writing and sending an e-mail during the
execution of the above steps, you can exit by pressing “space-e (dots
1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” before step 15. Then the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will return you to the “inbox.”
7.2.3.1 Sending a File Attachment
You can attach a file that you want to send with an e-mail while you
are writing an e-mail or inputting the recipient, hidden recipient, or
subject.
The following is the procedure to attach a file.
1) Call up the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.”
Then, the “file” menu will be displayed.
2) Press “enter” on the “file” menu. Then, “write new mail” will be
displayed.
3) Move to “attach file” by pressing “space-4.”
4) Press “enter” on “attach file.” Then, “file list” will be opened.
You can get to this step directly from step 1 by pressing “enter-f
(dots 1-2-4).” The default folder for the “file list” is the “upload”
folder, which is a sub folder of “flashdisk.” If there are no folders in
the “upload” folder of the Braille Sense Plus B32 due to any
144
reason, “no list” will be displayed. In this case, you have to make
a folder in the “file manager,” or move to the desired folder with the
move keys that are explained below.
The move keys in the file list are as follows;
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
Move to previous item: Space-1
Move to next item: Space-4
Move to the beginning of the list: Space-1-2-3
Move to the end of the list: Space-4-5-6
5) Move to the desired file, and press “enter.” If you want to attach
more than one file, move to the desired file, and press “space”
repeatedly. Then “*” will be displayed in front of the file names.
Press “enter” if you want to attach the selected files.
6) If the selected files are attached, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
announce “xx attached,” and then move to the stage before you
executed step 1 in this procedure. “xx” is the number of the
attached files.
If there are any files attached to an e-mail, the “attach” item will be
displayed after the “message” item like the following: “attach:
(attached file name) xx/yy (file size).” “yy” is the total number of
attached files, and “xx” means the “xxth” file out of “yy” files.
You can move and check the attached files by pressing “space-1” or
“space-4.” If there is an undesired file in the attached file list, you can
delete it from the list by pressing “space-d (dots 1-4-5).” If you press
“space-d (dots 1-4-5),” “delete (file name) file? Yes” will be displayed.
If you press “enter,” this file will be deleted from the attached file list.
If you press “space” to switch from “yes” to “no,” and then press
“enter,” your selection will be cancelled, and the file will remain on the
attached file list.
7.2.3.2 Sending E-Mail to Multiple Recipients
You can type in more than one recipient, carbon copy recipient, or
hidden recipient. If you type in more than one e-mail address in
those items, the same e-mail will be sent to all of them at the same
time.
145
When you input more than one recipient, you should insert a ‘;’ or ‘,’
between the e-mail addresses using the following Braille dots.
Semi-colon (;): Dots 5-6
Comma (,): Dot 6
For example, sense@braillesense.com;hims@braillesense.com.
7.2.3.3 Searching the Address List
You can type in the recipient at “To,” “CC,” and “BCC” from the
address list without typing in the e-mail address directly.
The address list has the e-mail addresses that were typed in to the
“address manager” and were typed in at the “from” control that was
explained in section 7.2.2.3 (Sender control).
The following are the steps to search for e-mail addresses:
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “e-mail” menu
at “To,” “CC,” or “BCC.” Then, “file” will be displayed.
2) Press “enter” on the “file” menu.
3) Press “space-4” to move to “lookup address.”
4) Press “enter” on “lookup address.” Then “search for address” will
be displayed. Pressing “enter-l (dots 1-2-3)” will take you to this
step directly.
5) Type in the last name of the desired recipient at “search for
address,” and then press “enter.” Or, press “tab (space-4-5)” to
move to “confirm,” and then press “enter.”
6) Then, “xx addresses are found” will be displayed, and the first item
of the found addresses is also displayed. Here, “xx” is the number
of the found addresses that have the same name in the address
list (Ex: HIMS hims@brailleSense.com 1/xx).
7) Press “space-1” or “space-4” to move to the desired address, and
press “enter” when the desired address is displayed. You can
select more than one address by pressing “space.” When you
have chosen the addresses you want, press “enter.”
8) Then, the selected addresses are inserted in “To,” “CC” or “BCC.”
In step 5 above, if you press “enter” without typing in the desired
name, all of the addresses in your address list will be displayed.
146
In step 5, if there is no matching address that you want to find, then
“No mail address matched your search string.” will be announced and
“search for address” will be displayed again.
7.2.3.4 Saving E-Mail Messages as Text, and to the Storage Box
If you want to send an e-mail message later, you can save it as text in
the storage box. This “save draft in storage box” function will save
the email as text, and place it in the storage box.
The following describes how to save an email in storage box:
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” after you write the e-mail
message. Then, the “file” menu will displayed.
2) Press “enter.”
3) Press “space-4” to move to “save draft in storage box.”
4) Press “enter.” Then, the dialog box for save will be opened, and
“file name: (subject of writing e-mail).txt” will be displayed. You
can jump to this stage by pressing “space-s (dots 2-3-4).”
5) Press “enter” on “file name: (subject of writing e-mail).txt,” or press
“tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button. Then, the
message will be saved as “(subject of writing e-mail).txt.” If you
want to name the e-mail message, type in a file name. The
detailed procedure is the same as “save as” in the word processor.
You can also change the path for saving it. Please refer to section
4.1.4 for the explanation of “save as” in the word processor in this
user manual.
6) After the Braille Sense Plus B32 saves the e-mail message, it will
return to the status it was at before step 1 above.
By following the explanation above, the e-mail message will be saved
as “(subject of writing e-mail).txt” in the “flashdisk/email/storagebox.”
If you want to find this saved message, you can retrieve and send it
by using “send mail in storage box,” which will be explained later.
If you do not input the subject in the writing e-mail, it will be displayed
as “noname” on the “file name.”
If you want to save the file in another folder, and not in
“flashdisk/email/storagebox,” you will not find the e-mail message
when you execute “send mail in storage box.”
147
Regarding how to send email that is in the storage box, please refer
to section 7.3.5 (Sending E-mail Saved in the Storage Box).
While you are typing in a “message,” if you press “space-e (dots 1-5)”
to cancel writing an e-mail, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display
“current writing mail. save? Yes.” If you press “enter,” then the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will execute from step 5 above. If you want to return
to the “inbox” without saving the email, press “space” to change “yes”
to “no,” and then press “enter.”
If you press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” instead of “space-e (dots 1-5)”
while you are writing an e-mail message, the Braille Sense Plus B32
will return to the “inbox” without asking whether it will save the
message or not.
7.2.4 Local Folder
The “local folder” function is located under the “file” menu. This
function lets you navigate between different email folders. It also lets
you cut or copy messages between email folders.
To use the “local folder” function, use the following steps:
1) Open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and
then press “enter” to open the “file” menu. Press “space-4” or
“space-1” to move to “local folder.” Then, press “enter” on “local
folder.” While you are in the “file” menu, the shortcut key is “d
(dots 1-4-5),” and the hotkey is “enter-d (dots 1-4-5).”
2) The “local folder” dialog box consists of 3 controls: “folder name”
list, a “confirm” button, and a “cancel” button. You can move
between these controls by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”).”
3) The first item of the “local folder” is “folder name: inbox 1/x.” The
“folder name” list will show the folders in the “email” folder that is
one of the folders in “flashdisk.” The “x” is the total number of the
folders in the “email” folder. In the “folder name” list, you can move
to another folder by pressing “space-4” or “space-1.”
4) Then, move to the “confirm” button by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”).”
Press “enter” to open the selected email folder. Then, the email list
will be displayed in the selected folder if there are emails in the
selected folder. If “storagebox” is selected and there is no email in
148
this folder, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say “there is no mail in
the storage box,” and return to the previous status. If you want to
cancel, you press “tab (“space-4-5”)” once more to move to the
“cancel” button. And press “enter” on cancel. Pressing “space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5)” anywhere in the dialog box
will cancel and close the “local folder” dialog box.
To move or copy e-mail messages to a different email folder, you can
select e-mail messages by pressing “space.” Press “enter-x (dots 1-
3-4-6)” to cut, or press “enter-c (dots 1-4)” to copy the email. Go to
the email folder where you want to paste the e-mail messages using
“local folder.” Then, press “enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)” to paste. For more
information on how to copy e-mail messages to another email folder
or move e-mail messages to another email folder, see sections 7.4.10
and 7.4.11.
7.3 Functions of the InBox
7.3.1 Deleting E-mail in Inbox
You can delete email that you have received from the “inbox.” You
can delete an e-mail message that you have selected, or, more than
one e-mail by selecting each of them individually.
7.3.1.1 Deleting One E-Mail Message
You can delete an e-mail message in the “inbox” by following the
steps below;
1) Press “space-1” or “space-4” to move to the “subject” of the e-mail
that you want to delete.
2) Press “space-d (dots 1-4-5).” Then “(subject of the selected e-
mail) mail(s) delete? Yes” will be displayed.
3) Press “enter” if you want to delete it.
If you want to cancel it, at step 2 above, press “space” to change
“yes” to “no,” and then press “enter.” Or, you can press “space-e
(dots 1-5)” or space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
149
7.3.1.2 Deleting Multiple E-mail Messages
If you want to delete more than one e-mail message, delete the e-
mail messages using the following steps:
1) Press “space-1” or “space-4” to move to the e-mail “subject” that
you want to delete. You can select it in “date control,” too.
2) Press “space” on the e-mail that you want to delete. Then “*” will
be displayed in front of the selected e-mail subject, and the label
(“subject:”) will disappear. So, it will then be displayed as “* (e-
mail subject) xx/yy.”
3) Move to the other e-mail that you want to delete by pressing
“space-4” or “space-1.” Then, press “space.”
4) You can select more e-mail messages that you want to delete.
Once you finish selecting all of the e-mail messages you want to
delete, press “space-d (dots 1-4-5).”
5) Then “xx mails delete? Yes” will be displayed. If you press
“enter,” the selected e-mail messages will be deleted from the
Braille Sense Plus B32.
If you want to cancel the deletion when the “xx mails delete? Yes” is
displayed, you can toggle “yes” to “no” by pressing “space,” and then
press “enter.” Or, you can cancel it by pressing “space-e (dots 1-5)”
or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” at step 2 above.
7.3.1.3 Deleting E-Mail by Making a Selection
If you want to delete multiple e-mail messages by designating a
selection, you can delete them as follows:
1) Press “enter-a (dot 1)” on the “subject” or “date” control. Then, all
of the e-mail messages in the “inbox” will be selected. Then, “*”
will be displayed in front of all of the e-mail messages.
2) Press “space-d (dots 1-4-5)”
3) “xx mails delete? Yes” will be displayed. If you press “enter” on
“yes,” all of the selected e-mail messages will be deleted.
If you want to delete the successive e-mail messages, you can delete
them using the following steps:
150
1) Press “enter-b (dots 1-2)” on the first e-mail where you want to
start the selection.
2) Press “space-4” to move to the last e-mail that you want to delete.
Then, press “space-d (dots 1-4-5).”
3) “xx mails delete? Yes” will be displayed. Press “enter” if you want
to delete them.
You can Press “enter-b (dots 1-2)” which will make the selection, just
like the “start selection” function in the word processor. In front of the
e-mail subjects selected, “*” will be attached.
If you have pressed “enter-a (dot 1)” or “enter-b (dots 1-2),” but you
want to cancel it, press “space” when “xx mails delete? Yes” is
displayed to toggle “yes” to “no,” and then press “enter.”
Or, you can cancel it by pressing “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6).”
7.3.2 Reply And Reply All to a Received E-Mail Message
When you reply to an email message that was received, you can edit
or add a message to the original message or add another recipient.
For example, you can reply to an e-mail message that you previously
received in your “inbox.” Let’s demonstrate with an example.
Suppose you received an email that had the following information:
Sender’s e-mail address: hims@brailleSense.com
Subject of the e-mail: Welcome to HIMS
You could reply to this e-mail by completing the following steps:
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu when you
are in “subject,” “date,” or “message” control
2) Press “space-4” to move to the “message” menu.
3) Press “enter.” Then, “reply” will be displayed.
4) Press “enter” on “reply.” Then, “message body” will be displayed
on the Braille display. You can find the original message body of
the received email; “–-- original message –--” followed by the
received email message. You can get to this stage by pressing
“enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5).”
5) Press “shift-tab (space-1-2)” to move to “subject,” “BCC”,” “CC,”
and “To.” At “subject,” “subject” Re: Welcome to HIMS” will be
151
displayed. And, at “To,” “To: hims@braillesense.com” will be
displayed.
6) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to “message body.” Type in the
message that you want to add or edit. Type in the “message” that
you want to add or edit. You can type in your message as in step
14 in section 7.2.3 (Sending e-mail message).
After you press “enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5),” you can write an e-mail
message with the same method that was explained in section 7.2.3
(Sending E-mail) in this user manual. You can attach a file, and add
or delete recipients as well as write an e-mail message.
If you want to add another e-mail recipient, you can input it as
described in step 5 above. Press the “cursor routing key” that is
located at the position where you want to add the recipient, and type
in the new e-mail address. Use computer Braille when typing in this
information.
You can also save the e-mail message that you are writing as a reply.
The method is the same as that explained in section 7.2.3.4. It will be
saved in the storage box.
You can reply to an email by using “reply all,” as well as “reply.”
Pressing “reply” will send a message to only the original sender.
Pressing “reply all” will send an email message back to the original
sender as well as all other recipients to the original email. However,
“reply all” will not send an email to you, even though you were a
recipient of the original email.
To activate the “reply all” function, open the menu by pressing
“space-m (dots 1-3-4) or “F2.” Then, press “space-1” or “space-4” to
move to “message.” Then, press “enter” on “message.” Use “space-
4” to move to “reply all,” and press “enter.” You can activate the
“reply all” function without calling up the menu by pressing
“backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5).” When you activate the “reply all”
function, you will see all email addresses of the original sender and
the original recipients in the “To” edit box. Then, you can use the
same steps to send a message as you would when using the “reply”
function.
152
7.3.3 Forwarding a Received E-Mail Message
“Forwarding” means that you will send an e-mail that you received to
another person. You can also add or edit the message and subject.
You can also attach a file to this e-mail.
Let’s explain how to use “forward” with an example.
Let’s suppose there is an e-mail message that you received as
follows:
Sender’s e-mail address: hims@braillesense.com
Subject of the e-mail: Welcome to HIMS
You can forward this e-mail to the others using the following method:
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu when
subject, date, or message item is displayed.
2) Press “space-4” to move to the “message” menu.
3) Press “enter.” Then, “reply” will be displayed.
4) Press “space-4” to move to “forward.”
5) Press “enter.” Then “To” will be displayed. You can also jump to
this stage by pressing “enter-f (dots 1-2-4).” Input the e-mail
address of the new recipient using computer Braille.
6) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to “CC,” “BCC,” and “subject.” At
“subject,” the subject of the e-mail will be displayed like “subject:
Fw: Welcome to HIMS.”
7) Press “tab (“space-4-5”)” to move to “message body.” You can
find the original e-mail message with the following message; “-----
forwarded message -----.”
8) Type in the message. The method is the same as explained on
section 7.2.3 (Sending e-mail message).
From step 5 of this procedure, the method to write e-mail is the same
as explained in section 7.3.2. So, you can type in additional
recipients and attach files to the email that you are forwarding.
You can also save the e-mail that you are writing in the storage box.
How to save a message in the storage box is explained in section
7.2.3.4.
153
7.3.4 Saving a Received E-Mail Message
You may need to save an e-mail as a document when you are
reading an e-mail message. You can do this by completing the
following steps:
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu. Then,
the “file” menu will be displayed.
2) Press “enter.”
3) Press “space-4” to move to “save as text.”
4) Press “enter” on “save as text.” Then, the dialog box will be
opened, and the Braille Sense Plus B32 will show “file name:
(subject of e-mail under reading).txt.” You can move to this stage
directly by pressing “space-s (dots 2-3-4).”
5) Press “enter” when “file name: (subject of e-mail under
reading).txt” is displayed, or press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the
“confirm” button, and press “enter.” You can rename the file as
explained in section 4.1.4 regarding the “save as” function in the
word processor.
6) You will move back to step 1 (as described above) automatically if
the e-mail is saved.
The text file will be saved in “flashdisk/work” with the file name
“(subject of e-mail under reading).txt.” You cannot change the file
format. You can read the saved text file in the word processor.
In order to cancel “save as text,” press “tab (space-4-5)” at step 5 one
more time to move to “cancel,” and then press “enter.” Or, just press
“space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
7.3.5 Sending E-Mail Saved in the Storage Box
There are two kinds of e-mail messages in the “storage box.”
1) The e-mail message that the user saved, as explained in section
7.2.3.4 (Saving E-mail as Text, and to storage box).
2) The e-mail that was not sent due to a network error or another
reason.
154
The e-mail saved in the “storage box” can be sent again using the
steps below:
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” in the “inbox” to call up the
“e-mail” menu.
2) Press “space-4” to move to the “message” menu.
3) Press “enter.” Then, “reply” will be displayed.
4) Press “space-4” to move to “send mail from storage box.”
5) Press “enter.” Then, the e-mail subjects will be displayed that are
saved in the “storage box.” You can jump to this stage by
pressing “enter-s (dots 2-3-4).”
6) Press “space-4” or “space-1” to move to the e-mail that you want
to send again. Then, you can send it with the same method as
explained in step 16 in section 7.2.3 (Sending E-mail Message).
The e-mail in the storage box consists of “subject,” “Account,” “To,”
“CC,” “BCC,” “subject,” “message,” and “attach” items. “Attach” will
be displayed if a file is attached to this e-mail. You can move from
one item to the next by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” and “shift-tab
(space-1-2).”
You can move from one e-mail to the next e-mail by pressing “space-
4” or “space-1.”
The e-mail message saved in the “storage box” can also be modified.
In step 5 above, press “tab (space-4-5)” when “subject” is displayed
to move to the desired item, such as “to” or “message,” etc. Then,
you can modify the email message, but the “subject” cannot be
modified.
In order to exit from “send mail in storage box,” press “space-e (dots
1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).” Then, the Braille Sense Plus B32
will return to “inbox.”
7.3.6 Printing E-Mail Messages
You may want to print an email that you received in using either an
embosser or an ink printer.
In order to print to an ink printer, do the following:
155
1) Connect the Braille Sense Plus B32 to an ink printer with the
printer cable that was provided by the manufacturer of the printer.
The printing port must be the same port that was set in the “print
port” in the “option menu.”
2) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu. Then,
the “file” menu will be displayed.
3) Press “enter.”
4) Press “space-4” to move to “print e-mail.”
5) Press “enter.” Then, the dialog box will be opened, and “printer” is
displayed. If you press “space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)” you will be taken
directly to this stage.
6) Press “enter” on “printer.” Or, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to
the “confirm” button, and then press “enter.” Then, the selected e-
mail will be printed through an ink printer.
If you want to print through a Braille printer (embosser), press “space”
at step 5 above to change “printer” to “embosser,” and then press
“enter.”
If you want to cancel printing, press “tab (space-4-5)” until the
“cancel” button is displayed, and then press “enter.” Or, you can
press “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
7.4 Edit Menu
The “edit” menu contains the following items: “select all,” “start
selection,” “copy,” “paste,” “cut,” “delete,” “move to next unread
message,” “find,” “find again,” “copy to folder,” and “move to folder.”
To access the “edit” menu, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.”
Then, use “space-4” to move to the “edit” menu, and press “enter” on
“edit.”
7.4.1 Select All
The “select all” function will allow you to create a selection that will
automatically select everything that can be selected where you are in
the email program. This function will allow you to select text, as well
as e-mail messages. To activate this function, press “space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2.” Then, you can use “space-4” to go to the “edit” menu,
156
and press “enter.” Or, you can press “enter-a (dot 1)” to activate this
function without calling up the menu.
7.4.2 Start Selection
The “start selection” function allows you to select a certain portion of
text that you would like to edit. When you use the “start selection”
function, the cursor will appear as blinking “dots 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8.”
The “start selection” function allows you to make changes to only the
text that is located within the selection, and the changes will not affect
text outside of the selection. The “start selection” function is
especially useful for copying, cutting, and pasting. You can also use
the “start selection” function to create a selection of e-mail messages.
You can make a selection in a document if you place the cursor on
the location where you want to start the selection of text. If you want
to use this function, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the
“edit” menu, and then press “enter” on “start selection,” or you can
press “b (“dots1-2”)” in the “edit” menu to get to the function. While
editing a document, pressing “enter-b (dots 1-2)” will activate this
function. The end point of the selection is where you place the cursor
after setting the starting point. For example, if you have typed the
word, “mother” in a document, and you want to select the word
mother, you should place the cursor before the letter “m,” and then
place the cursor directly after the letter “r.” Then, you will have
selected the entire word.
7.4.3 Copy
The “copy” function is only available when you have an email open.
After making a selection in an email, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2” to open the menu, and move to “edit” by pressing “space-4.”
Press “enter” to open the “edit” menu. Press “space-4” to move to
“copy” and then press “enter,” or press “c (dots 1-4)” in the “edit”
menu. While editing a document, pressing “enter-c (dots 1-4)” will
activate this function.
If you copy the selection, it will be copied to the clipboard. The
clipboard is the virtual space that is used for storing copied data
temporarily. However, if you decide to copy another selection, the
data in the clipboard that you copied before will be erased, and the
157
selection that you have just copied will replace the selection that was
on the clipboard.
7.4.4 Paste
The “paste” function is only available when you have an email open.
To paste data on the clipboard, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,”
and then press “enter” on “edit” to enter into the “edit” menu. Move to
“paste” by pressing “space-4” repeatedly and then press “enter” on
“paste,” or press “v (dots 1-2-3-6)” in the “edit” menu (which is the
short cut) to paste the selection. While editing an email, press “enter-
v (dots 1-2-3-6)” to activate this function.
7.4.5 Cut
The “cut” function is only available when you have an email open. To
cut a selection, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and press
“enter” on “edit” to enter into the “edit” menu. Move to “cut” by
pressing “space-4” repeatedly, and then press “enter” on “cut,” or
press “x (dots 1-3-4-6)” in the “edit” menu (which is the short cut) to
cut your selection. While editing a document, pressing “enter-x (dots
1-3-4-6)” will activate the “cut” function.
The difference between “cut” and “copy” is that if you execute the
“cut” function, the data of the selection will not be moved to the
clipboard and the selection in the document will be erased. However,
the “copy” function will copy the selection to the clipboard, and the
text in the selection will not be erased from the document.
7.4.6 Delete
To delete a selection or email, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,”
and then press “enter” on “edit” to enter into the “edit” menu. Move to
“delete” by pressing “space-4” repeatedly, and then press “enter” on
“delete,” or press “d (dots 1-4-5)” (as a short cut) in the “edit” menu to
delete the selection. When you are editing an email, you can press
“space-d (dots 1-4-5)” to activate this function.
158
7.4.7 Move to Next Unread Message
The “move to next unread message” option allows you to move to the
next message that is unread. If you use this function on the last
unread message in a list, you will be sent to the first unread message
in the list. To activate this function while you are in the “subject,”
“date,” or “from” control, open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2.” Then, move to the “edit” menu by pressing “space-4”
or “space-1.” Then, press “enter” on “edit.” Or, you can press “u
(dots 1-3-6)” while you are in the “edit” menu. To use this function
without calling up the menu, press “enter-u (dots 1-3-6).”
7.4.8 Find
The “find” command is used to find text in the current mailbox. Once
you enter text to find, the “find” function will look for text that matches
in “subject,” “date,” and/or “from.” Find only works in “subject,” “date,”
or “from” control.
The “find” dialog box consists of a “find:” edit box for text to search, a
“search” radio button, a “direction” radio button, a “confirm” button,
and a “cancel” button. In the “find” dialog box, you can move
between the five controls by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”).” The shortcut key is “f (dots 1-2-4).” You can access
this function without calling up the menu by pressing “space-f (dots 1-
2-4).”
To activate the “find” function, use the following steps:
1) Open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and
move to the “edit” menu by pressing “space-4.” Then open the “e
dit” menu by pressing “enter” on “edit.”
2) Press “space-4” or “space-1” to navigate to “find,” and then press
“enter,” or press the shortcut key, “f (dots 1-2-4).” Than find dial
og box appear. When the find dialog box appears, the focus is o
n the “find:” edit box where the user can type the text that they w
ant to find.
3) After typing in the text, press “tab (“space-4-5”)” to move to the n
ext control, “search” radio button. Here you can select between
“all,” “subject,” “date,” or “from.” The “all” control means
“subject,” “date,” and “from” controls together. You can select an
159
item by pressing “space-4” or “space-1.” By selecting a specific
control, you can search the control for the text that you want to fi
nd.
4) Pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” moves to the “direction” radio button,
which has two choices, “forward” or “backward.” Pressing “spac
e-4” or “space-1” lets you select the searching direction as
“forward” or “backward.”
5) Press “tab (“space-4-5”)” to move you to the “confirm” button. Th
en, press “enter” to execute the function. If you want to cancel, p
ress “tab (“space-4-5”)” to move to the “cancel” button. Then, pre
ss “enter.” Or, you can press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-
e (dots 1-5)” anywhere in this dialog box to cancel.
7.4.9 Find Again
The “find again” command finds the next text according to what you
found using “find” dialog box, and it will go to the previous text if you
set the direction to “backward” when you used the “find” function
before. The “find again” function only works in the “subject,” “date,”
or “from” control.
To activate the “find again” function, use the following steps:
1) Open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4) or “F2.”
2) Move to the “edit” menu by pressing “space-4,” and press “enter”
on “edit.” Then, navigate to “find again” by pressing “space-4” or
“space-1.” Then, press “enter” on “find again.” Under the “edit”
menu, the shortcut key is “g (dots 1-2-4-5).” To activate this
function without calling up the menu, press “backspace-f (dots 1-2-
4).”
7.4.10 Copy to Folder
The “copy to folder” command copies e-mail messages from one
email folder to another email folder. It does not allow you to copy e-
mail messages to a folder that you would find in the “file manager.”
For example, let’s suppose you have the email folder, “inbox,” and a
folder you created called “important.” The “copy to folder” function
would allow you to copy an email from the “inbox” to the “important”
email folder. Refer to section 7.2.4 for an explanation on how to
navigate between email folders.
160
The dialog box consists of 6 controls: “folder list,” “create folder”
button, “delete folder” button, “rename folder” button, a “confirm”
button, and a “cancel” button. You can move between the controls by
pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”).” And you can
move between items in the “folder list” by pressing “space-1” or
“space-4.” If you want to cancel while you are in these dialog boxes,
press “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
Use the following steps to copy an email to a folder:
1) Select the mail you want to copy by pressing “space,” or create a
selection of e-mail messages by pressing “enter-b (dots 1-2).”
2) Go to the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and p
ress “space-4” or “space-1” to move to the “edit” menu. Then, pr
ess “enter” to get in to the “edit” menu. Move to “copy to folder,”
and then press “enter,” which will open a dialog box. The shortcu
t key for “copy to folder” is “p (dots 1-2-3-4)” while you are in the
“edit” menu. To activate the “copy to folder” function without calli
ng up the menu, press “backspace-c (dots 1-4).”
3) Select an email folder to copy e-mail messages to in the “folder” l
ist. Then, press “enter,” or move to the “confirm” button, and pre
ss “enter.” This will copy e-mail messages to the selected email f
older in the “folder list.” However, the focus returns to the email f
older where you copied the e-mail messages from.
In the dialog box, pressing “enter” on the “create folder” button opens
a new dialog box. This dialog box consists of 3 controls: “folder
name,” a “confirm” button, and a “cancel” button. Here you can type
in a name for the new email folder in the “folder name” control. Then,
press “enter” to create a new email folder, or move to the “confirm”
button by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”),” and press “enter” to create a
new email folder.
Pressing “enter” on the “delete folder” button deletes the selected
email folder in the “folder list” control. Before the email folder is
deleted, the Braille Sense Plus B32 asks for confirmation. You can
toggle between “yes” and “no” by pressing “space.” Then, press
“enter” to delete the email folder. In the “folder list” in the “copy to
folder” dialog box, the hot key for “delete folder” is “space-d (dots 1-4-
5).
161
Like the “create folder” button, pressing the “rename folder” button
opens a dialog box which has the same controls as the “create folder”
dialog box. However, the “folder name” control shows the name of
the folder that was selected from the “folder list.” Here you can type
in the name that you want to rename the folder with. After editing the
folder name control, press “enter,” or move to the “confirm” button,
and press “enter.”
The “inbox” and “storagebox” are protected from deletion and rename,
so attempting to delete them will not work. If you attempt to delete or
rename the “inbox” or the “storagebox,” you will hear the warning
sound to notify you of the error.
7.4.11 Move to Folder
The “move to folder” function moves e-mail messages from one email
folder to another email folder. It does not allow you to move e-mail
messages to a folder that you would find in the “file manager.” For
example, let’s suppose you have the email folder, “inbox,” and a
folder you created called “important.” The “move to folder” function
would allow you to move an email from the “inbox” to the “important”
email folder. Refer to section 7.2.4 for an explanation on how to
navigate between email folders.
The dialog box consists of 6 controls: “folder list,” “create folder”
button, “delete folder” button, “rename folder” button, a “confirm”
button, and a “cancel” button. You can move between the controls by
pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”).” And you can
move between items in the “folder list” by pressing “space-1” or
“space-4.” If you want to cancel while you are in these dialog boxes,
press “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
Use the following steps to move an email to a folder:
1) Select the mail you want to copy by pressing “space,” or create a
selection of e-mail messages by pressing “enter-b (dots 1-2).”
2) Go to the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and p
ress “space-4” or “space-1” to move to the “edit” menu. Then, pr
ess “enter” to get in to the “edit” menu. Move to “move to folder,”
and then press “enter,” which will open a dialog box. The shortc
ut key for “move to folder” is “m (dots 1-3-4)” while you are in the
162
“edit” menu. To activate the “move to folder” function without call
ing up the menu, press “backspace-x (dots 1-4).”
3) Select an email folder to move e-mail messages to in the “folder”
list. Then, press “enter,” or move to the “confirm” button, and pre
ss “enter.” This will copy e-mail messages to the selected email f
older in the “folder list.” However, the focus returns to the email f
older where you copied the e-mail messages from.
In the dialog box, pressing “enter” on the “create folder” button opens
a new dialog box. This dialog box consists of 3 controls: “folder
name,” a “confirm” button, and a “cancel” button. You can type in a
name for the new email folder in the “folder name” control. Then,
press “enter” to create a new email folder, or move to the “confirm”
button by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”),” and press “enter” to create a
new email folder.
Pressing “enter” on the “delete folder” button deletes the selected
email folder in the “folder list” control. Before the email folder is
deleted, the Braille Sense Plus B32 asks for confirmation. You can
toggle between “yes” and “no” by pressing “space.” Then, press
“enter” to delete the email folder. In the “folder list” in the “move to
folder” dialog box, the hot key for “delete folder” is “space-d (dots 1-4-
5).”
Like the “create folder” button, pressing the “rename folder” button
opens a dialog box which has the same controls as the “create folder”
dialog box. However, the “folder name” control shows the name of
the folder that was selected from the “folder list.” Here you should
type in the name that you want to rename the folder with. After
editing the folder name control, press “enter,” or move to the “confirm”
button, and press “enter.”
The “inbox” and “storagebox” are protected from deletion and rename,
so attempting to delete them will not work. If you attempt to delete or
rename the “inbox” or the “storagebox,” you will hear the warning
sound to notify you of the error.
163
7.4.12 Check Spelling
The “check spelling” function is used to check spelling while you are
writing the e-mail message.
In order to bring up check spelling function, do the following;
1) Call up the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.”
2) Move to the “edit” menu by pressing “space-4.”
3) Press “enter” on the “edit” menu.
4) Press “space-4” until “check spelling” is heard. Or, press “k (dots
1-3)” in order to move to “check spelling” directly.
5) Press “enter” on the “check spelling.” Or, you can call up the
“check spelling” menu by pressing “enter-k (dots 1-3)” while you
are editing a document.
If “check spelling” is executed, a dialog box with the following items
will be displayed:
“Range” combo box
“Custom dictionary (c)” dialog
“Option (o)” dialog
“Begin (b)” button
“Cancel” button
You can move from one item to the next by pressing “tab (space-4-5)”
or “shift-tab (space-1-2).”
The following is a detailed explanation for each item:
The “range” combo box is used to designate the range that is to be
spell checked.
1) Whole document: check throughout the entire current document.
2) Chapter: check the current chapter where the cursor is located.
3) Sentence: check the current sentence where the cursor is located.
4) From cursor to bottom: check from the cursor position to the end
of the document.
5) Current word: check just the word where the cursor is located.
You can move from one item to the next by pressing “space-1” or
“space-4.”
164
When you press “enter” on the “custom dictionary” dialog, the
following items will be displayed:
1) List: it shows the words that are registered in the custom dictionary.
(Example: Braille 1/20). If there are no words registered, “no list”
will be displayed.
2) Add word (a): if “enter” is pressed on this button, “add word:” will
be displayed. If you want to add a word, press “enter” after you
enter the new word. Then, the new word is added and the Braille
Sense Plus B32 exits to the “add word” button.
3) Modify word (m): select the word to be modified on the “list” and
then press “enter.” The “modify word:” message is displayed.
Input the correct word that will replace the selected word and then
press “enter” in order to modify the selected word. The “modify
word” button will be displayed again after the Braille Sense Plus
B32 modifies the selected word.
4) Delete word (d): select the word to be deleted on your “list” and
press “enter” in order to delete the selected word.
5) Cancel: this command closes the dialog box.
You can move from one item to the next item by pressing “tab
(space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2).”
When you press “enter” on the “option” dialog, the following items will
be displayed:
1) Always suggest recommended word: if this option is set to “on,”
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will suggest a word if the word that is
encountered is not in the dictionary. The default is set to “on.” If
the option is set to “off,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will not
recommend a word. In order to toggle between “on” and “off,”
press “space.”
2) Use main dictionary only: if this option is set “on,” the spell
checker will not look up any words in the “custom dictionary.” It
will only use the main dictionary. The default value is set to “off,”
and you can toggle between “on” and “off” by pressing “space.”
3) Skip an upper-case word: if this option is set to “on,” words with
only upper-case letters will not be checked. The default is set to
“on,” and you can change it by pressing “space.”
165
4) Skip a word which includes an address: if this option is set to “on,”
the words that contain an address will not be checked. The
default is set to “on,” and you can change it by pressing “space.”
5) Skip a word which includes numbers: if this option is set to “on,”
the words that include the numbers will not be checked. The
default value is set to “off,” and you can change it by pressing
“space.”
6) Confirm: if you press “enter” on “confirm,” the changes that you
made above will be saved, and the Braille Sense Plus B32 will exit
from the “option” dialog.
7) Cancel: if you press “enter” on “cancel,” the changes that you
have made above will be canceled and the Braille Sense Plus B32
exit from “option” dialog.
In order to move between the items 1) through 6), press “space-1” or
“space-4.” But, in order to move to “confirm” or “cancel,” press “tab
(“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”).”
If you press “enter” on the “begin” button after you set all of the
settings, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will start to check spelling. If you
press “enter” on the “cancel” button, the “spell check” will be canceled.
Once “spell check” is executed, the following dialog box will be
displayed:
1) Window to show the text: it shows the sentence with the word to
be checked currently. The cursor will be located at the word that is
to be checked currently.
2) Change word edit box: it shows the word to be checked currently.
You can input the correct word in edit box directly.
3) Recommendation word list: if the word to be checked is not in the
dictionary, the Braille Sense will recommend words. You can
move from one recommended word to the next by pressing
“space-1” or “space-4.”
4) Skip once (s): if you press “enter” on this button when a word is
encountered that is not in the dictionary, the word will not be
modified. You can also press the “Down arrow key” in order to
skip the word.
5) Skip all (i): if you press “enter” on this button, the word that is the
same word as the currently focused word will not be modified and
skipped throughout the spell check range.
166
6) Add to custom dictionary (a): if you press “enter” on this button,
the word that is currently focused is added to your “custom
dictionary.”
7) Modify once (c): focus on the modified word and select the
desired word on the “recommendation word list,” and then press
“enter.” Then, the currently focused word that is on your document
will be replaced by the recommended word.
8) Modify all (m): focus on the modified word and select the desired
word on the “recommendation word list,” and then press “enter.”
The same words with the same spelling will be replaced by the
new word throughout the document.
9) Cancel: if you press “enter” on the “cancel” button, the “spell
check” will be ended.
You can move from one item to the next by pressing “tab (space-4-5)”
or “shift-tab (space-1-2).”
When the spell check has completed, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
say “search: 00 mismatch: 00 replace: 00.”
7.5 Settings in the Tool Menu
You can change the download path or set the e-mail service using
the “tools” menu.
The “tools” menu has the following four sub menus:
1) Service manager
2) Set path
3) Set options
4) Set spam
Each sub menu will be explained in detail in this section.
7.5.1 Service Manager
“Service manager” is used to register, delete, or modify an e-mail
service.
The following are the steps required to execute this sub menu.
1) Press “space-m (dot 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “e-mail” menu.
2) Press “space-4” to move to the “tools” menu.
3) Press “enter.” Then, the “service manager” will be displayed.
167
4) Press “enter.” Then, “service name: (registered service name)
1/yy” will be displayed. You can move to this stage directly by
pressing “enter-m (dots 1-3-4).” Then, the Braille Sense Plus B32
will display the first item of the “service manager” that is in “service
list.”
The “service manager” contains the following 6 items.
1) Service list
2) Information
3) Register
4) Modify
5) Delete
6) Close
You can move among these items by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or
“shift-tab (space-1-2).” You can execute each item by pressing
“enter” on the desired item that is displayed.
If you want to exit from the “service manager,” move to the “close”
button, and then press “enter.” Or, press “space-e (dots 1-5)” or
“space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
The following is a detailed explanation of each item. “Register” was
already explained in section 7.1.2. Please refer to that section for
information about “register.”
7.5.1.1 Signature and Advanced
If you activate the “service manager,” you will see “service name:
your registered service name 1/xx” in the list. While registering your
account, you can use “signature” to add a signature to all e-mail
messages that you write, and “advanced” setting to changed
advanced options.
1) Just as in Section 7.1.2, “registering e-mail service,” when you are
registering the “smtp server” in step 13. Then, you can press “tab
(“space-4-5”)” to go to the “advanced” button.
2) Press “enter” on the button.
3) You will hear “use secure POP3 (POP-SSL).” This check box is u
nselect by default. If the pop3 server uses the “SSL,” select the ch
168
eck box by pressing “space.”
4) Press “space-4” to go to “pop3 port number: 110” by default. Here
you can type in another pop3 port number in the computer edit bo
x.
5) Press “space-4” to go to “use secure SMTP (SMTP-SSL).” This ch
eck box is unselect by default. If the smtp server uses the “SSL,” s
elect the check box by pressing “space.”
6) Press “space-4” to go to “smtp port number? 25.” This is also a co
mputer edit box. Here you can type in another smtp port number.
7) Press “space-4” to go to “smtp username.” Here, you can add ano
ther smtp username if your Internet service provider requires you t
o use a different smtp username. You should use ASCII to type th
is in.
8) Press “space-4” to go to “smtp password.” You can type in your p
assword that corresponds to the above ID. It should be typed in u
sing ASCII.
9) Press “space-4” to go to “use as default SMTP” check box. If you
want to use the above new username and password that were set
in steps 7 and 8, select the check box by pressing “space.”
10) Press “tab (“space-4-5”)” to go to “use signature: no.” If you wa
nt to use a signature, press “space” choose “yes,” or if you do not
want a signature, leave it at “no.”
11) Press “tab (“space-4-5”)” to go to the “signature” button. Press
“enter,” and you will see the “signature” multi-edit box. You can ty
pe your signature in here that you want to use. Press “tab (“spac
e-4-5”),” and press “enter” on “confirm.” This will save the signatur
e, and you will be returned to the “signature” button. You can canc
el by pressing “enter” on "cancel" by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” af
ter typing-in a signature.
12) Press “tab (“space-4-5”), and press “enter” on "confirm."
7.5.1.2 Checking Registered Service List
The first item of the “service manager” is the “service list.” It is
displayed as “service name: (registered service name) 1/yy.”
The following is the method to check the registered service
information:
1) Press “space-4” or “space-1” to move to the desired service in the
service list.
169
2) If the desired service is displayed, press “enter” or “tab (space-4-
5)” to move to the “information” button, and then press “enter.”
3) Then, the information dialog box will be opened, and “service
name: (Registered service name)” will be displayed (Ex: service
name: Braille Sense Plus B32).
4) Press “space-4” or “tab (“space-4-5”)” and make sure the
information is correct for each item. Pressing “enter” on the
“close” button will return you to the service list.
Make sure the information is correct for the selected service.
The move keys are listed below to move among the items in the
dialog box:
Move to the previous item: Space-1
Move to the next item: Space-4
Move to the first item: Space-1-3 or space-1-2-3
Move to the last item: Space-4-6 or space-4-5-6
Move to the previous control: Space-1-2
Move to the next control: Space-4-5
If the information displayed exceeds 32 Braille cells, the remaining
parts can be checked by pressing the “down scroll button.”
7.5.1.3 Modify
If the “service manager” is executed, “service name: (Registered
service name) 1/yy” will be displayed in the “service list.” The user
can modify the desired information by using the following steps:
1) Press “space-4” or “space-1” to move to the desired service in the
service list.
2) When the desired service is displayed, press “tab (space-4-5)” to
move to the “modify” button, and then press “enter.” Or, just press
“m (dots 1-3-4).”
3) Then, the same message will appear that was explained in step 7
in section 7.1.2 (Registering E-mail Service). But, in this case, it is
a “modification,” so the Braille Sense Plus B32 will show you the
current information. For example, “service name: Braille Sense
Plus B32.”
4) Please follow step 7 through step 13 in section 7.1.2.
170
5) When the modification is complete, it will return to the “service
list.”
You can move among the items (service name, logon username,
password…) by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” You can move to
the “confirm” button or the “cancel” button by pressing “tab (space-4-
5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2).”
On all of the items, the values that were typed in already will be
displayed. If you type in new information, the new information will
replace the old information. If you want to modify part of an item,
press the “cursor routing key” at the desired position and type in the
new information.
If you made a typo in an item (service name, logon username,
password…), you can modify it using the following process:
1) You can delete the current letter by pressing “space-d (dots 1-4-
5).”
2) Press “backspace” in order to delete the previous letter.
3) In order to delete the current line, press “backspace-1-4.” Then,
“delete line: yes” will be displayed. Press “enter” in order to delete
the line. Otherwise, press “space” to change from “yes” to “no,”
and then press “enter.”
7.5.1.4 Deleting the Registered Service
If the “service manager” is launched, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
show the “service list” in the form of “service name: (Registered
service name) 1/yy.”
You can delete the service that you want to delete using the following
process:
1) Use “space-4” or “space-1” to move to the desired service in the
“service list.”
2) When the desired service is displayed, press “space-d (dots 1-4-
5)” or “d (dots 1-4-5).” Or, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the
“delete” button, and then press “enter.”
3) Then, “Are you sure you want to delete the (Registered service
name) service? Yes” will be displayed.
6) Press “enter” in order to delete it.
171
7) The Braille Sense Plus B32 will delete it, show “successfully
deleted,” and return to the “service list.”
If you want to cancel the deletion, press “space” when “Are you sure
you want to delete the (Registered service name) service? Yes” is
displayed in order to change “yes” to “no,” and then press “enter.” Or,
just press “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
7.5.2 Set Path
“Set path” sets the default download path where file attachments and
email are stored. You can set the download path using the following
method:
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “e-mail” menu
in the “Inbox.”
2) Press “space-4” to move to the “tools” menu.
3) Press “enter.” Then, “service manager” will be opened.
4) Press “space-4” to move to “set path.”
5) Press “enter” on “set path.” Then “save attachments path:
/flashdisk/download” will be displayed. You can move to this stage
by pressing “enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4).”
“Set path” contains the following three items:
1) Save attachments path
2) Send attachments path
3) Disk to save E-mail in
You can move among these items by pressing “space-4” and “space-
1.” Each item consists of “path,” “modify,” and “close.” At “path,” the
default path will be displayed. You can move among this information
by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2).”
“Set path” will be closed if you press “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6).” Or, you can close it by pressing enter on the “close”
button.
172
7.5.2.1 Set the Save Attachments Path
The default path for downloaded attached files is
“/flashdisk/download.”
You can set the download path using the following method:
1) Execute steps 1 through 5, as explained in section 7.5.2 (Set
path).
2) Press “enter” on “save attachments path: /flashdisk/download,” or
press “m (dots 1-3-4).” Or, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the
“modify” button, and then press “enter.”
3) Then, “no list” will be displayed when the “/flashdisk/download”
folder is empty. But, if the folder has a lower level folder, “(Folder
name) 1/yy” will be displayed. When “save attachment path” is
executed, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will only show the folder. So,
if there is no folder in the “download” folder, it will show “no list.”
4) Move to the desired folder by pressing move keys below:
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
Move to the previous item: Space-1
Move to the next item: Space-4
5) When you encounter the desired folder, press “space” to select it,
and then press “enter.” If a folder is selected, “*” will be displayed
in front of the selected folder.
If you press “enter” to set the path, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
show the changed path. If you changed the path to the “work” folder
that is one of the lower level folders located in “flashdisk,” “save
attachments path: /flashdisk/work” would be displayed.
When you download an attached file, if you press “enter” while
“current download path is set to /flashdisk/download. Do you want to
change it? yes” is displayed, this creates the same situation as step 3
above. Please follow the above remaining steps. In this case, if you
select a folder, and press “enter,” the attached file will be downloaded
into the selected folder and return to the “inbox.”
173
7.5.2.2 Set the Send Attachments Path
“Send attachments path” is the path where the files to be attached
are saved. The default path is “/flashdisk/upload.” You can change
this path to a different path using the following method:
1) Execute steps 1 – 5, as explained in section 7.5.2.
2) Press “space-4” to move to “send attachments path:
/flashdisk/upload.”
3) Press “enter” or “m (dots 1-3-4)” on “send attachments path:
/flashdisk/upload.” Or, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the
“modify” button and then press “enter.”
4) Then, “no list” will be displayed when the “/flashdisk/upload” folder
is empty. But, if the folder has a lower level folder, “(Folder name)
1/yy” will be displayed. When “send attachments path” is executed,
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will only show the folder. So, if there
are no folders in the “upload” folder, it will show “no list.”
5) Move to the desired folder by pressing the following keys:
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
Move to previous item: Space-1
Move to next item: Space-4
6) Press “space” to select the desired folder, and press “enter.” “*”
will be displayed in front of the selected folder.
If you finish setting the path by pressing “enter,” the Braille Sense
Plus B32 will show the changed path. If you changed the path from
the “upload” folder to the “music” folder in the “flashdisk,” it would
display “send attachments path: /flashdisk/music.”
7.5.2.3 Set the Disk to save E-mail
The e-mail messages that are downloaded from your network are
saved in the “email” folder, which is a lower level folder of “flashdisk.”
If the size of an email you are receiving is so large that it cannot be
downloaded and stored in the “flashdisk,” you can change to a
different disk using the following method:
1) Connect the external storage disc to the Braille Sense Plus B32.
2) Execute steps 1 – 5, as explained in section 7.5.2.
3) Press “space-4” to move to “disk to save E-mail in: /flashdisk.”
174
4) Press “enter” or “m (dots 1-3-4)” on “disk to save E-mail in:
/flashdisk.” Or, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “modify”
button, and then press “enter.”
5) Then, the “flashdisk” will be displayed. Press “space-4” or “space-
1” to move to the disk list. If you have connected a USB memory
stick or CF memory, “smd” (stick memory) or “cfd” (cf memory) will
be displayed during step one above, respectively.
6) Press “enter” on the desired disk name.
It will show the disk name if the disc setting is completed by pressing
“enter.” If you changed it to “CF memory,” it will show “disk to save
E-mail in: /cfd.” If it is changed, the “email” folder will be created
automatically in the selected disc, and the e-mail messages will be
downloaded in this disk.
7.5.3 Set Options
When you download e-mail from your e-mail server, you can set the
Braille Sense Plus B32 to keep e-mail messages on the server or not.
In the “set options,” you can select it.
The default value is set to keep your e-mail on the mail server.
You can change this setting by using the following method:
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “e-mail” menu
in the “inbox.”
2) Move to the “tools” menu by pressing “space-4.”
3) Press “enter.” Then, “service manager” will be displayed.
4) Press “space-4” to move to “set options.”
5) Press “enter.” Then, “keep mail copies in server: Yes” will be
displayed. Press “enter-o (dots 1-3-5)” in order to jump to this
stage.
6) Press “space” to change “yes” to “no,” and press “enter” if you do
not want a copy of the email to remain on the e-mail server.
By using the setting above, the new e-mail message will not be on
the e-mail server if you downloaded the e-mail to the Braille Sense
Plus B32. If an e-mail is not downloaded into the Braille Sense Plus
B32 successfully, that e-mail will remain on the e-mail server. If you
want the copy to remain on the e-mail server, you can change the
setting from “no” to “yes” by pressing “enter” at step 6 above.
175
You can cancel “set options” while you are changing a setting by
pressing “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
7.5.4 Spam Settings
When the Braille Sense Plus B32 downloads e-mail from the e-mail
server, there may be a lot of e-mail messages that are spam. In this
case, you can avoid downloading these spam e-mail messages by
registering specified words in the subject or the specified e-mail
address.
The spam e-mail messages that are set at “spam settings” will not be
downloaded into the Braille Sense Plus B32, and will remain on the e-
mail server.
Use the following steps to set up spam e-mail:
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu while you
are in the “inbox.”
2) Press “space-4” to move to the “tools” menu.
3) Press “enter.” Then, “service manager” will be opened.
4) Press “space-4” to move to “spam settings.”
5) Press “enter.” Then, “type: subject 1/3” will be displayed. You
can also jump to this stage by pressing “enter-e (dots 1-5).”
Now, you are in the “spam settings” menu.
“Spam settings” contains the following 6 items;
1) Type
2) List
3) Add
4) Modify
5) Delete
6) Close
You can move among the items by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or
“shift-tab (space-1-2).”
In order to exit from “spam settings,” move to the “close” button and
press “enter,” or press “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-
6).”
176
“Type” consists of 3 sub items; “subject,” “e-mail address string,” and
“host.” You can move among these sub items by pressing “space-1”
or “space-4.”
The “list” will be displayed in a different form according to the sub
item of the “type.”
If you have selected “subject,” the list will be displayed as “subject:
(Registered word) 1/xx.” If you selected “e-mail address string,” it will
be displayed as “e-mail address string: (Registered e-mail address
string) 1/xx.” It will be displayed as “no list 0/0” if there is no
registered word or e-mail address string.
Now we will explain how to register, modify, and delete the spam
settings.
7.5.4.1 Add As Spam E-Mail
First, we will explain how to set the e-mail program to sort out spam
by setting any specified words in the e-mail subject.
1) Execute steps 1 through 5, as explained in section 7.5.4.
2) Press “a (dot 1)” when “type: subject 1/3” is displayed. Or, press
“tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “add” button, and then press
“enter.”
3) Then, the “add dialog box” will be opened and “subject add:” will
be displayed.
4) Type in the words, and press “enter.” Or, press “tab (“space-4-5”)”
to move to the “confirm” button, and then press “enter” after you
type in the words.
5) Then, “successfully added spam data.” will be announced and you
will be returned to the “list.” Then, “subject: (registered word) 1/1”
will be displayed.
If you want to add more words, repeat step 2, and add the words. If
there is more than one registered word, you can check it by pressing
“space-1” or “space-4.”
By adding the word as explained above, if there are any e-mail
messages that include the words you entered in the subject of the
message, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will download those e-mails
177
from the e-mail server, but will delete them automatically. So those e-
mails will not be in the inbox.
You can also avoid receiving e-mail messages from a specific sender
or host by registering it.
The following are the steps to register a sender’s e-mail address:
1) Execute steps 1 to 5 in section 7.5.4.
2) Press “space-4” when “type: subject 1/3” is displayed. Then,
“type: e-mail address string 2/3” will be displayed.
3) Press “a (dot 1)” or press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “add”
button, and press “enter.”
4) Then, the “add dialog box” will be opened, and “E-mail address
string: (e-mail address)” will be displayed. The “(e-mail address)”
is the sender’s e-mail address that was focused.
5) Press “enter” on “E-mail address sting: (e-mail address).” Or,
press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button, and then
press “enter.”
6) Then, “successfully added spam data” will be announced and “E-
mail address string: (Registered e-mail address) 1/1” will be
displayed.
If you set it once, the e-mails with the e-mail ids will be downloaded
from the e-mail server, but the Braille Sense Plus B32 will delete
those e-mails automatically. So those e-mails will not be found in the
inbox.
At step 5 above, you can add an additional e-mail address by
modifying the e-mail address that you have typed in. If you type in a
new e-mail address at “E-mail address string: (e-mail address),” the
displayed e-mail address will be erased, and the new e-mail address
will be displayed. But, if you press the “cursor routing key” at the
position where you want to modify the displayed address, that
address will be modified as you type in the modifications.
If you want to add another e-mail address to the spam sender, repeat
the above steps, starting with step 3 above. Or, when “E-mail
address string: (registered e-mail address) 1/1” is displayed, you can
add it by pressing “a (dot 1)” or pressing “tab (space-4-5)” to move to
the “add” button, and press “enter.” You can check the registered e-
mail addresses by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.”
178
If you want to register a specific host as a spam sender, do the
following:
1) Execute steps 1 through 5, as explained in section 7.5.4.
2) Press “space-4” when “type: subject 1/3” is displayed in order to
move to “type: host 3/3.”
3) Press “a (dot 1)” on “type: host 3/3,” or press “tab (space-4-5)” to
move to the “add” button, and then press “enter.”
4) Then, the “add dialog box” will be opened, and “host add: (host
address)” will be displayed. Here, “host address” is the host
address that was focused on when you executed this command.
5) Press “enter” on “host add: (host address).” Or, press “tab
(space-4-5) to move to the “confirm” button, and then press
“enter.”
6) Then, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say “successfully added
spam data” and it will show “host: (registered host address) 1/1.”
If you add the host address as above, the e-mails from the registered
host will be downloaded from the e-mail server, but the Braille Sense
Plus B32 will delete them automatically. So those e-mails will not be
found in the inbox.
At step 5 above, you can add the additional host address by
modifying the host address that you have typed in. If you type in a
new host address at “host add: (host address),” the displayed host
address will be erased, and the new host address will be displayed.
But, if you press the “cursor routing key” at the position where you
want to modify the displayed address, that address will be modified
where you modify it.
If you want to add an additional host address, you can add it by
repeating step 3 above. Or, when “host: (registered host address)
1/1” is displayed, you can add it by pressing “a (dot 1)” or pressing
“tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “add” button, and then press “enter.”
You can check the registered host addresses by pressing “space-1”
or “space-4.”
When you register a subject, e-mail address, or host as spam e-mail,
you may make a mistake while you are typing in a subject, e-mail
179
address, or host. In this case, you need to modify the subject while
typing them in.
Please refer to the following correction methods:
1) In order to delete the current letter, press “space-d (dots 1-4-5)”
2) In order to delete the previous letter, press “backspace.”
3) In order to delete the current line, press “backspace-1-4.” Then,
“delete line: yes” will be displayed. Press “enter” to delete the line.
Or, if you do not want to delete the line, press “space” to toggle
“yes” to “no,” and then press “enter.”
If you want to cancel setting spam at the “add dialog box,” press “tab
(space-4-5)” to move to the “cancel” button, and press “enter.” Or,
just press “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
7.5.4.2 Modifying Spam Registration
In order to modify information that has been registered you can also
use the methods explained in section 7.5.4.1.
In order to modify a “subject” that has been registered, do the
following:
1) Execute steps 1 through 5, as explained in section 7.5.4.
2) Move to “list” by pressing “tab (space-4-5).” Then, “subject:
(Registered word) 1/xx” will be displayed.
3) Press “space-4” or “space-1” to move to the word to be modified.
4) Press “m (dots 1-3-4)” on the word to be modified. Or, press “tab
(space-4-5)” to move to the “modify” button, and press “enter.”
5) Then, the modify dialog box will be opened, and “subject modify:
(Selected word)” will be displayed.
6) If you type in a new word directly, the displayed word will be
erased, and the new word will be displayed. If you want to modify
a part of the displayed word, press the “cursor routing key” at the
position where you want to modify the word, and type in the letters
that you want to modify.
7) Press “enter” after you type in the new word. Or, press “tab
(space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button, and then press
“enter.”
180
8) Then “successfully modified spam data.” will be announced, and
you will be returned to the “list.” If there is more than one word in
the list, you can look them up by pressing “space-4” or “space-1.”
If you want to modify the e-mail addresses or host addresses that
have been registered, execute step 1 above. Press “space-4” to
move to “type: e-mail address string 2/3” and “type: host 3/3.” You
can modify them with the same method as explained above.
If you mistyped any letter while modifying the subject, e-mail address,
or host, you can correct it, as explained in section 7.5.4.1.
If you want to cancel registration, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to
the “cancel” button, and press “enter.” Or, you can press “space-e
(dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
7.5.4.3 Deleting Spam
You can delete an item that has been registered in the spam list.
Let’s start our explanation from “subject.”
1) Execute steps 1 through 5, as explained in section 7.5.4.
2) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “list.” Then, “subject:
(Registered word) 1/xx” will be displayed.
3) Press “space-4” or “space-1” to delete the registered word.
4) Press “space-d (dots 1-4-5)” to delete the selected word. Or,
press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “delete” button, and press
“enter.”
5) Then, “successfully deleted” will be announced and “list” will show
again. You can check the remaining words by pressing “space-4”
or “space-1.”
You may delete an “e-mail address string” or “host” in the spam list,
too. Execute step 1 above, and press “space-4” to move to “type: e-
mail address string 2/3” or “type: host 3/3,” and execute step 2 above.
The method is the same as explained above.
181
7.6. Hot Keys for E-Mail
7.6.1 Hot Keys That Are Used in the Inbox
Call “service manager”: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Receive new mail: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Write mail: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Reply: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Reply all: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Forward: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Call up “send mail in storage box”: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Call up “set path”: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Call up “set option”: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Call up “set spam”: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Call up “local folder”: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)
Move to unread message: Enter-u (dots 1-3-4)
Move to folder: Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Copy to folder: Backspace-c (dots 1-4)
Add a sender to the address list: Enter-I (dots 2-4) (This is valid only
at the “from” item of the “inbox”).
Delete received e-mail: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) (It is valid only at the
“subject” and “date” item in the “inbox”).
Save the received e-mail as text file: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Print the received e-mail: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5)
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
7.6.2 Hot Keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward,
and Save in the Mail Storage Box
Search address list: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Attach file: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Send e-mail: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Save in mail storage box: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5)
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
182
7.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mail Messages or Writing an E-
mail Message
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Copy to the clipboard: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Cut to the clipboard: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) (It is not valid when you
are reading e-mail in the “inbox”).
Paste from the clipboard: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) (It is not valid when
you are reading e-mail in the “inbox”).
Delete: Space-d (dots 1-2) (It is not valid when you are reading e-
mail in the “inbox”).
Cancel block: Space-e (dots 1-5)
Check Spelling: enter-k (dots 1-3) (It is not valid when you are
reading e-mail in the “inbox”)
183
8. Media Player
The Media Player on the Braille Sense Plus B32 is a program which
you can use to play audio files. The Media Player will play the
following formats, ac3, asf, asx, m3u, mp2, mp3, mp4, mpa, mpg,
ogg, pls, rmp, wav, wax, wma, and wmv. Note that you will not be
able to see the video with “avi” and “wmv” files.
You can control the playing of audio files using either the Braille
keyboard commands or audio keys that are on the front panel of the
Braille Sense Plus B32. The Media Player can play back recorded
voices as well as music files.
8.1 Using the Audio Buttons
There are a series of buttons on the front panel of the Braille Sense
Plus B32. These buttons can be used to control the Media Player.
You will find five buttons on the Braille Sense Plus B32. Starting from
the left, and going to the right, the buttons are called: “previous,”
“record,” “stop,” “play/pause,” and “next.” These buttons are used for
playing and recording music or voice quickly and easily.
If the “play/pause” button is pressed while you are using a program
other than the Media Player, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will play the
files in the play list. If there are no files in the play list, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 says, “There are no items to display.” The other
buttons, “previous,” “stop,” and “next” are available after you start
playing audio by pressing the “play/pause” button. Note that the
“record” button will not work while you are using other programs.
Even if the Media Player starts when you press the “play/pause”
button while you are using another program, the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will not stop the program that is currently running.
8.1.1 Play/Pause Button
The “play/pause” button has a long, rectangle shape. To locate the
“play/pause” button, find the button that is furthest to the right on the
front panel. Then, move one button to the left. This is the
“play/pause” button. With the “play/pause” button, you can easily
184
play audio files registered in the play list. If there are no files that
have been registered in the play list, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
display the message, “There are no items to display.” You have to
add a file to the play list before it can be played. There is a detailed
explanation on how to add files to the play list in section 8.2.2. If
there is more than one file in the play list when you press the
“play/pause” button, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will start playing all
the files in the list one after another. If you press the “play/pause”
button again while a file is being played, the playback will be paused.
If you want to resume playing, press the button again. If you press
the “play/pause” button while you are in the “record” dialog box, the
sound that was recorded most recently will be played back to you.
8.1.2 Next button and previous button
These buttons have a triangular shape. The “previous” button is the
first button from the left on the front panel, and it points to the left.
The “next” button is the button that is farthest to the right on the front
panel, and it points to the right. If you press the “next” button, the
next file in the play list will be played, and pressing the “previous”
button will play the previous file. If you press one of these buttons
while an audio file is being played, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
stop playing the current file, and jump to the previous or next file
(depending on which button you press) in the play list, and start
playing it. If you press the “next” button (while the last file in the list is
being played), or the “previous” button (while the first file in the list is
being played), it will have no effect, as the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
not stop playing the current file.
8.1.3 Record Button
The “record” button has a circular shape, and is used to record sound
using the built-in or an external microphone. The “record” button is
located directly to the right of the “previous” button. To use this
button to record sound, you should be either in the “Media Player,” or
in the “program” menu. If you press the “record” button once, the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will open the “record” dialog box. If you press
the “record” button again, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will resume
recording. When you press the “record” button while you are
recording, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will pause your recording. You
185
can resume the recording by pressing the “record” button again. The
recorded sound will be stored in a file, and placed in the
“flashdisk/media/record” folder. See section 8.3.3 for more
information about recorded files.
8.1.4 Stop Button
The “stop” button has a square shape, and is used to stop playing. If
you press the “stop” button while an audio file is being played, the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will stop playing. The next time the Braille
Sense Plus B32 starts playing, it will start from the first file in the play
list. If you press this button while recording, the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will stop recording. If you press the “stop” button in “record”
dialog box while the Braille Sense Plus B32 is not recording, the
dialog box will close.
8.1.5 Using the Audio buttons in file open dialog box
You can open “open file” dialog box by long pressing “stop” button in
the “Media Player” dialog box. And if you long press the “stop” button
again, this dialog box will close. And then return to the “Media Player”
dialog box.
“play/pause” button is same function as “enter” in “open file” dialog
box. Also “stop” button, “record” button, “previous” button and “next”
button is same function as “backspace”, “space”, “space-1” and
“space-4” in “file open” dialog box.
Namely, you can move to up and down by pressing “previous” and
“next” button in file list. And you can select and unselect by pressing
“record” button. If you press “stop” button, you can move to upper
folder. And if you press “play/pause” button, you can play the
selected file in file list of “open file” dialog box.
In order to use this function, you must set the audio mode switch to
“media mode.”
8.2 Braille Keyboard and Extended Keys
You can use more of the features in the “Media Player” with the
Braille keyboard than with the audio buttons. You can use the Braille
keyboard commands to control the player in the “Media Player” dialog
box. To open the “Media Player,” press “enter” on “Media Player,” or
186
press “m” in the “program menu.” The “Media Player” is also opened
when you play audio files by pressing the “play/pause” button on the
front panel of the Braille Sense Plus B32. This dialog box contains
two information tabs: “playback information” and “play list.” Press
“space-4-5” or “space-1-2” to move between these tabs. A detailed
explanation of these tabs follows in sections 8.2.1, 8.2.2, and 8.2.3.
8.2.1 Playback Information Tab
The “playback information” tab displays the track number, the file
name, and the current playback status such as (play, pause, or stop).
If there are no files in the play list, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
display “title: There are no items to display.” If you press “space-4,”
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display playback time information.
First, the elapsed or remaining time will be displayed. You can set
whether the elapsed time or remaining time will be displayed, using
the “playback settings” dialog box as explained in section 8.3.5.2. If
you have selected the “remaining time” with this option, the - (minus
sign), will be displayed before the time. Next to the
elapsed/remaining time, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display the
total playback time of the currently selected file.
If there are no files in the play list, “time: There are no items to
display” will be displayed.
8.2.2 Play List Tab
The “play list” tab displays all the files in the play list. For each file in
the play list, it displays the track number, file name, the current place
of the file in the list, and the total number of files in the list. If there is
no file in the play list, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display the
message “no list 0 of 0.”
For example, if you had the following track on the Braille Sense Plus
B32: “track 1 Chopin – Fantasie Impromptu 1/10,” then “track 1”
means this file is the first item in the play list. “Chopin – Fantasie
Impromptu” is the file name. “1/10” means the file is the first of ten
files in the play list. Whenever you register an audio file using the
“file” menu (as explained in section 8.3.1), the file is added to the play
list.
187
8.2.3 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab and the Play List Tab
The hot keys that can be used in the “playback information” and the
“play list” tabs are as follows:
1) Hot keys in the Play Information Tab
Hot key Function
Space-4 Move to the next information
Space-1 Move to the previous
information
Space “Pause” when it is play state
and “play” when it is pause
state.
Enter Start playing
Backspace Stop playing
Dot 6 Play the next file
Dot 3 Play the previous file
Dots 4-6 Play the last file
Dots 1-3 Play the first file
Dots 5-6 Play the fifth file after the
current file
Dots 2-3 Play the fifth file before the
current file
Dot 4 One minute next
Dot 1 One minute previous
Dot 5, play and next button Go forward 5 seconds and play
Dot 2, play and previous
button Go backward 5 seconds and
play
Dots 3-4-5 Speed up
Dots 1-2-6 Speed down
Space-up scroll button Volume up
Space-down scroll button Volume down
Space-1-3-4 Open menu
Space-1-2-5 Open help
Space-4-5/Space-1-2 Move to “play list” tab
Space-1-3-5-6 Exit “Media Player”
188
2) Hot Keys in the Play List Tab
Hot key Function
Space-4 Move to the next file
Space-1 Move to the previous file
Space-4-6 Move to the last file
Space-1-3 Move to the first file
Space Select/resume current file
(while playing, it is used as
play/pause)
Enter-1-2 Start selecting files
Enter Start playing the selected files
Backspace Stop playing
Space-1-4-5 Delete the selected files in the
play list
Dot 6 Play the next file
Dot 3 Play the previous file
Dots 4-6 Play the last file
Dots 1-3 Play the first file
Dots 5-6 Play the fifth file after the
current file
Dots 2-3 Play the fifth file before the
current file
Dot 4 One minute next
Dot 1 One minute previous
Dot 5 Go forward 5 seconds and
play
Dot 2 Go backward five seconds and
play
Dots 3-4-5 Speed up
Dots 1-2-6 Speed down
Space-up scroll button Volume up
Space-down scroll button Volume down
Space-1-3-4 Open menu
Space-1-2-5 Open help
Space-4-5/Space-1-2 Move to “playback information”
tab
Space-1-3-5-6 Exit “Media Player”
189
8.3 How to Use the Media Player Menu
When you want to open the “Media Player” menu, you can press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4).” You can also “F2” while in the “Media Player”
dialog box. This menu contains five items: “file,” “play,” “record,”
“advanced” and “settings.” Using the “file” menu, you can add or
delete files in the play list. The “play” menu lists all of the commands
related to playing files. The “record” menu opens the “recording”
dialog box in which allows you to record sound and play it. The
“advanced” menu contains commands related to bookmark and go to
position. The “settings” menu allows you to set various Media Player
options. A detailed explanation for each menu can be found in the
section 8.3.
8.3.1 File
When you want to use the “file” menu, you can press “space-m (dots
1-3-4)” to call up the “Media Player” menu, and then press “enter” on
“file,” or press “f (dots 1-2-4).” A submenu will appear, which contains
“open file,” “open folder,” “add file,” “add folder,” “save playlist,” “save
as playlist,” “delete item,” and “exit.” You can move between these
items by pressing “spaece-4” or “space-1.” Press “enter” on the item
you want to execute. If you want to go back to the menu that is one
level up, you can press “space-e (dots 1-5).” Then press, “space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6).” which will close the menu, and take you back to the
“Media Player” dialog box.
8.3.1.1 Open File
You can use the “open file” menu item to add files to the play list and
start playing. If you press “enter” on “open file,” a dialog box will open,
just like the “file list” in the “file manager.” You can navigate through
the file list just like you do in the “file list” in the “file manager.” The
audio files that can be played in the “Media Player” are files that have
the extensions, ac3, asf, asx, m3u, mp2, mp3, ogg, pls, wav, wax,
wma, and wmv. If you select all the files you want to play, and press
“enter,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will register the files in the play list,
and start playing the first file. You can select more than one file in the
“open file” dialog box by pressing “space” on the file you want to play,
and then move to another file to be played, and press “space.” Once
190
you finish selecting all the files you want, press “enter.” When you
open the “open file” dialog box, files in the default folder will be
displayed. The default folder is set to “/flashdisk/media.” You can
also open the “file open” dialog box by pressing “enter-o (dots 1-3-5)”
in the “Media Player” dialog box.
8.3.1.2 Open Folder
This “open folder” menu item is used to select all of the audio files in
the selected folders to the play list and play them one after another. If
you press “enter” on “open folder” in “file” menu, or press “enter-f
(dots 1-2-4)” in the “Media Player” dialog box, the “open folder” dialog
box will be opened. The “open folder” dialog box is almost the same
as the “open file” dialog box. The difference is that only folder names,
and not file names will be displayed in the “folder open” dialog box.
When you open the “open folder” dialog box, the default folder name
will be displayed. The default folder is set to “flashdisk.” Press
“enter” to display all of the folders in “flashdisk,” and press “space-1”
or “space-4” to move between the folder names. If you want to move
into the folder that you are currently pointed at (and list all the files in
it) press “enter” on the folder name. Press “backspace” if you want to
go up to the parent folder. If you want to select a folder, press
“space” on the folder name. You can select more than one folder.
Once you have selected all of the folders you want, press “enter.”
Then, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will add all of the audio files, with
the extensions, “wav,” “mp3,” and “wma,” from the selected folders to
the play list and start playing the first file.
8.3.1.3 Add File
The “add file” menu item is used to add audio files to the play list. If
you press “enter” on “add file” in the “file” menu, or press “backspace-
o (dots 1-3-5)” in the “Media Player” dialog box, the same dialog box
that is used for “open file” will be displayed. If you select all of the
files that you want, and press “enter” (as in the “open file” dialog box),
then the Braille Sense Plus B32 will add the selected files to the play
list. However, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will not start playing these
files. If you want to start playing the files in the play list, press the
“play/pause” button on the front panel of the Braille Sense Plus B32.
Or, you can press “enter” on “play” in the “play” menu. A detailed
191
explanation of the “play’ menu can be found in section 8.3.2.
8.3.1.4 Add Folder
The “add folder” menu item is used to add all of the audio files in a
selected folder to the play list. If you press “enter” on “add folder” in
the “file” menu (or press “backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)” in the “Media
Player” dialog box), the same dialog box that is used for “open folder”
will be displayed. If you select all of the folders, and press “enter,”
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will add all of the audio files in the
selected folders to the play list. However, it will not start playing any
files. You can start playing the files in the play list by pressing the
“play/pause” button on the front panel of the Braille Sense Plus B32,
or press “enter” on “play” in the “play” menu. A detailed explanation
of the “play’ menu can be found in section 8.3.2.
8.3.1.5 Save play list
The “save playlist” menu item is used to save the play list to a disk
drive. If you want to use this function, you can press “space-m (dots
1-3-4)” to open the “file” menu and execute the “save playlist”
command by pressing “enter” on it, or you can press “s (dots 2-3-4).”
Otherwise, you can press “enter-i (dots 2-4)” in the “Media Player”
dialog box.
If you activate the “Media player” program and first execute “save
playlist,” the “save as playlist” dialog box will open. You can refer to
section 8.3.1.6 that explains how to use the “save as playlist” dialog
box.
If you execute “save” after you save the play list for once, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will save the play list with the same file name without
using a dialog box. After saving a play list, it will return to “Media
player” dialog box.
8.3.1.6 Save as play list
The “save as playlist” menu item is used to save the play list as a
different file or on another disk drive. If you want to use this function,
you can press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the “file” menu and
192
execute the “save as playlist” command by pressing “enter” on it, or
you can press “l (dots 1-2-3).” Otherwise, you can press “space-s
(dots 2-3-4)” in the “Media Player” dialog box.
If you execute “save as playlist,” the “save as playlist” dialog box is
displayed. This dialog box consists of “file list,” “file name,” a
“confirm” button, and a “cancel” button. If the dialog box is opened,
“file name:” is displayed. You can move from one tab to the other tab
by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”.
The file format of saved play list is always the “m3u.” By default, file is
saved in “/flashdisk/media.”
If you want to make a new file name, type in the new file name. You
cannot use the following characters in a file mane. “|, \, <, >, ?, :, *”.
If you want to change the saving location, move to the “file list” by
pressing “shift-tab (space-1-2).” And you move to location that you
want to save by using the navigation keys in “file manager” program.
8.3.1.7 Delete Item
If you want to delete a file from the play list, first, locate the file you
want to delete in the “play list” tab by pressing “space-1” or “space-4”
repeatedly. Then, bring up the “Media Player” menu by pressing
“space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and press “enter” on “file.” Now, move to
“delete item” by pressing “space-4” repeatedly, and then press
“enter.” Or, you can press “space-d (dots 1-4-5)” on the file to be
deleted in the “play list” tab. You can select more than one file in the
“play list” tab by pressing “space” on each file to be deleted. “*” will
be displayed before each selected item. If you press “space” on a
selected item, the selection will be canceled and the “*” will disappear.
Now, let’s explain how to delete multiple files in a block from the play
list. Press “enter-b (dots 1-2)” on the first file to be deleted. “Enter-b
(dots 1-2)” is the start of the block. Next, if you press “space-4” or
“space-1,” the displayed files will be selected. After selecting the files
you want to delete, press “space-d (dots 1-4-5)” in order to delete
them.
193
8.3.1.8 Exit
You can exit from the “Media Player” by selecting “exit” in the “file”
menu, or by pressing “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” in the “Media Player”
dialog box. Then, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will stop playing (if it is
playing a file), and exit from “Media Player” to the “program menu.”
8.3.2 Play
The “play” submenu has all of the commands that can be used to
control playback. To use this menu, first, press “space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” to call up the “Media Player” menu. Next, press “space-4.” The
Braille Sense Plus B32 will then display “play (p)->.” Then, press
“enter,” and the “play” submenu will be displayed. You can move to
any menu item in this menu by pressing “space-4” or “space-1”
repeatedly. To go back to the top level in the “Media Player” menu,
press “space-e (dots 1-5).” Press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” if you want
to close the menu and go back to the “Media Player” dialog box. All
of the commands that can be used in this menu will be explained in
this section.
8.3.2.1 Play
If you press “enter” on “play,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will start
playing the files in the play list. Also, if you press “enter” in the
“Media Player” dialog box, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will start
playing.
8.3.2.2 Previous Track
“Previous track” is used to play the previous file, while a file is being
played. You can also do this by pressing “dot 3” in the “Media Player”
dialog box.
8.3.2.3 Next Track
This item is used to play the next file in the play list, while a file is
being played. You can also press “dot 6” in the “Media Player” dialog
box to do this.
194
8.3.2.4 Back 5 Track
This is used to play the fifth file before the file that is currently being
played. You can also press “dots 2-3” in the “Media Player” dialog
box to do this.
8.3.2.5 Forward 5 Track
This is used to play the fifth file after the file that is currently being
played. You can also do this by pressing “dots 5-6” in the “Media
Player” dialog box.
8.3.2.6 First Track
This is used to play the first file in the play list. You can also do this
by pressing “dots 1-3” in the “Media Player” dialog box.
8.3.2.7 Last Track
This is used to play the last file in the play list. You can also do this
by pressing “dots 4-6” in the “Media Player” dialog box.
8.3.2.8 Back 1 Minute
This is used to start playing one minute before your current location.
You can also press “dot 1” to activate this function, without calling up
the menu.
8.3.2.9 Forward 1 Minute
This is used to start playing one minute after your current location.
You can also press “dot 4” to activate this function, without calling up
the menu.
8.3.2.10 Back 5 Seconds
This is used to go backward 5 seconds, and play from there, while a
file is being played. You can also do this by pressing “dot 2” in the
“Media Player” dialog box, or you can press the “previous” and “play”
buttons together on the front panel.
195
8.3.2.11 Forward 5 Seconds
This is used to go forward 5 seconds, and play from there when a file
is being played. You can also do this by pressing “dot 5” in the
“Media Player” dialog box, or you can press the “next” button and the
“play” button on the front panel.
8.3.2.12 Volume Up and Volume Down
These options are used to adjust the audio playback volume. Here,
the volume level ranges from 0 to 10. You can also adjust the volume
level by pressing “space-up scroll button (up)” or “space-down scroll
button (down)” in the “Media Player” dialog box. The actual volume
level depends on the value of “voice volume” that is set in the “option”
menu as explained in section 2.4. For example, if “voice volume” is
set to 5, and the volume level in the “Media Player” is set to its
maximum 10, the actual volume is 5. If the volume level in the
“Media Player” is set to 5, the actual volume level is 2.5.
8.3.2.13 Speed Up and Speed Down
You can use these controls to adjust the audio playback speed. The
speed level ranges from 1 to 10. You can also adjust the speed level
by pressing “dot 3-4-5” or “dot 1-2-6” in the “Media Player” dialog box.
“Dot 3-4-5” can increase the audio playback speed, and “dot 1-2-6”
can decrease the audio playback speed.
8.3.2.14 Pause
This item is for pausing playback while you are playing a file. If you
use this command again, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will start playing
again from the position where it stopped playing. You can also do
this by pressing “space” in the “Media Player” dialog box.
8.3.2.15 Stop
This is used to stop playing the file that is currently being played. You
can also do this by pressing “backspace” in the “Media Player” dialog
box.
196
8.3.3 Record
This menu item is used to open the “record” dialog box. To open the
“record” dialog box, first, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to bring
up the “Media Player” menu. Press “space-4” twice to move to
“record (r),” and then press “enter,” or you can press “r (dots 1-2-3-
5).” Then, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display the “record” dialog
box. You can also open this dialog box by pressing “enter-r (dots 1-
2-3-5)” in the “Media Player” dialog box. The “record” dialog box
contains an “information” tab and five buttons. You can move
between these by pressing “space-4-5” or “space-1-2.” You can
press the buttons in this dialog box by pressing “enter” on the button
you want to use. You can also press the buttons by typing the
character displayed after the button name.
8.3.3.1 Record/Playback Information Tab
This tab is displayed only when the Braille Sense Plus B32 is
recording, or when there is a file that has just been recorded. It
means that the dialog box does not show any information when the
Braille Sense Plus B32 is not recording, or if you exit from the dialog
box. The information displayed in this tab includes: a file name, the
current status, and two pieces of time information. The file name is
the name of the file containing the sound that is currently being
recorded or played. The current status can be one of the following:
recording, playing, pause, or stop. The time information that is
displayed first is the elapsed time while recording, and the elapsed or
remaining time while playing, (depending on the “time” setting that is
in the “playback setting” dialog box, which is explained in section
8.3.5.2). The time information that is displayed last, when you are
recording, is the remaining time. The remaining time is limited by the
remaining space on your flashdisk. While playing, the total length of
the file in time will be displayed. You can move between time
information and other information by pressing “space-4” or “space-1.”
8.3.3.2 Record
This is used to start recording. You can also start recording by
pressing the “record” button on the front panel of the Braille Sense
Plus B32. While recording, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display
197
the “recording information” tab. Whenever you start recording the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will create a file. The file will be named
“record01.wav,” or “record02.wav” etc. The recorded sound will be
saved to that file. These files are stored in a special folder. By
default, these files are saved in “/flashdisk/media/record.” You can
change the saving folder and recoding file type by using the “record
settings” option, which is explained in section 8.3.5.3. When
recording, you can pause the recording by pressing “space 4-5” to
move to the “pause” button, and then press “enter.” You can also
pause by pressing the “record” button on the front panel of the Braille
Sense Plus B32. If you want to resume recording, press “enter” on
the “continue” button, or press the “record” button on the front panel
of the Braille Sense Plus B32 again. To stop recording, press
“space-4-5” repeatedly on “record” to move to the “stop” button, and
then press “enter.”
8.3.3.3 Play
This button is used to play the file that has just been recorded. You
can also start playing the recorded sound by pressing the “play”
button on the front panel of the Braille Sense Plus B32. If you have
not yet recorded a file after opening the “record” dialog box, pressing
“enter” on the “play” button will not do anything. While playing, the
“playback information” tab will be displayed. If you want to pause or
stop playing, press “enter” after moving to the “pause” or “stop” button
by pressing “space-4-5” repeatedly.
8.3.3.4 Stop
This is used to stop recording or playing. If you press “enter” on
“stop” while recording, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will stop recording
and show the “recording information” tab. If you press “enter” on the
“stop” button while playing, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will stop
playing and show the “playback information” tab. You can also stop
recording or playing by pressing the “stop” button on the front panel
of the Braille Sense Plus B32.
198
8.3.3.5 Pause
This item is used to pause the recording or playing a file while in the
Media Player. If you press “enter” on “pause,” or press the
“play/pause” button on the front panel of the Braille Sense Plus B32,
recording or playing will be paused, and the “recording information” or
“playback information” tab will be displayed.
8.3.3.6 Continue
If you press “enter” on “continue” while the current status is “pause,”
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will resume recording or playing.
8.3.3.7 Cancel
If you press “enter” on “cancel,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will stop
recording or playing, close the “record” dialog box, and return to the
“Media Player” dialog box. If you press “enter” on “cancel” while
recording, the recorded file will not be saved. If you want to save the
recorded sound to a file, and exit from this dialog box; press “enter”
on “stop,” and then move to the “cancel” button, and press “enter.”
You can also use “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” to
cancel.
8.3.4 Advanced Menu
If you want to set a bookmark and delete a bookmark when you are
listening to music or an audio file, you can execute the “advanced”
menu. This menu will also let you jump to the time you want to go to
in an audio file.
The “advanced” menu has four submenus:
1) Set bookmark
2) Delete bookmark
3) Jump to bookmark
4) Go to position
You can move between the menus by pressing “space-4” or “space-
1.” To execute this menu, press “enter.”
199
8.3.4.1 Set Bookmark
If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file
is paused, a bookmark will be set. A bookmark will mark a specific
location, so that you can come back directly to the spot where you
placed the bookmark.
To execute this function,
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and move to “advanced” by
pressing “space-4.”
2) Press “enter” on “advanced.”
3) Move to “set bookmark” by pressing “space-4,” and press “enter.”
4) Or, press “enter-m (dots 1-3-4)” when playing a file, or when a file
is paused.
If you exit the “Media Player” after setting a bookmark, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 asks if you want to save the bookmark.
If you select “yes,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will save the bookmark,
at your current position, and play from the bookmark position the next
time that you execute the Media Player.
If you select “no,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will save the bookmark
that is already set. If you select “erase,” the Braille Sense Plus B32
will delete the bookmark that is already set.
8.3.4.2 Delete Bookmark
If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file
is paused, it will delete the bookmark that was created before.
To execute this function,
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and move to “advanced” by
pressing “space-4.”
2) Press “enter” on “advanced.”
3) Move to “delete bookmark” by pressing “space-4,” and press
“enter.”
4) Or, you can press “enter-d (dots 1-4-5)” when playing a file, or
when a file is paused.
200
If you execute this function in a file that does not have a bookmark,
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display “There is no bookmark in
selected file.”
8.3.4.3 Jump to Bookmark
If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file
is paused, it will find a bookmark that has already been created.
To execute this function,
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and move to “advanced” by
pressing “space-4.”
2) Press “enter” on “advanced.”
3) Move to “jump to bookmark” by pressing “space-4,” and press
“enter.”
4) Or, you can press “enter-j (dots 2-4-5)” when playing a file, or
when a file is paused.
If you execute this function in a file that does not have a bookmark,
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display “There is no bookmark in
selected file.”
8.3.4.4 Go to Position
If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file
is paused, it will move to a time that you specify, and begin playing
the file.
To execute this function,
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and move to “advanced” by
pressing “space-4.”
2) Press “enter” on “advanced.”
3) Move to “go to position” by pressing “space-4,” and press “enter.”
4) Or, you can press “enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)” when playing a file, or
when a file is paused.
5) The Braille Sense Plus B32 will display “go to position: 0 minute.”
6) Type in the amount of time that you want, and press “enter.”
201
If you type in a longer time than the total playback time, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will display “invalid time,” and play from the paused
location.
8.3.5 Settings
Through this menu, you can change settings about recording, playing,
and general Media Player options. To use the “settings” menu, press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call up the “Media Player” menu. Press
“space-4” three times to reach “settings,” and then press “enter.” Or,
you can press “s” in the “Media Player” menu. Then, the “settings”
submenu will appear, which contains three items: “configuration,”
“playback settings,” and “recording settings.”
8.3.5.1 Configuration Dialog Box
If you press “enter” on the first item, “configuration,” or press
“backspace-c (dots 1-4)” in the “Media Player” dialog box, the
“configuration” dialog box will be displayed, which contains the
following: the “Braille keyboard hold” option, “display title” option, a
“confirm” button, and a “cancel” button. You can move between
controls by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”.
And you can move between options by pressing “space-1” or “space-
4.”
The “Braille keyboard hold” option allows you to set whether or not
you can use Braille keyboard commands in the “Media Player.” If this
is set to “on,” you cannot use Braille keyboard commands. Its default
value is set to “off,” and you can change it by pressing “space” on
“Braille keyboard hold,” or by pressing the “previous” and “next”
buttons on the front panel of the Braille Sense Plus B32
simultaneously. While the “Braille keyboard hold” option is “on,” since
you cannot use the Braille keyboard in “Media Player,” you should
press the “previous” and “next” buttons simultaneously to turn the
option off.
The “display title” option allows you to set whether or not you can
hear the track title when you move to previous/next track or transfer
to next track automatically. If this is set to “on,” you can hear the track
title. The default value is set to “off,” namely you can’t hear the track
202
title when move to previous/next track. You can change the on or off
by pressing “space.”
To save the changed settings and exit, press “enter” after you change
an option, or move to the “confirm” button by pressing “space-4-5”
repeatedly. If you want to cancel the changes you made, and exit
this dialog box, press “space-e (dots 1-5),” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-
6).” You can also press “enter” on the “cancel” button to close the
dialog box without changing any options. The options set in this
dialog box only have an effect in “Media Player.” If “hold” is set to
“off,” you can call up the “program” menu by pressing “F1,” and you
can use another program.
8.3.5.2 Playback Settings Dialog Box
If you press “enter” on “playback settings,” or press “p (dots 1-2-3-4)”
on the “settings” menu, the “playback settings” dialog box will be
displayed. In this dialog box, pressing “space-4-5” or “space-1-2” will
circulate among setting options, “confirm” and “cancel.” The setting
options are the “display time” option, the “repeat” option, “playlist”
option and “set speed” option. Press “space-4” or “space-1” to move
from one option to the next or previous option. You can also open this
dialog box by pressing “enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” in the “Media Player”
dialog box.
The “display time” option allows you to set which type of time
messages will be displayed in the “playback information” tab. You
can set it to either “elapsed time” or “remaining time.” You can
change its value by pressing “space” on “time.”
The “repeat” option allows you to set whether all files in the play list
will be played repeatedly. If it this option is set to “yes,” all files in the
play list will be played repeatedly, and if it is set to “no,” the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will stop playing after playing the last file in the play
list. Again, you can change the value of this option by pressing
“space” on “repeat.”
The next option is “playlist” option. When you want to play audio files
from File Manager, you can select multiple files by pressing “space”
and then play files by pressing “enter.” At this time, if the play list has
had a list of audio files, you will be asked if you want to overwrite the
203
play list or you want to append the selected files into the play list. The
default value is “overwrite” and it means the play list will be filled with
the selected files. And if you press “space” then the value will be set
to “append” and the play list will be appended with the selected files.
The “set speed” option allows you to set the audio playback speed.
The speed level ranges from 1 to 10. The default setting is the 5.
If you change the value, press “space” or “backspace.” The higher the
number, audio playback speed is fast.
To save the changed settings and exit from this dialog box, press
“enter” after you change all the options you want to change, or move
to the “confirm” button by pressing “space-4-5” or “space-1-2”
repeatedly, and then press “enter.” If you want to cancel the changes,
and exit from this dialog box, press enter on the “cancel” button, or
press “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
8.3.5.3 Record Settings Dialog Box
If you press enter on “record settings” in the “settings” menu, or press
“backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)” in the “media player” dialog box, the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will display the “record settings” dialog box,
which contains “recording type,” “sample rate” option, “bits per
channel” option, “record mode” option, “set folder,” “confirm” button
and a “cancel” button. You can move between controls by pressing
“tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”. And you can move
between options by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.”
The “recoding type” allows you to set the default file type of recording
file. Its default value is set to “mp3.” You can select between “wav”
and “mp3” the value by pressing “space.”
The three options are used to control the quality of recorded sound.
Higher values in “sample rate” and “bits per channel” means a better
quality of recorded sound, as well as a larger file size of recorded files.
In other words, if you want to record high quality sound, the total time
the Braille Sense Plus B32 can record will be shortened. On the
other hand, if you set the lower values of these options, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 can record sound longer, although the sound quality
204
may not be as good as when these options are set to higher values.
You can change these values by pressing “space.”
When you record the file using the external microphone, you must set
to “external mic” the “record mode.” And when you record the file
using the line-in-cable, you must set to “line in” the “record mode.”
And when you record the file using internal microphone, you must set
to “internal mic” the “record mode.”
The “set folder” allows you to set the default folder where the
recorded files will be saved. Its default value is set to
“/flashdisk/media/record.” To specify a different folder, press “enter”
on “set folder,” and the same dialog box as the “open folder” dialog
box will be displayed. Select a folder in the same way as in the “open
folder” dialog box. (Refer to section 8.3.1.2 for more information
about how to select a folder.)
If you save the changed settings, and exit from this dialog box, press
“enter” after changing all of the options you want to change, or move
to the “confirm” button, and press “enter.” If you want to cancel the
changes you made, press “enter” on the “cancel” button, or press
“space-e (dots 1-5).”
8.4 Hot Keys in the Media Player
1) Hot Keys for the Commands for the File Menu
Open file: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Open folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Add file: Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)
Add folder: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)
Save play list: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Save as play list: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Delete item: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
2) Hot Keys for Commands While in the Playback menu
Play: Enter, Play button
Previous track: Dot 3, Previous button
Next track: Dot 6, Next button
Back 5 track: Dots 2-3
Forward 5 track: Dots 5-6
First track: Dots 1-3
205
Last track: Dots 4-6
Back 1 minute: Dot 1
Forward 1 minute: Dot 4
Back 5 seconds: Dot 2, play and previous button
Forward 5 seconds: Dot 5, play and next button
Volume up: Space-up scroll button
Volume down: Space-down scroll button
Speed up: Dots 3-4-5
Speed down: Dots 1-2-6
Pause/continue: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
Delete play list during stop: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
3) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Record Dialog Box
Call up the record dialog box: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5), Record
button
Record: Record button
Pause/continue recording: Space, Record button
Play: Play button
Pause/continue play: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
4) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Advance Menu
Set bookmark: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete bookmark: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Jump to bookmark: Enter-j (dots 2-4-5)
Go to position: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
5) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Setting Menu
Configuration dialog box: Backspace-c (dots 1-4)
Hold/resume hole: Previous button-Next button
Playback setting dialog box: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Record setting dialog box: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)
206
9. Radio
In order to use “Radio” program in the Braille Sense Plus B32, please
connect the headphone to the headphone jack of the Braille Sense
Plus B32. The headphone connected to the Braille Sense Plus B32
will work as a radio antenna.
In the program menu, please press scroll buttons to move to the
“Radio” and press “enter,” or just press “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” in order to
execute radio program. Once the radio program is executed, your
Braille Sense Plus B32 will announce the radio frequency. If you had
executed the radio program, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will tune to
the frequency that you listened to and announce the frequency.
For your reference, the frequency range of the Braille Sense Plus
B32 is from 87.5MHz to 108MHz.
9.1 Listening to radio via internal speakers
When you execute radio program after connecting the headphone to
the headphone jack, sound from the radio will output through the
headphone. If you want to listen to the radio through not only the
headphone but also internal speakers, please set as follows;
1) Press space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call the radio menu and press “ente
r” at “file” menu and then press “enter” at “settings.”
2) Or without calling menu, press “enter-e (dots 1-5)” in order to call t
he dialog box.
3) Then the dialog box will be opened and “external speaker: No” is a
nnounced in voice.
4) Press “space” once to switch from “no” to “yes” and press “enter.”
Then you can hear the radio sound from both headphone and internal
speakers.
This setting is valid only in the Radio program. If you exit from Radio
program and hear the sound through speakers, you have to unplug
the headphone.
If the external speakers are selected in the “settings” dialog box and
“space-4” is pressed, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will announce
207
“volume.” You can adjust the radio volume. Radio volume can be
adjusted without calling dialog box. “space-down scroll button” will
decrease the volume and “space-up scroll button” will increase the
radio volume.
9.2 Frequency control
During listening to the radio, if you want to tune to the other frequency,
please press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call the menu. Move to
“frequency” and press “enter.” And then move to “previous
frequency,” “next frequency,” “auto scan backward,” or “auto scan
forward” and press “enter.”
Without calling the menu, if you press “dot 2,” your Braille Sense Plus
B32 will search the next frequency. If you press “dot 5,” your Braille
Sense Plus B32 will search the previous frequency. If you press “dot
6,” the frequency will increase by 0.1MHz. If you press “dot 3,” the
frequency will decrease by 0.1MHz.
You can input the frequency directly by pressing “space-f (dots 1-2-
4).” If you press “space-f (dots 1-2-4),” then the dialog box will be
opened. You can input the frequency in numbers and press “enter” to
move to that frequency.
Besides using the Braille keys on the top panel, you can use audio
buttons on the front panel. In order to use the audio buttons on the
front panel, the audio mode switch should be moved to “FM” that is
the left side of the switch. After setting the audio mode switch,
pressing “previous” button will search the previous frequency and
pressing “next” button will search the next frequency.
9.3 Registration of the channel and move among channels
During listening to the radio, you can register the frequency which
you are listening to. Please do as follows;
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call the menu and press “enter” at
“presets”
2) And then press “enter” at “register preset” or press “enter-s (dots
2-3-4)” without calling menu.
3) Then register preset dialog box will be opened and “frequency: (cu
208
rrent frequency)” will be announced.
4) Press “space-4-5.”
5) Then “label:” is announced. Please input the name of the channel t
o be registered.
6) Press “space-4-5” to move to “confirm” and press “enter.”
If you want to register the frequency other than the frequency which
you are listening to, input the frequency when “frequency: (The
current frequency” is displayed in the dialog box.)
After you register all the desired channels, you can move to the
previous channel by pressing “dot 1,” and move to the next channel
by pressing “dot 4.” Or you can move to the specified channel by
pressing the initial letter of the registered label.
In order to delete any channel, move to the channel to be deleted and
press “space-d (dots 1-4-5).” If “space-d (dots 1-2-4)” is pressed, the
selected channel will be deleted without any warning message.
You can register and delete channels in the presets manager dialog
box. Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call menu, press “enter” at
“preset,” move to the “preset manager” and press “enter.” Or you can
press “enter-m (dots 1-3-4)” without calling menu to open the preset
manager dialog box.
Preset manager dialog box consist of “registered channel list”,
“register” button, “delete” button, “modify” button and “close” button.
You can move from one control to the next control by pressing “tab
(space-4-5 or F3)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2 or space-F3).”
If you press “register” button, the “register dialog box” that was
explained above is opened. You can register the channels as
explained above. And if you want to change the label of the
registered channel, move to the desired channel item in the
registered channel list by pressing “space-1” or “space-4,” and press
“tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “modify” button and press “enter.”
Then the “modify dialog box” will be opened. The structure of the
“modify dialog box” is almost the same as that of “register dialog box.”
The difference between these two dialog boxes is that the channel
label and frequency are displayed on the “modify dialog box.”
209
If you want to delete any channel from the registered channels, select
the desired channel in the channel list and move to “delete” button by
pressing “tab (space-1-2)” and press “enter.”
In order to exit from the preset manager dialog box, press “enter” at
the “close” button, or just press “space-e (dots 1-5).”
Registering the channel and move among the registered channels
are available using audio buttons on the front panel, too. In order to
use the audio buttons, audio mode switch should be set to “FM
radio.”
If you press “record” button more than 2 seconds, “register dialog
box” will be opened. In order to move to the previous channel to be
registered, press “previous” button for more than 2 seconds. Pressing
“next” button for more than 2 seconds will move to the next channel
to be registered.
Pressing “stop” button for more than 2 seconds will delete the
selected channel.
9.4 Recording radio sound
If you want to record the radio, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call
menu, move to “record (r)” and press “enter.” Or just press “enter-r
(dots 1-2-3-5)” without calling menu. Then the record dialog box will
be opened and the Braille Sense Plus B32 starts recording.
The record dialog box consists of “pause/continue” button, “stop”
button, “cancel” button and “record status” status bar. You can move
among these controls by pressing “tab (space-4-5 or F3)” or “shift-tab
(space-1-2 or space-F3).”
While recording the radio, if you press enter at “pause” button,
recording will pause, and the name of button is changed to
“continue.” If you press “continue” button, recording will be continued.
“Record status” will show the frequency of the radio under recording.
If you press “enter” at “stop” button, recording radio will stop.
Recorded files will be saved in the “flashdisk/media/radio” folder. The
file name will be “registered channel label (frequency)-xx.mp3.” “xx”
will start from 01 and increased by one when recording the radio
sound. If unregistered channel is recorded, “radio” will be used as a
file name instead of “registered channel label.” If you stop recording,
the record dialog box will be closed automatically. If you press “enter”
210
at “cancel” button, the recorded file will not be saved and close the
dialog box.
During recording, you cannot change the channel and frequency.
During listening to the radio, you can record without calling the record
dialog box by pressing the “record” button on the front panel. Before
you use the “record” button out of the audio buttons on the front panel,
please set the audio mode switch to the FM radio mode. If you press
the “record” button, the record dialog box will be opened and
recording will start.
If you press “stop” button on the front panel during recording,
recording will stop and the recorded audio file will be saved. If you
press the “pause” button during recording, the “pause” button will be
changed to the “continue” button. Please press the “continue” button
to continue recording. Pressing “previous” button or “next” button will
move among controls in the record dialog box.
9.4.1 Changing record folder
If you want to change the folder for saving recorded files, please do
as follows;
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call menu and press “enter” at “fil
e.”
2) Press “enter” at “record settings.” Or press “backspace-s (dots 2-3-
4)” without calling menu.
3) Then the record dialog box will be opened and
“recoding type: mp3” is announced.
4) Press Space-4-5 to move to “record folder.”
5) Then “record folder: flashdisk/media/radio” is displayed. Press “ent
er.”
6) Then the list in the radio folder will be displayed. Press “backspac
e” to move to upper level folder, and press “space-1” or “space-4” t
o move to desired folder.
7) Press “space” at the desired folder and press “enter.”
8) Then “record folder: (Changed folder)” is announced.
9) Press “space-4-5” to move to “confirm” button and press “enter.”
In the record settings dialog box, you can set recording type, sample
rate, bit per channel and channel. In order to change the recording
211
type, you press the “space.” And then you can select between “wav”
and “mp3.” In order to change the sample rate and bit per channel,
press “space-1” or “space-4” to move to the desired item to be
changed when “sampling rate: 8000Hz” is displayed. At the desired
item, press “space” and change the value. After you change all items
as you desire, press “space-4-5” to move to “confirm” button and
press “enter.”
If the values of sample rate, bit per channel and channels are getting
higher, the recorded audio quality will be better. But it requires more
large storage space in the flash memory. So please select proper
values for your recording purposes.
9.5 Additional features
1) Sensitivity adjustment
When you activate the radio program, if the Braille Sense Plus B32
cannot tune to the broadcasting frequency, please adjust the
sensitivity. In order to adjust the sensitivity, call “settings dialog box”
as explained in the Section 9.1. And press “space-4” to move to
“sensitivity” and press “space” or “backspace” to adjust the sensitivity.
Higher value will make the Braille Sense Plus B32 radio be more
sensitive. If the sensitivity is increased, you can tune to more
frequencies.
2) Mute
During listening to the radio, if you want to make it silent for a while,
press “space.” This is mute function. Pressing “space” once again will
cancel mute mode. Or you can use mute function by pressing “stop”
button on the front panel and cancel mute mode by pressing “play”
button on the front panel. If mute mode is activated, radio sound will
not be heard but TTS (text to speech) sound will be heard.
9.6 Hot Keys in the Radio
Call up the sets dialog box: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Call up the menu: space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2
Internal speakers on/off: Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Move to next frequency: dot 6
Move to previous frequency: dot 3
Auto previous frequency: dot 2, short press previous button
212
Auto next frequency: dot 5, short press next button
Go to frequency: space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Move to previous channel: dot 1, long press previous button
Move to next channel: dot 4, long press next button
Registry channel: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), long press record button
Delete the channel: long press stop button
Call up the record dialog box: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Record start/pause: short press record button
Record stop: short press stop button
Mute on: short press stop button, space
Muto off: short press play button, space
Volume up: Space-up scroll button
Volume down: Space-down scroll button
213
10. Web Browser
You can use the Web Browser on the Braille Sense Plus B32 to read
pages on the Internet, as well as reading html books that you have
saved to disk. In addition, you can download and read books from
places such as Web Braille, and BookShare. Note that you will need
to have setup an account in order to access many of the books on
these sites.
When you want to launch the Web Browser, select Web Browser in
the “program” menu, and press “enter.” Or, you can press “b (dots 1-
2)” in the “program” menu. You can also launch the Web Browser by
pressing “space-w (dots 2-4-5-6)” while you are in the “program”
menu. When you press these keys, the Braille Sense Plus B32, will
open up a computer edit box. You can then type in the URL that you
want to go to. After you type in you’re the web page address, press
“enter,” to open the web page. Then, the Web Browser will open, and
take you to the specific URL that you typed in. The Braille Sense
Plus B32 will connect to the web page that is registered as the “home
page” in the Web Browser. Please note that the Web Browser
supports SSL 1.0 to 3.0. A more detailed explanation of the Web
Browser can be found within this chapter.
10.1 File
The “file” menu can be executed by selecting “file” after pressing
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” which calls up the Web Browser menu.
“File” will appear on the Braille display. When you press “enter” on
“file,” you can enter into the “file” menu. To move from one submenu
to another submenu, press the up arrow key (“space-1”) or the down
arrow key (“space-4”). The following is a detailed explanation of the
Web Browser “file” menu.
10.1.1 Open URL
Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the Web Browser menu.
Then, move to “file,” and press “enter.” The first item that is displayed
on the Braille display is “open URL.” Press “enter” to get into the
“open URL” edit window, or press “enter-u (dots 1-3-6)” while the
214
Web Browser is open. When “open URL” is executed, the edit
window for an address will be displayed. On the Braille display, you
will see the address of the current page. You can enter a new web
page address that you want to connect to. You need to enter the new
address in computer Braille such as “www.yahoo.com.” Then, press
“enter.”
You can check the addresses that have been entered previously by
pressing the down arrow key (“space-4”). Move to the address that
you want to open using the up arrow key (“space-1”) or the down
arrow key (“space-4”), and press “enter” when the desired URL is
displayed on the Braille display. You can go to a specific web page
either by typing in a new address, or by selecting one of the
previously entered addresses.
If the Braille Sense Plus B32 cannot connect to the desired web page,
and it only shows progress on the Braille display, press “backspace-
enter” to stop connecting, and call up “open URL” again. You can
type in the address and try to connect again. You can stop the Web
Browser from connecting by pressing “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).
Sometimes, this can happen due to network or Internet problems.
10.1.2 Open
In order to enter into “open,” press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to
call up the “menu,” and press “enter” on “file.” Go to “open” by
pressing “space-4,” and press “enter.” Or, you can press “enter-o
(dots 1-3-5)” when the Web Browser is active. Then the “open dialog
box” will show up.
“Open dialog box” consists of “file list,” “file name,” “type,” “confirm”
button and “cancel” button. You can move among those controls by
pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2).” When the “open
dialog box” is opened, “file name” will be focused. Type in a file name,
and press “enter,” or press “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to move to the file
list. Select the desired file name, and press “enter.”
The default folder is “/flashdisk/download,” and it can be changed by
the same method as explained in the “file manager.”
There are three types of files in “file type”; “*.*,” “htm,” “html.” Default
is “*.*” and it means that all types of files will be shown in the file list.
215
At the “file type,” press “space-1” or “space-4” to select the file type.
In order to check the current path, press “space-3-4.” You can use
this command in the following dialog boxes: “save as,” “add to
favorite,” and the “favorite list.”
10.1.3 Save As
In order to execute “save as,” call up the “menu” by pressing “space-
m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and press “enter” on “file.” Move to “save as”
by pressing “space-4” and press “enter,” or press “space-s (dots 2-3-
4)” while the Web Browser is activated. When you press “enter” on
“save as,” the “save as” dialog box will appear. Here you can type in
a new file name, and press “enter” to save the file as a new file.
“Save as” will give you the opportunity to save html files with different
file names. This is similar to “save as” in the word processor.
In this dialog box, there are “file name” edit combo box, “type” combo
box, “confirm” button, “cancel” button and “file list.” You can move
among these items by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-
1-2).”
The first item to be displayed when “save as” is executed is “file
name” edit combo box. You can type in the file name to be saved in
this edit box.
If you want to edit the file name that is displayed on the Braille display,
press the cursor routing key that corresponds with the text that you
want to edit. Please remember that “:” cannot be used in file names.
You have to delete “:” if there is one in your file name.
If you want to select the file name from the existing file name, press
“shift-tab (space-1-2)” to move to “file list.” The default folder is
“/flashdisk/download.” In order to move to upper level, press
“backspace” and if you want to enter the selected folder or select a
file, press “enter” on the folder or file that you want to select. And
press “space-4” or “space-1” in order to move next or previous folder
or file.
There is a “type” option combo box that is the next item of “file name”
edit combo box. You can move from “file name” to “type” by pressing
“space-4-5.” The available file types are htm, html, brl, brf and txt file
216
format. Use “space-4” or “space-1” to select the file type that you
want.
Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to “confirm” and press “enter” to save
as the file name and type as selected. Or, press “tab” again to move
to “cancel” and press “enter” to cancel “save as.”
If you do not want to save with a new file name, press “escape
(“space-e”)” or “exit (“space-z”).”
10.1.4 Page Information
“Page information” shows how many tables, links, and controls are in
the current page.
In order to enter into “page information,” press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
to call up the “menu,” and press “enter” on “file.” Move to “page
information” by pressing “space-4” a few times, and then press
“enter.” Or, you can press the letter “I (dots 2-4).”
“Page information” can be shown in one line. However, if there are
too many characters to be displayed, you will need to press the scroll
button to read the additional lines.
10.1.5 Exit
This command terminates the Web Browser, and returns the Braille
Sense Plus B32 to the program list. You can exit from the Web
Browser by pressing “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6),” or by selecting “exit”
from the Web Browser file menu.
10.2 Read
The “read” menu can read the page generally. In order to call up the
“read” menu, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and press “enter” on
“read” or press “r.”
The “read” menu has three submenus:
1) Read from beginning to cursor
2) Read from cursor to end
217
3) Auto scroll
You can move between the menus by pressing “space-4” or “space-
1.” To execute the menu, press “enter.”
10.2.1 Read from Beginning to Cursor
This function will read the current page from the beginning to the
cursor location.
To execute this function, press “enter” on “read from beginning to
cursor” in the “read” menu. Or, you can press “backspace-g (1-2-4-
5)” when you open a web page.
If you want to quit this function before the cursor location, press
“backspace-enter.” If you execute this function, the Braille display
and LCD change to correspond with the voice output.
10.2.2 Read from Cursor to End
This function will read the current page from the cursor to the end of
the current page.
To execute it, press “enter” on “read from cursor to end” in the “read”
menu. Or you can press “enter-g (1-2-4-5)” when you open a web
page.
If you want to quit this function before the end of the current page,
press “backspace-enter.” If you execute this function, the Braille
display and LCD change to correspond with the voice output.
10.2.3 Auto Scroll
This function will scroll the current page from the cursor to the end of
the current page.
To execute the “auto scroll” function, press “enter” on “auto scroll” in
the “read” menu. Or, you can press the up and down scroll buttons
simultaneously when you open a web page.
218
If you quit this function before the end of current page, you can press
“backspace-enter.”
If you execute this function, the Braille display and LCD change to
correspond with the voice output.
For a faster scroll during scrolling, press “space-6.” For a slower
scroll during scrolling, press the “space-3.”
10.3 Edit
“Edit” menu is used to copy any part of the web page or add it to the
clipboard.
In order to call up the “edit” menu, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and
press “enter” on “edit” or press “e (dots 1-5).”
10.3.1 Start selection
This command cannot be used on the controls in the web page, but
can be used on the text or on the edit box. This means that it cannot
be used on the links when setting the block, but it can be used to
make selection to make a block on the text or on the edit box of the
bulletin board.
In order to use this command, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, move to
“edit” menu by pressing “space-4” and press “enter” at the starting
point of selection. And press “enter” on the “start selection.” Then
move to the end of selection that you want to select.
You can also set the starting point of the block by pressing “enter-b
(dots 1-2)” without calling up the menu.
10.3.2 Copy
The selected part of the web page can be copied to the edit box in
the web page, word documents or the edit box of the other programs.
To copy the selected part of the web page, press “space-m (dots 1-3-
4),” move to the “edit” menu by pressing “space-4” and press “enter.”
And move to “copy” by pressing “space-4” and press “enter” on
“copy.” Or you can copy the selected part by pressing “enter-c (dots
1-4)” without calling up the menu.
219
10.3.3 Add to clipboard
You can copy various parts of the web page to the clipboard, and
then you can copy them to the edit box or the other program at once.
In order to add the selected parts of the web page by pressing
“space-m (dots 1-3-4),” move to “edit” menu by pressing “space-4”
and press “enter.” And press “space-4” to move to the “add to
clipboard” and press “enter.” Or you can add to the clipboard by
pressing “enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)” without calling up the menu.
10.3.4 Copy URL
When you use the “copy URL” function you can copy the address of
the web page that you are on.
In order to copy the address of web page, you press the “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)”, move to “edit” menu by pressing “space-4” and press
“enter.” And press “space-4” to move to the “copy URL” and press
“enter.” Or you can copy to URL by pressing “backspace-d (dots 1-4-
5)” without calling up the menu.
The web address of the page will then be placed on the clipboard.
You can paste it to a document, or wherever you can paste text on
the Braille Sense Plus B32.
10.3.5 Copy Link
The “copy link” function allows you to copy a link in the web page that
you are on. For example, if you tab (“space 4-5”) to a link, and select
the “copy link” function, then the link will be copied to the clipboard.
In order to copy a link in the web page, you press the “space-m (dots
1-3-4)”, move to “edit” menu by pressing “space-4” and press “enter.”
And press “space-4” to move to the “copy link” and press “enter.” Or
you can copy to link by pressing “backspace-l (dots 1-2-3)” without
calling up the menu.
The link will then be placed on the clipboard, so that you can paste it
to a document, or wherever you can paste text in the Braille Sense
Plus B32.
220
10.4 Go To
In order to enter into the “go to” menu, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
or “F2,” and go to “go to” by pressing “space-4.” Then, press “enter.”
The sub menus are explained in the following sections.
10.4.1 Go to Home Page
The first page that your Web Browser loads when the Web Browser
opens is called the “home page.” You can set your favorite site as
your home page. As soon as your “home page” is set, your Web
Browser will show you the same “home page” every time you start the
Web Browser.
The default home page is www.braillesense.com. In order to move to
the home page while you are reading another web page, press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and go to the “go to” menu by
pressing “space-4,” and press “enter.” The first sub menu in the “go
to” menu is “go to home page.” You can activate “go to home page”
by pressing “enter,” or by pressing “backspace-h (dots 1-2-5)” while
your Web Browser is opened.
10.4.2 Go to Previous Page
The previous page is the page shown just before the current page.
For example, when the Web Browser is activated, the first page that
opens is the home page that is set as the default home page on the
Braille Sense Plus B32. You can search and load the web page of
Yahoo, which is www.yahoo.com. Then, the Braille Sense Plus B32
will connect to the Yahoo web page. When “go to previous page” is
activated, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will show you the last position in
the previous page (the home page) that was displayed before the
current page.
In order to move to the previous page, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
or “F2” to call up the “menu,” and go to the “go to” menu by pressing
“space-4,” and press “enter.” Go to “go to previous page” by pressing
“space-4,” and then press “enter.” Or, you can press “backspace-p
(dots 1-2-3-4)” or “backspace” with the left arrow key (“space-3”).
This command does not work on the first page in the Braille Sense
221
Plus B32 because there is no previous page when you first open the
Web Browser.
10.4.3 Go to Next Page
When you have opened multiple web pages, you can go back and
forth from the current page to the previous page, or to the next page.
For example, when you first open the Web Browser, you connect to
your home page. Then, you connect to the web site of Yahoo, and
next, you connect to the Lycos web site. In this case, the next page
from the Yahoo web site is the Lycos web site.
In order to move to the next page, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2” to call up the menu, and then go to the “go to” menu by pressing
“space-4.” Then, press “enter.” Go to the “go to next page” by
pressing “space-4,” and press “enter,” or you can press “backspace-n
(dots 1-3-4-5)” or “backspace” with the right arrow key (“space-6”).
This command does not work on the last page because there is no
page after the last page.
10.4.4 Go to Previous Heading
If you activate the “go to previous heading” function, you can go to a
heading that is located before your current location. To execute the
“go to previous heading” function, open the menu by pressing “space-
m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and press “space-4” repeatedly to move to
the “go to” menu. Press “enter” on “go to.” Then, use “space-1” or
“space-4” to move to “go to previous heading,” and press “enter.” Or,
press “u (dots 1-3-6)” in the submenu. To activate this function
without opening up the menu, press “backspace-b (dots 1-2)” while in
a web page.
10.4.5 Go to Next Heading
If you activate the “go to next heading” function, you can go forward
to a heading from your current location. To execute the “go to next
heading” function, open up the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” or “F2,” and press “space-4” repeatedly to move to the “go to”
menu. Press “enter” on “go to.” Then, use “space-1” or “space-4” to
move to “go to next heading.” Then, press “enter” on “go to next
heading.” Or, just press “d (dots 1-4-5)” in the submenu. You can
222
also activate this function without opening up the menu by pressing
“backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)” while you are in a web page.
10.4.6 Go to Previous/Next Text
This menu can be used to go to the next text or the previous text
while you are reading the web page.
In order to execute the “go to next text” menu, do the following:
1) Call up the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.”
2) Move to “go to” by pressing “space-4.”
3) Press “enter” on the “go to” menu
4) Press “space-4” until “go to next text” will be displayed. Or, you can
press “a (dots 1)” in order to move to “go to next text” directly.
5) Press “enter” on “go to next text.”
Or you can call up the “go to next text” menu by pressing “space-1-2-
4-5-6” while the web page is being read.
In order to execute “go to previous text” menu, do the following:
1) Call up the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.”
2) Move to “go to” by pressing “space-4.”
3) Press “enter” on the “go to” menu
4) Press “space-4” until “go to previous text” is displayed. Or, you
can press “b (dot 1-2)” in order to move to “go to previous text”
directly.
5) Press “enter” on “go to previous text.”
Or, you can call up the “go to previous text” menu by pressing
“space-2-4-6” while a web page is being read.
10.4.7 Refresh
If a web page opens incorrectly due to a network problem, or if you
want to refresh the current page, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2,” and go to the “go to” menu by pressing “space-4.” Then, press
“enter.” Go to “refresh” by pressing “space-4,” and press “enter,” or
you can press “enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)” without calling up the menu.
223
10.4.8 History
The “history” is the list of the web page addresses (and their titles)
that have been visited either by clicking on a link or by typing in the
address directly. When “history” is executed, the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will display the titles of the web pages in the history list.
If you have visited a web page such as www.yahoo.com previously,
The history list on the Braille Sense Plus B32 will show you the title of
the page as, “Yahoo!.”
In order to visit the Yahoo web site by using the history list, first,
press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call up the “menu,” and go to the “go
to” menu by pressing “space-4.” Then, press “enter.” Go to “history”
by pressing “space-4,” and press “enter.” You can always open the
history list by pressing “enter-h (dots 1-2-5)” while the Web Browser
is running. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will show the history list.
Move to the title of the web site that you want to select by pressing
“space-4” or “space-1.” If you want the “history” list to show the web
address, instead of the title, of the website, you can press “space-I
(dots 2-4).” If you press “space-4,” the display will show the title
again, instead of the address. After you move to the desired web site,
you should then press “enter” to connect to that web site.
In order to delete an undesired item from the history list, select that
item on the history list, and press the “del key (space-d (dots 1-4-5)).”
And if you want to delete the all file in history list, press the “enter-a
(dot 1)” and press “space-d (dots 1-4-5).”
The maximum number of items in the history list is 300. If the list
exceeds 300 items, the oldest item will be deleted automatically from
the history list, and the new item will be added as the first item on the
list.
10.4.9 Find
This feature is similar to the function of “find” in the word processor.
The “find dialog box” will allow you to find text on the current web
page.
224
In order to execute the “find” menu, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2” to call up the menu, and go to the “go to” menu by pressing
“space-4.” Then, press “enter.” Go to “find” by pressing “space-4,”
and press “enter,” or you can press “space-f (dots 1-2-4)” while the
Web Browser is loaded.
When “find” is executed, the dialog box that contains the edit window
for entering text and the searching direction will appear. As in any
other dialog box, you can press the “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”)” to move from one control to another. Enter the text to
search for, and select the search direction. Then, press “enter.” The
Braille Sense Plus B32 will then find the text, and move the cursor
position to the text.
The default search direction is set to “forward.” This means that the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will search for the specified text from the
current cursor position to the end of the page. If you want to change
the search direction, select “backward,” and then press “enter.” The
selected search direction will remain until the Web Browser is closed,
unless you choose the other direction.
10.4.10 Find Again
The “find again” function searches the text again in the direction that
you have selected. In order to enter into “find again,” press “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and go to the “go to” menu by pressing “space-
4.” Then, press “enter.” Move to “find again” by pressing “space-4.”
Then, press “enter.” Or, you can press “enter-f (dots 1-2-4),” which is
the hot key for “find again” while the Web Browser is running.
“Find again” finds the text that you have entered in “find.” There is no
edit box in “find again.” If you want to find another key word, you
should use the “find” function explained as in section 10.4.9.
10.4.11 Link List
This function will list all the links in the current page. If you want to
activate it, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” and press “enter” on “link list”
in “go to” menu. Or without calling up the menu, press “backspace-i
(dots 2-4).” Then you will see “link list dialog box.” In the dialog box,
225
you can find the following controls: “link list,” “focus link” button,
“activate link” button, and “cancel” button. You can move control by
control by pressing “space-4-5” or “space-1-2.” In the “link list,” you
can move by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.”
If you want to move to the selected page in “link list,” press “enter” on
the link of focus in “link list.” Or move to “activate link” button by
pressing “space-4-5” or “space-1-2” and press “enter” there.
If you want to go to the link position selected in “link list,” move to
“focus link” button by pressing “space-4-5,” and press “enter” there.
To close the dialog box, move to “cancel” button, and press “enter”
there. Or just press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or press “space-e (dots
1-5).”
10.5 Favorites
In order to enter into “favorites,” press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,”
and move to “favorites” by pressing “space-4,” and press “enter.” If
there are web sites that you frequently visit, it would be very
inconvenient to enter the long address every time. In such a case,
you can add these web site addresses in the “favorites” list. Then,
you can visit the web sites that are stored in your “favorites” list by
simply selecting the address in the “favorites” list.
10.5.1 Set Current As Your Home Page
The “home page” is the web site that you connect to automatically
when the Web Browser is opened. The user can set any web site as
the home page.
In order to set the “home page,” you have to go to the web page that
you want to register as the home page. While the web page is
displayed, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and move to
“favorites” by pressing “space-4.” Then, press “enter.” Then “set
current as your home page” will be displayed on the Braille display
and press “enter.” Then, the current web site will be registered as
your home page automatically, and the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
say “registered,” and it displays the current web page. Or, you can
press “enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” without calling up menu.
226
10.5.2 Add To Favorites
You can add the web page that you are reading now to the “favorites”
list. In order to add the web page to the “favorites” list, press “space-
m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and move to “favorites” by pressing “space-4.”
Then, press “enter.” Then, move to “add to favorites” by pressing
“space-4,” and then press “enter.” You can activate “add to favorites”
by pressing “backspace-a (dot 1)” when the Web Browser is running.
“Add to favorites” is a dialog box that contains the following: a list box
that shows the current favorites list (including the folders and files of
your favorites), an edit window for the web page address where you
can enter, type, confirm, and cancel. You can move from one item to
the next by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”.
When you open “add to favorites,” the edit window will appear first. In
this edit window, you can type in the title of the current web page that
you are reading. The extension name (.URL) will be attached
automatically to the title name that you have written.
If you want to edit only a part of the current title name, press the
cursor routing key that is furthest to the left. Then, the current title
name will be displayed on the Braille display. You can press the
cursor routing key where you want to edit the text, and then modify it.
Make sure that you do not use “:” in the title name.
The favorites list will be saved in the “/flashdisk/favorite” folder. This
folder is the default folder, and you cannot make your desired folder
above this folder (a higher level folder).
If you want to add your “favorites” list to the folder you made, rather
than the default folder, press “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”, and select the
desired folder by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” Then, press
“enter.”
10.5.3 Favorites List
You can check the list of the web sites that are saved in “add to
favorites.” The user can copy, delete, or rename the title of the sites
in the favorites list.
227
In order to open the “favorites” list, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and
move to “favorites” by pressing “space-4.” Then, press “enter.” Move
to the “favorites list” by pressing “space-4,” and press “enter.” Or,
you can press “enter-l (dots 1-2-3)” while the Web Browser is running.
When you press these keys, the Braille Sense Plus B32, will display
the favorites list dialog box. This dialog box contains the following:
the favorites list, an edit window for the title, a type combo box, a
confirm button, and a cancel button. You can move from one item to
the next by pressing the “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”.
When the “favorites list” is open, an edit window will appear first. The
edit window will display the message, “name:.” You can enter one of
the titles that you have entered previously. You can open the web
page by pressing “enter” after entering the title. If there are no titles
that match the one you entered, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say
“invalid name” and return to the edit window. If there is a title in the
“favorites list,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will connect to the web
page.
If you do not remember the exact title, you can find it from the
“favorites” list, using the method that is outlined below.
When the edit window appears, press “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” in
order to move to the “favorites list.” Then the Braille Sense Plus B32
will display the “favorites list.” You can move between folders and
files by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.”
Press “enter” on the title of the web site that you want to visit. On this
list, folders are enclosed by quotation marks. When you press “enter”
on the folder, you can get into the folder.
You can also edit the titles in the “favorites list.” When the title name
is displayed on your display, press the following hot keys and enter
your desired text.
In the favorite list, you can find only the files with the file format that
was selected in the “type” combo box. Press “tab (space-4-5)” to
move to “type” combo box. In the type combo box, there are two
kinds of file formats; “*.*” and “url.” Press “space-1” or “space-4”
select one out of these two file formats. If you select “*.*” then all
types of files will be shown.
228
10.6 Options
Using the “options” menu, you can select the type that is gets the web
page.
In order to execute the option menu, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4),”
and move to “options” pressing “space-4.” Then, press “enter.”
Or, you can press “backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)” while the web browser
is running. When you press these keys, the Braille Sense Plus B32
open the “options dialog box.” And it will tell the “user agent: windows
CE.” You can select one in the “windows XP”, “windows CE” and
“pocket PC,” using the “space” key.
After you select the value that you want, press “enter.” The “option
dialog box” is closed, and the Braille Sense Plus B32 will open the
web page which you chosen type.
10.7 Read Page
On the web page, there are links, controls, and other various
elements, as well as text. In order to read web pages properly, the
Web Browser should classify each element, and notify the user with
its information.
When reading a web page by moving with “space-4” or “space-1,”
one element will be displayed on one line. The links and controls will
be displayed with their respective symbols for the user to distinguish
each element.
There is a more detailed explanation of this feature within this section.
10.7. Moving Between Controls
A control is a link, an edit box, a radio button, or a combo box. These
same controls are found in Windows on a personal computer. Web
pages also use various kinds of controls for user input. Each control
has different purposes. Therefore, the user has to know exactly what
type of control is being used. For example, in an edit box, the user
enters a text string. In a combo box and list box, the user should
select one of the items listed in the combo box or list box. The Braille
Sense Plus B32 Web Browser uses symbols to identify what type of
control is being used. In order to move from one control to another
229
without reading the text in between controls, the Braille Sense Plus
B32 provides the following “move to control” methods:
1) Move to the previous control: “Shift-tab (space-1-2)”
This command moves to the nearest previous control from the
current position. If there are no more previous controls, the
warning sound will be played.
2) Move to the next control: “Tab (space-4-5)”
This command moves to the next control from the current position.
If there are no more controls, the warning sound will be played.
When you find controls in web pages, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
show control symbols ahead of the contents of the control. The
followings are a list of control symbols.
Control name Symbol
Link LN
Anchor ANC
Edit box EB
Multi edit box MEB
List Box LB
Combo box CB
Radio button select SRB
Radio button
unselect URB
Check box check SCHB
Check box uncheck UCHB
Button BT
1) Link: If you press “enter” on link, you will move to the page that
the link is referencing.
2) Anchor: If you press “enter” on anchor, you will move to the
referenced part of the web page.
3) Edit box: You can start entering the text at the cursor position.
After you finish entering the text, press “space-4” to move to the
next item. If there is any text in the edit box, it will be spoken and
displayed on the Braille display.
4) Multi edit box: This is similar to the edit box. It is an edit box that
allows you to enter plural lines in one edit box. You can start a
230
new line by pressing “enter.” After you finish entering the text,
press “tab (space-4-5)” in order to move to the next item.
5) List box, combo box: In order to change a selection in the combo
box, press “backspace-space-4” or “backspace-space-1.” You can
move to the next item by pressing “space-4.”
6) Radio button, check box: In order to select or cancel the selection,
press “enter.”
7) Button: If you press “enter” on a button, you will move to the
referenced page.
10.7.2 Moving to a Form
A “form” is a page that has all of the controls, except the “link” control.
The edit windows, buttons, and combo boxes are included in a “form.”
When you navigate some web pages, if there are many links, it would
be very cumbersome to navigate to a form because you would have
to push too many “tab” or “shift-tab” keys to get to a form. In this
case, you can use the “moving to the form” function.
1) Move to the previous form: Space-1-2-3-4-6
You can move to the previous form by pressing this key. If there
are no previous forms, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will play the
warning sound.
2) Move to the next form: Space-1-3-4-5-6
You can move to the next form by pressing this key. If there are
no more forms. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will play the warning
sound.
If there are no forms on a web page, the Braille Sense Plus B32
will say, “no control.”
10.7.3 Table
At the beginning position of the table, the Braille Sense Plus B32
shows the table number, and the number of rows and columns on the
table.
For example, there are two big tables (we call these “upper level
tables”) on one web page. Each table has 3 sub tables (we call these
“lower level tables”) with 3 rows and 2 columns on each. In this case,
when the Braille Sense Plus B32 shows the first sub table on the
231
second big table, it displays “table 2-1 3 rows, 2 columns.” At the end
of the sub table, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display “table 2-1.”
If the table consists of only 1 row and 1 column, or empty space that
has only border or background, such tables are not considered tables
in the Braille Sense Plus B32.
The Braille Sense Plus B32 provides a way to move table by table,
and cell by cell, in order for the user to comprehend the structure of
the table. In order to move cell by cell, the cell position and contents
of the cell will be displayed. However, the position information will
only be announced in voice.
For example, if you have move to a cell that is positioned on the
second row and third column, and the content of the cell is “news,”
the Braille Sense Plus B32 will announce, “row 2 cell 3 news.” In this
case, “row 2 cell 3” will be announced in voice only, while “news” will
be displayed in Braille.
If a table is included in the cell, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
announce “table cell.” If there is not a table in the cell, you will hear
“empty cell.”
In the “table cell,” if you want to move to any cell within the lower level
table, press “space-4” to move to the starting line of the lower level
table.
Moving by cell is only valid in the table. If this command is executed
outside of the table, a warning sound will be played.
1) Move to the previous table: Space-3-4-5-6
It moves to the starting position of the previous table. If there are
no previous tables, the warning sound will be played.
2) Move to the next table: Space-1-4-5-6
It moves to the starting position of the next table. If there are no
more tables, the warning sound will be played.
3) Move to the previous cell: Space-2-3
It moves to the previous cell. If the current cell is the first cell, it
will move to the starting line of the table. If this command is
232
pressed on the starting line of the table, the warning sound will be
played.
4) Move to next cell: Space-5-6
It moves to the next cell. If the current cell is the last cell, it moves
to the end line of the table. If it is pressed on the end line of the
table, the warning sound will be played.
5) Move to upper cell: Space-3-5
It moves to the cell in the previous row within the same column. If
the current cell is on the first row, the warning sound will be played.
6) Move to lower cell: Space-2-6
It moves to the cell in the next line, within the same column. If the
current cell is on the last row, the warning sound will be played.
7) Current cell: Space-2-3-5-6
It announces and displays the content of the current cell again.
8) Move to the previous cell in the upper level table: Backspace-2-3
It moves to the previous cell from the current cell that contains the
current table. If the current table cell is the first cell of the highest
level table, it will show the starting line of the table. It does not
work on the highest level table.
9) Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Backspace-5-6
It moves to the next cell from the current cell that contains the
current table. If the current table cell is the last cell in the highest
level table, it moves to the end line of the table. It does not work
on the highest level table.
10) Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Backspace-3-5
It moves to the previous row, within the same column, to the table
cell that contains current table. If the cell that contains the current
table is located on the first row of the upper level table, the
warning sound will be played. It does not work on the highest
level table.
11) Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-6
It moves to the next row, within the same column, to the table cell
that contains the current table. If the table cell that contains
current table is at the last row of the upper level table, the warning
sound will be played. It does not work on the highest level table.
12) Check the position: Space-1-5-6
It announces the position of the current cell in the table. It shows
the position in both Braille and voice, such as “table 2-3 row 3, cell
4.”
233
10.7.4 Move to the Frame
1) Move to the previous frame: Space-3-4-6
It moves to the starting position of the previous frame. If there are
no previous frames, the warning sound will be played.
2) Move to the next frame: Space-1-4-6
It moves to the starting position of the next frame. If there are no
more frames, the warning sound will be played.
10.7.5 Playback of Streaming Audio Files
When you come across a link for a streaming audio file, pressing
“enter” on the link plays the file, and opens the “add to favorites”
dialog box where you can add the link to your “favorites list.” You can
download real audio files but not play them in the Web Browser.
Streaming audio files that were added in the “add to favorites” dialog
box will appear in “favorites list” with “ASF-” in front of the file names.
“ASF” denotes that the link is a streaming audio file. Streaming audio
files only can be played while the Braille Sense Plus B32’s “Web
Browser” is open and connected to the web. The following are the
playback commands for streaming audio files, and these commands
only work in the “Web Browser.”
1) Pause/Replay: “Play” button on the front panel
2) Stop: “Stop” button on the front panel
3) Turn up the volume: Space-up scroll button
4) Turn down the volume: Space-down scroll button
5) Five seconds back: “Previous” button on the front panel
6) Five seconds forward: “Next” button on the front panel
Playback of a streaming audio file does not stop if you switch to
another program or go to other web pages, until you press the “stop
button” on the front panel while you are in the “Web Browser.”
10.8 Hot keys in the Web Browser
File Menu
Open URL: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
234
Information: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Read Menu
Read from beginning to cursor: Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Read from cursor to end: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Auto scroll: Up scroll button-down scroll button
Edit menu
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Add to clipboard: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Copy URL: Backspace-d (dots 1-4-5)
Copy link: Backspace-l (dots 1-2-3)
Go to menu
Go to the home page: Backspace-h (dots 1-2-5)
Go to the previous page: Backspace-space-3 or backspace-p (dots
1-2-3-4)
Go to the next page: Backspace-space-6 or backspace-n (dots 1-3-
4-5)
Go to previous heading: Backspace-b (dots 1-2)
Go to next heading: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)
Go to previous text: Space-2-4-6
Go to next text: Space-1-2-4-5-6
Refresh: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Open the history list: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5)
Check the address of the selected title in the history list: Space-I
(dots 2-4)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Link list: Backspace-I (dots 2-4)
Favorites
Set current as your home page: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Add to favorites: Backspace-a (dot 1)
Favorites list: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Options setting: backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)
235
Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in the Web Browser
Turn up the volume: Space-up scroll button
Turn down the volume: Space-down scroll button
Five seconds before: Previous button of the front panel
Five seconds after: Next button of the front panel
Pause/Replay: Play button of the front panel
Stop: Stop button of the front panel
Reading Web Pages
Move between controls
Move to the previous control: Shift-tab (space-1-2)
Move to the next control: Tab (space-4-5)
Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Backspace-space-4
Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Backspace-
space-1
Moving to the form
Move to the previous form: Space-1-2-3-4-6
Move to the next form: Space-1-3-4-5-6
Table navigation hot keys
Move to the previous table: Space-3-4-5-6
Move to the next table: Space-1-4-5-6
Move to the previous cell: Space-2-3
Move to the next cell: Space-5-6
Move to the upper cell: Space-3-5
Move to the lower cell: Space-2-6
Read current cell: Space-2-3-5-6
Move to the previous cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-3
Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Backspace-5-6
Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Backspace-3-5
Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-6
Check the current position: Space-1-5-6
Move to frame
Move to the previous frame: Space-3-4-6
Move to the next frame: Space-1-4-6
Read the current line: Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
236
10.9 What the Web Browser Does Not Support
1) Images are not supported.
2) Any executable files on web sites cannot be executed. It is
because the operating system on the Braille Sense Plus B32 is
different from the operating system on a personal computer.
3) A web page using flash can be opened, but the flash content may
not be read.
4) Some web pages that use JavaScript cannot be opened.
237
11. DAISY Player
Using the DAISY Player, on the Braille Sense Plus B32, you can
listen to files and read books that use the DAISY format. DAISY is an
acronym for (DIGITAL ACCESSIBLE INFORMATION SYSTEM).
One advantage to DAISY books is that you can listen to the audio as
well as read the associated text with the audio. The Braille Sense
Plus B32 supports DAISY books that are version 3.0 or earlier. When
you want to run the player, press “enter” on “DAISY Player” in the
“program” menu, or press the shortcut key “d (dots 1-4-5)” in the
Braille Sense Plus B32 “program” menu. When you run the DAISY
Player, you will see all of the disks available on the Braille Sense Plus
B32 (regardless of whether each disk has DAISY-formatted files or
not). You can navigate through the list with “space-1” or “space-4.”
You can open a disk containing DAISY-formatted files by pressing
“enter” on the name of the disk. After opening the disk, you will find
all of the folders that are on the disk, and any DAISY file titles that are
on the disk that you have opened. Once you find a DAISY file that
you want to open, press “space” to select it. Then, press “enter” to
play the file.
If you have DAISY files in a folder on a disk, you can go in to the
folder by pressing “enter” on the folder. Make sure that you do not
press “space” on the folder. You will find all of the folders on the disk,
and you can navigate through the disk by using the same navigation
keys that are used in the file manager. Then, you can go to the folder
that has the DAISY files that you want to read or listen to. Press
“space” to select the folder, and press “enter” to play the DAISY file.
If you only have one DAISY file, it will automatically start playing after
showing the title.You can play the DAISY file by pressing “enter” on
the selected file after navigating the file list with “space-1” or “space-
4.” If you replay a file that you have listened to before, you can start
listening to the file at the location where you stopped earlier. To stop
playing a file, press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6),” which will move you to
the prompt box. Once there, you can select “yes” or “no” with “space”
or “backspace.” When you want to exit from the DAISY Player, press
“space-z (dots 1-3-5-6),” which will move you to the prompt box.
Once in the prompt box, you can select “yes” or “no” with “space” or
“backspace.”
238
You can open the DAISY Player menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2” when you are in the DAISY Player. In the menu, you will
find “file,” “document,” “mark,” and “heading.” You can move
between these menu items with “space-1” or “space-4,” and press
“enter” when you want to activate the selected menu item.
You can also play the DAISY contents using the audio buttons on the
front panel. In order to use the audio buttons to control the DAISY
player, the audio mode switch that was explained in the Section 2.11
(Switching audio mode) should be set to DAISY mode that is the
center of the audio mode switch. Once the audio mode is set to
DAISY mode, you can play the DAISY contents by pressing “play”
button on the front panel. Also you can pause the DAISY player by
pressing “play” button on the front panel when playing the DAISY
contents. How to use the audio buttons to control the DAISY player is
explained in the following sections.
11.1 Components of the DAISY Player
While running the DAISY Player, you will find four controls
components: “heading,” “information,” “play,” and “pause.” You can
move between the controls with “tab (“F3” or “space-4-5”)” or “shift-
tab (“space-F3” or “space-1-2”).” While playing a file in the DAISY
Player, you will find a “heading,” which will show you a prefixed
heading or affixed text if one has been prepared. In “information,”
you can find the current page, level, phrase, elapsed time, and
running time. You can move between these items with “space-1” or
“space-4.” You can press “enter” on “pause” or “play,” which will let
you pause or play the audio. If you are anywhere in the four control
components, you can play or pause by pressing “space.”
11.2 File
When in the “file” menu, you can open a new DAISY file, check file
information on the file that is currently open, and set voice
parameters. You can open the “file” menu by pressing “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and then press “enter” on “file.” Or, you can
press “f (dots 1-2-4).” In the “file” menu, you will find items such as,
“open DAISY,” “voice settings,” “book-info,” and “exit.” You can move
239
between these items with “space-1” or “space-4.” You can activate
the selected item by pressing “enter.”
11.2.1 Open DAISY
You can open another DAISY file with using “open DAISY.” To get to
“open DAISY,” press “space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu, and
then press “tab (“space-4-5”) until you hear “open DAISY.” Or, you
can use the hot key “enter-o (dots 1-3-5)” without pressing “space-m
(dots1-3-4).”
When you activate “open DAISY,” you can see the disk list while
pausing or playing a file. Once here, you can open a file, as
explained above in section 11.
You can open “open DAISY” dialog box by long pressing “stop” button
when play or pause the DAISY contents. And if you long press the
“stop” button again, this dialog box will close. And then return to the
previous position.
“Play” button is same function as “enter” in “open DAISY” dialog box.
Also “stop” button, “record” button, “previous” button and “next” button
is same function as “backspace”, “space”, “space-1” and “space-4” in
“open DAISY” dialog box.
Namely, you can move to up and down by pressing “previous” and
“next” button in list of “open DAISY” dialog box. And you can select
and unselect by pressing “record” button. If you press “stop” button,
you can move to upper folder. And if you press “play” button, you can
play the selected file in file list of “open DAISY” dialog box.
In order to use this function, you must set the audio mode switch to
“DAISY mode.”
11.2.2 Voice Settings
In the “voice settings,” you can set the DAISY Player voice
parameters. Press “space-m (dots1-3-4)” or “F2,” and navigate to
“voice settings,” which is located under the “file” menu. Or, you can
activate the “voice settings” by pressing the hot key “enter-s (dots 2-
3-4).” If you activate “voice settings,” you can open the “voice
settings” dialog box without stopping the file that is currently playing.
In the dialog box, you will find the “voice control” tab with “set speed,”
“set volume,” a “confirm” button, and a “cancel” button. You can
240
move between the three controls with “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab
(space-1-2).” In “voice control,” you can move between “set speed”
and “set volume” with “space-1” or “space-4.” You can increase the
levels of speed and volume with “space,” and decrease them with
“backspace.” After setting the levels, press “enter” to confirm your
choice. Without using the “voice settings” menu, you can increase or
decrease the speed with “dots 3-4-5” or “dots 1-2-6.” You can also
control the volume by pressing “space-up scroll button” to decrease
the volume or “space-down scroll button” to increase the volume.
11.2.3 Book-Info
Using “book-info,” you can check the information on the file that is
currently playing. Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” and press “enter” on
“file.” Press “space-4” repeatedly to move to “book-info” and press
“enter” on “book-info.” Or you can activate “book-info” by pressing
“enter-i (dots 2-4).” Activating “book-info” will open the “book-info”
dialog box without stopping the playing of the file. In the dialog box,
you will find one state box that contains “running time and pages,”
another state box that contains the “mark information,” and “close.”
You can move between the three controls with “tab (space-4-5)” or
“shift-tab (space-1-2).” In the first state box, you will find “total time,”
“read time,” “remaining time,” “total pages,” “current page,” and
“remaining pages.” In the other state box, you will find the “total
marks” and “mark page.” You can move between the items with
“space-1” or “space-4.” If you want to close the dialog box, press
“enter” on “close,” which will return you to the current file.
11.2.4 Exit
When you want to quit the DAISY Player, press “space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” or “F2,” and press “enter” on “file.” And press “space-4” repeatedly
to move to “exit” and press “enter” on “exit.” Or, you can press
“space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” without using the “exit” menu. While exiting,
you will hear the message “Exit DAISY player. Are you sure?” Then,
press “enter” on “yes,” which is the default; or if you do not want to
exit, you can select “no” by pressing “space,” and then press “enter.”
241
11.3 Document
When in the “document” menu, you can move by phrase or level
while playing. If you want to activate the “document menu,” press
“space-m (dots1-3-4)” and then press “d (dots 1-4-5).” In this menu,
you will find items such as, “play/pause,” “previous phrase,” “next
phrase,” “previous page,” “next page,” “go to page,” “up level,” and
“down level.” You can move between these items with “space-1” or
“space-4.” To activate a menu item, select the menu item, and then
press “enter.”
11.3.1 Play and Pause
You can access “play/pause” in the menu by pressing “space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2,” and then press “enter” on “document.” Then, use
“space-4” to move to “play/pause,” and press “enter.” You can also
activate “play/pause” without calling up the menu by pressing
“space.” While playing, you can move to the beginning of a
document by pressing “space-1-2-3” or “space-1-3.” You can move
to the last phrase by pressing “space-4-5-6” or “space-4-6.”
11.3.2 Move by Phrase
You can access this command in the menu by pressing “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and then press “enter” on “document.” Then,
use “space-4” to move to “previous phrase” or “next phrase,” and
press “enter.” You can move to the next, previous, next fifth, or
previous fifth phrase without calling up the menu by pressing “dot 6,”
“dot 3,” “dot 4,” or “dot 1,” respectively.
Also you can move to the previous or next phrase without calling up
the menu by a short pressing “previous” button or “next” button in the
front panel. In order to move by phrase with “previous” or “next”
button, you must set the audio mode switch to “daisy mode.”
11.3.3 Move by Page
You can access this item in the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2,” and then press “enter” on “document.” Then, use
“space-4” to move to “previous page,” “next page,” or “go to page,”
and press “enter.” You can move to the next or previous page
242
without calling up the menu by pressing “space-3-4-5” or “space-1-2-
6” during play or pause. You can jump to whatever page you want to
go to by pressing “enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5).” If you activate “go to
page,” you will find an edit box asking “move to page number”” Here
you can type in the page number that you want to move to. Press
“enter,” and the Braille Sense Plus B32 will move you to that page.
11.3.4 Move by Level
You can access this function in the menu by pressing “space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2,” and then press “enter” on “document.” Then, use
“space-4” to move to “up level” or “down level,” and press “enter.” Or,
you can go to the upper-level and lower-level without calling up the
menu by pressing “dots 2-3” or “dots 5-6.” You can move to the next
or previous level by pressing “dot 5” or “dot 2” on the present level.
11.4 Mark
When you are in the “mark” menu, you can put in a mark or jump to a
mark while you are playing a file. You can open the “mark” menu by
pressing “space-m (dots1-3-4)” or “F2,” and then “m (dots 1-3-4).”
When you are in the “mark” menu, you will find the following sub-
menus: “previous mark,” “next mark,” “set mark,” “move to mark,”
and “delete mark.” You can move between the sub-menus with
“space-1” or “space-4.”
11.4.1 Previous Mark
The “previous mark” function will allow you to move to a location
where you have placed a mark. If you have passed a mark while
listening to a DAISY Player file, you can move to that mark by using
the “previous mark” function. You can access the “previous mark”
function by pressing “enter” on “mark,” and then move to “previous
mark” by pressing “space-4” and press “enter.” Or just press “p (dots
1-2-3-4)” to execute “previous mark.” Then, press “enter” on
“previous mark.” You can also move to the previous mark by
pressing “space-3” during reading DAISY contents.
243
11.4.2 Next Mark
The “next mark” function will allow you to move to a location where
you have placed a mark. If you have placed a mark in a DAISY
Player file, and you have not yet passed it, you can move to that mark
by using the “next mark” function. You can access the “next mark”
function by pressing “enter” on “mark,” and then move to “next mark”
by pressing “space-4” and press “enter.” Or just press “n (dots 1-3-4-
5)” to execute “next mark.” Then, press “enter” on “next mark.” You
can also move to the previous mark by pressing “space-6” during
reading DAISY contents.
11.4.3 Set Mark
You can set a mark anywhere you want while playing a file. You can
set a mark in the “set mark” menu. Otherwise, you can set a mark by
pressing “enter-m (dots 1-3-4).” You can also activate this function
by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.” Then, press “enter” on
“mark.” Use “space-4” to move to “set mark,” and then press “enter.”
Or press “m (dots 1-3-4)” when you are in the “mark” menu. The “set
mark” dialog box will then open, which will ask you to “enter mark
name:.” You can only use one letter, in ASCII, as a mark name.
11.4.4 Move to Mark
Without using the menu, you can move to the next or previous mark
by pressing “space-6” or “space-3” during play/pause. You can also
move to the mark you want by pressing “enter-j (dots 2-4-5).” You
can also access this feature in the menu by pressing “space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or by pressing “F2.” You can then, use “space-4” to move to
“mark,” and press “enter.” Or, you can press “j (dots 2-4-5)” when
you are in the “mark” menu. If you activate the “move to mark”
function, you will find the edit box asking “mark name to move to:.”
Here you can type in the mark name that you want to go to. Make
sure that you have already set a mark. Otherwise, you will not be
able to move to a mark.
244
11.4.5 Deleting a Mark
Without using the menu, you can activate the “delete mark” function
by pressing “space-d (dots 1-4-5).” You can also activate this
function by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.” Then use,
“space-4” to move to “mark,” and press “enter.” Then, use “space-4”
to move to “delete mark,” and press “enter” on “delete mark.” If you
activate the “delete mark” function, an edit box will appear asking,
“enter mark name to delete:.” Make certain that you want to delete
the mark that you have entered. If you type in a mark in this edit box,
the mark name will be deleted without pressing “enter.”
11.5 Heading
When in the “heading” menu, you can move in a document by your
text heading, or you can search a heading while the DAISY Player is
playing. You can open the “heading” menu by pressing “space-m
(dots1-3-4)” or “F2,” and then press “h (dots 1-3-5).” Then, you can
see the sub-menu: “previous heading,” “next heading,” “scan
heading,” “read heading,” “first heading,” “last heading,” “find
heading,” and “find again.” You can move between the sub-menu
items with “space-1” or “space-4.”
11.5.1 Move by Heading
While playing a DAISY file, you can move heading by heading without
using the “heading” menu. You can move to the next, previous, first,
and last heading by pressing “space-5,” “space-2,” “space-2-3,” and
“space-5-6,” respectively.
Also you can move to the previous or next heading without calling up
the menu using audio buttons on the front panel. Before you use this
feature, you have to set the audio mode button on the front panel to
“daisy mode.” In order to move to previous or next heading, press
“previous” or “next” button for about 2 seconds and release it. Then it
will move to the previous or next heading.
11.5.2 Find Heading
You can find any heading you want while playing a DAISY file.
Without using the “find heading” menu, you can activate “find
245
heading” by pressing “space-f (dots 1-2-4).” When you have pressed
this hot key, you will see a dialog box that shows the message,
“heading to find:” You will also see a “search direction:,” a “confirm”
button, and a “cancel” button. You can move between the four items
with “tab (space-dots 4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-dots 1-2).”
At the “heading to find:” edit box, you can input the mark name that
you want to find. And select the searching direction to “previous” or
“next” at “search direction” prompt by pressing “space.”
11.5.3 Scan Heading and Read Heading
While playing a DAISY Player file, you can check your current
heading (or heading list) from your current location to the last heading.
You can scan them by activating the “read heading” or “scan
heading” in the “heading” menu.
Without using the menu (pressing “space-m (dots1-3-4)” and then “h
(dots 1-2-5”)”), you can check the current heading (in the file that is
currently being played) by pressing “enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6).” If you
activate this function, you will see the current heading name and level.
By pressing “enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5),” you can scan the heading list
from the present to the end. If you activate the “scan heading” menu,
you will see the heading list from the present to the end. In the list, if
you find one that you want to listen to, press “enter” or “space” to play
it. Using this method, you are able to skip other headings and play
what you want. If you want to cancel the scan heading function,
press “space-e (dots 1-5)” or “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).” Then, you will
be returned to where you were before.
11.6 Hot Keys in the DAISY Player
Play
Play/Pause: Space
Move to the beginning of document: space-1-3 or space-1-2-3
Move to the last phrase: space-4-6 or space-4-5-6
Increase the speed: dots 3-4-5
Decrease the speed: dots 1-2-6
Increase the volume: Space-up scroll button
Decrease the volume: Space-down scroll button
246
Move by Phrase
Move to the next phrase: dot 6 or short press “next” button
Move to the previous phrase: dot 3 or short press “previous” button
Move to the next fifth phrase: dot 4
Move to the previous fifth phrase: dot 1
Move by page
Move to the next page: Space-3-4-5
Move to the previous page: Space-1-2-6
Go to the page: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Move by level
Move to the upper-level: dots 5-6
Move to the down-level: dots 2-3
Move to the next level at the preset level: dot 5
Move to the previous level at the preset level: dot 2
Move by heading
Move to the next heading: Space-5 or long press “next” button
Move to the previous heading: Space-2 or long press “previous”
button
Move to the last heading: Space-5-6
Move to the first heading: Space-2-3
Check the currently-reading level and heading: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Scan the heading list from the present to the end: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-
5
Heading
Find heading: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Scan heading: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Read heading: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Set mark
Set mark at current position: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Move to the next mark: Space-6
Move to the previous mark: Space-3
Delete mark: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
247
Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Move to the title list: Space-1-2-5-6
Open DAISY file: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Voice setting: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Check the book-info: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
248
12. Bluetooth Manager
The Braille Sense Plus B32 is Bluetooth capable. Bluetooth is the
latest in wireless technology that allows for a Personal Area Network
(PAN). Unlike a traditional Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN),
these networks are limited to approximately 30 feet or less. Bluetooth
enables users to exchange various types of information. In order to
use Bluetooth with the Braille Sense Plus B32, you must change the
Bluetooth option to “on” in the option menu. Please refer to the
section 2.4.2.34 in this user manual.
Bluetooth on the Braille Sense Plus B32 allows you to transfer files
from the Braille Sense Plus B32 to a computer, use the Internet
connection your computer is using, or use the Braille Sense Plus B32
as a wireless Braille display. To use the Braille Sense Plus B32 as a
wireless Braille display, you must be running the screen readers;
Window-Eyes, JAWS or Supernova. Please note that Bluetooth is
currently an evolving standard, and you may experience different
functionality, depending on the operating system that you are using.
The Braille Sense Plus B32 uses the built-in Bluetooth Manager
program to allow the user to use the Bluetooth functionality in the
Braille Sense Plus B32. You can access the Bluetooth Manager in
several ways. To access Bluetooth Manager from the Program menu,
you can either press “space-1” or “space-4” until you hear Bluetooth
Manager, or press the “space” until you get to Bluetooth Manager.
When you hear Bluetooth Manager, press “enter” to activate it. Or,
you can press “l (dots 1-2-3)” to open the Bluetooth Manager from the
“program” menu without having to press “enter” on it.
12.1 Bluetooth Device List
After the Bluetooth Manager has been activated, it will begin
scanning for other Bluetooth devices that are in range, and for the
services available from the other Bluetooth devices. For example, if
you have a computer with Bluetooth enabled nearby, then the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will attempt to find it. It may take a while to find all of
the Bluetooth devices in range, so expect to wait about 30 to 40
seconds for this process to complete. You will hear “Scanning for
249
devices. Please wait…” message and beep sound when this process
begins. And when the Bluetooth device is detected, the Braille Sense
Plus B32 announces “find (Bluetooth device name).” Until the end of
scanning all devices, any keys on the Braille Sense Plus B32 will not
work, and you cannot stop scanning the device. You have to wait until
the completion of the scanning devices.
If Bluetooth option in Option menu set to “off,” or if the Braille Sense
Plus B32 does not recognize it, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say
the message, “Bluetooth not activated.” Then, the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will automatically exit the Bluetooth Manager.
Once the Braille Sense Plus B32 has found other Bluetooth devices
that are in range, they will be displayed as “device name(untrusted
(or trusted)) xx/yy” where xx is the number where the device appears
in the list, and yy is the total number of devices. And “trusted” means
that the service has been authenticated, and “untrusted” means that
the service has not been authenticated.
This part of the Bluetooth Manager is known as the Bluetooth Device
List, and thus, the menu for this section is called the Bluetooth Device
List menu. If there are no other Bluetooth devices in range, the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will say “no list 0/0.” You can press “space-1”
or “space-4” to move through the list. To select the device from the
list, press “enter” on the device name.
If the Bluetooth device trusted, the device setting will be automatically
saved in the memory of the Braille Sense Plus B32. If you want to
delete this setting, you press “enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” on Bluetooth
device name in the Bluetooth Service List. The Braille Sense Plus
B32 will say “Device settings removed.” Removing this setting will
apply only to the current device.
Once the Braille Sense Plus B32 has finished searching for other
Bluetooth devices, you can access the menu by pressing “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or by pressing “F2.” The “Bluetooth Device List menu”
has the “scan device,” “device name” and “exit.” You can navigate the
menu items with “space-1” or “space-4.”
The first menu item is “scan device.” This item allows you to rescan
for other Bluetooth devices. To activate this item, press “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” for “F2” and then press “enter” on “scan device.” You
250
can also access this option by pressing “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” while you
are in the Bluetooth Device List menu, or you can activate it directly
without calling up the menu by pressing “enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5).”
You can access the next item in the menu by pressing “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” and then “space-1” or “space-4” until you get to “device
name,” and press “enter.” You can also press “n (dots 1-3-4-5)” while
you are in the Bluetooth Device List menu to activate “device name.”
This item allows you to give the Braille Sense Plus B32 a specific
name. The default name for the Bluetooth device name is
“BrailleSensePlus.” You can activate this item by pressing “enter” on
it, or you can access it without calling up the menu by pressing
“enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5).” After you activate this item, you will find a
computer edit box that contains your current device name. To modify
the name, type the new name and then press “enter.” Once you have
entered the new name, you should close all programs and reset the
Braille Sense Plus B32 by pressing the reset button with your finger
on the rear panel. To cancel your changes, press “space-e (dots 1-5)”
or “F4.” You will then be returned to the Bluetooth Device List.
The next item in the Bluetooth Device List menu is the “exit” item.
This item will exit the Bluetooth manager program. To activate this
item, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” and then press “space-1” or
“space-4” to navigate to “exit.” Then, press “enter” on “exit.” You can
also access the item while in the menu by pressing “z (dots 1-3-5-6)”
while you are in the Bluetooth Device List menu or at any time without
calling up the menu by pressing “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
12.2 Bluetooth Service List
Once you know which remote Bluetooth device you want to connect
to, press “space-1” or “space-4” to navigate to the device you want to
connect to in the Bluetooth Device List, and then press “enter” on the
device name. You will then hear, “Scanning for service. Please
wait…” Please note that no keys will work during scanning the
devices. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will begin scanning services
that are available from the remote Bluetooth device. The Braille
Sense Plus B32 support the services: LAN, FTP, ActiveSync, Serial
port, USB port and Bluetooth DUN. In order to access all of these
functions, you must make sure that the remote Bluetooth device is in
251
Discoverable mode, and that all services are enabled. It is possible
to have certain services enabled on your remote Bluetooth device,
while having other services that are disabled. For example, you
could have LAN and FTP enabled, while having ActiveSync and
Serial Port disabled. If this is the case, then the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will only display LAN and FTP.
Once the Braille Sense Plus B32 has found all of the available
services, it will display the services in a list in the following format:
“service name xx/yy” where xx is the number of the service that you
are on, and yy is the number of total available services. You can
move through the available services by pressing “space-1” or “space-
4.” You can press “backspace” to return to the Bluetooth Device List.
Once the Braille Sense Plus B32 has finished searching service, you
can access the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or by
pressing “F2.” The “Bluetooth Service List menu” has the “device
name,” “open FTP,” “disconnect” and “exit.” You can navigate the
menu items with “space-1” or “space-4.”
How to use “device name” and “exit” in the “Bluetooth service list”
menu are the same as how to use them in the “Bluetooth device list”
menu. Please refer to Section 12.1 (Bluetooth device list).
The “Open FTP” menu item allows you to open a direct FTP
connection with a remote Bluetooth device without having to select
the device and then the service. However, you must have connected
the service first before the Braille Sense Plus B32 will allow you to
transfer files. If you have not connected the FTP service already, and
you activate this function, you will hear, “FTP service disconnected.”
You can access “Open FTP” by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” and
then “space-1” or “space-4” to navigate to “Open FTP.” Once you are
at “Open FTP,” press “enter” to activate it, and the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will say, “connecting service.” You can also activate it by
pressing “t (dots 2-3-4-5)” while you are in the Bluetooth Device List
menu, or by pressing “enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)” without calling up the
menu. This chapter will cover connecting various Bluetooth services
later in more detail.
The “disconnect” menu item will allow you to disconnect services that
are connected to other Bluetooth devices. You can access this item
252
by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” and then “space-1” or “space-4.”
Then, press “enter” to activate it. You can also activate this item
while you are in the Bluetooth Service List menu by pressing “d (dots
1-4-5),” or you can activate it without calling up the menu by pressing
“enter-d (dots 1-4-5).”
In order to disconnect any service, press “space-1” or “space-4” at
the Bluetooth service list to move to the service that you want to
disconnect, and execute the “disconnect” command.
You can disconnect the currently focused service only. This means
that you can disconnect only one service at one time. You cannot
disconnect plural services at once.
If there are no services connected to other Bluetooth devices, and
you activate this function, you will hear, “There is no service
connected.”
12.2.1 Connecting Service
To authenticate a service and connect to it, press “enter” on the
service. Once you have pressed “enter” on the service, you will hear
“connecting service.” Then, you will hear “pin code:” You must use
ASCII characters when you type in this edit box. On the Braille
display, you will see “pin code:” This edit box will only appear when
you have pressed enter on a service that not say “connected” after
the service name. You can exit the edit box or cancel any text you
have typed in by pressing “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).” You will then be
returned to the Bluetooth Service List.
If you have typed in a pin code, and have pressed “enter,” you will
hear, “please wait for authentication.” If the remote device is setup
correctly, and has not been set up to allow this device to always
connect, then the remote device will ask for a pin code. If the remote
Bluetooth device pin code matches the pin code that was typed in the
Braille Sense Plus B32, then the service will authenticate. If this
occurs, you will hear, “pin code authentication passed.” Then, while
the service connects, you will hear, “please wait for access
permission.” If the remote Bluetooth device does not give access
permission, then you will hear, “connection failed,” and you will be
returned to the Bluetooth Services List. If the remote Bluetooth
device gives you access permission, then the Braille Sense Plus B32
will say “connection succeeded.” If the connection succeeds, then
253
you will see “connected” after the services that have successfully
connected. Some of the service may be connected without inputting
pin code depending on the Remote Bluetooth device settings.
It is possible to setup the remote Bluetooth device to always accept
the connection from the Braille Sense Plus B32, or to require a pin
code each time. These options must be changed on the remote
Bluetooth device. However, if you press “enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” while
in the Bluetooth Service List, all authentication will be removed, and
the Braille Sense Plus B32 and the remote Bluetooth device will ask
you for a pin code the next time you try to connect the service.
After you have connected to a service, you can press “enter-d (dots
1-4-5)” to disconnect the service, and the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
say “service disconnected.” You will then be returned to the
Bluetooth Service List. If you disconnect a service, “connect” will
disappear from the Bluetooth Service List.
If you connect to the FTP service, you will see a list of files and
folders that are on the remote Bluetooth device. The rest of this
chapter will discuss each service in detail.
12.2.2 LAN Service
With the LAN service, you can connect to the Internet through your
computer. If you connect this service, you can use the web browser
and email program, just like if you were connected to the Internet via
a dial-up modem or wireless LAN card. However, you must setup
Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) on your remote Bluetooth device.
Without ICS properly setup, you will not be able to connect to the
Internet using the LAN service. For information on how to setup ICS
for your remote Bluetooth device, please refer to the documentation
that came with your Bluetooth adapter. Setting up ICS requires
knowledge of network architecture, so it may be a good idea to
contact a local network technician or your network administrator for
help to set up ICS.
254
12.2.3 FTP Service
This service will work similar to using FTP on the Internet. It will allow
you to transfer folders and files to and from the Braille Sense Plus
B32 between it and the remote Bluetooth device. When referring to
the FTP service, we will refer to the file/folder list in the remote
Bluetooth device as “remote folder list” and the file/folder list of the
Braille Sense Plus B32 as the “local folder list.”
After you have successfully connected to the FTP service, the
Bluetooth Manager will take you to the remote folder list. The remote
folder list that you are taken to is determined by the remote Bluetooth
device. Typically, this folder is called the Bluetooth Exchange Folder
on the remote Bluetooth device, but you should check your remote
Bluetooth device for information on this folder.
The remote folder list is very similar to the File Manager. With the
FTP service, you can perform the following functions:
1. Copy
2. Paste
3. Send to
4. Retrieve file
5. New folder
6. Delete file/folder
7. Open local folder. If you press “enter” on this, you will be taken to
the local folder list. If you are in the local folder list, this menu will
be changed to “move remote folder.”
8. Select all
9. Information
In the next few sections, we will discuss the various FTP functions.
Please note that while sending data to and from the remote Bluetooth
device, the remote Bluetooth device may still need to give access
permission to the Braille Sense Plus B32. Please consult the
documentation for the remote Bluetooth device for details.
12.2.3.1 Copy and Paste
These functions will allow you to copy and paste files between the
local folder and the remote folder.
255
You can use the following steps to move files from a local folder to
the remote folder:
1. After you connect to the FTP service, you will be in the remote
folder list. While in the remote folder list, you should press “space-
m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the FTP menu. Then, you should
press “space-1” or “space-4” to navigate to “open local folder,” and
press “enter.” You can also press “o (dots 1-3-5)” while in the
menu, or you can press “enter-o (dots 1-3-5)” without having to call
up the menu. After activating this function, you will hear, “open
local folder.” Then, you will be taken to the Disk list that appears
in file manager. You will be taken to “flashdisk” by default, but if
you have a CF memory card or USB memory stick inserted, you
can navigate to them by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.”
2. Just like navigating in the file manager, you can access a disk by
pressing “enter” on it. Use the exact same navigation keys as the
file manager to navigate the local folder. You can refer to chapter
3 of this manual to find the various file manager commands. Note
that you cannot select folders. You can only select files. If you try
to select a folder, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say “deactivated.”
3. Once you have selected files by pressing the “space,” you can
copy them by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2,” and then
navigate to “copy” by pressing “space-1” or “space-4,” and press
“enter.” Or, you can press “enter-c (dots 1-4)” to activate the
function without calling up the menu.
4. After you have activated the copy function, you will hear, “copying”
and then “open remote folder.” You will then be moved to the
remote folder list.
5. In the remote folder list, you can navigate to the folder where you
want to paste the file. Once you are in the folder where you want
to paste the file, press “enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6).” Or, you can press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and then use “space-1” or “space-4” to get
to the “paste” function, and press “enter.” While pasting, you will
hear a sound that indicates that the Braille Sense Plus B32 is
working. If the file is larger than 300 KB, you will also hear the
progress meter each time an additional 10% has been completed.
If the file is less than 300 KB, then you will only hear the sound,
and not the progress meter.
6. When the file has been pasted successfully, you will see the
message, “xxx file pasted,” where xxx is the name of the file. If the
256
file is not pasted successfully, you will hear, “xxx file not pasted.”
After the file is pasted successfully, you will also hear, “paste
completed,” and you will be returned to the remote folder list.
The following steps should be used to copy a file from the remote
folder list to the local folder list:
1. After the FTP service has connected, you can navigate through
the remote folder, just like in the file manager. If you need to
reference the navigation keys for the file manager, please refer to
chapter 3 in this manual.
2. Once you have selected the files that you want to copy by
pressing the “space,” you can open the FTP menu by pressing
“space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and then use “space-1” or “space-4” to
navigate to “copy,” and press “enter.” You can also activate this
function without calling up the menu by pressing “enter-c (dots 1-
4).” Note that you cannot copy folders to send to the local folder.
3. Next, open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4),” move to
“open local folder” with “space-1” or “space-4,” and press “enter.”
You can also activate this function without calling up the menu by
pressing “enter-o (dots 1-3-5).” After you have activated this
function, you will see the Disk list, just like when you open the file
manager. You will be taken to “flashdisk” by default. However, if
you have a CF memory card or USB memory stick inserted, you
can navigate to those disks by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.”
Please refer to chapter 3 in this manual regarding navigation keys
in the file manager.
4. After entering a disk, open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots
1-3-4).” Then, move to “paste” with “space-1” or “space-4,” and
press “enter.” You can also activate this function without calling up
the menu by pressing “enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6).” While pasting, you
will hear a sound that indicates that the Braille Sense Plus B32 is
working. If the file is larger than 300 KB, you will also hear the
progress meter each time an additional 10% has been completed.
If the file is less than 300 KB, then you will only hear the sound,
and not the progress meter.
5. When the file has been pasted successfully, you will see the
message, “xxx file pasted,” where xxx is the name of the file. If the
file is not pasted successfully, you will hear, “xxx file not pasted.”
257
After the file is pasted successfully, you will also hear, “paste
completed,” and you will be returned to the local folder list.
12.2.3.2 Send To
This function will allow you to send files from the local folder list to the
remote folder list. It is only available in the local folder list. This is
very similar to the copy and paste function. The difference is that you
do not have to paste the file to the remote folder. It is done as soon
as you activate the “send to” function. When you activate this
function, the file can only be sent to the root of the remote folder list.
To activate the “send to” function, perform the following steps:
1. After the FTP service is connected, you can press “space-m (dots
1-3-4)” while you are in the remote folder list to open the menu.
Then, press “space-1” or “space-4” to move to “open local folder,”
and press “enter.” You can also activate this function without
calling up the menu by pressing “enter-o (dots 1-3-5).”
2. After you have activated this function, you will see the disk list, just
like when you open the file manager. You will be taken to
“flashdisk” by default. However, if you have a CF memory card or
USB memory stick inserted, you can navigate to those disks by
pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” Please refer to chapter 3 in this
manual regarding navigation keys in the file manager.
3. Then, select a file by pressing “space” on the file. You can only
select files and not folders.
4. After you have selected a file, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4),” and
then press “space-1” or “space-4” to move to “send to,” and press
“enter.” Or, you can press “enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” to activate the
“send to” function without having to call up the menu.
5. Just like copying and pasting, you will hear a sound that indicates
that the Braille Sense Plus B32 is working. If the file is larger than
300 KB, you will also hear the progress meter each time an
additional 10% has been completed. If the file is less than 300 KB,
then you will only hear the sound, and not the progress meter.
When the transfer has completed, you will hear, “xxx file sent,”
where xxx is the name of the file. If the file does not transfer, you
will hear, “xxx file not sent.” Once all of the files have been
transferred completely, you will hear, “sent completely,” and you
will be returned to the remote folder list.
258
12.2.3.3 Retrieve File
The “retrieve file” function will allow you to retrieve a file from the
remote folder list, and move it to the local folder. This function is
available while in the remote folder list. You can only save files to the
“flashdisk/download” folder with this function. Perform the following
steps to activate the “retrieve file” function:
1. After you have connected the FTP service, you will be connected
to the remote folder list. You can navigate through the list using
the same commands as in the file manager. You can reference
these commands by referring to chapter 3 of this manual.
2. Select the file that you want to retrieve by pressing the “space” on
it. Note that you cannot select folders.
3. After you have selected the file, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to
open the menu, and then use “space-1” or “space-4” to move to
“retrieve file,” and press “enter.” You can also activate this
function without calling up the menu by press “enter-r (dots 1-2-3-
5).”
4. Just like copying and pasting, you will hear a sound that indicates
that the Braille Sense Plus B32 is working. If the file is larger than
300 KB, you will also hear the progress meter each time an
additional 10% has been completed. If the file is less than 300 KB,
then you will only hear the sound, and not the progress meter.
When the transfer has completed, you will hear, “xxx file retrieved,”
where xxx is the name of the file. If the file does not transfer, you
will hear, “xxx file not retrieved.” Once all of the files have been
transferred completely, you will hear, “retrieve completed,” and you
will be returned to the remote folder list.
12.2.3.4 New Folder
The “new folder” function will allow you to create a new folder in the
local folder list or the remote folder list. To create a new folder,
perform the following steps:
1. After the FTP service has connected, navigate to the local or
remote folder list and move to the folder where you want to make
new folder. You can move between the “remote folder list” and
“local folder list” by pressing “enter-o (dots 1-3-5).” And how to
259
move among the items in the folder list is the same as how to
move in the File Manager.
2. Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the menu, and then use
“space-1” or “space-4” to navigate to “new folder,” and press
“enter.” Or, you can activate this function without calling up the
menu by pressing “enter-f (dots 1-2-4).”
3. You will then see an edit box that says, “new folder name:.” Type
in the new folder name using ASCII characters, and then press
“enter.” If the folder is created successfully, you will hear, “xxx
folder created,” where xxx is the name of the folder. You will then
be automatically returned to the list that you were in, whether it
was the remote or local folder list.
4. To cancel any changes that you made, press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-
6),” and you will be returned to the previous list.
12.2.3.5 Delete File/Folder
This function will allow you to delete files or folders in the remote or
local folder list. Note that if a folder contains folders, you will not be
able to delete the folder. To activate this function, perform the
following steps:
1. After you have connected to the FTP service, navigate to the local
or remote folder list, and select the file(s) or folder(s) that you want
to delete by pressing the “space” on them. The navigation keys
are exactly the same as when using the file manager. To
reference these keys, please refer to chapter 3 of this manual. You
can move to between “remote folder list” and “local folder list” by
pressing “enter-o (dots 1-3-5).”
2. Once you have selected the file(s) or folder(s), press “space-m
(dots 1-3-4),” and then use “space-1” or “space-4” to move to
“delete file/folder,” and press “enter.” You can also activate this
function without calling up the menu by pressing “space-d (dots 1-
4-5).”
3. If the file(s) or folder(s) is/are deleted successfully, you will hear,
“delete completed.”
260
12.2.3.6 Information
This function will allow you to check information regarding files or
folders that are located in the remote or local folder list. You can
activate this function by performing the following steps:
1. After you have connected to the FTP service, navigate to the local
or remote folder list, and select the file or folder that you want to
know information about. The navigation keys are exactly the same
as when using the file manager. To reference these keys, please
refer to chapter 3 in this manual.
2. Then, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the menu, and then
use “space-1” or “space-4” to move to “information,” and press
“enter.” Or, you can activate this function without calling up the
menu by pressing “enter-i (dots 2-4).”
3. After you have activated the function, you will see the “information
dialog box,” which consists of “type,” “size,” “date,” “attribute,”
“confirm,” and “cancel.” You can move between these controls by
pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2).” If you select
multiple files, the “information” function will display the number of
selected files and size.
12.2.4 ActiveSync Service
This service works the same way as when you connect the Braille
Sense Plus B32 to a computer via a USB cable, and use ActiveSync.
If the connection succeeds when activating it by pressing “enter” on
ActiveSync, you will hear the sound that ActiveSync makes when
there is a successful connection. Just as with all of the Bluetooth
services, the remote Bluetooth device may need to authorize the
Braille Sense Plus B32. You will then be returned to the Bluetooth
Service list. Just like using ActiveSync via USB, you can copy and
paste files from the Braille Sense Plus B32 from the remote Bluetooth
device to the Braille Sense Plus B32 and visa versa.
If you want to disconnect the service, you can press “enter-d (dots 1-
4-5)” while in the Bluetooth Manager, and the Braille Sense Plus B32
will say, “service disconnected,” and you will be returned to the
Bluetooth Service list. You will no longer see the word “connected”
after ActiveSync in the Bluetooth Service list.
261
You cannot use ActiveSync via USB and Bluetooth at the same time.
If the remote Bluetooth device is connected via USB and using
ActiveSync, you must disconnect the remote Bluetooth device in
order to use the ActiveSync service via Bluetooth.
12.2.5 Serial Port
If you connect this service, you should not connect the other services.
The Serial Port service will allow you to use your Braille Sense Plus
B32 as a wireless Braille display via Bluetooth. In order to use the
Braille Sense Plus B32 as a wireless Bluetooth display, please
reference the following sections. Note that you must be using
Window-Eyes in order to use the Braille Sense Plus B32 as a
wireless Braille display. Note that following explanation is how to use
the serial port when the Window-Eyes is installed as a screen reader
program in PC. If you are using JAWS or Supernova as a screen
reader, please contact HIMS by e-mail. The e-mail id of HIMS is
hims@himsintl.com.
12.2.5.1 Setting up the Braille Sense Plus B32 to Work as a
Bluetooth Braille Display
The following steps will walk you through setting up the Braille Sense
Plus B32 to work as a Bluetooth Braille display. These instructions
assume that you already have Bluetooth installed on your computer.
The following instructions assume that you are running Window-Eyes
5.5, or greater, and at least Windows XP, Service Pack 2. Before
starting, make sure that your Braille Sense Plus B32 is turned on.
Although it may not be necessary, you should close all applications
that are running on the Braille Sense Plus B32, and be in the
Program menu for best performance. If you have more than one
Braille Sense Plus B32, make sure that only the Braille Sense Plus
B32 that you want to configure is turned on.
12.2.5.2 Setting up the Computer
1. Navigate to the Bluetooth icon in the System Tray. You may do
this in Windows XP by pressing “windows key-b,” and then use the
Right or Left Arrow Keys until you reach the Bluetooth icon. Then,
press the “context menu key.” Note that if you don’t have the
262
Bluetooth icon in the System Tray, you may have to change the
settings for the Bluetooth icon to appear. Go to the Windows
Control Panel, Bluetooth Devices, Options, and then check the
check box that says “Show the Bluetooth Icon in the Notification
Area.”
2. Press the “up or Down” Arrow keys until you get to "Open
Bluetooth settings."
3. Press “enter.”
4. Select the Device tab control. You may need to press Ctrl-Tab in
order to select this tab control.
5. Tab to the Add button.
6. Press “enter.”
7. Press “space” to check the checkbox for "My device is setup and
ready to be found."
8. Press enter.”
9. The XP machine will find the Braille Sense Plus B32, and it will be
called "Windows CE." Remember that the Braille Sense Plus B32
must be turned on in order to be found as mentioned above. If
you forgot to turn the Braille Sense Plus B32 on, leave it turned on,
exit the Bluetooth settings, and start at step number 1 above.
10. Press the “down arrow” key to focus Windows CE.
11. Tab to the Next button.
12. Press “enter.”
13. Press “down arrow” to focus the radio button, "Let me choose my
own passkey." Focus will automatically be put in the edit box, and
you may hear a tool tip that says, “We recommend using a
passkey that is 8 to 16 digits long.” You should type your passkey
here. For example, you might type, “1111.”
14. Press “enter.” Windows will then begin exchanging the passkeys,
and a new dialog will appear on the computer.
15. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will then ask for the passkey by saying,
“Computer Edit Box Pin Code?” Using the same passkey that was
typed in to the computer, type in the same passkey on the Braille
Sense Plus B32 and press “enter” on the Braille Sense Plus B32.
16. The computer will say the message, “Found new hardware” and
the final dialog should appear on the computer. Remember that
you can press “ctrl-shift-w” to have the entire dialog read using
Window-Eyes. The dialog should display that the Bluetooth device
was successfully set up. It is very important to note the COM ports
for the outgoing COM port and the incoming COM port. For
263
example, the outgoing COM port may be COM 5, and the
incoming COM port may be COM 6. Do not be surprised if your
COM ports are not set to COM 5 and COM 6. The COM ports
used can vary from computer to computer.
17. Press “tab” to get to the Finish button, and then press “enter” to
activate it.
18. You will then be taken back to the Bluetooth devices setting dialog.
Press Ctrl-Tab twice to focus the COM ports tab control.
19. Press “tab” to get to the list of COM ports, and then press the
Down Arrow to move through the list of COM ports to make sure
that they match the COM ports that were mentioned when you
completed the Bluetooth device wizard. You should hear your first
COM port, then the direction, and then the name. After you press
“down” Arrow again, you should hear the next COM port, the
direction, and name. For example, when you press the “down
arrow” key the first time, you might hear, "COM 5 Outgoing
Windows CE Blue Tooth Serial." When you press the “down
arrow” key a second time, you might hear, “COM 6 Incoming
WindowsCE.”
20. Tab to the OK button, and press Enter.
You have now setup the Braille Sense Plus B32 and the computer.
However, you must properly setup Window-Eyes in order to use
the Braille Sense Plus B32 as a Bluetooth Braille display.
12.2.5.3 Setting up Window-Eyes
1. Press “ctrl-backslash” to open the Window-Eyes Control Panel.
2. Press” alt-f” to open the File menu.
3. Press the “up arrow”, or “down arrow” to move to Select Braille
Display, and press “enter.” Or, just press B to open the Select
Braille Display dialog without using the Arrow Keys.
4. Press the “down arrow” or the letter “b” until you hear Braille
Sense Plus B32.
5. Press “tab” to get to the COM port list box
6. Select the COM port that was given as the outgoing COM port
when you setup the computer to interact with the Braille Sense
Plus B32 via Bluetooth.
7. Press “enter“
264
Now that you have set up Window-Eyes, you need to finish the setup
on the Braille Sense Plus B32.
12.2.5.3 Setting up the Braille Sense Plus B32
1. Press “f1” to get to the Program menu.
2. Press “space-1” or “space-4” to get to the Utility menu, or just
press the letter u.”
3. Press “enter.”
4. Press “space-1” or “space-4” to get to Terminal for Screen Reader,
and press” enter.”
5. Press “space-1” or “space-4” to get to Bluetooth Serial Port, and
press “enter.”
The Braille Sense Plus B32 should be connected as a Bluetooth
Braille display. To exit this mode from the Braille Sense Plus B32,
press “space-z.” Please note that “f1” on the Braille Sense Plus B32
will still take you to the Program menu. This is to allow you to use the
applications on the Braille Sense Plus B32 at the same time, and be
able to switch back to using the Braille Sense Plus B32 as a
Bluetooth Braille display.
12.2.6 Using Multiple Services Simultaneously
You can use the LAN, FTP, and ActiveSync Bluetooth services all at
the same time. However, if you plan to use any of these services at
the same time, you should connect the FTP service before
connecting the LAN and ActiveSync services. Otherwise, you may
experience problems. However, if you want to connect to the Serial
Port, you should not connect to any of the other Bluetooth services in
the Bluetooth Service list.
12.3 Hot keys in Bluetooth Manager
Scanning Bluetooth device: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Connecting device: Enter on the device name
Connecting service: Enter on the service name
Disconnect service: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Move to Bluetooth device list in service list: Backspace
Remove device setting in Bluetooth device list: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
265
1) FTP service
Open local folder/move remote folder: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Send to: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Retrieve file: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
New folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Delete file/folder: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
266
13. MSN messenger
The MSN Messenger program on the Braille Sense Plus B32 is very
similar in its operation to that which runs on a Personal computer.
This is because we have made every attempt to keep the structure
and features the same as those that are found in the MSN
messenger program that runs on a PC. Using MSN Messenger, you
can chat online with other registered users of MSN Messenger. Note
that you will need to setup your MSN Messenger account with
Microsoft before using this service. To start MSN Messenger, in the
program menu, press “space-4” repeatedly until you get to “MSN
Messenger,” and press “enter.” Or you can just press its shortcut key,
“n (dots 1-3-4-5).”
13.1 Getting Started with MSN Messenger
When you first launch MSN Messenger, the Braille Sense Plus B32
will check for the network status, and if a network connection is
available, a log-in dialog box will be displayed.
1) When the log-in dialog box appears, you will be placed in the “e-
mail address” computer edit box. Here, you should type the email
address that you have registered for your MSN passport. Note
that the e-mail address should be typed using computer Braille.
2) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “password” computer edit
box. Now, Type the password that you have setup for your MSN
Messenger account. Again, you will want to use computer Braille
for this.
3) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “remember me” check box.
By default, this check box is unchecked. You can check the check
box by pressing “space.” Next time when you run the messenger
program, the email address will be displayed automatically for you.
4) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “save password” check box.
By default, this will be unchecked. You can check this option by
pressing “space.” Then, next time you run the messenger program,
the password will be entered automatically, and it will be displayed
in the password edit box as “****”. To use this feature, you should
also check the “remember me” check box. Otherwise, the
267
password will not be stored even if you have checked the “save
password” check box.
5) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button. Pressing
“enter” here will log you in to your Messenger account. Once you
are logged in, a contact list will appear. If you want to cancel
logging in, press “tab (space-4-5)” once more at the “confirm”
button, to move to the “cancel” button. Then press “enter.” Or you
can also press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).” Then the messenger
program will close.
If you have successfully logged in and checked “remember me” and
“save password” check boxes, you can log in by just pressing “enter”
when you are at the “email” edit box the next time you want to log in.
When the Braille Sense Plus B32 is not connected to the Internet, if
you execute the MSN Messenger and try to log in, the Braille Sense
Plus B32 will announce “connection failed. Check Internet settings”
and return to the log-in dialog box.
13.2 Using a Contact List
If you have successfully logged in, a list box containing your contact
list will appear. In this list, the contact information for those who are
online and for those who are offline will be grouped together. You
can move through the entire list by pressing “space-4” or “space-1”
repeatedly. When this list box appears, the number of people who
are online will be displayed first. Then, the list of people who are
online will be shown in the format, “(current status) nickname xx/yy” in
Braille, and “nickname, current status, xx/yy” in speech. Where “yy”
is the number of people who are online or offline, and “xx” is the order
of the current item in the online or offline group. In Braille, the current
status, “online”, is displayed as “nln”, and “offline” as “fln”. In speech,
they are announced as “online” and “offline”, respectively. When the
status is “idle”, it is displayed as “idl” in Braille, and “idle” in speech. If
the status of a person changes after you log in, you will hear different
sound depending on their status.
The hotkeys you can use in this list box is as follows.
1) Move to the previous item : Space-1 or up scroll button
2) Move to the next item : Space-4 or down scroll button
3) Move between online and offline groups : Space-5-6
268
You can have the received message stay on the Braille display until
you are done reading it. When in the Contacts list box you can press
“enter-l (dots 1-2-3).” When you are asked to “confirm the received
message: no,” select “yes” by press the “space.” When a message is
received the message will stay on the Braille display until you close it
with “space-e (dots 1-5).”
If you want to close the messenger program, press “enter” on “close”
in the file menu. Or you can press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
13.2.1 Instant Messaging
When you want to have a conversation with a person in your list of
contacts, move to the list item corresponding to the person you want
to contact, and press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the menu. Move
to “actions” and press “enter.” Press “enter” again on “send instant
message.” Or instead of using the menu, you can press “enter” or
“enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” at the contact item. Then, the “instant
message” dialog box will appear, where you can have a conversation
with your contact online. The “instant message” dialog box will be
described in more detail in 13.3.
13.2.2 Adding, Deleting, or Viewing Contact Information
You can add a contact by doing the following.
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or F2 to open the menu. Move to
“contacts” by pressing “space-4,” and then press “enter.” Press
“enter” on “add contact.” You could also press “enter-a (dot 1”)
instead of using the menu.
2) Then, the “add” dialog box will be displayed, and you will be
placed in the “e-mail address” edit box. Type the email address of
the person you want to add, in computer Braille.
3) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button, and press
“enter.” Then, the contact information will be stored and you will be
placed back in the contact list box. If you want to cancel adding
the contact information, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the
“cancel” button, and press “enter.”
269
The added contact will be displayed as offline until the person
accepts your request for adding him or her to your contact list. As
soon as the request is accepted, their status will be changed to online.
You can delete a contact that you have registered by doing the
following.
1) Move to the contact you want to delete, by pressing “space-1” or
“space-4” repeatedly.
2) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the menu. Press “space-4”
to move to “contacts,” and press “enter.” Move to “delete contact”
by pressing “space-4,” and press “enter.” Or instead of using the
menu, just press “enter-d (dots 1-4-5).”
3) Then, the “delete contact” dialog box will be displayed, showing
the email address of the person to be deleted in the “e-mail
address” edit box. Make sure that the address is correct, and if
not, make a change to it.
4) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button, and press
“enter.” Then, the item will be deleted and the contact list box will
appear again. If you want to cancel deleting, press “tab (space-4-
5)” once more at the “confirm” button, to move to the “cancel”
button. Then press “enter.”
You can delete a contact regardless of whether he/she is online or
offline.
You can view information of a contact by doing the following.
1) Move to the item whose information you want to know, by pressing
“space-4” or “space-1.”
2) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the menu. Press “space-4”
to move to “contacts,” and press “enter.” Move to “contact
information” by pressing “space-4,” and press “enter.” Or instead
of using the menu, just press “enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6).”
3) Then, you will be placed the “contact information” dialog box. First,
“nickname” is focused. Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the
email address of the contact. Press “tab (space-4-5)” again to
move to his/her status.
4) After you have read all the information about the contact, press
“tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “close” button, and press “enter.”
270
Or you can just press “space-e (dots 1-5).” Then, the dialog box
will be closed and the contact list box will appear again.
13.2.3 Changing Your Nickname, Status and Viewing Your
Information
You can change your nickname as follows.
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or F2 to open the menu. Press
“space-4” repeatedly to move to “tools,” and press “enter.” Press
“enter” on “nickname.” Or instead of using the menu, just press
“enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4).”
2) Then, the “change nickname” dialog box will appear, and the
“nickname” edit box will be focused. Type the nickname you like.
You can use alphabets, numbers, and other symbols in the
nickname.
3) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button, and press
“enter.” Then your nickname will be changed and you will be
placed back in the contact list box.
To view your nickname or email address, you can use “my status” as
follows.
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the menu. Press “enter” on
“file.” Then, move to “my status” by pressing “space-4,” and then
press “enter.” Or instead of using the menu, just press “enter-m
(dots 1-3-4).”
2) Then, the dialog box will appear, and your nickname will be
displayed. Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to your email address,
and “tab (space-4-5)” again to move to “status,” and so on.
3) When you have read through all of the information, you can press
“tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “close” button, and then press
“enter.” Or you can just press “space-e (dots 1-5).” Then, the
information dialog box will be closed and you will be placed in the
contact list box.
You can change your status by doing the following.
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or F2 to open the menu. Press
“enter” on “file.” Move to “set my status” by pressing “space-4,”
271
and press “enter.” Or instead of using the menu, just press “enter-t
(dots 2-3-4-5).”
2) Then, the “set my status” dialog box will appear, and the “status”
combo box will have focus. Move to the status item that you want
by pressing “space-4” or “space-1.”
3) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button, and press
“enter.” Then your online status will be changed and you will be
placed in the contact list box.
13.2.4 Additional Features
1) Sign out
When you are logged in and you want to log in to another account,
you will need to log out first, and then log in to the other account.
Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the menu. Press “enter” on
“file.” Press “space-4” repeatedly to move to “sign out” and press
“enter.” Then, you are logged out, and the log in dialog box will
appear again. In the “e-mail address” and “password” edit box,
the email address and password used in the previous login will be
displayed by default. To log in to another account, you first need
to delete the log in information from the first account, and type the
log in information of the other account.
2) Save account
If you did not check the “remember me” and “save password”
check boxes in the login dialog box, later, you may want to save
the account information once you are logged in. You can use the
“save account” option for this. It is exactly the same as checking
the two check boxes in the login dialog box. To use “save
account,” you should press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the
menu. Press “space-4” repeatedly to move to “tools,” and press
“enter.” Press “space-4” to move to “save account,” and press
“enter.” Then, you will hear “save account? Yes. ” In here, you
press “enter” and then you will be placed back in the contact list
box.
272
3) View chat and last message
When you are having a conversation with more than one person
simultaneously, you can view a list of messages that you have
received previously. You can use the “last message option,” or
when using “view chat” go back to the instant message dialog box
which you have used recently in the current instant message
dialog box.
To use “view chat,” you should press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to
open the menu and press “enter” on “file” menu. Press “space-4”
to move to “view chat,” and press “enter.” Or you press “enter-r
(dots 1-2-3-5)” without call up menu.
To use “last message,” you should press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to
open the menu. Press “space-4” repeatedly to move to “actions,”
and press “enter.” Press “space-4” to move to “last message,” and
press “enter.” Or you press “backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)” without
call up menu. When executing “last message” you can see the
“list of messages.” In this list, you can move through the
messages by pressing “space-1” or “space-4” repeatedly. If you
press “enter” on a message, then the focus will move to the
corresponding instant message dialog box.
4) Play keyboard sound
You can select whether your message input is converted into the
sound or not to use “play keyboard sound” when you are writing
your message to a person in the instant message dialog box. In
other words, you can choose whether you will hear a person’s
message input while inputting your message or your message
input continuously when a person send you a message. You
need to take the following steps for this function.
(1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call the menu.
(2) Press “space-4” to move to the “tools” and press “enter.”
(3) Press “space-4” to move to the “play keyboard sound” and
press “enter.” Or, you can press “enter-k (dots 1-3)” to
move to the “play keyboard sound” directly. Then, you can
see “play keyboard sound: yes” message.
(4) If you press “enter,” you can hear your input message even
if a person send you a message.
If you press “space-4” first and then press “enter,” you can hear a
person’s input message even if you are writing your message.
273
5) Message sound notification while in current window
You can select whether you use beep sound for the messages or
not to use “notify message sound in current window” when you are
communicating with a person in the instant message dialog box.
You need to take the following steps for this function.
(1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call the menu.
(2) Press “space-4” to move to the “tools” and press “enter.”
(3) Press “space-4” to move to the “message sound
notification while in current window” and press “enter.” Or,
you can press “backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)” to move to the
“message sound notification while in current window”
directly. Then, you can see “play message sound
notification while in current window: yes” message.
(4) If you press “enter,” you can hear beep sound when you
communicate with a person.
(5) If you press “space-4” first and then press “enter,” you can’t
hear beep sound when you communicate with a person.
However, if you are not in instant message dialog box, but in
contact list, you will hear beep sound even if you selected no
option of “notify message sound in current window” because it is
applied for current messaging window only.
6) Message sound notification while messenger is in the background
You can select whether you use beep sound for receipt of the
messages or not to use “message sound notification while
messenger is in the background” when you are using another
program like as word processor. You need to take the following
steps for this function.
(1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call the menu.
(2) Press “space-4” to move to the “tools” and press “enter.”
(3) Press “space-4” to move to the “message sound notification
while messenger is in the background” and press “enter.” Or,
you can press “backspace-m (dots 1-3-4)” to move to the
“message sound notification while messenger is in the
background” directly. Then, you can see “play message
sound notification while messenger is in the background:
yes” message.
(4) If you press “enter,” you can hear beep sound when a
person send you a message.
274
If you press “space-4” first and then press “enter,” there is no beep
sound and you can’t find out new message before you check
messenger program.
13.3 Instant Message Dialog Box
If you press “enter” on an item in the contact list box, the instant
message dialog box will appear. The instant message dialog box
consists of “history” window, “input” edit box, “send” and “close”
buttons. The “history” window lists all the messages that have been
sent to and from other contacts. In the “input” edit box, you can type
your message to be sent to another person. You can move between
these controls by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2).”
When you are sending an instant message, the “input” edit box will be
focused when the dialog box appears. On the other hand, if the
dialog box was opened to read received messages, the “history”
window will be focused. In the “input” edit box, you can type one line,
and by pressing “enter,” you can send the message. You can also
move to the “send” button, and press “enter” to send the message.
Then the message will also be added to the “history” window. In the
“history” window, for each message, the nickname of the person who
wrote the message will be displayed first, and then the content of the
message will be displayed. Each message is considered as a
paragraph. When you are in the instant message dialog box, if the
other person sends a message, the message will be displayed in
Braille and announced in speech immediately. If you receive a
message while the focus is at the “input” edit box, the focus will not
be changed. If the focus is at the “history” window, the content of the
window will not be updated until you move to another control and go
back to the “history” window.
While you are in the instant message dialog box, you can move to the
contact list box by pressing “space-1-2-6” (or F1-F2) or “space-3-4-5”
(or F3-F4). If you press the key again, you will go back to the instant
message dialog box. More than one instant message dialog box can
be opened at the same time. For example, while you are in an
instant message dialog box, if you go to the contact list box by
pressing “space-1-2-6,” and press “enter” on another contact, another
instant message dialog box will be opened.
275
If you want to close the instant message dialog box, press “enter” on
the “close” button, or press “space-e (dots 1-5).” Then, the dialog box
will be closed, and you will be placed back in the contact list box.
13.3.1 Inviting Others to Start a Conversation
You can invite others to have a conversation together at the same
time. That is, you can have a conversation with more than one
person in one instant message dialog box. You can invite or add
another participant as follows. Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open
the menu. Move to “actions” by pressing “space-4” repeatedly, and
press “enter.” Press “enter” on “invite a contact.” Or instead of using
the menu, you can just press “enter-i (dots 2-4).” Then, the list of
people who are online will be displayed. Press “space-1” or “space-
4” repeatedly to move to the contact you want to invite. Press “enter.”
Then you will get a message that says the person has been invited,
and you will be placed back in the current instant message dialog box.
Now, you are able to have a conversation with more than one person
in one dialog box.
13.3.2 Saving and Printing Your Messages
You can save or print the messages that are shown in the “history”
window. If you want to save the messages, press “space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” to open the menu. Press “enter” on “file.” Move to “save as”
and press “enter.” Or instead of using the menu, you can just press
“space-s (dots 2-3-4).” Then, the save dialog box will appear and the
“file name” edit box will be focused. This dialog box has the same
controls, and you can use it in the same way as the “save as” dialog
box in “word processor.”
If you want to print the messages, first, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
to open the menu. Then, press “enter” on “file.” Move to “print” by
pressing “space-4” repeatedly, and press “enter.” Or instead of using
the menu, you can just press “space-p (dots 1-2-3-4).” Then, the
“print” dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box is the same as
the “print” dialog box in the “word processor.” The messages can be
printed or embossed in Braille.
276
13.3.3 Copying and Pasting Instant Messages
You can copy, paste, and delete the messages in the “history”
window or “input” edit box, as you can do in the “word processor.”
However, since the “history” window is read only, you cannot paste,
cut, and delete the messages in the “history” window. To select a
block of text, move the cursor to the starting point, and press “enter-b
(dots 1-2).” Then, move to the end point of the text to be selected.
Press “enter-c (dots 1-4)” to copy, “enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)” to cut.
Then, move the cursor to the place where you want to insert the
copied text (the “input” edit box, or an edit box of another program),
and press “enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)” to paste the text. If you press
“enter-a (dot 1),” you can select all the text in the current control. You
can perform these functions using the “edit” menu.
13.3.4 Searching Messages
You can search the messages in the “history” window for text. This is
very useful especially when you have exchanged a lot of messages.
The “find” dialog box is used for this, and it works the same as the
one in the “word processor.” Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the
menu. Press “space-4” to move to “edit,” and press “enter.” Press
“space-4” repeatedly to move to “find, and press “enter.” Or instead
of using the menu, just press “space-f (dots 1-2-4).” Then, the “find”
dialog box will appear, and the “text to find” edit box will be focused.
Type the string to look for and set the searching direction, and then
press “enter.” Then, the focus will move to the message that contains
the text. If you want to find it again in the same direction, press
“enter-f (dots 1-2-4).” If the text is not found, you will get the
message, “not found,” and the cursor will be located where you
invoked the “find” dialog box.
13.4 Hot Keys in MSN Messenger
1) Log-in dialog box
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Check or uncheck a check box: Space
277
2) The contact list box
Move to the previous item: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the next item: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move between online and offline groups: Space-5-6
Open the menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2
Logout: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
View chat: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
My status: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Close: Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Add contact: Enter-a (dot 1)
Delete contact: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Contact information: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6).
Send instant message: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Last message: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Play keyboard sound: Enter-k (dots 1-3)
Message sound notification while in current window: Backspace-s
(dots 2-3-4)
Message sound notification while messenger is in the background:
Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4)
Nickname: Enter-p (dots 1-3-4)
Save account: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Confirm the Received Message: Enter-l (Dots 1-2-3)
3) Instant message dialog box
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2 or Space-
F3)
Move between the instant message dialog box and the contact
list box: Space-1-2-6 or Space-3-4-5, F1-F2, or F3-F4
Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Print: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Close: Space-e (dots 1-5)
Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Delete: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Invitation: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
278
14. Database Manager
The database manager is a program that can be used to create a
database in the form that you specify. You can use the DataBase
Manager to add records and search for data in your records. A table
contains at least one record, and a record consists of at least one
field. You can specify attributes for each of the fields. In other words,
a record is made up of a group of one or more fields.
When the database manager is started, it will check whether or not a
table has been registered or created already. If no table has been
registered yet, a “table manager” dialog box will appear to help you to
register a new table. If there is at least one table already registered,
a “search records” dialog box will appear and the “search” edit box
will be focused, so that you can search for data records in the tables.
If you want to close the program while you are adding or searching a
table, press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).” Or you can use the menu.
Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or F2 to open the menu. Move to “exit”
by pressing “space-1” or “space-4” (or Left or down scroll button)
repeatedly, and press “enter.” Or you can type “z (dots 1-3-5-6)” in
the menu.
The major navigation keys that can be used in this program are as
follows.
1) Moving by controls
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (space-1-2) or Space-F3
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5) or F3
2) Moving in a list box
Move to the previous list item: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the next list item: Space-4 or down scroll button
3) Changing the selection in a prompt box
Select the next value: Space-4 or Space, or down scroll button
Select the previous value: Space-1 or Backspace, or up scroll
button
The menu in the database manager consists of the following items.
You can open this menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or F2.
279
1) Table manager: Here you can create, delete, and modify tables,
records, and their fields. When you run the database manager for
the first time, the “table manager” dialog box will appear.
2) Add record : You can add records to the current table.
3) Search records : You can search records in the current table. You
can also search each field in the table.
4) List of records found : You can use this menu item to go through a
list of records found in the table by the previous search. Here, you
can delete or modify each record in the list. If you didn’t search for
anything before you use this function, the message, “no list 0/0,”
will be displayed.
5) Setting backup option: You can select the method to back up the
database.
6) Backup database: You can backup all database files that are used
in the database manager.
7) Restore database: You can restore the database files that are
backed up already.
8) Exit: It is used to close the database manager.
Each of these menu items will be discussed in the following sections
below.
14.1 Table Manager
The “table manager” dialog box is where you can create, delete, or
modify a table. This dialog box contains the following controls.
1) Table name list : It displays the name of registered tables, and
their order in the list.
2) Add table button : Using this option, you can create a new table.
3) Modify table button : Using this option, you can change the name
of a table, or modify the structure of the table, by adding or
deleting fields.
4) Delete table button : Using this option, you can delete the table
that you have selected in the table name list.
5) Set default table button : Using this option, you can set the table
that opens by default when you run the program.
6) Close button : After closing the “table manager” dialog box, it will
take you back to where you were before you started the “table
manager” dialog box. When there is no registered table, if you
280
press “enter” at the “close” button, the database manager program
will be closed.
You can move between each of these controls by pressing “tab
(space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2).”
14.1.1 Add Table
“Add table” is a dialog box where you can create a new table. This
dialog box contains “table name” edit box, “registered fields” list, “add
field” button, “modify field” button, “delete field” button, “previous field”
button, “next field” button, “confirm” button and “cancel” button. You
can move between these controls by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or
“shift-tab (space-1-2).”
Suppose you want to create a table called “addressbook” which
contains 4 fields: name, telephone, address, and memo. You can
create this table as follows.
1) In the “table manager” dialog box, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move
to the “add table” button, and press “enter.” Or you can just press
“a (dot 1)” in the dialog box.
2) Then, the “add table” dialog box will appear, and the “table name”
edit box will be focused.
3) Type “addressbook” and then press “tab (space-4-5).”
4) Then, the “registered fields” list will be focused. At first, “no list
0/0” will be displayed in the list. As you add fields to this table,
they will be added to this list box.
5) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “add field” button, and
press “enter.” Or you can just press its shortcut key, “a (dot 1).”
6) Then the “add field” dialog box will be opened, and the “field
name” edit box will be focused.
7) Type “name” here, and then press “tab (space-4-5).”
8) Then, the “field type” combo box will be focused. Press “space-4”
or “space-1” to move to “edit box,” and press “tab (space-4-5).”
9) The “primary key” check box will be focused. If you want to set the
current field as the primary key, press “space” in order to check it.
10) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button, and press
“enter.” Now, the “name” field has been added to the
“addressbook” table.
281
If you want to cancel adding the field, press “tab (space-4-5)” once
more to move to the “cancel” button, and press “enter.” If you have
added a new field, you will get a message saying that a new field has
been added. Then, the “registered fields” list will be shown again.
Now, “name” field appears in the list, with the form, “name (edit box,
pri) 1/1”. Since only one primary key exists in a table, if you have set
a field as the primary key, the “set primary key” check box will not be
shown in the “add field” dialog box when you add another field. Add
the “telephone”, “address”, and “memo” fields by repeating the step 5
through 10 above. Note that you may want to set the “field type” of
“telephone” field to “number”, “address” to “edit box”, and “memo” to
“multi edit box”. Once you have added all of the fields you want,
press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button, and press
“enter.”
If you need to change a name of a field that is registered, move to a
field name that you want to change on a “registered fields” list. Then
press “m (dots 1-3-4)” or “tab (space-4-5)”, and enter on a “modify
field.” It appears as “field name: (selected filed name)”, here you type
the Name you want, and press “enter.”
Even though you can change a name of a field, it is not possible to
change the property of that field.
If you want to delete an already registered field, press “space-1” or
“space-4” repeatedly in the “registered fields” list to move to the name
of the field you want to delete. And then press “tab (space-4-5)”
repeatedly move to “delete field” button and press enter or press “d
(dots 1-4-5),” the shortcut key for the “delete field” button. Or you can
also press “tab (space-4-5)” repeatedly to move to the “delete field”
button and press “enter.”
To change the order of a field, which is in your table, you can move to
the field that you want to change. This can be done when you are in
the “registered fields” list. Once you are on the field, press “p (dots 1-
2-3-4)” or “n (dots 1-3-4-5).” Or you press “tab (space-4-5)” and enter
on a “previous field” button or “next field” button.
Then, the “add table” dialog box will be closed, and the “table name”
list box will be shown again. The newly created table will be added to
this list, and “address book 1/1” will be shown in the list. To close the
282
“table manager” dialog box, press “tab (space-4-5) to move to the
“close” button, and press “enter.” Or you can just press “space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6)” to close the dialog box. Then, the “search records”
dialog box will be opened, and the “name” field, the first field of the
“address book” table, will be shown. Here, you can type the name
you want to search for.
14.1.2 Modify Table
“Modify table” is used to modify the name or structure of a registered
table. It contains the same controls as in the “add table” dialog box.
To modify a table, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or F2 to open the
menu, and press “enter” on “table manager.” Or you can just press
the hotkey for “table manager”, “enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5).” The “table
name” list will be focused when the “table manager” dialog box is
opened. Press “space-1” or “space-4” to move to the table that you
want to modify, and press “m (dots 1-3-4),” the shortcut key for the
“modify table” button. Or you can press “tab (space-4-5)” repeatedly
to move to the “modify table” button, and press “enter.” Then, a dialog
box where you can modify the table will appear. This table is same
as the “add table” dialog box. The only difference is that the “table
name” edit box, and “registered fields” list contain the information
already stored in the table. You can not change the name of table.
If you want to add additional fields, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to
“add field” and press “enter.” And then type in the new field name
and press “enter.” If you want to delete an already registered field,
press “space-1” or “space-4” repeatedly in the “registered fields” list
to move to the name of the field you want to delete. And then press
“tab (space-4-5)” repeatedly move to “delete field” button and press
enter or press “d (dots 1-4-5),” the shortcut key for the “delete field”
button. Or you can also press “tab (space-4-5)” repeatedly to move
to the “delete field” button and press “enter.”
To change the order of a field, which is in your table, you can move to
the field that you want to change. This can be done when you are in
the “registered fields” list. Once you are on the field, press “p (dots 1-
2-3-4)” or “n (dots 1-3-4-5)”. Or you press “tab (space-4-5)” and enter
on a “previous field” button or “next field” button.
283
If you need to change a name of a field that is registered, move to a
field name that you want to change on a “registered fields” list. Then
press “m (dots 1-3-4)” or “tab (space-4-5)”, and enter on a “modify
field.” It appears as “field name: (selected filed name)”, here you type
the Name you want, and press “enter”.
Even though you can change a name of a field, it is not possible to
change the property of that field.
14.1.3 Delete table
This option is used when you want to delete a table. To delete a
table, Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or F2 to open the menu, and
press “enter” on “table manager.” Or you can press “enter-t (dots 2-
3-4-5),” the hotkey for “table manager.” When the “table manager”
dialog box is opened, the “table name” edit box will be focused. In
this list box, you can move to the name of the table you want to
delete by pressing “space-4” or “space-1” repeatedly, and press “d
(dots 1-4-5),” the shortcut key for the “delete table” button. Or you
can press “tab (space-4-5)” repeatedly to move to the “delete table”
button, and press “enter.” Then, “delete table? Yes” will be displayed.
If you want to delete, press “enter,” and if you want to cancel, press
“space” to select “no,” and press “enter.”
14.1.4 Set Default Table
When you set a table as the default table, whenever the database
manager is started, the table will be activated and you will be placed
in the search dialog. You can search and add fields on this table. If
you have registered more than one table and there is a table you use
more frequently than the others, it may be convenient for you to set
this table as the default table. However, if no table has been set as
the default table, the table that was used the last time will be
activated when the database manager is started. To set a table as
the default table, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or F2 to open the
menu, and press “enter” on table manager. Or you can also press
“enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5),” the hotkey for “table manager.” Then, the
“table manager” dialog box will appear, and the “table name” list will
be focused. In this list, press “space-4” or “space-1” repeatedly to
move to the name of the table you want to set as the default table.
Then press “s (dots 2-3-4),” the shortcut key for the “set default
284
table,” or press “tab (space-4-5)” repeatedly to move to the “set
default table” button and press “enter.” Or you can press “enter” on
the name of the table in the “table name” list. Then, you will get a
message saying that the table is set as the default table, and the
“table manager” dialog box will be closed.
14.2 Add Record
You can use this option to add information to a table that you have
created. When the database manager is started, the “search
records” dialog box will be opened at first. To open the “add record”
dialog box, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the menu, and press
“enter” on “add record.” Or instead of using the menu, you can just
press “enter-i (dots 2-4).” You can think of a record as a collection of
information (fields) for an object (record). Let’s consider the
“addressbook” table you created in the previous section. Adding
records to this table can be performed as follows.
1) Press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or F2 to open the menu, and press
“enter” on “add record.” Or instead of using the menu, just press
“enter-i (dots 2-4).”
2) Then the “name” field, the first field in the “addressbook” table, will
be shown. Here, you type the name you want to add, and press
“tab (space-4-5).”
3) Then, the “telephone” field will be focused. Here, type the phone
number. Since this field is of “number” type, you can type only a
limited set of characters such as numbers and hyphen. You can
enter a number without the leading number sign. If you press
“space” instead of – (hyphen), the hyphen will be entered.
4) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “address” field. Type the
address.
5) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “memo” field. Since this
field is of “multi edit box” type, you can type multiple lines. To start
a new line, press “enter.”
6) Press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “confirm” button. If you
press “enter” here, the one record that you have just entered will
be added to the table. If you do not want to save the record you
have just typed in, press “tab (space-4-5)” once more to move to
the “cancel” button, and press “enter.” Or you can just press
“space-e (dots 1-5).”
285
If you have added a record, the “name” field will be focused again so
that you can add another record. If you press “shift-tab (space-1-2)”
at a field, the focus will be moved to the previous field.
To go back to the “searching address” dialog box, press “enter-s
(dots 2-3-4).” To open the “table manager” dialog box, press “enter-t
(dots 2-3-4-5).” If you open these dialog boxes while you are entering
a record, you will be asked if you want to save the record. Select
“yes” or “no by pressing “space” or “backspace,” and press “enter.” If
you select “yes”, the record will be saved, and if you select “no”, it will
not be saved and open the specified dialog box. If you select
“cancel,” the dialog box will not be opened.
14.3 Search Records
After you have added your records, if you want to search for
information that is in your records, you can use the “search records”
dialog box. To open the “search records” dialog box, press “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” and press “enter” on “search records.” Or instead of
using the menu, just press “enter-s (dots 2-3-4).” Then, the “search
records” dialog box will be opened, and the first field of the table will
be focused. Here, you can type the text that you want to search for.
If you want to search for records using content from more than one
field, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to another field. Type the text
to search for, and press “enter.” Then, the “list of records found” will
be opened and the search result will be shown in the “list of records
found.” Being able to search in more than one field can be useful if
you are searching for those who have the same first and last name.
In the “list of records found,” each record will be shown in the
following form. “(the name of the first field) : (other information in the
record) xx/yy”. “yy” is the total number of records found, and “xx” is
the order of the current record in the list. If no record has been found,
you will get the message “no matched record,” and the current field
will be shown again, so that you can type another text to search for.
You can move through the “list of records found” as follows.
1) Move by records
Move to the next record: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to the previous record: Space-1 or up scroll button
286
Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6
Move to previous same field different record: Space-3
Move to next same field different record: Space-6
Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3
2) Move between the fields in a record
Move to the next field: Space-5
Move to the previous field: Space-2
Move to the last field: Space-4-6
Move to the first field: Space-1-3
In the “list of records found,” if you want to search for different text,
you can press “enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” again to open the “search
records” dialog box. Then, type the new text that you want to search
for.
If you want to delete a record found, press “space-1” or “space-4” to
move to the record, and press “space-d (dots 1-4-5)” in any of the
fields in the record. Then, you will be asked if you really want to
delete the record. Here, you can select “yes” or “no” by pressing
“space” or “backspace.” If you press “enter” after selecting “yes,” the
record will be deleted, and if you select “no,” the deletion will be
canceled. If you want to search for records in another table, press
“enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)” to open the “table manager” dialog box, and
press “enter” on the name of the table that you want to activate.
If you want to change the content of a record, select the record by
pressing “space-1” or “space-4” repeatedly. And press “enter-m (dots
1-3-4)” at any field in the record. Then, the same dialog box as the
“add record” dialog box will be opened. To change the content of
some fields, move to the fields by pressing “tab (space-4-5),” type the
new content of the fields, and press “enter.” To save the modified
content of a record, press “enter” after typing the contents of all the
fields that you want to change. Or you can move to the “confirm”
button by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” repeatedly, and press “enter.” If
you want to cancel modifying the record, press “tab (space-4-5)” once
more to move to the “cancel” button and press “enter.”
287
14.4 List of Records Found
The “list of records found” will appear when the “search records” was
performed successfully. While you are using the “add record” or
“search records” dialog box, if you want to go to the “list of records
found,” press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or F2 to open the menu, and
press “enter” on “list of records found”. Or instead of using the menu,
you can just press “enter-f (dots 1-2-4).”
14.5 Setting Backup Option
To backup your database file, you can do it manually using the
"backup database" function. You can also backup your database file
automatically by using the “setting backup option.” To activate the
“setting backup option” function, press “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”
to open up the menu. Then press “space-4” or “space-1” repeatedly
to move “setting backup option.” Then press “enter” on it. Or, you
can press “e (dots 1-5)” in the menu to go to “setting backup option.”
You can also activate the function without opening up the menu by
pressing “enter-e (dots 1-5).”
If you activate the function, you will see a dialog box. The dialog box
has three controls: “backup mode” radio button, a “confirm” button,
and a “cancel” button. You can switch between controls by pressing
“tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2).” To switch between radio
buttons, you can press “space-1,” “backspace,” “space-4,” or “space.”
The “backup mode” has three radio buttons: “manual backup,”
“always backup changes when exiting,” and “prompt backup changes
when exiting.”
1) If you select the “manual backup,” it will not create a new backup fi
le even though there may be changes in the database. In this cas
e, you can only make a new backup file by using the “backup
database” menu.
2) If you select the “always backup changes when exiting,” a new bac
kup file will be automatically created if you modify the database or
add other information when you exit the database manager.
3) If you select the “prompt backup changes when exiting,” you will s
ee the message “backup changes? yes” when you exit the
database manager, if you have modified the database or added ot
288
her information. If you press “enter” on “yes,” it will automatically c
reate a new backup file and exit the database manager. If you pre
ss “space-4” once and press “enter” on “no,” it will exit without mak
ing a new backup file.
You can change the backup mode if you press “enter” after focusing
on one of the three radio buttons. Or, you can press “enter” on
“confirm” by moving to it by pressing “tab (space-4-5).” The default
backup mode is set to “prompt backup changes when exiting.”
14.6 Backup Database
If a cold reset occurs, or if your battery goes dead, all of the data in
the Database manager will be lost. So, it is very important that you
make a backup file every time you make a change to the Database
file. To go to “backup database,” open the menu by pressing “space-
m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2.” Then, use the “space-1” or “space-4,” and
find “backup database.” Then, press “enter.” You can also press “u
(dots 1-3-6)” while you are in the menu to get to “backup database.”
Or, you can press “enter-u (dots 1-3-6)” to activate this function
without calling up the menu.
If you already have a backup file, you will hear the message “backup
changes? Yes.” If you have made any changes to your database file,
press “enter” to create a new backup file. If you want to keep the
previous backup file, press “space,” locate “no,” and press “enter” on
it. When you make a backup file in your database manager, you will
always have a new backup file with the extension SDF. The name of
backup file is “UserDatabase.sdf”
14.7 Restore Database
If you want to restore the database file after a cold reset, press
“space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu, and use the up
and down arrow keys to find “restore database.” Then, press “enter”
on “restore database.” Or, you can press “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” while you
are in the menu to find “restore database.” You can also press “enter-
o (dots 1-3-5)” to activate this function, without calling up the menu.
289
If you activate the “restore database” function, and you already have
an database file, you will hear the message, “database file already
exists. restore? Yes” If you press “enter,” the backup database file
will be restored to the current database file. If you want to cancel,
you press “space” and press “enter.”
14.8 Hot Keys for Database Manager
Add record: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Search records: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Table manager: enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
List of records found: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Setting backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Backup database: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore database: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
1) Move by controls
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
2) Move in a list box
Move to the next list item: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to the previous list item: Space-1 or up scroll button
3) Select your answer in the prompt box
Move to the next answer: Space-4, Space, or down scroll button
Move to the previous answer: Space-1, Backspace, or up scroll
button
4) Move in the “list of records found”
Move to the next record: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to the previous record: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6
Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3
Move to the next field: Space-5
Move to the previous field: Space-2
Move to the last field: Space-4-6
Move to the first field: Space-1-3
Move to previous same field different record: Space-3
Move to next same field different record: Space-6
290
15. Utility
The “utility” menu provides several special functions for use with the
Braille Sense Plus B32. The “utility” menu has the following items:
“Calculator,” (where you can do simple math equations as well as
scientific calculations), “set date and time,” (where you can set the
Braille Sense Plus B32 internal clock), “check date and time,” (where
you can check the date and time), “check power status,” (where you
can check the remaining battery power), “setup Internet,” (where you
can adjust your Internet settings), “terminal for screen reader,” (which
allows you to connect the Braille Sense Plus B32 to your PC for use
as a Braille display, external speaker, as well as many other useful
functions). To access the menu items, press “space-1” or “space-4”
in the “program menu,” and press “enter” on the “utility” menu. Or,
you can press “u (dots 1-3-6)” in the “program menu” to open the
utility menu. The “utility” menu has several submenus under each of
the menu items. The following sections will discuss each of these
menu options and their functions in greater detail.
15.1 Calculator
Using the calculator on the Braille Sense Plus B32 you can do simple
math equations as well as complex scientific calculations. The
results and formulas will be displayed in Braille, and spoken by the
Braille Sense Plus B32. While using the calculator, you can refer to
the “help” menu by pressing “space-h (dots 1-2-5).” The “help” menu
is very useful as you can quickly access hot key information for the
various programs on the Braille Sense Plus B32.
When you want to use the calculator you can press “c (dots 1-4)”
from within the “utility” menu. When using the calculator on the
Braille Sense Plus B32, you need to type using computer Braille
when calculating or inserting your formulas. You can initialize your
calculation line by pressing “backspace-c (dots 1-4).” If you insert
numbers or a function into a result, the result will disappear; and if
you put in operators, you can get to the next step. In addition, you
can keep your result in the calculator’s memory, and you can recall it
when you need the result. You can use the function and operators
291
via the calculator menu or you can use the hot keys depending on
which method works best for you.
All of these functions are explained in greater detail below.
15.1.1 General Functions
“General functions” is a dialog box that contains the “general function
list,” a “confirm” button, and a “cancel” button. In the dialog box, you
can navigate through the items with “tab (“space-4-5”)” and “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”)”. In the general function list, you can navigate the
operators using “space-1” or “space-4.” Or, in the list, you can press
the first letter of the operator that you want to go to. In the
“calculator,” you can open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” or “F2,” and press “enter” on “general functions.” Or, you can
press “g (dots 1-2-4-5)” in the menu to access “general functions.”
After starting the calculation, 0 will be displayed in computer Braille.
On the calculation line, you can access the “general functions” by
pressing “enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5).” If the dialog box pops up first, you
will be placed on the general function list. Once in the list, you can
select what you want, and press “enter” on it to run the operator since
the default is set to the “confirm” button in the dialog. In the dialog
box, you can cancel the operator selection by pressing “enter” on
“cancel,” “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6),” or “space-e (dots 1-5).” You can
use hot keys of the operators for convenient access.
The hot keys of the operators are as follows:
Plus: dots 3-4-6
Minus: dots 3-6
Division: dots 3-4
Multiplication: dots 1-6
Percent: dots 1-4-6
Power: Backspace-4-5
Square Root: Enter-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)
Decimal point: dots 4-6
Left parenthesis: dots 1-2-3-5-6
Right parenthesis: dots 2-3-4-5-6
PI: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Exponential function: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
292
If you want to enter in negative numbers, you should type in minus
(dots 3-6) and the number together in parentheses. For example,
you should type in minus 2 in the following manner: (-2).
For the percent operation, you can get the result when you put in the
numbers first and the percent sign (%) just after typing in the
numbers. Immediately after you have typed in the percent sign (%),
the number that you have typed in will be converted into a percent
value. For example, 90 + 20% equals 90 + 18. You will see the
number 18 on pressing the % sign since 18 is 20% of 90. So, you
get 108 for your answer.
15.1.2 Variable Calculators
The “variable calculators” will keep your resulting answers and
calculations in the memory. The “variable calculators” menu has four
submenu items: “recall item,” “delete all saved items,” “save item,”
and “statistics functions.” You can move between these items by
pressing “space-4” or “space-1” repeatedly, and then press “enter” on
the desired feature. To access these menu items, press “space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” to call up the menu, and press “enter” on “variable
calculators.” Or, you can press “v (dots 1-2-3-6)” when you are in the
menu.
15.1.2.1 Recall Items
“Recall items” is a dialog box, that has the following items “list,”
“delete,” “display detail,” a ”confirm” button, and a “cancel” button.
You can navigate through each of these items by pressing tab
(“space-4-5”) or shift-tab (“space-1-2”). You can access “recall items”
by pressing “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” in the “variable calculators” menu.
Otherwise, you can access the dialog box by pressing “backspace-r
(dots 1-2-3-5)” in the calculation line. The “item list” displays “an item
name: the result value,” and you can move in the item name list by
pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” You can insert the item’s result into
your calculation if you press “enter” on the item name. You can also
copy each item in the “item list.” Press the “space” key to select an
item in the “item list.” Then, press “enter-i (dots 2-4)” to copy the
selected items to the clipboard. The “display detail” shows the item
name and its result with the default set to “no.” If you want to review
293
the detailed information, press “space” to switch to “yes.” Then, it will
display “item name: the formula = its result value” in Braille. “Delete”
is used to get rid of your registered item. If you want to delete an
item, first, you should select the item that you want to be deleted, and
then press “enter” on “delete.” You can find the deleted item in “item
list” by pressing “tab (space-4-5).” Or, you can press “space-d (dots
1-4-5)” on what you want to delete in the item name list. If you want
to delete all of the items, you can select all of them by pressing
“enter-a (dot 1),” and press “space-d (dots 1-4-5).” If you only want to
delete some of them, you can select the items by pressing “space,”
and press “space-d (dots 1-4-5)” on the selected items.
15.1.2.2 Delete All Saved Items
When you use this function, you can delete all of the saved items that
are stored in the “recall items.” To activate it, you can call up the
menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or press “F2.” Then, use
the “space-1” or “space-4” to get to the “variable calculators” menu,
and press “enter.” Next, use the up and down arrows to go to “delete
all saved items,” and press “enter.” You can also press “enter-d (dots
1-4-5)” while you are in the calculation line.
15.1.2.3 Save Items
“Save items” is a dialog box that has an edit window for typing in the
item name, a “confirm” button and a “cancel” button. You can move
between the control items by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”)”. In the “variable calculators” menu, you can access
“save items” by pressing “s (dots 2-3-5).” When you are in the
calculation line, you can press “backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)” to open the
save items dialog box. When you are on the calculation line if you
type in the item name, and formula, “a=2+sin(30),” followed by
pressing “enter,” the calculation will be saved automatically. In your
calculating result, you can access “save items” to type in an item
name in the edit box, and then you can save it by pressing “enter”
directly or by pressing “enter” on the “confirm” button. If you type in
function names like “sin,” “cos,” or “pi” as an item name, you will see
the message “invalid item name,” and if you type in names that have
already been saved, you will see a message that says, “replace
variable a with current value? Yes.” If you want to change the value,
294
press “enter” on “yes.” And if you do not want to change the value,
press “enter” on “no.” Press “space” to toggle between “yes” and
“no.”
15.1.2.4 Statistics Function
If you select this menu item, a dialog box opens, which consists of a
list box containing all the stored variables, a list box displaying the
results of several functions, and a “close” button. You can move
between these elements by pressing “tab (space-4-5),” or “shift-tab
(space-1-2).” You can bring up this dialog box by pressing
“backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5)” in the calculator line, or by pressing “t
(dots 2-3-4-5)” in the “variable calculators” menu. In the variable list,
the variable names and their current values are displayed. You can
move between these variables by pressing “space-4” or “space-1.” In
order to select a variable to be used in the calculation, press “space”
on it. This list is the same as the one in the “recall items” dialog box.
The only difference is that this dialog box always displays variable
names and values, regardless of the value of “detail display” option.
After you select all of the variables to be used in the calculation, you
can press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the “result” list. The “result”
list displays the sum, average, variance, and standard deviation of
selected variables. You can move between these items by pressing
“space-4” or “space-1.” If you want to copy some results in the list to
the clipboard, first press “space” on the items to be copied, and then
press “enter-I (dots 2-4).” (However, “copy to clipboard” in the menu
cannot be used. Only this hotkey will work.) Once they are copied to
the clipboard, they can be pasted in the word processor or other
programs. To close the dialog box, press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or
press “enter” on the “close” button. To get the statistics about
another set of variables after reading the result, press “shift-tab
(space-1-2)” to go back to the variable list. Then, press “space-e
(dots 1-5)” to cancel all the selections. Now, select all the variables
to be calculated in the same way as you did before, and press “tab
(space dots-4-5) to read the result.
15.1.3 Sine Functions
The “sine functions” menu will be activated when you press “enter” on
“sine functions,” or press “s (dots 2-3-4)” in the menu. You can open
295
the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4).” Or, you can activate
the “sine functions” menu by pressing “enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” in your
calculation line. The “sine function” list consists of “sine,” “arc sine,”
and “hyperbolic sine.” If you press “enter” on one of the three
functions while moving with “space-1” or “space-4,” or if you press
“enter” on “confirm” on one of the functions while moving with tab
(“space-4-5”), you can insert it into your calculation line after selecting
one of the sine functions. Or, you can insert one of the three sine
functions by pressing the first letter of each in the list.
15.1.4 Cosine Functions
You can activate the “cosine functions” by pressing “enter” on “cosine
function,” or if you press “c (dots 1-4)” in the menu. You can open the
menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4). Or, in your calculation line,
you can open the “cosine function” by pressing “enter-c (dots 1-4).”
The “cosine function” list consists of “cosine,” “arc cosine,” and
“hyperbolic cosine.” If you press “enter” on one of the three functions
while moving with “space-1” or “space-4,” or if you press “enter” on
“confirm” while moving with tab (“space-4-5”), you can insert it into
your calculation line after selecting one of the three cosine functions.
Or, you can insert one of the three cosine functions by pressing the
first letter of each in the list.
15.1.5 Tangent Functions
You can activate the “tangent functions” when you press “enter” on
“tangent functions,” or if you press “t (dots 2-3-4-5)” in the menu. You
can also open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4).” Or, in
your calculation line, you can open the “tangent functions” by
pressing “enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5).” The “tangent functions” list consists
of “tangent,” “arc tangent,” and “hyperbolic tangent.” If you press
“enter” on one of the three functions while moving with “space-1” or
“space-4,” or if you press “enter” on “confirm” on one of the functions
while moving with tab (“space-4-5”), you can insert it into your
calculation line after selecting one of the three tangent functions. Or
you can insert one of the three tangent functions by pressing the first
letter of each in the list.
296
15.1.6 Logarithm Functions
The “logarithm functions” is a dialog box, which contains the
following: “function list,” a “confirm” button, and a “cancel” button.
You can move between the three items by pressing “tab (“space-4-
5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”. The function list consists of “common
logarithm” and “natural logarithm,” in which you can move by pressing
“space-1” or “space-4.”
You can activate the “logarithm functions” menu by pressing “enter”
on “logarithm functions,” or if you press “l (dots 1-2-3)” in the menu.
Of course, you can open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-
4).” Or, in your calculation line, you can activate the “logarithm
function” by pressing “enter-l (dots 1-2-3).”
When running the “logarithm functions,” If you press “enter” on one of
the functions while moving with “space-1” or “space-4,” or if you press
“enter” on “confirm” on one of the functions while moving with “tab
(“space-4-5”)”,” you can insert it into your calculation line after
selecting one of the logarithm functions. Or, you can insert “natural
logarithm” by pressing “n (dots 1-3-4-5)” in the list. You can insert
“common logarithm” by pressing “c (dots 1-4).”
15.1.7 Copy to Clipboard
The “copy to clipboard” function is used to copy your formula or result
into the clipboard for pasting your formula or result in a document of
the word processor. You can activate it by pressing “enter” on the
“copy to clipboard,” or by pressing “I (dots 2-4)” in the menu. You can
open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4)” while running the
calculator. Or, in the calculation line, you can press “enter-I (dots 2-
4)” for the quick copy of your calculation into the clipboard directly.
After copying, you can paste it in your document of the word
processor.
When you activate “copy to clipboard,” you will hear “copy
completed,” and the Braille Sense Plus B32 will return to your
calculation line.
297
15.1.8 Option Settings
“Option settings” is a dialog box, which contains the following:
“setting list,” a “confirm” button, and a “cancel” button. You can move
between the three items by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”)”. The “setting list” consists of “radian” and “degree,” in
which you can move by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.”
If you select “radian,” you can get the PI value while using the
trigonometric function. If you select “degree” and activate PI, you will
get a wrong answer. You can activate the “option settings” if you
press “enter” on it, or if you press “o (dots 1-3-5)” in the menu. Of
course, you can open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4).
Or, in your calculation line, you can activate the “option settings” by
pressing “enter-o (dots 1-3-5).”
When running the “option settings,” if you press “enter” on what you
want in the setting list while moving with “space-1” or “space-4,” or if
you press “enter” on “confirm” on what you want in the setting list,
while moving with “tab (“space-4-5”)”,” you will set the option.
15.1.9 Exit
This is used to exit the calculator. You can quit a calculation if you
press “enter” on “exit,” or if you press “z” in the menu. Of course, you
can open the menu by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4). Or, in your
calculation line, you can exit by pressing “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
15.1.10 Sample Math Calculations
The following are examples for each of the math functions that you
can perform when using the calculator on the Braille Sense Plus B32.
General functions:
1. Addition Plus
For Plus press “dots 3-4-6.”
For example, to add the numbers 10 and 20, you would enter:
10+20.
The result is displayed as 30.
298
2. Subtraction Minus
For Minus, press “dots 3-6.”
For example, to add the numbers 10 and 20, and then subtract 5,
you would enter: 10+20-5. The result is displayed as 25.
3. Multiplication
For multiplication, press “dots 1-6.”
For example, to multiply 10 by 20, you would enter: 10*20.
The result is displayed as 200.
4. Division
For Division, press “dots 1-4.”
For example, to divide 20 by 10, you would enter: 20/10. The
result is displayed as 2.
5. Percent
For Percent, “press dots 1-4-6.”
If you want to calculate, what a 10 percent mark-up of 20 would be,
enter the following, 20+10% which gives you the result 22. You
get this answer because, 2 is 10percent of 20.
To calculate a 10 percent mark-down on 20, press: 20-10% which
gives the result 18.
You get this answer because, 2 is 10 percent of 20.
To calculate what percentage 20 is of 10, press: 20/10% which
gives you the result 200.
To calculate 10 percent of 20, press: 20*10% which gives the
result 2. That is, 10 percent is 0.1. 20*0.1 = 2.
6. Power
For Power, press “BACKSPACE” with “dots 4-5.”
For example, to calculate 2 to the power of 10, you would press:
2^10. The answer will be given as 1024.
7. Calculating Square Root
To perform the Square root function, you can press “enter” with
“dots 1-2-3-4-5.”
299
For example, to calculate the square root of 16, you press: Enter
with dots 1-2-3-4-5, 16 “)”. Then, press enter.
Your answer will be given as 4.
8. Exponential
For Exponential you can press “enter” with “dots 1-5.”
For example, to calculate the Exponential of 2, you would press:
Enter with dots 1-5 then 2, followed by the “)” and “enter.” That is,
exp (2) which gives the result 7.3890561.
9. Trigonometric Functions
Sine Functions:
For Sine, press “Enter” with “dots 2-3-4,” and then “s.” This is shown
on the Braille display as, sin(.
For Arc Sine, press “enter” with “dots 2-3-4,” then “a.” This is
displayed as asin(.
For Hyperbolic sine, press “enter” with “dots 2-3-4,” then “h.” This is
displayed as sinh(.
In order to calculate the sine of a 30 degree angle you would type the
following: Enter with dots 2-3-4, then “s,” 30 and then” ).” Press
“enter” and your answer is displayed as
0.5.
Cosine Functions:
For Cosine, you would press “enter with “dots 1-3,” and then you
would press “c.” This is displayed as cos(.
For Arc cosine, press “enter,” with “dots 1-3,” then, “a.” This is
displayed as acos(.
For Hyperbolic cosine, press “enter” with “dots 1-3,” then, “h.” This is
displayed as cosh(.
For example, to calculate the cosine of the 30 degree angles, you
press: Enter with dots 1-3, C, 30 and then “)”. Then, press “enter.”
Your answer will be given as
300
0.8660254.
Tangent Functions:
For Tangent, press Enter with dots 2-3-4-5 and then T. This is
displayed as tan(.
For Arc tangent, press Enter with dots 2-3-4-5 then A. This is
displayed as atan(.
For Hyperbolic tangent, press “enter,” with “dots 2-3-4-5,” then, “h.”
This is displayed as tanh(.
For example, to calculate the tangent of the 30 degree angles, you
press: Enter with dots 2-3-4-5, T, 30 and then “)”. That is, tan(30)
which gives you the result of 0.57735027.
Logarithm Functions:
Common logarithm
For Common logarithm, press “Enter” with “dots 1-2-3,” and then “n.”
This is displayed as log(.
For example, to calculate the common logarithm of the 100, you
press: Enter with dots 1-2-3, N, 100 and then “)”. That is, log(100)
which gives the result 2.
Natural Logarithm
For Natural logarithm, press “enter” with “dots 1-2-3,” and then, “e.”
This is displayed as ln(.
For example, to calculate the natural logarithm of the 100, you press:
Enter with dots 1-2-3, E, 100 and then “)”. That is, ln(100) which gives
the result 4.60517019.
15.2 Set Date and Time
If you want to set the Braille Sense Plus B32 internal clock, you can
set it by pressing “enter” on “set date and time” in the “utility” menu.
In the “utility” menu, you can locate the set date and time by pressing
“t (dots 2-3-4-5),” or you can find it by navigating the “utility” menu
with “space-1” or “space-4.”
The set date and time is a dialog box, which consists of “time zone,”
“use daylight savings,” “time format,” “time,” “date,” a “confirm” button,
301
and a “cancel” button. You can move between each of these items
by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2)”.
If you activate “set date and time” for the first time, you may see “time
zone? Pacific Time (US & Canada); Tijuana (GMPT-08:00)” which is
set as the default. In “time zone,” you can review the “time zone” list
by pressing “space-4” or “space-1,” or by typing in the first letter of
represented cities. If you selected one of the time zones, you can
move to the next item by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)”,” or you can
move to the previous item by pressing “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”.
The “use daylight savings” will display according to “time zone.”
Namely if daylight saving time is used in selected time zone, this item
will display. If not so, this item is not display. You can check and
uncheck this item by using “space.”
The next item is “time format,” where you can switch between 12 hour
and 24 hour time. You can toggle between which time to use with
“space-1” or “space-4.”
Once you select a time, you can move to the next “time” by pressing
“tab (“space-4-5”)”.” In “time,” you can set your time. If you select 12
hour clock in the “time format,” you can see A.M. or P.M. after the
hour and minute. In the 12 hour clock, you can set the time after
selecting A.M. or P.M. by pressing “space-x (dots 1-3-4-6).” In the 24
hour clock setting, you can type in a 24-hour-system number
regardless of A.M. or P.M. When you put numbers in the time, you
need to put a “space” or “: (colon)” between the hour and the minute.
To set your time, you can move to the date by pressing “tab (space-4-
5).” In the date, you should put in the month, date, and year in that
order. You should use a 2-digit number for the month, a 2-digit
number for the date, and a 4-digit number for the year while typing in
a “space” or “/ (slash)” between them. After you have completed the
necessary information, you can press “enter” on “confirm” by moving
with “tab (space-4-5),” and then you will return to “set date and time.”
Or, you can press “enter” when you have completed entering all of
the information because the default is set to “confirm.”
302
15.3 Check Date and Time
You can check the current date and time here. To activate this
function, press “space-4” or “space-1” in the “utility” menu, and then
press “enter” on “check date and time.” Or, you can activate this
function by pressing “d” in the menu. Anywhere in the Braille Sense
Plus B32, you can press “space-t (dots 2-3-4-5)” to check the time. If
you press “space-t (dots 2-3-4-5),” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say
the time, and the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display the current time
in Braille. Then, if you press tab (“space-4-5”), the Braille Sense Plus
B32 will say and display today’s date.
15.4 Wake up alarm
If you have set up the “wake up alarm” function, an alarm will sound
on the Braille Sense Plus B32 at the specified time every day. If you
want to open “wake up alarm,” go to the “program” menu, move to
“utility,” and then press “enter.” Then, use the “space-1” or “space-4”
to find “wake up alarm,” and then press “enter” on “wake up alarm.” If
this is the first time you have opened “wake up alarm,” and you have
not yet set the time or date in the Braille Sense Plus B32, the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will then say, “set time:” After you set the time, the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will display the “wake up alarm” dialog box.
The Braille Sense Plus B32 will then say, “set time:” The “wake up
alarm” dialog box contains the following: “set time,” “bell,” “term,”
“alarm duration,” “repeat interval,” “wake up call times” a “confirm”
button, and a “cancel” button. You can move among these by
pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” and “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”. If you want
to check the wakeup call settings, open this dialog box again. It will
show you the current wakeup call settings. When the alarm sounds,
the Braille display on the Braille Sense Plus B32 will also display the
message “wake up alarm.” If you want to stop the alarm, press
“backspace-enter.” After you press “backspace-enter,” the Braille
Sense Plus B32 will remain on, even though the power switch is
turned to “off.” In order to turn the Braille Sense Plus B32 off, you
must turn the power switch to “on,” and then back to “off” after you hit
“backspace-enter.” Then, the Braille Sense Plus B32 will be turned
off, and the alarm will not sound again until you set it again. If you do
not plan on being able to turn the unit off and on, you should turn on
303
the “power saving mode” in the “option” menu (as explained in
section 2.4) to avoid draining the battery.
15.4.1 Set Time
When you open the “wake up alarm” dialog box, the Braille Sense
Plus B32 will display the “set time” field. The value is set to the
current time or the time specified previously. Here you can directly
type in the time, or set the time using the shortcut keys, as explained
in section 6.3. After you set the time, you should press “tab (“space-
4-5”)” to move to the next field. While you are anywhere in the Braille
Sense Plus B32, you can check the time by pressing “space-t (dots 2-
3-4-5)” to check the time.
15.4.2 Alarm Sound
You can select an alarm sound for the wake up alarm. If you press
“tab (“space-4-5”)” on “set time,” you will hear the alarm sound that is
currently set. Press “space-1” or “space-4” to change the alarm
sound, and you will hear the different alarm sounds. Select one of
the three alarm sounds that are available. If you have selected the
sound that you want, press “tab (space-4-5)” to move to the next field.
15.4.3 Term
In this field, you can set which day of the week the alarm will go off.
There are four options: “off,” “once,” “week days,” and “every day.”
Move between these options by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” If
“term” is set to “off,” the alarm will not go off at the specified time at all.
If “term” is set to “once,” the alarm will go off only once. If “term” is
set to “week day,” the alarm will go off at the same time every
weekday, Monday through Friday. If “term” is set to “everyday,” the
alarm will go off at the specified time 7 days a week, even on
weekends. When you have selected the option you like, press “tab
(“space-4-5”)” to move to the next field.
15.4.4 Ringing Duration
This option sets the amount of time that the alarm will sound. The
options are 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. Move between these
304
options by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” If you set the ringing
duration to “1 minute,” the alarm will sound for one minute, and then
the alarm will be silent. To stop the alarm, press “backspace-enter.”
15.4.5 Repeat Interval
This option sets the amount of time that will be between the times
that the alarm sounds. For example, after the alarm has stopped
sounding, it will ring again in 3 minutes, if you set the repeat interval
to three minutes. The available settings are 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, or 20
minutes. Move between these options by pressing “space-1” or
“space-4.”
15.4.6 Wakeup Call Times
This option allows you to decide how many times the alarm will sound.
The available settings are anywhere from 1 to 10 times. For example,
if the alarm is not turned off by pressing “backspace-enter,” it will
repeat according to the number of times that you set for this option.
Move between these options by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.”
15.4.7 Confirm Cancel
If you press “enter” on the “confirm” button, the changed options will
be saved, and the dialog box will be closed. If you do not want to
save the changes you have made, press “enter” on the “cancel”
button. The Braille Sense Plus B32 will keep the previous “wakeup
call” settings, and close the dialog box.
15.5 Calendar
You can activate the calendar by pressing “enter” on “calendar” in the
“utility” menu, or by pressing “l (dots 1-2-3).” The following options
will be available when you are using the calendar. “solar calendar,”
“lunar calendar,” and “day of week.” In the calendar, you can check
the three kinds of information starting from the year 1841 to the year
2043. If you type in a date that is not in the range and press “enter,”
you will get the message, “invalid date,” and return to where you
where you were typing in the date.
305
15.5.1 Using the Calendar
The “calendar” is composed of the “solar calendar,” “lunar calendar,”
and “day of week.” In the “lunar calendar,” a leap month will display
the month with “l (dots 1-2-3).” The calendar works according to a
date unit. The default is the date that the Braille Sense Plus B32 was
set to the last time the date was set. You can check the date in two
ways.
The following is an explanation of how to check the dates.
1) Moving items
You can switch between “solar calendar,” “lunar calendar,” and “day
of week” by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”.
2) Typing in date
In the calendar, you can type in a month, date, and year. For the
year, you should type in a 4-digit number, and for the month and date,
you should type in 2-digit numbers. It is possible to type these
numbers in using computer Braille and regular grade 1 Braille without
using the number sign. You can put “space” or “/ (slash)” between the
month, date, and year. If you press “enter” after typing in a date, you
can hear the date once, and go to the next item. For example, if you
put the date in the “solar calendar,” you will be on the “lunar
calendar.”
3) Hotkeys for switching dates
After putting in a date, you can check the “solar calendar,” “lunar
calendar,” and “day of week” by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-
tab (space-1-2).”
Move to the next day: Space-6
Move to the previous day: Space-3
Move to the next week: Space-5
Move to the previous week: Space-2
Move to the next month: Space-4
Move to the previous month: Space-1
Move to the next year: Space-5-6
Move to the previous year: Space-2-3
306
15.6 Pronunciation Dictionary
The “pronunciation dictionary” is used to register or modify the Braille
Sense Plus B32’s pronunciation while it is speaking. You can
activate it by pressing “p (dots 1-2-3-4)” in the “utility” menu.
The “pronunciation dictionary” is composed of the list, “add word”
button, “modify word” button, “delete word” button and “close” button.
You can move through those controls by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or
“shift-tab (space-1-2).” The list will be shown as “word: xx – yy”
where “xx” is the original word and “yy” is the word you wanted to
hear instead of the original word. For example, if you wanted to hear
“world health organization” for the original word “WHO” and added
the word, the list will be listed as “word: WHO – world health
organization.” If there are many items on the list, you can move up or
down through lists by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” Also you can
click the cursor routing key corresponding to the item position you
want to focus. For example, if there are 10 items in the list and you
want to focus the 5th item, you can just click the 5th cursor routing key
and you will focus on the 5th item on the list. The list will not be listed
by the alphabetical order and it will be listed by the sequential order
to be added.
If you want to add new word, you can add the word by pressing
“enter” on “add word” button or you can press “space-I (dots 2-4).”
Then you will meet “add entry:” Here you can type in the word you
want to change its pronunciation and press “tab (space-4-5)” then you
will meet “replacement:” Here you can type in the word you want to
hear the pronunciation and then press “enter” or press “tab (space-4-
5)” to move to “confirm” button and then press “enter.” The word will
be added completely and the focus will be returned to “add word”
button. In case of adding the word by pressing “space-I (dots 2-4),”
newly added word will be displayed. If you want to cancel this
modification, you can press “enter” on “cancel” button or press
“space-e (dots 1-5)” or press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
If you want to modify the registered word, in the list, you can move up
or down by pressing “space-1” or “space-4” so that you focus the item
you want to modify. And after moving to “modify word” button by
pressing “tab (space-4-5),” press “enter.” Or on the item you want to
307
modify, just press “space-m (dots 1-3-4).” Then you will meet “modify
entry: (focused word).” At this time, if you press “tab (space-4-5)”
once, you will meet “replacement: (new pronunciation).” Here you
can type in the pronunciation you want to change and then press
“enter.” Or press “tab (space-4-5)” again to move to “confirm” button
and then press “enter.” Then the word will be modified completely
and the focus will be returned to “modify word” button. In case of
modifying the word by pressing “space-m (dots 1-3-4),” the modified
word will be displayed. If you want to cancel this modification, you
can press “enter” on “cancel” button or press “space-e (dots 1-5)” or
press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
If you want to delete the registered word, in the list, you can move up
or down by pressing “space-1” or “space-4” so that you focus the item
you want to delete. And after moving to “delete word” button by
pressing “tab (space-4-5),” press “enter.” Or on the item you want to
delete, just press “space-d (dots 1-4-5).” Then you will meet the
prompt, “delete: yes.” If you are sure to delete the item, press “enter.”
Otherwise press “space” to switch to “no” and then press “enter.”
If you want to exit “pronunciation dictionary,” you can press “enter” on
“close” button or press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).”
15.7 Stopwatch
When you press “enter” on the “stopwatch,” you will show “00:00:00.”
If you press “enter,” the stopwatch will start. If you press “enter”
again, it will pause, and the Braille Sense Plus B32 will say the
elapsed time, and display it in Braille. Pressing “enter” again will
restart the stopwatch from where it paused.
If you press “backspace” on “work” or “pause,” it will let you know the
elapsed time and will initialize into “00:00:00.” While the stopwatch is
working, pressing “space” will make the Braille Sense Plus B32 say
the elapsed time at the moment. In this case, the Braille display is
still just displaying the clock.
While the stopwatch is running, pressing “space-F2” will stop
displaying the time while the stopwatch is still running. If you press
“space-F2,” the time will be displayed again.
308
If you press “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” before the
start of the stopwatch or while it is running, you can switch to the
“count down timer.” If you activate the “count down timer,” you will be
asked to put in hours, minutes, and seconds. When typing in the
hours, minutes, and seconds, you should type in a two-digit number
for the hour, minute and the second, regardless of whether you are
using computer Braille or regular grade 1 Braille without using a
number sign. If you press “enter” without typing in any numbers, the
“count down timer” will start with the default, which is set to one
minute. When started, the “count down timer” will display “count
down xx minute,” and it will start running. If you press “enter” in the
“count down timer,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will tell you the
remaining time, and then it will pause. If you press “enter” again, it
will restart. Pressing “backspace” will initialize the “count down
timer.” If the timer reaches zero, you will hear a 10-second alarm,
and the “count down timer” will initialize. If you press “backspace-
enter” while the alarm is sounding, the alarm will stop and your timer
will initialize, and will be ready to accept a new time.
If you press “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2)” again
anywhere in the count down timer, the stopwatch will be ready. If you
want to exit the stopwatch or “count down timer,” press “space-z (dots
1-3-5-6)” anywhere within the stopwatch or “count down timer,” and
you will return to the “stopwatch” menu.
15.8 Terminal for Screen reader
The “terminal for screen reader” function allows the Braille Sense
Plus B32 to be used as a Braille display when hooked up to a
computer that uses a compatible screen reader such as Window-
Eyes, JAWS or Supernova. Before using this function, make sure
that the Braille Sense Plus B32 is connected to your personal
computer via a serial cable, bluetooth serial or to the USB client port.
To turn on this function, go to the “utility” menu, and press “enter.”
Then, press “space-4,” until you hear “terminal for screen reader.”
Then, press “enter.” If you activate “terminal for screen reader,” you
will see the list of connection methods. In the list, you will see “serial
port,” “bluetooth serial port” and “USB port.” Press “space-1” or
“space-4” until you reach what you want to select. If you have
309
selected one, press “enter” and you will hear “terminal mode.” The
Braille Sense Plus B32 will no longer say anything, as it is now simply
acting as a Braille display for your computer. If you fail to connect,
you will be returned to the list of connection methods.
For information and support files on connecting the Braille Sense
Plus B32 to the USB port with Window-Eyes see:
GWKB1043 - Configuring the Braille Sense Plus B32 to Work as a
Braille Display via the USB Port
http://www.gwmicro.com/Support/Knowledge_Base/?kbnumber=GW
KB1043
For information and support files on connecting the Braille Sense
Plus B32 to the USB port with JAWS see:
GWKB1046 - Using the Braille Sense Plus B32 as a Refreshable
Braille Display with JAWS
http://www.gwmicro.com/Support/Knowledge_Base/?kbnumber=GW
KB1046
For more information on Bluetooth, refer to Section 13.
15.9 Setup Internet
The “setup Internet” function is used to set up your IP configuration.
In “setup Internet,” you will find “LAN,” “modem,” “ADSL,” “Bluetooth
DUN” and “wireless LAN.” You can move between the four items by
pressing “space-4” or “space-1.” The “LAN” setup should be used if
you are connecting to the Internet via a network or router. The
“modem” setup should be used if you are connecting to the Internet
via a dial-up modem. The “ADSL” setup should be used if you are
connecting to the Internet via a DSL modem. To connect to the
Internet via a wireless network, use the “wireless LAN” function.
If you want to activate “setup Internet,” press “enter” on “setup
Internet” in the “utility” menu, or press “I (dots 2-4)” in the “utility”
menu. You can move through the “utility” menu items with “space-1”
or “space-4.”
If you want to access to Internet with the Braille Sense Plus B32, you
must set the Internet settings at “setup Internet” that is one of the
submenus of “utility” menu.
310
Or, if the PC in which the Active Sync program is installed is
connected to Internet and the Braille Sense Plus B32 is connected to
that PC, then you can connect the Braille Sense Plus B32 to Internet.
The functions of this menu are explained in greater detail in the
following sections.
15.9.1 LAN Setup
If you are going to set up a LAN, you should first connect a LAN cable
to the Braille Sense Plus B32. In this setup, you can decide whether
you will use the automatic or manual setup to setup your IP
configuration. If you want to set it up automatically, press “enter” on
“setup IP: Automatic.” Then, it will be set up automatically. For the
automatic setup, your host server should provide DHCP service
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
If you want to set up your IP configuration manually, move to
“manual” by pressing “space-4” from the “setup IP: Automatic,” and
press “enter.” Then, you will find the following: “IP,” “subnet mask,”
“gateway,” and “primary DNS.” These settings require specific
information. Please contact your Internet service provider for the
right information. To type in the information, you should use
computer Braille, and after typing in the information, you can move to
the next item by pressing “space-4.” Finally after completing the
“primary DNS,” press “enter.” Then, you will see the message
“setting completed.” You will be returned to “setup internet” with your
information saved. You can then use e-mail, msn messenger or the
web browser.
15.9.2 Modem & Bluetooth DUN setup
If you are going to set up the Braille Sense Plus B32 to connect to the
Internet via a modem, you should first put in a CF type modem card
into the CF slot, and connect a phone line to the modem on the CF
card. Then, activate “setup Internet” in the “utility” menu. After you
have activated “setup Internet,” move to the modem by pressing
“space-1” or “space-4,” and then press “enter.”
If you wish to connect to Mobile network using Bluetooth DUN, you
can move to “setup internet” in the “utility” menu and select “Bluetooth
DUN” and enter on it. In this case, you don’t need to insert CF
311
modem card into the Braille Sense Plus B32 and its user interface is
same as setting up connection using the modem.
The modem setup contains the following: “connect list,” “default,”
“register,” “modify,” “delete,” and “close.” You can move between
these by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”.
Within each item, you can move by pressing “space-4” or “space-1.”
The “connect list” has registered connection names. You can move
between these by pressing “space-4” or “space-1.”
The “default” is to set to the default connection name in the Internet
setup. If you want to choose a connection as the default, go to the
“connect list,” and move to “default” by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)”.”
Then, press “enter.”
“Register” is a dialog box where you can set up the environment
regarding the connect group names. It has “connect name list,” a
“confirm” button, and a “cancel” button. You can move between
these by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”. The
“connect name list” has “connect name,” “connect number,” “id,”
“password,” and “modem speed.” In “connect name,” you can type in
the host name to connect with, and in the “connect number,” you can
type in the number of the host. Here you can type in numbers and
commas (,) only. You can type in numbers using computer Braille. In
“ID” and “password,” use computer Braille to type the ID and
password that are required by the host server. In case of Bluetooth
DUN, you can make the connection to Mobile network without any
password according to Mobile server. In the modem speed, select
one from the list by pressing “backspace” or “space.” After
completing each item, you can move to the next item by pressing “tab
(“space-4-5”)”.” Finally, with “modem speed” completed, you can
press “enter” to save your registration. Before saving it, you can
cancel your choices by moving to “cancel” by pressing “tab (“space-4-
5”)”,” and press “enter” on it.
“Modify” is used to modify the connect group. You can do this by
moving to what you want to select in the “connect list,” and then press
“enter.” You can also press “tab (“space-4-5”)” to locate “modify.”
Otherwise, you can press “enter-m (1-3-4)” on the “connect name” in
312
the “connect list” directly. “Modify” has the same items as “register,”
and you use the menus in the same way.
In “delete,” if you want to delete an item, you can move to what you
want to delete in the “connect list,” and then press “enter” on “delete.”
Use “tab (“space-4-5”)” to move between the items. Or, you can
delete an item by pressing “space-d (dots 1-4-5)” on what you want to
delete in the “connect list.”
If you want to exit the “modem setup,” you can press “space-z (dots
1-3-5-6),” or you can press “enter” on “close” by moving to it by
pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)”.
15.9.3 ADSL Setup
If you want to connect the Braille Sense Plus B32 to the Internet via a
DSL connection, you should use the ADSL setup. First, you should
plug in a LAN cable to the Braille Sense Plus B32’s LAN port. If you
press “enter” on “setup internet,” you will first see “CB LAN 1/5.”
Then, go to ADSL by pressing “space-4” repeatedly. Press “enter” on
“ADSL.” It contains the following controls: connect list, default,
register, modify, delete, and close. You can move between the
controls by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”.
Within each control, you can move item by item by pressing “space-4”
or “space-1.”
In the “connect list,” you will see the registered connect names.
Select one by pressing “enter” on it. In “default,” you can make one
of the registered connect names the default connection. If you make
a connection the default connection, that will be the connection that is
used to connect to the Internet first. In “register,” you can manage
the connect names in the list. It has three controls: edit field, a
confirm button, and a cancel button. You can move between the
three controls by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-
2”)”. The edit field contains the following: connect name, ID, and
password. You can move between the controls by pressing ‘”space-
4” or “space-1.” When in the “connect name” control, type in the
server host name. In “ID” and “password,” you can type in what you
want in ASCII. After completed filling in the appropriate information,
press “enter” or press “enter” on “confirm” after pressing “tab (“space-
313
4-5”)” moving. To cancel everything that has been typed in to the edit
field, go to “cancel,” and press “enter.”
In “modify,” you can modify a connect name. If you want to modify a
connection in the “connect list,” select the connect name you want to
modify in the list. Then, press “enter” on “modify.” Or, after you have
selected the connect name, press “enter-m (dots 1-3-4).” “Modify”
contains the same items as “register,” and the text is typed in the
same way.
Using “delete,” you can delete selected connect names. If you want
to delete a connect name in the “connect list,” select the connect
name you want to delete in the list, and then press “enter” on “delete.”
Or, after you have selected the connect name, press “space-d (dots
1-4-5).”
If you want to exit the ADSL setup, press “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6),” or
press “enter” on “close.”
15.9.4 Setup Wireless LAN
If you want to connect to a wireless network, you should use the
“setup wireless LAN” function. In order to use the “setup wireless
LAN” function, you must change the wireless option to “on” in the
option menu.
Go to the “utility” menu that is located in the “program” menu by
pressing “F1,” and then press “space-4” repeatedly to move to the
“utility” menu. Then, press “enter” on “utility.” Next, move to "setup
Internet" by pressing “space-1” or “space-4,” and then press “enter”
on “setup Internet.” And then press “enter” on “wireless LAN.”
The "wireless LAN" dialog box consists of the “access point” list,
“advanced” button and “close” button. You can move between these
controls by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”. If
you do not have a wireless LAN turned on, you will hear “no item”
when you press “enter” on “wireless LAN.”
When you first open the “wireless LAN” dialog box, the focus is on the
“access point” list. The list has the information of wireless access
314
points which is searched and the “add new…” to additional
registration.
“Access point” list will let you know the “access point name,”
“encryption,” and “sensitivity” of each item. (Ex: linksys, encryption:
WEP, sensitivity: good.) If there is more than one access point in the
list, you can move between them by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.”
Move to the “access point” that you want to connect to. And press
“enter.” Then you will show “the key is provided automatically” check
box. If you don’t use network key in Access Point, just press “enter.”
And if you are using network key in Access Point, press “space” and
press “tab (space-4-5).” And then edit box will be displayed. In edit
box, you have to input the encryption key and press “enter.” And if
your settings are correct, then you will hear “connected” after the
“sensitivity,” with connecting sound.
If you want to register new profile for hide Access Point, press the
“add new…” then the dialog box to register new profile will be opened
and this dialog box is same when opening “advance” common dialog
box.
The “advance” common dialog box is used to modify the registered
profile or add new profile or check the existed profile. If you press
“enter” on the “advance” button while wireless LAN turned off, “no
item” will be displayed. Pressing “enter” on the “advance” button,
while wireless LAN turned on. The “advance” dialog box has 5
controls. You can navigate among these controls by pressing “tab
(“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”.
The “advance” common dialog box contains “profile list,” “add
common dialog” button, “remove” button, “properties common dialog”
button and “close” button controls.
1) “profile list”: Here you will see the profile lists that you have
registered. You can move through the list by pressing “space-4” or
“space-1.”
2) “add common dialog” button: You can register a profile here and
this dialog is same when entering on ‘add new’ in lists of Access
Point. “Add common dialog” has the 10 controls.
315
(1) “setup IP: Automatic” combo box: You can switch between
automatic and manual by pressing “space-4” or “space-1.” If
you select “manual,” you will need to enter your IP address,
subnet mask, gateway IP address, and DNS IP address by
yourself. You can move between these computer edit boxes by
pressing “space-4” or “space-1.” Press “tab (“space-4-5”)” to
move to the next control.
(2) “network name (SSID)” computer edit box: The edit box is
empty and you can type in network name you prefer.
(3) “network mode” combo box: Here you can select between
“infrastructure,” and “802.11 ad-hoc” mode by pressing “space-
1” or “space-4.”
(4) “network authentication mode” combo box: Here you can select
between “open,” “shared,” and “wpa-psk” by pressing “space-1”
or “space-4.”
(5) “data encryption” combo box: Here you can select the data
encryption method by pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” If you
select “open” or “shared” in network authentication mode, you
can choose between “disable” and “wep.” And if you select
“wpa-psk” in network authentication mode, you can choose
“tkip.”
(6) “the key is provided automatically” check box: If the “access
point” does not provide a key for users automatically, uncheck
this check box by pressing “space.” The default is that the
check box is checked.
(7) “network key” computer edit box: This is a computer edit box to
type the network key if the key is not provided automatically.
(8) “key index” edit box: This is an edit box to type the key number
of the wireless access point that matches the network key input.
(9) “confirm” button: Pressing this button applies the changes.
(10) “cancel” button: You can press this button to cancel the
setup.
Selecting “open” in “data encryption” skips numbers 6 through 8,
and checking “the key is provided automatically” check box will
omit the numbers 7, 8.
3) “remove” button: If you want to delete a profile item in the profile list,
select the profile item you wish to delete, and then press “r (dots 1-
316
2-3-5)” or go to the “remove” button by pressing “tab (“space-4-5”)”,
and then press “enter” on “remove” button.
4) “properties common dialog” button: If you want to get information
about a selected profile item in the profile list, press “enter” on the
“properties common dialog” button after focusing on a profile item
by using “tab (“space-4-5”)”. You can reconfirm the registered
information in each item. You can modify an item here directly.
In order to exit from “advance” dialog box, you can press “space-
e(dots 1-5)” or “space-z(dots 1-3-5-6)”.
15.10 Network Status
Using this program, you can check if the Braille Sense Plus B32 is
currently connected to the Internet. This program provides you with
the information about the current connection type, the current IP of
the unit, subnet mask, gateway, and mac address. To run this
program, press “enter” on “network status,” or press “n (dots 1-3-4-5)”
in the “utility” menu. If you start the program, a list of information
about the connection type and address will be displayed. If you press
“tab (space-4-5),” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will display a “renew”
button. If you press “tab (space-4-5) again, “exit” will be displayed. If
you press “shift-tab (space-1-2),” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will
move between these elements in the opposite direction. The first
item in the information list (status) shows if the Braille Sense Plus
B32 is currently connected to the Internet (online/offline), and what
the current connection type is (LAN, Modem, ADSL, or Wireless LAN).
The next item is the “current IP address,” followed by “subnet mask,”
and then “gateway,” and finally “mac address.” You can move
between these items by pressing “space-4” or “space-1.” If the Braille
Sense Plus B32 is not currently connected to the Internet, the status
information shows that the Braille Sense Plus B32 is offline. If you
press “enter” on the “renew” button, it tries to connect to Internet
using the parameters specified in “setup Internet” once again, and
displays on/offline status. To end this program, press “space-z (dots
1-3-5-6)” at any time in the program. Or pressing “enter” on the “exit”
button will close the program too. You can also press “space-n (dots
1-3-4-5)” while you are in the “program” menu to open network status.
317
15.11 Check Power Status
You can activate “check power status” function by pressing “b” or
press “enter” on the “check power status” in the “utility” menu. You
can move to it by pressing “space-4” or “space-1” in the “utility” menu.
Anywhere in the Braille Sense Plus B32, you can activate this
function by pressing “space-1-6.” In “check power status,” you can
check two kinds of information regarding the Braille Sense Plus B32's
power. It will let you know the recharging percentage and if the
Braille Sense Plus B32 is using the AC adapter or the battery. If you
activate this function, you will see “xx% charged, using battery or AC
power.” After checking it, you can exit by pressing “space-z (1-3-5-
6),” which will return you to the menu.
15.12 Backup/Restore Option
“Backup/restore option setting” is a program where you can
backup/restore the option settings for each program in the Braille
Sense Plus B32 all at once. This program can be found in the “utility”
menu. You can run this program by pressing “k (dots 1-3)” in the
“utility” menu. If you run this program, a dialog box will be opened.
This dialog box contains: “program option check box list”, “select all”
button, “backup” button, “restore” button, and “cancel” button. You
can move between the check boxes in the “program option list”, by
pressing “space-1” or “space-4.” You can move between these
controls by pressing “tab (space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (space-1-2).” The
“program option check box list” contains “option settings”, “file
manager option”, “word processor option”, “address manager option”,
“schedule manager option”, “media player option”, “web browser
option”, “e-mail option”, “messenger option”, “Bluetooth option” and
“database manager option”.
In this list, you move to the program option and check it by pressing
“space.” If you want to uncheck it you can do so by pressing “space”
again. After you select all the options you want to backup or restore,
press “enter” on the “backup” or “restore” button. If you want to select
all of the programs in the list, press “enter” on the “select all” button. If
you press “enter” on “backup” or “restore” button, the dialog box will
be closed.
318
If you press a “backup” button, it lets you see a list in which you can
select a path where to store a backup file. It shows up “flashdisk” as
default values. Here you move to disk or folder where you want to
store a file, by using navigation key in a “file manager” program. And
you select a folder or disk by pressing “space,” press “enter”, it turns
up that a backup file is stored in selected folder. Each one of these
options has its own backup file. This means that when you backup
each of the 5 options, it will generate 5 backup files. If you need to
store a backup file in a root of disk, refer to this way. When it comes
out a name of disk, you press “enter” after selecting a disk by
pressing “space.”
If you press a “restore” button, it lets you see a list in which you can
select a path where to restore a backup file. A way how to move or
select a folder or disk is the same as “backup.” If you select a folder
that is not back upped, you can be seen a message which tells that
there is no backup option file.
If you cold reset your Braille Sense Plus B32, or its battery is fully
discharged, the main option settings and settings for each program
will be lost, and initialized to the default values. If you backup options
using this program right before you cold reset, you can restore the
option settings you set previously.
15.13 Upgrade Braille Sense Plus B32 OS
If you activate this function, you can update the Braille Sense Plus
B32 either through an Internet connection or from a disk that contains
the upgrade file. If you decide to upgrade using an Internet
connection, you must first complete the “setup Internet” function. If
you update the Braille Sense Plus B32, all of the settings will be
returned to their default status. Data in the flashdisk will be protected.
However, we recommend that you backup your files before updating
the Braille Sense Plus B32 OS.
While updating, you cannot cancel the update. Note that you must
not press the reset button while updating, and you should avoid
power failure. We recommend that you do not touch the Braille
Sense Plus B32 while it is updating. It may take up to 30 minutes to
update the Braille Sense Plus B32, though it depends on the speed of
319
your Internet connection. On completing the setup, the Braille Sense
Plus B32 will reboot again to finish the update.
15.13.1 Upgrading the Braille Sense Plus B32 OS Using the
Internet
To upgrade the Braille Sense Plus B32 OS via the Internet, complete
the following steps:
1) Make sure an Internet connection is available. Press “enter” on “U
pgrade Braille Sense Plus B32 OS” in the “utility” menu. Then, “U
pgrade: Online” will appear.
2) Now, press “enter” on “Upgrade: Online.” The Braille Sense Plus
B32 will connect to the HIMS server, and your current software ver
sion will be compared to the HIMS server version. You will then b
e asked if you want to continue to upgrade.
If you press “enter” on “no,” the upgrade will be cancelled. Press
“space” to toggle between “yes” and “no.” If you press “enter” on
“yes,” the Braille Sense Plus B32 will download the upgrade file,
the upgrade will stop. If the upgrade fails, it will give you the
message “Internet connection is not available. Check your cable
and try again.” To try the upgrade again, press “space-z (1-3-5-6)”
to cancel, and then activate upgrade Braille Sense Plus B32 OS
again. If the connection is successful, the updated files will be
downloaded, and the Braille Sense Plus B32 will start upgrading.
If you do not have enough memory available on the flashdisk, the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will be unable to update until you make
room for the upgrade files by deleting any unnecessary files from
the Braille Sense Plus B32.
3) After downloading the upgrade file, Braille Sense Plus B32 will aut
omatically start the upgrading process. Please remember that you
must not do anything to the Braille Sense Plus B32 until the upgra
de is complete. When the upgrade is complete, you will be returne
d to the “program” menu, and you will hear “file manager.”
4) After you have completed the upgrade, you should check the softw
are version by pressing “space-v (dots 1-2-3-6)” while you are in th
e “program” menu.
320
15.13.2 Upgrading the Braille Sense Plus B32 OS from a Disk
To upgrade the Braille Sense Plus B32 OS from a disk, complete the
following steps:
1) Connect a disk (such as a compact flash card, SD card or USB me
mory stick) to the Braille Sense Plus B32. The disk must have the
upgrade file stored on it. Then, press “enter” on “Upgrade Braille
Sense Plus B32 OS.”
2) Then, “Upgrade: online” will appear. Press “space-4” to go to the
“Upgrade: Offline.” Then, press “enter.” Then, you will see the dis
k list. Press “space-4” repeatedly to go to the disk that contains th
e upgrade file. Then, press “enter.”
3) You will then be asked if you want to continue to upgrade. If you p
ress “enter” on “no,” the upgrade will be cancelled. Press “space” t
o toggle between “yes” and “no.” If you press “enter” on “yes,” the
Braille Sense Plus B32 will start upgrading.
This step will not appear when your current software version
is not the latest version.
4) The Braille Sense Plus B32 will automatically start the upgrading p
rocess. Please remember that you must not do anything to the Br
aille Sense Plus B32 until the upgrade is complete. When the upg
rade is complete, you will be returned to the “program” menu, and
you will hear “file manager.”
5) After you have completed the upgrade, you should check the softw
are version by pressing “space-v (dots 1-2-3-6)” while you are in th
e “program” menu.
15.14 Hot Keys for Utility
Calculator: c (dots 1-4)
Calculator initialize: Backspace-c (dots 1-4)
Delete numbers or operators: Backspace
General function: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Plus: dots 3-4-6
Minus: dots 3-6
Division: dots 3-4
Multiplication: dots 1-6
Percent: dots 1-4-6
321
Power: Backspace-4-5
Square Root: Enter-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)
Decimal Point: dots 4-6
Left Parenthesis: dots 1-2-3-5-6
Right Parenthesis: dots 2-3-4-5-6
PI: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Exp: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Variable Function:
Recall Items: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Delete all saved items: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Save Items: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)
Trigonometric Function: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), s (dots 2-3-4)
Arc Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), a (dot 1)
Hyperbolic Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), h (dots 1-2-5)
Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), c (dots 1-4)
Arc Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), a (dot 1)
Hyperbolic Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), h (dots 1-2-5)
Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Arc Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), a (dot 1)
Hyperbolic Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), h (dots 1-2-5)
Logarithm Function: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Natural Logarithm: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), e (dots 1-5)
Common Logarithm: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Copy to Clipboard: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
Option Setting: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Setting date and time: t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Move to the next day: Space-6
Move to the previous day: Space-3
Move to the next week: Space-5
Move to the previous week: Space-2
Move to the next month: Space-4
Move to the previous month: Space-1
Move to the next year: Space-5-6
Move to the previous year: Space-2-3
322
Move to 1 hour after: Space-4
Move to 1 hour before: Space-1
Move to 10 minutes after: Space-5
Move to 10 minutes before: Space-2
Move to 1 minute after: Space-6
Move to 1 minute before: Space-3
Switch Between a.m. and p.m.: Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Checking date and time: Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Calendar: l (dots 1-2-3)
Move items
Move to the previous item: Tab (space-4-5)
Move to the next item: Shift-tab (space-1-2)
Move key for date in calendar
Move to the next day: Space-6
Move to the previous day: Space-3
Move to the next week: Space-5
Move to the previous week: Space-2
Move to the next month: Space-4
Move to the previous month: Space-1
Move to the next year: Space-5-6
Move to the previous year: Space-2-3
Pronunciation dictionary: p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Move to the previous control: Tab (space-4-5)
Move to the next control: Shift-tab (space-1-2)
Move to the previous item in entry: space-1
Move to the next item in entry: space-4
Add word: Space-I (dots 2-4)
Modify word: Space-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete word: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Stopwatch: w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Stopwatch start, pause, restart: enter
Check the elapsed time: backspace
Stop Braille display: Space-F2
Restart Braille display: Space-F2
323
Switch between stopwatch and count down timer: “tab (“space-4-5”)”
or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)”
Count down timer pause or restart: enter
Count down timer Initialize: backspace
Exit stopwatch or count down timer: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Setup internet: I (dots 2-4)
Check power status: Space-1-6
Check network status: Space-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Backup/restore option: k (dots 1-3)
Move to previous item: Space-1 or up scroll key
Move to next item: Space-4 or down scroll key
Move to previous control: Shift-tab (space-1-2 or space-F3)
Move to next control: Tab (space-4-5 or F3)
Upgrade Braille Sense Plus B32 OS: u (dots 1-3-6)
Check download information: Space-I (dots 2-4)
Cancel download and exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
324
16. Using the help menu
The help section consists of various text files that will allow you to
read about the many functions of the Braille Sense Plus B32. You
will find the following help sections:
1. Help overview
2. Basic functions help
3. File manager help
4. Word processor help
5. address manager help
6. Schedule manager help
7. Email help
8. Media player help
9. Radio help
10. Web browser help
11. Daisy player help
12. Bluetooth manager help
13. MSN messenger help
14. Database manager help
15. Utility help
16. Using the help menu
17. Using activesync
18. Command summary
19. Command summary for USB keyboard
20. Troubleshooting guide
21. Accessories
22. Information about the Braille Sense Plus B32
The section, “Help overview,” gives an entire overview of the Braille
Sense Plus B32. This section covers all of the functions of the Braille
Sense Plus B32. To access the help file, press “F1” to go to the
“program” menu, and use “space-4” repeatedly until you find “help.”
Then, press “enter” on “help.” Then, press “enter” on “Help
overview.” The navigation keys are the same as in the word
processor. For a list of the navigation keys, please see section
18.3.2. When you are reading the manual on the Braille Sense Plus
B32, you can search for text in the various sections by pressing
“space-f (dots 1-2-4),” type the text you wish to find, and then press
325
“enter.” You can find the next occurrence of the particular text that
you have previously searched for by pressing “enter-f (dots 1-2-4).”
The section, “Basic functions help,” gives an explanation of the
“option” menu functions and common function, and how to use them.
To access the help file, press “F1” to go to the “program” menu, and
use “space-4” repeatedly until you find “help.” Then, press “enter” on
“help.” Then, press “enter” on “Basic functions help.” The navigation
keys are the same as in the word processor. For a list of the
navigation keys, please see section 18.3.2. Remember that when
you are reading the manual on the Braille Sense Plus B32, you can
search for text in the various sections by pressing “space-f (dots 1-2-
4),” type the text you wish to find, and then press “enter.”
You can find the next occurrence of the particular text that you have
previously searched for by pressing “enter-f (dots 1-2-4).”
The remaining sections cover each of the functions of the Braille
Sense Plus B32 in detail. To access these help files, press “F1” to go
to the “program” menu, and use “space-4” repeatedly until you find
“help.” Then, press “enter” on “help.” Then, press “enter” on the
section that you want to read. The navigation keys are the same as
in the word processor. For a list of the navigation keys, please see
section 18.3.2. Remember that when you are reading the manual on
the Braille Sense Plus B32, you can search for text in the various
sections by pressing “space-f (dots 1-2-4),” type the text you wish to
find, and then press “enter.” Also, you can find the next occurrence
of the particular text that you have previously searched for by
pressing “enter-f (dots 1-2-4).”
The “Miscellaneous Hot Keys” section 18.3.2, lists the various hot
keys that are available in the Braille Sense Plus B32. To access this
section, press “F1” to go to the “program” menu, and use “space-4”
repeatedly until you find “help.” Then, press “enter” on “help.” Then,
press “enter” on “Command summary.” The navigation keys are the
same as in the word processor. For a list of the navigation keys,
please see section 18.3.2. Remember that when you are reading the
manual on the Braille Sense Plus B32, you can search for text in the
various sections by pressing “space-f (dots 1-2-4),” type the text you
wish to find, and then press “enter.” You can find the next occurrence
326
of the particular text that you have typed previously by pressing
“enter-f (dots 1-2-4).”
The “information about the Braille Sense Plus B32” section gives the
copyright and version of the Braille Sense Plus B32, as well as the
version of Windows CE that the Braille Sense Plus B32 is using. To
access “information about the Braille Sense Plus B32” section, press
“F1” to go to the “program” menu, and use “space-4” repeatedly until
you find “help.” Then, press “enter” on “help.” Then, press “enter” on
“information about the Braille Sense Plus B32.”
If you want to save the information about the Braille Sense Plus B32,
press “enter” on “Information about the Braille Sense Plus B32” of
“help” and press “tab (space-4-5 or F3)”. Braille Sense Plus B32 will
display “save button.” You press “enter” on this button. Then Braille
Sense Plus B32 will display “save completed” and return to “save”
button.
The saving file is named “bs-information.txt.” And this file is stored in
“flashdisk.”
327
17. Using ActiveSync
17.1 What is ActiveSync?
ActiveSync is a program that allows mobile devices to connect to a
personal computer. This program enables file transfers from a
personal computer to a mobile device and vise versa. Also this
program is able to synchronize the Braille Sense Plus B32 with
Microsoft Outlook. ActiveSync is not shipped with the Braille Sense
Plus B32. If you would like to use ActiveSync, you will have to
download it from the Internet on to your personal computer.
17.2 Connecting the Braille Sense Plus B32 to a PC
Before connecting the Braille Sense Plus B32 to your personal
computer for the first time, make sure that the Braille Sense Plus B32
is turned off. Once you have ActiveSync installed, you will need to
plug a USB cable in to the USB slave port on the rear panel of the
Braille Sense Plus B32. Then, plug the other end of the USB cable in
to a USB port on your personal computer. Now, turn on the Braille
Sense Plus B32. You will hear several sounds. First, on the Braille
Sense Plus B32, you will hear chimes. Then, you will hear a “ding-
dong” sound on your computer, which lets you know the computer is
connected properly to the Braille Sense Plus B32. You will again
hear chimes on the Braille Sense Plus B32, and then on your
computer.
17.3 Setting up the Braille Sense Plus B32 in the ActiveSync
Program
After you have turned on the Braille Sense Plus B32, and you have
heard all of the sounds, a screen will come up on your computer that
has the heading, “Set Up a Partnership.” You have a “yes” option
and a “no” option on this screen. If you select “yes” on this screen,
the next time you connect the Braille Sense Plus B32 to your
computer, you will be able to have it synchronize with Microsoft
Outlook automatically. If you select “no,” the “Set Up a Partnership”
screen will come up every time you connect the Braille Sense Plus
B32 to your computer.
328
If you want to be able to synchronize the Braille Sense Plus B32 with
Microsoft Outlook, select “yes,” and then press the “next” button.
Then, you will be asked to select a name that you want to call the
mobile device. You can only use the following characters: _, A-Z, or
0-9. You cannot use spaces. Once you have entered an appropriate
name, press “next.” Then, a list of functions will appear on your
computer. Each function has a check box located next to it. Make
sure that only the “contacts” check box (that corresponds with
Microsoft Outlook) is checked. Then, press “next.” Then, the next
dialog box that appears will say, “setup complete.” Then, press
“finish.” ActiveSync will then look for changes, and synchronize with
Microsoft Outlook. For more information on how to use ActiveSync or
Microsoft Outlook, please visit www.microsoft.com.
17.4 Transferring Files to the Braille Sense Plus B32 Via
ActiveSync
In order to transfer files to the Braille Sense Plus B32 from your
computer, you will first need to find the file(s) on your PC that you
want to transfer. Once you have found the file(s) that you want to
transfer, make sure the files have been selected by using the
“spacebar.” After you have selected the file(s), press “ctrl-c” on your
PC to copy the file(s). Then, go to the desktop on your computer by
pressing “Windows-key-d.” Press the letter “m” until you find “My
computer.” Press “enter” on “My computer.” Then, press the letter
“m” until you hear “mobile device,” and press “enter.” The mobile
device is the Braille Sense Plus B32. After you have opened “mobile
device,” you will enter in to the file list on the Braille Sense Plus B32.
One of the items in the list is “my computer.” Press the letter “m” until
you hear “my computer,” and press “enter.” Then, another file list will
open. In this list, you will find the folder called “flashdisk.” This is the
same “flashdisk” that you hear under “file manager.” Press “f” until
you hear “flashdisk,” and then press “enter.” You will notice that all of
the folders that you find in the “flashdisk” under “file manager” are
located here. You can paste the file(s) here directly by pressing “ctrl-
v,” or you can paste the file(s) in to one of the folders by pressing
enter on one of the folders, and then pressing “ctrl-v” to paste the
file(s).
329
If you want to copy folders from the Braille Sense Plus B32 to your
PC via ActiveSync, follow the same steps; except, you will need to
copy files from the Braille Sense Plus B32, and paste the file(s) to
your PC in the directory where you want to store the file(s).
330
18. Command Summary
18.1 Common Combination Keys
Call up the program menu: F1
Run the individual program in the program menu F1-“shortcut key”
(varies for each program)
Call up the task ID list: F1-F4
Switch to previous program: Space-F2-F3
Switch to next program: F2-F3
Call up the menu in the individual program: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or
F2
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Escape: Space-e (space-1-5) or F4
Move to the next control in a dialog box: Tab (space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control in the dialog box: Shift-tab (space-1-2
or F3-F4)
Move to the previous character: Left arrow key (space-3)
Move to the next character: Right arrow key (space-6)
Move to the previous line/item: Up arrow key (space-1)
Move to the next line/item: Down arrow key (space-4)
Move to the beginning of line/item: Home key (space-1-3 or F2-up
scroll button)
Move to the end of line/item: End key (space-4-6 or F3-down scroll
button)
Move to the top of a document or to the first item: Ctrl-home (space-
1-2-3 or F1-F2-up scroll button)
Move to the bottom of a document or to the last item: Ctrl-end
(space-4-5-6 or F3-F4-down scroll button)
Move to the previous page or to the first item of the previous 32-item
group: Page up (space 1-2-6 or F1-F2)
Move to the next page or to the first item of the next 32-item group:
Page down (space 3-4-5 or F3-F4)
Scroll left: Up scroll button
Scroll right: Down scroll button
Move the cursor to each cell or move to an item: The corresponding
cursor routing key
Capital sign: Space-u (dots 1-3-6)
Read the current item again: Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
331
Say current time: Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Check power status: Space-1-6
Call up the “option” menu: Space-o (dots 1-3-5)
Online help: Space-h (dots 1-2-5)
Checking software version: Space-v (dots 1-2-3-6) only in the Braille
Sense Plus B32 “program” menu.
Check network status: Space-n (dots 1-3-4-5) in the Braille Sense
Plus B32 “program” menu
Increase the voice volume: Backspace-F4
Decrease the voice volume: Backspace-F1
Increase the voice rate: Space-F4
Decrease the voice rate: Space-F1
Increase the voice tone: Enter-F4
Decrease the voice tone: Enter-F1
One-handed mode on: hold down F3 while turning on
One-handed mode off: hold down F4 while turning on
Scroll voice on/off: F3-up scroll button
Selecting Braille cursor: F4-up scroll button
Selection control information: F2-down scroll button
Eight dot mode on/off: F1-down scroll button
18.2 File Manager
18.2.1 Navigation keys on the file list and menu list
Move to previous item: Up arrow key (space-1) or up scroll button
Move to next item: Down arrow key (space-4) or down scroll button
Move to the beginning of the list: Ctrl-home (space-1-2-3)
Move to the end of the list: Ctrl-end (space-4-5-6)
18.2.2 Navigation Keys for the File List
Fast move to folder list or move to file list: Space-5-6
Move between file list and address window: Tab (space-4-5 or F3) /
shift-tab (space-1-2 or F3-F4)
Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
332
Fast move to the top level disk: Space-1-2-5-6
18.2.3 Item (folder or File) Selection Key
Select item by item: Space
Continuous selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
18.2.4 Hot Keys for the Commands
Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Open with: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Zip: Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Unzip: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Send: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Delete: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Rename: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
New document: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
New folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
File conversion: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Sort files by: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Set file info: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Display only files of type: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Search file: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
18.3 Word Processor
18.3.1 Hot Keys for the Commands
New document: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Save: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Close current document: Space-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)
Print: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
333
Environment setting: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Add to the clipboard: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Clear clipboard: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Delete: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Insert from file: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
Insert date: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Delete blank lines : Backspace-e (dots 1-5)
Select all : Enter-a (dot 1)
Change insert/overwrite mode : Space-i (dots 2-4)
Check spelling : Enter-k (dots 1-3)
Check spelling of the current word: Backspace-k (dots 1-3)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Replace: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Go to location: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Go to previous page: Space-1-2-6 or F1-F2
Go to next page: Space-3-4-5 or F3-F4
Set Mark: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Go to the mark: Enter-j (dots 2-4-5)
Go to previous document: Tab (space-1-2 or space-F3)
Go to next document: Shift-tab (space-4-5 or F3)
Read selected text: Backspace-b (dots 1-2)
Read beginning of selected text: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Read from beginning to cursor: Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Read from cursor to end: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Auto scroll: up-down scroll buttons
Read status: Space-3-4
Braille document layout: Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Braille paragraph layout: Backspace-1-2-4-6
General document layout: Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
General paragraph layout: Backspace-2-3-4-6
334
18.3.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Move to previous character: Left arrow key (space-3)
Move to next character: Right arrow key (space-6)
Move to previous word: Space-2
Move to next word: Space-5
Move to the beginning of the line: Home (space-1-3)
Move to the end of the line: End (space-4-6)
Move to previous line: Up arrow key (space-1) or up scroll button
Move to next line: Down arrow key (space-4) or down scroll button
Move to previous paragraph: Space-2-3
Move to next paragraph: Space-5-6
Move to the beginning of the document: Ctrl-home (space-1-2-3)
Move to the end of the document: Ctrl-end (space-4-5-6)
Read current paragraph: Space-2-3-5-6
Read current line: Space-1-4
Read current word: Space-2-5
Read current character: Space-3-6
Delete current paragraph: Backspace-1-3-4-6
Delete current line: Backspace-1-4
Delete current word: Backspace-2-5
Delete current character: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Confirm current cursor position: Space-1-5-6
Set view format character: Space-1-4-6
Set reading unit: Space-2-4-6
Set read only: Space-3-4-6
18.4 Address Manager
18.4.1 Move keys for adding an address or in the menu
Move to the previous field or menu item: Up arrow key (space-1) or
up scroll button
Move to the next field or menu item: Down arrow key (space-4) or
down scroll button
Move to the first field or menu item: Ctrl-home (space-1-2-3)
Move to the last field or menu item: Ctrl-end (space-4-5-6)
18.4.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List
335
Move to the previous field: Space-2
Move to the next field: Space-5
Move to the first field: Home (space-1-3)
Move to the last field: End (space-4-6)
Move to the previous record: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the next record: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3
Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6
Move to previous same field different record: Space-3
Move to next same field different record: Space-6
18.4.3 Hot keys for the Commands
Add address: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
Find address: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Edit address: Enter-m (dots1-3-4)
Delete address: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Save as a file: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Print address: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Backup address list: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore address list: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Setting backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Setting add/searching address fields: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
18.4.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Tab: Space-4-5 or F3
Shift-tab: Space-1-2 or Space-F3
Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5) or F4
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
18.5 Schedule Manager
18.5.1 Hot keys for the commands
Move to the next field: Tab (space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous field: Shift-tab (space-1-2 or space-F3)
Add schedule: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
Search schedule: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
336
Modify schedule: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete schedule: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Backup schedule: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore schedule: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Set backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Alarm option: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Save schedule as file: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Print schedule: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
18.5.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List
1) Move from an appointment to another in the schedule list
Move to the previous appointment in the same day: Up arrow key
(space-1)
Move to the next appointment in the same day: Down arrow key
(space-4)
Move to the first appointment in the same day: Space-1-3
Move to the last appointment in the same day: Space-4-6
2) Move from one appointment to another in all the appointments
registered
Move to the previous schedule: Space-2
Move to the next schedule: Space-5
Move to the first schedule: Space-2-3 or space-1-2-3
Move to the last schedule: Space-5-6 or space-4-5-6
18.6 E-mail
18.6.1 Hot keys that are used in the inbox
Call “service manager”: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Receive new mail: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Write mail: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Reply: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Reply all: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Forward: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Call up “send mail in storage box”: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Call up “set path”: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Call up “set option”: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Call up “set spam”: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
337
Call up “local folder”: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)
Move to unread message: Enter-u (dots 1-3-4)
Move to folder: Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Copy to folder: Backspace-c (dots 1-4)
Add a sender to the address list: Enter-I (dots 2-4) (This is valid only
at the “from” item of the “inbox”)
Delete received e-mail: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) (It is valid only at the
“subject” and “date” item in the “inbox”)
Save the received e-mail as text file: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Print the received e-mail: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5)
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
18.6.2 Hot keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward,
and Save in the Mail Storage Box
Search address list: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Attach file: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Send e-mail: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Save in mail storage box: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5)
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
18.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mails or Writing an E-Mail
Message
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Copy to the clipboard: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Cut to the clipboard: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) (This is not available
when you are reading e-mail in the “inbox”)
Paste from the clipboard: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) (This is not available
when you are reading e-mail in the “inbox”)
Delete selection and delete a letter: Space-d (dots 1-2) (It is not valid
when you are reading e-mail in the “inbox”)
Cancel block: Space-e (dots 1-5)
338
18.7 Media Player
18.7.1 Hot keys for commands
Open file: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Open folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Add file: Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)
Add folder: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)
Save play list: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Save as play list: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Delete item: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Play: Enter, Play button
Pause/continue: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
Previous track: Dot 3, previous button
Next track: Dot 6, next button
5th previous track: Dots 2-3
5th next track: Dots 5-6
First track: Dots 1-3
Last track: Dots 4-6
One minute previous: Dot 1
One minute next: Dot 4
5 seconds previous: Dot 2
5 seconds next: Dot 5
Volume up: Space-up scroll button
Volume down: Space-down scroll button
Speed up: Dots 3-4-5
Speed down: Dots 1-2-6
Call up the record dialog box: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5), Record button
Record: Record button
Pause/continue recording: Space, Record button
Play: Play button
Pause/continue play: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
Delete play list during stop: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Set bookmark: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete bookmark: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Jump to bookmark: Enter-j (dots 2-4-5)
339
Go to position: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Configuration dialog box: backspace-c (dots 1-4)
Hold/resume hole: Previous button-next button
Playback setting dialog box: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Record setting dialog box: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)
18.7.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab
Move to the next information: Space-4
Move to the previous information: Space-1
“Pause” when it is play state and “play” when it is pause state: Space
Start playing: Enter
Stop playing: Backspace
Play the next file: Dot 6
Play the previous file: Dot 3
Play the last file: Dots 4-6
Play the first file: Dots 1-3
Play the fifth file after the current file: Dots 5-6
Play the fifth file before the current file: Dots 2-3
One minute previous: Dot 1
One minute next: Dot 4
Go forward 5 seconds and play: Dot 5
Go backward 5 seconds and play: Dot 2
Volume up: Space-up scroll button
Volume down: Space-down scroll button
Speed up: Dots 3-4-5
Speed down: Dots 1-2-6
Open menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4)
Open help: Space-h (dots 1-2-5)
Move to “play list” tab: Space-4-5/space-1-2
Exit “media player”: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
18.7.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab
Move to the next file: Space-4
Move to the previous file: Space-1
Move to the last file: Space-4-6
Move to the first file: Space-1-3
Select/resume current file (while playing, it is used as play/pause):
Space
340
Start selecting files: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Start playing the selected files: Enter
Stop playing: Backspace
Delete the selected files in the play list: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Play the next file: Dot 6
Play the previous file: Dot 3
Play the last file: Dots 4-6
Play the first file: Dots 1-3
Play the fifth file after the current file: Dots 5-6
Play the fifth file before the current file: Dots 2-3
One minute previous: Dot 1
One minute next: Dot 4
Go forward 5 seconds and play: Dot 5
Go backward 5 seconds and play: Dot 2
Volume up: Space-up scroll button
Volume down: Space-down scroll button
Speed up: Dots 3-4-5
Speed down: Dots 1-2-6
Open menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4)
Open help: Space-h (dots 1-2-5)
Move to “playback information” tab : Space-4-5/Space-1-2
Exit “media player”: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
18.8 Radio
Call up the sets dialog box: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Call up the menu: space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2
Internal speakers on/off: Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Move to next frequency: dot 6
Move to previous frequency: dot 3
Auto previous frequency: dot 2, short press previous button
Auto next frequency: dot 5, short press next button
Go to frequency: space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Move to previous channel: dot 1, long press previous button
Move to next channel: dot 4, long press next button
Registry channel: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), long press record button
Delete the channel: long press stop button
Call up the record dialog box: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Record start/pause: short press record button
Record stop: short press stop button
341
Mute on: short press stop button, space
Muto off: short press play button, space
Volume up: Space-up scroll button
Volume down: Space-down scroll button
18.9 Web Browser
18.9.1 Hot keys for the command
Open URL: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Information: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Read from beginning to cursor: Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Read from cursor to end: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Auto scroll: Up scroll button-down scroll button
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Add to clipboard: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Copy URL: Backspace-d (dots 1-4-5)
Copy link: Backspace-l (dots 1-2-3)
Go to the home page: Backspace-h (dots 1-2-5)
Go to the previous page: Backspace-Space-3 or backspace-p
(dots 1-2-3-4)
Go to the next page: Backspace-Space-6 or backspace-n (dots
1-3-4-5)
Go to previous heading: Backspace-b (dots 1-2)
Go to next heading: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)
Go to previous text: Space-2-4-6
Go to next text: Space-1-2-4-5-6
Refresh: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Open the history list: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5)
Check the address of the selected title in the history list: Space-I
(dots 2-4)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
342
Link list: Backspace-I (dots 2-4)
Set current as your home page: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Add to favorites: Backspace-a (dot 1)
Favorites list: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Option settings : Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)
18.9.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser
Turn up the volume: Space-up scroll button
Turn down the volume: Space-down scroll button
Five seconds before: Previous button of the front panel
Five seconds after: Next button of the front panel
Pause/Replay: Play button of the front panel
Stop: Stop button of the front panel
18.9.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages
Move to the previous control: Shift-tab (space-1-2)
Move to the next control: Tab (space-4-5)
Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Backspace-Space-4
Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Backspace-
Space-1
Move to the previous form: Space-1-2-3-4-6
Move to the next form: Space-1-3-4-5-6
Move to the previous table: Space-3-4-5-6
Move to the next table: Space-1-4-5-6
Move to the previous cell: Space-2-3
Move to the next cell: Space-5-6
Move to the upper cell: Space-3-5
Move to the lower cell: Space-2-6
Read current cell: Space-2-3-5-6
Move to the previous cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-3
Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Backspace-5-6
Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Backspace-3-5
Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-6
Check the current position: Space-1-5-6
Move to the previous frame: Space-3-4-6
Move to the next frame: Space-1-4-6
343
Read the current line: Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
18.10 Daisy Player
Move to the title list: Space-dots 1-2-5-6
Open daisy file: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Voice setting: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Check the book-info: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Play/Pause: Space
Move to the beginning of document: space-1-3 or space-1-2-3
Move to the last phrase: space-4-6 or space-4-5-6
Increase the speed: dots 3-4-5
Decrease the speed: dots 1-2-6
Increase the volume: Space-up scroll button
Decrease the volume: Space-down scroll button
Move to the next phrase: dot 6 or short press “next” button
Move to the previous phrase: dot 3 or short press “previous” button
Move to the next fifty phrase: dot 4
Move to the previous fifty phrase: dot 1
Move to the next page: Space-3-4-5
Move to the previous page: Space-1-2-6
Go to the page: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Move to the upper-level: dots 5-6
Move to the down-level: dots 2-3
Move to the next level at the preset level: dot 5
Move to the previous level at the preset level: dot 2
Move to the next heading: Space-5 or long press “next” button
Move to the previous heading: Space-2 or long press “previous”
button
Move to the last heading: Space-5-6
Move to the first heading: Space-2-3
Check the currently-reading level and heading: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Scan the heading list from the present to the end: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-
5
Find heading: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Set mark at current position: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Move to the next mark: Space-dot 6
Move to the previous mark: Space-dot 3
344
Delete mark: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
18.11 Bluetooth Manager
Scanning bluetooth device: enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Connecting device: enter in the device name
Connecting service: enter in the service name
Disconnect the service: enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Move to Bluetooth device list in service list: Backspace
Remove device setting in Bluetooth device list: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
1) FTP service
Open local folder: enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Copy: enter-c (dots 1-4)
Paste: enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Send to: enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Retrieve file: enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
New folder: enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Delete file/folder: space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Information: enter-i (dots 2-4)
18.12 MSN messenger
1) Log-in dialog box
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Check or uncheck a check box: Space
2) The contact list box
Move to the previous item: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the next item: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move between online and offline groups: Space-5-6
Open the menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2
Logout: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
View chat: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
My status: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Exit: Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Add contact: Enter-a (dot 1)
Delete contact: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Contact information: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6).
345
Send instant message: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Last message: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Play keyboard sound: Enter-k (dots 1-3)
Message sound notification while in current window: Backspace-s
(dots 2-3-4)
Message sound notification while messenger is in the
background: Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4)
Nickname: Enter-p (dots 1-3-4)
Save account: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Confirm the Received Message, “Enter-l (dots-1-2-3)
3) Instant message dialog box
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2) or Space-F3
Move between the instant message dialog box and the contact
list box : Space-1-2-6 or Space-3-4-5, F1-F2, or F3-F4
Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Print: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Close: Space-e (dots 1-5)
Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Delete: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Invitation: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
18.13 Database Manager
Add record: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Search records: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Table manager: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
List of records found: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Setting backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Backup database: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore database: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
1) Move by controls
346
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
2) Move in a list box
Move to the next list item: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to the previous list item: Space-1 or up scroll button
3) Select your answer in the prompt box
Move to the next answer: Space-4, Space, or down scroll button
Move to the previous answer: Space-1, Backspace, or up scroll
button
4) Move in the “list of records found”
Move to the next record: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to the previous record: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6
Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3
Move to the next field: Space-5
Move to the previous field: Space-2
Move to previous same field different record: Space-3
Move to next same field different record: Space-6
Move to the last field: Space-4-6
Move to the first field: Space-1-3
18.14 Utility
18.14.1 Calculator
Calculator initialize: Backspace-c (dots 1-4)
Delete numbers or operators: Backspace
General function: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Plus: Dots 3-4-6
Minus: Dots 3-6
Division: Dots 3-4
Multiplication: Dots 1-6
Percent: Dots 1-4-6
Power: Backspace-4-5
Square Root: Enter-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)
Decimal Point: Dots 4-6
Left Parenthesis: Dots 1-2-3-5-6
Right Parenthesis: Dots 2-3-4-5-6
347
PI: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Exp: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Recall Items: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Delete all save items: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Save Items: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)
Trigonometric Function: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), s (dots 2-3-4)
Arc Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), a (dot 1)
Hyperbolic Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), h (dots 1-2-5)
Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), c (dots 1-4)
Arc Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), a (dot 1)
Hyperbolic Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), h (dots 1-2-5)
Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Arc Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), a (dot 1)
Hyperbolic Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), h (dots 1-2-5)
Logarithm Function: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Natural Logarithm: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), e (dots 1-5)
Common Logarithm: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Copy to Clipboard: Enter-I (dots 2-4)
Option Setting: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
18.14.2 Setting Date and Time
Move to the next day: Space-6
Move to the previous day: Space-3
Move to the next week: Space-5
Move to the previous week: Space-2
Move to the next month: Space-4
Move to the previous month: Space-1
Move to the next year: Space-5-6
Move to the previous year: Space-2-3
Move to 1 hour after: Space-4
Move to 1 hour before: Space-1
Move to 10 minutes after: Space-5
Move to 10 minutes before: Space-2
Move to 1 minute after: Space-6
348
Move to 1 minute before: Space-3
Switch between A.M. and P.M.: Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
18.14.3 Checking Date and Time
Checking date and time: Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
18.14.4 Calendar
Move to the previous item: Tab (space-4-5)
Move to the next item: Shift-tab (space-1-2)
Move to the next day: Space-6
Move to the previous day: Space-3
Move to the next week: Space-5
Move to the previous week: Space-2
Move to the next month: Space-4
Move to the previous month: Space-1
Move to the next year: Space-5-6
Move to the previous year: Space-2-3
18.14.5 Pronunciation dictionary
Move to the previous control: Tab (space-4-5)
Move to the next control: Shift-tab (space-1-2)
Move to the previous item in entry: space-1
Move to the next item in entry: space-4
Add word: Space-I (dots 2-4)
Modify word: Space-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete word: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
18.14.6 Stopwatch
Stopwatch start, pause, restart: Enter
Check the elapsed time: Backspace
Stop and restart Braille display: Space-F2
Switch between stopwatch and count down timer: Tab (space-4-
5) or shift-tab (space-1-2)
Count down timer pause or restart: Enter
Count down timer Initialize: Backspace
349
Exit stopwatch or count down timer: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
18.14.7 Check Network Status
Check network status: Space-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
18.14.8 Check Power Status
Check power status: Space-1-6
18.14.9 Backup/restore option
Move to previous item: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to next item: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to previous control: Shift-tab (space-1-2 or space-F3)
Move to next control: Tab (space-4-5 or F3)
Select/unselect check box: Space
18.14.10 Upgrading the Braille Sense Plus B32 OS
Check download information: Space-I (dots 2-4)
Cancel download and exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
350
19. Command Summary for USB Keyboards
19.1 Common Combination Keys
Call up the program menu: Ctrl-F10
Call up the task ID list: Alt-F10
Call up the menu in the individual program: Alt or F10
Run the individual program in the program menu: Ctrl-Alt-"shortcut
key" (varies for each program)
Switch to previous program: Ctrl-shift-tab
Switch to next program: Ctrl-tab
Exit: Alt-F4
Escape: ESC key
Move to the next control in a dialog box: Tab
Move to the previous control in the dialog box: Shift-tab
Move to the previous character: Left arrow key
Move to the next character: Right arrow key
Move to the previous line item: Up arrow key
Move to the next line item: Down arrow key
Move to the beginning of line item: Home key
Move to the end of line item: End key
Move to the top of a document or to the first item: Ctrl-home
Move to the bottom of a document or to the last item: Ctrl-end
Move to the previous page or to the first item of the previous 32-
item group: Page up
Move to the next page or to the first item of the next 32-item group:
Page down
Read the current item again: Ctrl-shift-r
Say current time: Ctrl-shift-t
Check power status: Ctrl-shift-b
Print spool: Alt-shift-p
Call up the "option" menu: Ctrl-shift-o
Online help: F1
Checking your version: Ctrl-shift-v only in the Braille Sense Plus B32
"program" menu.
Check network status: Ctrl-shift-n in the Braille Sense Plus B32
"program" menu
Voice volume up: F7
Voice volume down: Shift-F7
351
Voice rate up: F8
Voice rate down: Shift-F8
Voice tone up: F9
Voice tone down: Shift-F9
Voice on/off: Ctrl-F7
19.2 File Manager
19.2.1 Navigation keys on the file list and menu list
Move to previous item: Up Arrow key
Move to next item: Down Arrow key
Move to the beginning of the list: Ctrl-home
Move to the end of the list: Ctrl-end
19.2.2 Navigation Keys in the File List
Fast move to folder list or move to file list: Ctrl-down Arrow
Move between file list and address window: Tab / shift-tab
Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
Fast move to the top level disk: Ctrl-shift-\
19.2.3 Item (Folder or File) Selection Keys
Select item by item: Space
Continuous selection: Ctrl-b
Select all: Ctrl-a
19.2.4 Hot Keys for the Commands
Open: Ctrl-o
Open with: Ctrl-e
Zip: Ctrl-z
Unzip: Ctrl-u
Send: Ctrl-s
Copy: Ctrl-c
Cut: Ctrl-x
Paste: Ctrl-v
Delete: DEL
352
Rename: Ctrl-r
New document: Ctrl-n
New folder: Ctrl-f
File conversion: Ctrl-t
Select all: Ctrl-a
Sort files by: Ctrl-g
Set file info: Ctrl-l
Display only files of type: Ctrl-w
Search file: Ctrl-shift-f
Information: Ctrl-I
19.3 Word Processor
19.3.1 Hot keys for the command
New document: Ctrl-n
Open: Ctrl-o
Save: Ctrl-s
Save as: Ctrl-shift-s
Close current document: Ctrl-shift-q
Print: Ctrl-shift-p
Settings: Ctrl-e
Exit: Alt-f4
Start selection: Ctrl-b
Copy: Ctrl-c
Add to the clipboard: Ctrl-p
Clear clipboard: Ctrl-d
Delete: Del (No use space-d)
Cut: Ctrl-x
Paste: Ctrl-v
Delete blank lines: Alt-e
Select All: Ctrl-a
Insert from file: Ctrl-I
Insert date: Ctrl-w
Change insert/overwrite mode: Ctrl-shift-i
Check spelling: Ctrl-k
Check spelling of the current word: Alt-k
Find: Ctrl-Shift-f
Find again: F3 (No use Ctrl-f)
353
Replace: Ctrl-r
Go to location: Ctrl-l
Go to previous page: Page up key
Go to next page: Page down key
Set bookmark: Ctrl-m
Go to bookmark: Ctrl-j
Go to previous document: Shift-tab
Go to next document: tab
Read selected text: Alt-b
Read beginning of selected text: Ctrl-u
Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-g
Read from cursor to end: Ctrl-g
Auto scroll: Ctrl-shift-a
Read status: Ctrl-shift-/
Braille document layout: Alt-p
Print document layout: Alt-t
Braille paragraph layout: Alt-shift-p
Print paragraph layout: Alt-shift-t
19.3.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Move to previous character: Left arrow key
Move to next character: Right arrow key
Move to previous word: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to next word: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the beginning of the line: Home key
Move to the end of the line: End key
Move to previous line: Up arrow key
Move to next line: Down arrow key
Move to previous paragraph: Ctrl-up arrow
Move to next paragraph: Ctrl-down arrow
Move to the beginning of the document: Ctrl-home
Move to the end of the document: Ctrl-end
Read current paragraph: Ctrl-shift-v
Read current line: Ctrl-shift-c
Read current word: Ctrl-shift-x
Read current character: Ctrl-shift-z
354
Delete current paragraph: Del-v
Delete current line: Del-c
Delete current word: Del-x
Delete current character: DEL
Confirm current cursor position: ctrl-shift-;
Set view format character: Ctrl-shift-5
Set reading unit: Ctrl-shift-{
Set read only: Ctrl-shift-+
19.4 Address Manager
19.4.1 Move keys for moving from field to field in the record or
in the menu
Move to the previous field or menu item: Left Arrow
Move to the next field or menu item: Right Arrow
Move to the first field or menu item: Home
Move to the last field or menu item: End
19.4.2 Move Keys for Moving from Record to Record
Move to the previous record: Up Arrow
Move to the next record: Down Arrow
Move to the first record: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last record: Ctrl-End
19.4.3 Hot Keys for the Commands
Add address: Ctrl-I
Find address: Ctrl-s
Modify address: Ctrl-m
Delete address: DEL
Select all: Ctrl-a
Save as a file: Ctrl-t
Print address: Ctrl-shift-p
Backup address list: Ctrl-u
Restore address list: Ctrl-r
Backup option: Ctrl-e
355
19.4.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Tab: tab
Shift-tab: Shift-tab
Cancel: ESC
Exit: Alt-f4
19.5 Schedule Manager
19.5.1 Hot keys for the commands
Move to the next field: Tab
Move to the previous field: Shift tab
Add schedule: Ctrl-I
Modify schedule: Ctrl-m
Delete schedule: DEL
Alarm option: Ctrl-o
Save schedule as file: Ctrl-t
Print schedule: Ctrl-shift-p
Backup schedule list: Ctrl-u
Restore schedule list: Ctrl-r
Backup option: Ctrl-e
19.5.2 Movement Keys for the Search Result List
1) Move from an appointment to another in the schedule list
Move to the previous appointment in the same day: Up Arrow
Move to the next appointment in the same day: Down Arrow
Move to the first appointment in the same day: Home
Move to the last appointment in the same day: End
2) Move from one appointment to another in all the appointments
registered
Move to the previous schedule: Ctrl-Left Arrow
Move to the next schedule: Ctrl-Right Arrow
Move to the first schedule: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last schedule: Ctrl-End
356
19.6 E-mail
19.6.1 Hot keys for reading e-mails
Call “service manager”: Ctrl-m
Receive new mail: Ctrl-n
Write mail: Ctrl-w
Reply: Ctrl-r
Reply all: Alt-r
Forward: Ctrl-f
Call up “send mail in storage box”: Ctrl-s
Call up “set path”: Ctrl-p
Call up “set option”: Ctrl-o
Call up “set spam”: Ctrl-e
Call up “local folder”: Ctrl-d
Find: Ctrl-shift-f
Find again: f3 (Backspace-f)
Move to folder: Alt-x
Copy to folder: Alt-c
Add a sender to the address list: Ctrl-I (This is valid only at the “from”
item).
Delete received e-mail: DEL (It is valid only at the “subject” and
“date” item).
Save the received e-mail as text file: Ctrl-shift-s
Print the received e-mail: Ctrl-shift-p
Move to unread message: Ctrl-u (It is valid only at the “subject” and
“date” item)
Cancel: ESC
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Alt-f4
19.6.2 Hot Keys for Sending E-mail Including Reply, Forward,
and Save in the Pail Storage Box
Search address list: Ctrl-l
Attach file: Ctrl-f
Send e-mail: Ctrl-s
Save in mail storage box: Ctrl-shift-s
Cancel: ESC
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Alt-f4
357
19.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-mail messages or Writing an E-
mail Message
Start selection: Ctrl-b
Select all: Ctrl-a
Copy to the clipboard: Ctrl-c
Cut to the clipboard: Ctrl-x (It is not valid when you are reading e-
mail).
Paste from the clipboard: Ctrl-v (It is not valid when you are reading
e-mail).
Delete selection and delete a letter: DEL (It is not valid when you are
reading e-mail).
Cancel block: ESC
19.7 Media Player
19.7.1 Hot keys for commands
Open file: Ctrl-o
Open folder: Ctrl-f
Add file: Alt-o
Add folder: Alt-f
Save play list: Ctrl-I
Save as play list: Ctrl-shift-s
Delete time: DEL
Play: Enter
Previous track: ctrl-Left arrow
Next track: ctrl-right arrow
5th previous track: ctrl-up arrow
5th next track: ctrl-down arrow
First track: ctrl-home key
Last track: ctrl-end key
One minute previous: alt-down arrow
One minute next: alt-up arrow
5 seconds previous: alt-left arrow
5 seconds next: alt-right arrow
Volume up: Shift-up arrow
Volume down: Shift-down arrow
Speed up: Shift-left arrow
358
Speed down: Shift-right arrow
Pause/Continue: Space
Stop: backspace
Delete play list during stop: DEL
Record: Ctrl-r
Play: Enter
Stop: backspace
Pause/Continue recording: Space
Configuration dialog box: Alt-c
Set bookmark: Ctrl-m
Delete bookmark: Ctrl-d
Jump to bookmark: Ctrl-j
Go to position: Ctrl-g
Playback setting dialog box: Ctrl-s
Record setting dialog box: Alt-s
19.7.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab
Move to the next information: Down arrow
Move to the previous information: Up arrow
Pause/Play when it is pause state: Space
Start playing: Enter
Stop playing: Backspace
Play the next file: ctrl-right arrow
Play the previous file: ctrl-Left arrow
Play the last file: ctrl-end key
Play the first file: ctrl-home key
Play the fifth file after the current file: ctrl-down arrow
Play the fifth file before the current file: ctrl-up arrow
Go forward 5 seconds and play: alt-right arrow
Go backward 5 seconds and play: alt-left arrow
Volume up: Shift-up arrow
Volume down: Shift-down arrow
Speed up: Shift-left arrow
Speed down: Shift-right arrow
Open menu: Alt
Open help: F1 or Space-h
359
Move to “play list” tab: Tab/Shift-tab
Exit “media player”: Alt-F4 or Space-z
19.7.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab
Move to the next file: Down arrow
Move to the previous file: Up arrow
Move to the last file: END key
Move to the first file: HOME key
Select resume current file (while playing, it is used as plays/pause):
Space
Start selecting files: Ctrl-b
Start playing the selected files: Enter
Stop playing: Backspace
Delete the selected files in the play list: DEL
Play the next file: ctrl-right arrow
Play the previous file: ctrl-Left arrow
Play the last file: ctrl-end key
Play the first file: ctrl-home key
Play the fifth file after the current file: ctrl-down arrow
Play the fifth file before the current file: ctrl-up arrow
Go forward 5 seconds and play: alt-right arrow
Go backward five seconds and play: alt-left arrow
Volume up: Shift-up arrow
Volume down: Shift-down arrow
Speed up: Shift-left arrow
Speed down: Shift-right arrow
Open menu: Alt or F10
Open help: F1
Move to “playback information” tab: Tab/shift-tab
Exit “media player”: Alt-f4 or space-z
19.8 Radio
Call up the sets dialog box: Ctrl-e
Call up the menu: Alt or F10
Internal speakers on/off: Ctrl-shift-x
Move to next frequency: ,
Move to previous frequency: ‘
360
Auto previous frequency: 1
Auto next frequency: “
Go to frequency: Ctrl-shift-f
Move to previous channel: a
Move to next channel: `
Registry channel: Ctrl-s
Call up the record dialog box: Ctrl-r
Mute on/off: Space
Volume up: Shift-up arrow
Volume down: Shift-down arrow
19.9 Web Browser
19.9.1 Hot keys for the command
Open URL: Ctrl-u
Open: Ctrl-o
Save as: Ctrl-shift-s or Space-s
Page information: Ctrl-I
Exit: Alt-f4 or Space-z
Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-g
Read from cursor to end: Ctrl-g
Auto scroll: Ctrl-shift-a
Copy selection: Ctrl-b
Copy: Ctrl-c
Add clipboard: Ctrl-p
Copy URL: Alt-d
Copy link address: Alt-l
Go to the home page: Alt-h
Go to the previous page: Alt-p or Alt-left arrow
Go to the next page: Alt-n or Alt-right arrow
Go to previous text: Ctrl-shift-{ or Space-{
Go to next text: Ctrl-shift-} or Space-}
Go to previous heading: Alt-b
Go to next heading: Alt-f
Refresh: Ctrl-r
Open the history list: Ctrl-h
361
Check the address of the selected title in the history list: Ctrl-shift-i or
space-I
Find: Ctrl-shift-f or space-f
Find again: F3 or ctrl-f
Link list: Alt-i
Register as your home page: Ctrl-s
Add to favorites: Alt-a
Favorites list: Ctrl-l
19.9.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser
Turn up the volume: Shift-up arrow
Turn down the volume: Shift-down arrow
19.8.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages
Move to the previous control: Shift-tab
Move to the next control: Tab
Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Alt-down arrow
Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Alt-up arrow
Move to the previous form: Ctrl-shift-1
Move to the next form: Ctrl-1
Move to the previous table: Ctrl-shift-2
Move to the next table: Ctrl-2
Move to the previous cell: Ctrl-shift-left arrow
Move to the next cell: Ctrl-shift-right arrow
Move to the upper cell: Ctrl-shift-up arrow
Move to the lower cell: Ctrl-shift-down arrow
Read current cell: Ctrl-shift-c
Move to the previous cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-left arrow
Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-right arrow
Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-up arrow
Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-down arrow
Check the current position: Ctrl-shift-b
Move to the previous frame: Ctrl-shift-3
Move to the next frame: Ctrl-3
362
Read the current line: Ctrl-shift-r or space-r
19.10 Daisy Player
Play/Pause: Space
Move to the beginning of document: Home or ctrl-home
Move to the last phrase: End or ctrl-end
Increase the speed: Shift-left arrow
Decrease the speed: Shift-right arrow
Increase the volume: Shift-up arrow
Decrease the volume: Shift-down arrow
Move to the next phrase: Ctrl-right arrow
Move to the previous phrase: Ctrl-left arrow
Move to the next fifty phrase: Ctrl-up arrow
Move to the previous fifty phrase: Ctrl-down arrow
Move to the next page: Page down key
Move to the previous page: Page up key
Go to the page: Ctrl-g
Move to the upper-level: Alt-up arrow
Move to the down-level: Alt-down arrow
Move to the next level at the preset level: Alt-right arrow
Move to the previous level at the preset level: Alt-left arrow
Move to the next heading: Ctrl-shift-right arrow
Move to the previous heading: Ctrl-shift-left arrow
Move to the first heading: Ctrl-shift-home
Move to the last heading: Ctrl-shift-end
Check the currently-reading level and heading: Ctrl-w
Scan the heading list from the present to the end: Ctrl-n
Find heading: Ctrl-shift-f
Find again: F3
Set mark at current position: Ctrl-m
Move to the next mark: Right arrow
Move to the previous mark: Left arrow
Delete mark: DEL key or Space-d
363
Move to the title list: Ctrl-shift-\
Open daisy file: Ctrl-o
Check the book-info: Ctrl-I
Voice setting: Ctrl-s
19.11 Bluetooth Manager
Scanning bluetooth device: Ctrl-r
Connecting device: enter in the device name
Connecting service: enter in the service name
Disconnect the service: Ctrl-d
Move to Bluetooth device list in service list: Backspace
1) FTP service
Open local/remote folder: Ctrl-o
Copy: Ctrl-c
Paste: Ctrl-v
Send to: Ctrl-s
Retrieve file: Ctrl-r
New folder: Ctrl-f
Delete file/folder: DEL
Information: Ctrl-i
19.12 MSN messenger
1) Log-in dialog box
Move to the next control: Tab
Move to the previous control: Shift-tab
Check or uncheck a check box: Space
2) The contact list box
Move to the previous item: Up arrow key
Move to the next item: Down arrow key
Move between online and offline groups: Ctrl-down arrow
Open the menu: Alt
Logout: Ctrl-n
View chat: Ctrl-r
My status: Ctrl-m
Exit: Ctrl-z
Add contact: Ctrl-a
364
Delete contact: Ctrl-d
Contact information: Ctrl-v
Send instant message: Ctrl-s
Last message: Alt-r
Play keyboard sound: Ctrl-k
Message sound notification while in current window: Alt-s
Message sound notification while messenger is in the
background: Alt-m
Nickname: Ctrl-p
Save account: Ctrl-o
Confirm the Received Message: Ctrl-l
3) Instant message dialog box
Move to the next control: Tab
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab
Move between the instant message dialog box and the contact
list box: Page up, Page down
Save as: Ctrl-shift-s
Print: Ctrl-shift-p
Close: Ctrl-shift-e
Cut: Ctrl-x
Copy: Ctrl-c
Delete: Ctrl-d
Paste: Ctrl-v
Select all: Ctrl-a
Start selection: Ctrl-b
Find: Ctrl-shift-f
Find again: F3
Invitation: Ctrl-i
19.13 Database Manager
Add record: Ctrl-i
Search records: Ctrl-s
Table manager: Ctrl-t
List of records found: Ctrl-r
Setting backup option: Ctrl-e
Backup database: Ctrl-u
Restore database: Ctrl-o
365
1) Move by controls
Move to the next control: Tab
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab
2) Move in a list box
Move to the next list item: Down arrow key
Move to the previous list item: Up arrow key
3) Select your answer in the prompt box
Move to the next answer: Space, or down arrow key
Move to the previous answer: Backspace, or up arrow key
4) Move in the “list of records found”
Move to the next record: Down arrow key
Move to the previous record: Up arrow key
Move to the last record: Ctrl-end
Move to the first record: Ctrl-home
Move to the next field: Ctrl-right arrow
Move to the previous field: Ctrl-left arrow
Move to previous same field different record: Left arrow key
Move to next same field different record: Right arrow key
Move to the last field: End key
Move to the first field: Home key
19.14 Utility
19.14.1 Calculator
Calculator initialize: Alt-c
Delete numbers or operators: Backspace
General function: Ctrl-g
Plus: +
Minus: -
Division: /
Multiplication: *
Percent: %
Power: Alt-shift-6
Square Root: Ctrl-q
Decimal Point: .
Left Parenthesis: (
Right Parenthesis: )
PI: Ctrl-p
366
Exp: Ctrl-e
Recall Items: Alt-r
Delete all saved items: Ctrl-d
Save Items: Alt-s
Trigonometric Function: Ctrl-s
Sine: Ctrl-s, s
Arc Sine: Ctrl-s, a
Hyperbolic Sine: Ctrl-s, h
Cosine: Ctrl-c, c
Arc Cosine: Ctrl-c, a
Hyperbolic Cosine: Ctrl-c, h
Tangent: Ctrl-t, t
Arc Tangent: Ctrl-t, a
Hyperbolic Tangent: Ctrl-t, h
Logarithm Function: Ctrl-l
Natural Logarithm: Ctrl-l, e
Common Logarithm: Ctrl-l, n
Copy to Clipboard: Ctrl-I
Option Setting: Ctrl-o
19.14.2 Setting the Date and Time
Move to the next day: Right arrow
Move to the previous day: Left arrow
Move to the next week: Ctrl-right arrow
Move to the previous week: Ctrl-left arrow
Move to the next month: Down arrow
Move to the previous month: Up arrow
Move to the next year: Ctrl-down arrow
Move to the previous year: Ctrl-up arrow
Move to 1 hour after: Down arrow
Move to 1 hour before: Up arrow
Move to 10 minutes after: Ctrl-right arrow
Move to 10 minutes before: Ctrl-left arrow
Move to 1 minute after: Right arrow
367
Move to 1 minute before: Left arrow
Switch Between A.M. and P.M.: Ctrl-shift-x
19.14.3 Checking the Date and Time
Checking date and time: Ctrl-shift-t or space-t
19.14.4 Calendar
Move to the previous item: Tab
Move to the next item: Shift-tab
Move to the next day: Right arrow
Move to the previous day: Left arrow
Move to the next week: Ctrl-right arrow
Move to the previous week: Ctrl-left arrow
Move to the next month: Down arrow
Move to the previous month: Up arrow
Move to the next year: Ctrl-down arrow
Move to the previous year: Ctrl-up arrow
19.14.5 Pronunciation dictionary
Move to the previous control: Tab
Move to the next control: Shift-tab
Move to the previous item in entry: up arrow
Move to the next item in entry: down arrow
Add word: Ctrl-shift-I
Modify word: Ctrl-shift-m
Delete word: Del
19.14.6 Stopwatch
Stopwatch start, pause, restart: Enter
Check the elapsed time: Space
Stop Braille display: Space-F2
Restart Braille display: Space-F2
Switch between stopwatch and count down timer: Tab
Count down timer pause or restart: Enter
Count down timer Initialize: Backspace
368
Exit stopwatch or count down timer: Alt-f4
19.14.7 Check Network Status
Check network status: Ctrl-shift-n
19.14.8 Check Power Status
Check power status: Ctrl-shift-b
18.14.9 Backup/restore option
Move to previous item: up arrow
Move to next item: down arrow
Move to previous control: Shift-tab
Move to next control: Tab
Select/unselect check box: Space
19.14.10 Upgrading Braille Sense Plus B32 OS
Check download information: Ctrl-shift-i
Cancel download and exit: Alt-f4
369
20. Troubleshooting Guide
If you are having trouble with the Braille Sense Plus B32, please try
the following suggestions according to your problem:
20.1 The Braille Sense Plus B32 Will Not Turn On
1) Check to make sure that the battery is inserted in to its
compartment properly.
2) If the battery is inserted properly, connect the AC adapter, and
plug the AC adapter in to an electrical outlet. The battery may
need to be charged.
3) Or, Check the location of keyboard lock switch. If this switch put on
“lock,” power switch does not work.
20.2 The Voice Cannot Be Heard
1) Make sure the volume is turned up. Press “backspace-F4” to turn
up the volume.
2) Make sure the voice is turned on. Press “space-o (dots 1-3-5)” to
open the “option” menu. Press “F3-F4” once. Then, press
“space.” Then, press “enter.” This will turn on the voice.
20.3 The Voice is Too Fast to Understand
1) Press “space-F1” to slow down the voice rate.
20.4 The Voice Tone Is Too Low or Too High to Understand
1) Press “enter-F1” to lower the tone, or press “enter-F4” to raise the
voice tone.
20.5 Lost Your Place
1) If you have lost your place in the Braille Sense Plus B32, and
cannot remember where you are press “F1” to access the
“program” menu. Then, press “F2-F3” to switch between
programs that are open. If you are in the word processor, pressing
“space1-5-6” will give you your current location.
370
20.6 No Internet Connection
1) If you are using a LAN, make sure that the Ethernet cable is
connected.
2) If you are using a modem, make sure that the phone line is
connected to the modem.
3) If you are using a DSL connection, make sure that that the
Ethernet cable is connected.
20.7 Email
2) If you are having trouble downloading email, please contact your
Internet service provider to make sure that you have the correct
POP3 and SMTP settings.
20.8 The Braille display Does Not Display Braille
2) If the Braille display does not display Braille, make sure that the
Braille display is turned on. In order to do this, press “space-o
(dots 1-3-5),” and press “space.” Then, press “enter.” The Braille
display will now be turned on if this option was set to off.
20.9 The Braille Sense Plus B32 Does Not Respond
2) If the Braille Sense Plus B32 does not respond to keystrokes or
commands, it may be necessary to reset the unit. Please note that
if you press the reset button, all of your options will be reset to the
factory defaults. To reset the Braille Sense Plus B32, press the
reset button, or press “1-2-3-4-5-6-F2-F3.” Do NOT hold the reset
button for more than 5 seconds.
20.10 The LCD Does Not Come On
1) If the LCD screen does not come on, make sure that it is turned on.
Press “space-o (dots 1-3-5).” Then, press “F3-F4” twice. Press
“space” to turn the LCD screen option on, and then press “enter”
to save the option.
371
21. Accessories
For information on available accessories for the Braille Sense Plus
B32, please contact HIMS. You can contact HIMS at
hims@himsintl.com. Or, you can contact HIMS by phone at +82-42-
864-4460. You can also visit HIMS on the web at www.himsintl.com.
22. Obtaining Support
If you are having any problems with your Braille Sense Plus B32,
please contact the dealer from whom you bought your unit. If you
require further assistance, please contact us at hims@himsintl.com.
Or, you can contact HIMS by phone at +82-42-864-4460.